Category Archives: Life

How to use the singular they in writing and speaking

How to use the singular they in writing and speaking

How to use the singular they in writing and speaking

Big changes are afoot! APA endorses the use of “they” as a singular third-person pronoun in the seventh edition of the Publication Manual of the American Psychological Association. This means it is officially good practice in scholarly writing to use the singular “they.”

This blog post provides insight into how this change came about and provides a forum for questions and feedback.

What is the singular “they”?

The singular “they” is a generic third-person pronoun used in English. It’s not the only third-person singular pronoun—other third-person singular pronouns are “she” and “he” as well as less common options such as “ze” or “hen.”

Although the term singular “they” may be unfamiliar, you’ve probably heard and used the singular “they” in conversation throughout your life. Here is an example:

A person should enjoy their vacation.

The noun in this sentence is “person,” and the pronoun is “their.”

Before the seventh edition, people might have written the aforementioned sentence like this in a scholarly paper:

A person should enjoy his or her vacation.

However, this second sentence presumes that a person uses either the pronoun “he” or the pronoun “she,” which is not necessarily the case. For example, some people use other pronouns, including “they,” “zir,” “ze,” “xe,” “hir,” “per,” “ve,” “ey,” and “hen.”

Why use the singular “they”?

When readers see a gendered pronoun, they make assumptions about the gender of the person being described (Gastil, 1990; Moulton et al., 1978). APA advocates for the singular “they” because it is inclusive of all people and helps writers avoid making assumptions about gender.

When should I use the singular “they”?

Writers should use the singular “they” in two main cases: (a) when referring to a generic person whose gender is unknown or irrelevant to the context and (b) when referring to a specific, known person who uses “they” as their pronoun.

When referring to a generic person whose gender is unknown or irrelevant to the context, use the singular “they” as the pronoun. For example, if you use nouns like “person,” “individual,” or “everyone” or phrases like “every teacher” or “each nurse” in a sentence, use the appropriate form of the pronoun “they” as needed.

Each student submitted their art portfolio to the committee.
not
Each student submitted his or her art portfolio to the committee.

If you are writing about a specific, known person, always use that person’s pronouns. The person’s pronouns might be “she/her,” “they/them,” “he/him,” or something else—just ask to find out! It is also good practice for an individual to volunteer what pronouns they use so that others do not have to ask.

If a person uses “she” or “he,” do not use “they” instead. Likewise, if a person uses “they,” do not switch to “he” or “she.” Use the pronouns the person uses.

Kai is a nonbinary person. They attend university in their home state of Vermont and are majoring in chemistry. Kai’s friend River is a transgender woman. She attends the same university and is majoring in physics.

What verbs do I use with the singular “they”?

When “they” is the subject of a sentence, “they” takes a plural verb regardless of whether “they” is meant to be singular or plural. For example, write “they are,” not “they is.” The singular “they” works similarly to the singular “you”—even though “you” may refer to one person or multiple people, in a scholarly paper you should write “you are,” not “you is.” However, if the noun in one sentence is a word like “individual” or a person’s name, use a singular verb.

Every individual is unique. They are a combination of strengths and weaknesses.
not
Every individual is unique. They is a combination of strengths and weaknesses.
Every individual is unique. She or he is a combination of strengths and weaknesses.

Read more about plural verb forms for the singular “they” from the folks at Merriam-Webster.

What is a generic person, anyway?

Some people write about a generic person but give that generic person gendered qualities. For example, someone might write about “Jane Doe” and intend that Jane be a woman who uses “she/her” pronouns. In that case, it would be acceptable to use the pronoun “she” to refer to Jane because Jane is meant to be a generic woman who uses “she/her” pronouns, not a generic person who might use any pronouns.

Use the singular “they” when the generic person is truly generic—devoid of gendered qualities. When describing generic people, it is easiest to avoid names (or to pick names without an obvious gender association) to avoid this confusion.

What if I don’t like the singular “they”—do I have to use it?

If you are writing about a person who uses “they” as their pronoun, then yes, you have to use it. Respectful and inclusive language is important. And it’s part of APA Style.

If you are writing about a generic person, you should use the singular “they” if your sentence includes a pronoun. However, there are many ways to write grammatical and inclusive sentences. For example, you can rewrite a sentence in the plural to use plural pronouns, or you can rewrite a sentence so that it does not use pronouns at all.

Here are some examples:

People should enjoy their vacations.
A person should enjoy vacations.
A vacation should be enjoyable.

These sentences are just as grammatical and inclusive as “A person should enjoy their vacation.”

Where did the change come from?

APA is also not alone in the singular “they” movement. Although usage of the singular “they” was once discouraged in academic writing, many advocacy groups and publishers have accepted and endorsed it, including Merriam-Webster’s Dictionary.

Questions?

To learn more about the singular “they,” read the style and grammar guidelines page on singular “they.” It includes more examples of the proper forms and ways to write inclusive, grammatical sentences.

You can also find guidance on the singular “they” in Section 4.18 of the Publication Manual (7th ed.).

If you have other questions or feedback, leave a comment!

How to use the singular they in writing and speaking

Nigel Caplan, Associate Professor at University of Delaware, shows how useful they/them can be for non-plural as well as plural reference. English is perhaps at a transition point with its pronouns, so you will want to take in everything he has to say.

Introductory linguistics courses often teach that pronouns are a closed group: languages tend not to add new pronouns, unlike open categories such as nouns and verbs, where there is frequent innovation. However, pronouns can and do still change. For example, English used to have a second-person singular pronoun, thou, which contrasted with the plural pronoun you much like tu/vous in French, tu/usted in Spanish, and du/Sie in German, which it historically derived from. Thou carried the meaning of familiarity: in Hamlet, Gertrude greets her son after her wedding celebrations, “thou hast thy father much offended,” to which Hamlet coldly replies, “No, madam, you have my father much offended.” In modern standard English, of course, the formerly plural pronoun you covers both singular and plural, familiar and polite.

They as a singular-pronoun

Something comparable is happening today with the third-person plural pronoun they. Like you, but for different reasons, they has become a singular pronoun with two different uses that fill two gaps in the English language.

First use of singular they

First, they is used when the gender of the referent (the noun to which the pronoun refers) is unknown or unimportant. This use avoids clumsy workarounds such as he/she and his or her. For example:

  • Everyone needs to bring their laptop to class tomorrow.
  • I didn’t see the person who stole my wallet. They reached into backpack and ran away.
  • The teacher should expect students to contact them with questions after class.

While grammar prescriptivists may object to the use of a plural pronoun with a singular meaning, this is a widely accepted usage that dates back centuries and has finally been recognized by most style guides. Singular they is colloquial, convenient, and concise, and it is an option that English learners can and should be taught.

Second use of singular they

The second use of singular they is more contemporary. Some people do not identify with the pronouns he or she. Many nonbinary people use the pronouns they/them/their. It is a sign of respectful and inclusive language to use people’s identified pronouns. They can also be used for people whose gender and identified pronouns are unknown rather than assuming he/him/his or she/her/hers pronouns simply based on someone’s name or appearance. Note that plural verb forms are always used with they even when referring to one person, as they are with you (e.g., they are and you are and not *they is or *you is).

Making ESL/EFL more inclusive

Teaching English learners to understand the importance of using people’s identified pronouns is part of a broader project of making ESL/EFL more inclusive so that the language we teach is better aligned with the lived reality of the millions of users of English around the world. In some teaching situations, it may be better to wait until a context for singular they arises before pointing its use out to students. In other situations, it might be taught as part of basic instruction in pronouns. In either case, it is important for teaching materials not to assume that there are only two possible singular pronouns for people, he or she.

The downloadable handout demonstrates contexts in which singular they might be used, but it may need adapting for local contexts.

Subscribe to the monthly Grammar Teaching Newsletter with teaching tips and classroom activities from grammar experts, and read more grammar blogs.

Get teaching tips, insights, and resources straight to your inbox when you create your free World of better learning account today.

Singular they, you, and a ‘senseless way of speaking’

It’s enough to drive anyone out of their senses – G. B. Shaw

Every fool can do as they’re bid – Jonathan Swift

I like singular they, and I use it often. Most English speakers do, without even thinking about it. There may be times when alternatives are preferable, but singular they/their/them generally works very well, and the grammatical objections to it are specious. Other objections – based on aesthetics, feelings, or dubious authority – are weaker still.

I bring this up for two reasons. First, it’s topical among language bloggers – yes, yet again, but don’t let the subject’s familiarity put you off reading John McIntyre’s eloquent presentation of the facts, systematic defence, and exasperated addendum; or Lane Greene’s perceptive analysis at Johnson in which he says, simply and succinctly:

If you’re a singular-they non-believer, allow this seemingly paradoxical fact to sink in, and see how deeply it can go before the automatic shields are activated.

People who complain about singular they rarely extend their censure to singular you – but they could, if they wanted to be more consistent, and what peever doesn’t? You was once exclusively plural but crept into widespread singular use, as Greene shows in a subsequent post. (The related history of thee and thou is summarised here, while this essay details the development of their marked use.)

Where then are the howls of protest over singular you from devotees of logic and order? You would do well to find any: it’s just not the done thing to complain about singular you nowadays. No one would take you seriously. At least when you complain about singular they, you can drum up a few mumbles of support, albeit from a misdirected minority.

How to use the singular they in writing and speaking

The second reason for bringing this all up is that I was prompted by Jessa Crispin’s essay on William James and Berlin to re-read, over the Christmas break, James’s Varieties of Religious Experience; and in it I found someone complaining bitterly about singular you. Thomas Elwood (1639–1714), an early Quaker, wrote in his posthumously published autobiography:

Again, the corrupt and unsound form of speaking in the plural number to a single person, you to one, instead of thou, contrary to the pure, plain, and single language of truth, thou to one, and you to more than one, which had always been used by God to men, and men to God, as well as one to another, from the oldest record of time till corrupt men, for corrupt ends, in later and corrupt times, to flatter, fawn, and work upon the corrupt nature in men, brought in that false and senseless way of speaking you to one, which has since corrupted the modern languages, and hath greatly debased the spirits and depraved the manners of men;—this evil custom I had been as forward in as others, and this I was now called out of, and required to cease from.

This is no ordinary rant, but still it presupposes – among a host of other metaphysical assumptions – that there is a “single language of truth”, absolutely harmonious forever, and conveniently in accord with the writer’s stylistic preference. (Funny how that happens.) Think of it as an overambitious theological version of the One Right Way fallacy.

Words can never be so impeccably created, chosen and arranged as to constitute a “single language of truth”; they only ever manage an approximation or a corruption of it. But we do our best, and patterns and principles emerge and congregate on common and generally sound conventions. Such as singular they.

On Twitter lately I said I find it strange when someone declares they don’t like singular they: it’s like hearing they don’t like socks, or carrots. Or singular you. The construction is fully grammatical; it’s been in use since the 14th century, abundant in literature and speech alike. It wasn’t objected to until 18th-century grammarians decided that indefinite pronouns simply had to be singular, and should be masculine.

They don’t, and they don’t.

Alternatives commonly proposed, of turning “generic” he into s/he, she/he or he or she, or alternating between he and she, perpetuate a false idea of gender as a binary set. They, by contrast, is implicitly inclusive. The binary options are also clunky, especially when repeated:

1. Someone left to his or her own devices must take action himself or herself.

2. Someone left to their own devices must take action themselves. [Or themself.]

Line 1 pretty much epitomises a “false and senseless way of speaking”, to use Elwood’s phrase. And pluralising the antecedent (someonepeople in the line above) is not always desirable. Whatever you do, avoid he or she are.

Peeves about singular they are unsupported by historical and present usage and unsupportable by appeal to grammar or logic. You don’t have to use it, but resistance invites unnatural awkwardness and unnecessary exclusion. Why not get on board with it?

New rule! Anyone who objects to singular ‘they’ on the basis of logic or grammar has to avoid singular ‘you’ as well. Thou’rt welcome.

The older I get the more unwieldy & exclusionary ‘he or she’ seems when we have singular ‘they’ available. It’s natural, unfussy, inclusive.

Update:

A few articles of interest: Geoffrey Pullum’s definitive argument for singular they; Mark Liberman on the future of singular they; more on Quakers and singular you.

Singular they has two uses: specific and generic (“Pronouns”).

Specific Use

The MLA advises writers to always follow the personal pronouns of individuals they write about. Thus, if a person’s pronoun is they, the following sentences are correct:

Jules is writing their research paper on Jane Austen’s Persuasion.

Ari read the instructions to themselves [or themself] before beginning the test.

This use of singular they is widely accepted. In September 2019, Merriam-Webster’s even added a new definition to the entry for they in its online dictionary, stating that they can refer to a “single person whose gender identity is nonbinary” (“They,” def. 3d).

Generic Use

They is also used “as a generic third-person singular pronoun to refer to a person whose gender is unknown or irrelevant to the context,” as the seventh edition of the Publication Manual of the American Psychological Association attests (120). This use of singular they, until very recently discouraged in academic writing and other formal contexts, allows writers to omit gendered pronouns from a sentence like the following:

Each taxpayer must file his or her tax return before 15 April.

Instead, writers may substitute singular they:

Each taxpayer must file their tax return before 15 April.

Because it lacks grammatical agreement, this use of singular they has been considered a less desirable option than revising to use the plural or rephrasing without pronouns. But it has emerged as a tool for making language more inclusive (see “Guidelines”), and the MLA encourages writers to accept its use to avoid making or enabling assumptions about gender.

The following principles and examples show some techniques that can help writers avoid the unnecessary and discriminatory use of gendered pronouns. For generic uses, writers should not use he or she alone or alternate he and she.

References to a Hypothetical Person

Original

When a celebrity joins Twitter he or she gains tens of thousands of followers within minutes.

Revised, Singular They

When a celebrity joins Twitter they gain tens of thousands of followers within minutes.

Revised, No Pronoun

A celebrity who joins Twitter gains tens of thousands of followers within minutes.

Revised, Plural Subject and Pronoun

When celebrities join Twitter they gain tens of thousands of followers within minutes.

References to an Anonymous Person

Original

The anonymous reviewer recommends in his or her report that the essay be published after minor revisions.

Revised, Singular They

The anonymous reviewer recommends in their report that the essay be published after minor revisions.

Revised, No Pronoun

The anonymous reviewer’s report recommends that the essay be published after minor revisions.

References to a Person Whose Gender Is Unknown or Irrelevant

Original

I am impressed by the résumé of T. C. Blake, a candidate for the web developer job, and will schedule an interview with her.

Revised, Singular They

I am impressed by the résumé of T. C. Blake, a candidate for the web developer job, and will schedule an interview with them.

Revised, No Pronoun

I am impressed by the résumé of T. C. Blake and will schedule an interview with this candidate for the web developer job.

References to Generic Subjects That Are Grammatically Singular but Plural in Sense

Original

Everyone wants to do well on his or her midterm.

Revised, Singular They

Everyone wants to do well on their midterm.

Revised, No Pronoun

Everyone wants to do well on the midterm.

Works Cited

“Guidelines for Inclusive Language.” Linguistic Society of America, 2016, www.linguisticsociety.org/resource/guidelines-inclusive-language.

“Pronouns.” The Chicago Manual of Style Online, U of Chicago, 2017, www.chicagomanualofstyle.org/qanda/data/faq/topics/Pronouns.html.

Publication Manual of the American Psychological Association. 7th ed., American Psychological Association, 2020.

How to use the singular they in writing and speaking

How to use the singular they in writing and speaking

How to use the singular they in writing and speaking

“The employee believed their safety could not be guaranteed.”

The sentence above has an apparently overt grammar error. The subject of the sentence, employee, is singular but the pronoun their is plural. Most business writers would catch this obvious error. Subjects and pronouns need to agree in number, so the sentence should be “The employee believed his or her safety could not be guaranteed.”

The challenge with the corrected sentence is that it is awkward and it boxes individuals who do not identify as uniquely male or female into a category that doesn’t fit for them. It’s exclusionary, and style guides are addressing this.

Using they as a singular pronoun has become acceptable in some cases, especially as a gender-neutral pronoun.

The 2017 edition of The AP Stylebook — the style guide used most widely in business — stated:

“They/them/their is acceptable in limited cases as a singular and/or gender-neutral pronoun, when alternative wording is overly awkward or clumsy.”

For example, to avoid the specificity of an individual’s gender, this use of their is acceptable: “The employee believed their position was in jeopardy.”

The Washington Post addressed this in 2015:

“Allowing they for a gender-nonconforming person is a no-brainer. And once we’ve done that, why not allow it for the most awkward of those he or she situations that have troubled us for so many years?”

The Chicago Manual of Style now states:

“While this usage [they, them, their, and themselves] is accepted in those spheres [speech and informal writing], it is only lately showing signs of gaining acceptance in formal writing, where Chicago recommends avoiding its use. When referring specifically to a person who does not identify with a gender-specific pronoun, however, they and its forms are often preferred.”

Garner’s Modern American Usage recommends its cautious use:

“Where it can’t be avoided, resort to it cautiously because some people may doubt your literacy.”

Microsoft Manual and Style advises:

“Although . . . they for a singular antecedent is gaining acceptance. . . . Whenever possible, write around the problem.”

Grammarly polled their readers and most objected to the singular use of they. Admittedly, it can become awkward: “They is a talented artist.”

As a comment below correctly noted, use the plural verb conjugation when using “they” to refer to an individual: “They are a talented artist.” Or, just rewrite the sentence to avoid both a gender identification and the need for a pronoun: “The artist is talented.” More on gender-neutral pronouns here.

One of the aspects of business writing that I love most is that it evolves to reflect appropriate information flow and awareness. Style Guides and writing blogs are clearly addressing this with a cautious endorsement of the singular they.

My recommendation now is to generally stick to standard grammar constructs and match singular pronouns with singular subjects and plural pronouns with pronoun subjects. But, do use they as a singular pronoun when it is respectful or more clear to do so.

Words matter. Including everyone respectfully in the discourse warrants bending this grammar rule.

Everyone Uses Singular ‘They,’ Whether They Realize It Or Not

How to use the singular they in writing and speaking

Talk about belated recognition. At its meeting in Washington, D.C., on Jan. 7, the American Dialect Society voted to make the 600-year-old pronoun “they” their word of the year for 2015. Or more precisely, a particular use of that pronoun that grammarians call the singular “they.” This is the “they” that doesn’t care whether it’s referring to a male or female. As in “If I get a call, tell them they can call me back.” Or “Did someone leave their books here?”

As ordinary as it is, that use of “they” has always been a bit disreputable — you might say it, but you wouldn’t want to write it down. But now it’s a pronoun whose hour has come.

A few months ago, the Washington Post style guide accepted it. And it’s been welcomed by people who identify as genderqueer and who feel that “he” and “she” don’t necessarily exhaust all the gender possibilities. Universities allow students to select it as their personal pronoun. And so does Facebook, so that your friends will get notices like “Wish them a happy birthday.”

This use of “they” has been around for a long time. It shows up in Shakespeare, Dickens and George Bernard Shaw. Jane Austen was always saying things like “everybody has their failing.” But the Victorian grammarians made it a matter of schoolroom dogma that one could only say “Everybody has his failing,” with the understanding that “he” stood in for both sexes. As their slogan had it, “the masculine embraces the feminine.”

Nobody would ever say, ‘Every candidate thanked his spouse, including Hillary.’ When you utter ‘he,’ you always bring a male to mind.

That rule wasn’t really discredited until the 1970s, when the second-wave feminists made the generic masculine the paradigm of sexism in language. Male critics ridiculed their complaints as a “libspeak tantrum” and accused them of suffering from “pronoun envy.” But most writers now realize that the so-called gender-neutral “he” is anything but. Nobody would ever say, “Every candidate thanked his spouse, including Hillary.” When you utter “he,” you always bring a male to mind.

But once the generic masculine fell out of favor, what were we going to replace it with? People weren’t about to adopt a brand-new gender-neutral pronoun the way they were adopting gender-neutral job descriptions. “He or she” was impossibly clunky. It was time to restore singular “they” to respectability. And that’s been happening, even in edited books and the media.

But singular “they” still has its critics, and they can get pretty lofty about it. One British grammarian calls it “illiterate,” which always strikes me as something Diane would have said to Sam in Cheers.

A lot of people tell you it sets their teeth on edge, but my guess is that they’re not listening to themselves very attentively. Everyone uses singular “they,” whether they realize it or not. In an engaging recent book called Between You & Me, the New Yorker’s self-designated comma queen Mary Norris says that that use of “they” is “just wrong.” But flip back a few pages and you find her writing “Nobody wanted to think they were not essential.” If that sentence got by a New Yorker copy editor in her own book on grammar, what hope is there for anybody else? If you insist on coming down on singular “they,” it’s best to be a bit ironic about it, since you’re almost certainly going to be making a hypocrite of yourself before the day is out.

The only problem with singular “they” is that some people still think there is one. But that’s reason enough for most grammar guides to advise their readers to write around it. It’s what I think of as the “don’t make trouble” theory of English usage.

The Chicago Manual of Style provides nine different strategies for achieving gender-neutrality without having to resort to using “they” — change the subject to a plural, repeat the noun and so on. That can be prudent. Even when you know your sentence is fine as it is, you don’t want to make some pedant’s morning. But if I could have back all the time I’ve wasted writing my way around a perfectly grammatical singular “they,” I could have added another book or two to my name.

Everybody seems certain that singular “they” will ultimately prevail, even the grammarians who disapprove of it. A lot of younger writers don’t think twice about using it, and the rest tend to think of it as a pretty venial sin — the grammatical equivalent of wearing white after Labor Day.

But our pronoun controversies aren’t going to subside any time soon. English is never going to have a one-size-fits-all pronoun the way Chinese and Finnish do. We’ve spent the last few hundred years struggling to get our unwieldy pronoun system to line up with our genders, and that was when everybody thought there were only two of them.

Now some genderqueer people are taking “they” into new grammatical territory, using it for alternative genders exactly the way you’d use a personal pronoun like “he” or “she.” So you could say, “Pat shrugged their shoulders,” or “Ronnie bit off more than they could chew.” That’s the usage that the American Dialect Society was focusing on when they made “they” their word of the year. It takes quite a bit of getting used to, and it’s launched a whole new conversation. But that’s the advantage of having a messy pronoun system like ours — in every era we have to thrash things over again.

The misused word is everywhere, proliferating like fruit flies ’round a bowl of rotting bananas. We must stop it before it goes too far.

Let’s talk about something. Let’s talk about the “singular” they. That’s when a writer or a speaker — a he or a she — is discussing someone who might be either a he or a she (it’s unknown, or the writer doesn’t intend to make a subject or object gender-specific and instead hopes to convey a universality of personhood). So instead of writing, say, he or she did x or y, the writer uses they. It’s everywhere, proliferating like fruit flies ’round a bowl of rotting bananas, bad writing surrounding bad writing. Some examples:

“If someone is concerned about their mental health, they should seek professional help.”

“If a person decides they like dubstep, that’s really their prerogative.”

“What do you say to a coworker when their attitude is just terrible?”

These all make me cringe, but it’s a usage that has a fair number of supporters. In a post on The Economist‘s Grammar blog, R.L.G. examines the matter further, as inspired by grad student and blogger Freddie deBoer, who thinks we need to stop fighting the use of their as a singular pronoun. deBoer writes,

Using “their” for singular antecedents is one that I think people need to just give up on. As I’ve argued, it only occurs in a very limited set of circumstances, and those circumstances [are very] unlikely to produce confusion about what is meant. We all know what is intended in such a statement, to the point that most of us don’t even notice it in spoken conversation. And as we lack a satisfying alternative, the usage is likely to persist. That’s not to say that you shouldn’t understand what the “rule” is, if only to be able to satisfy those gatekeepers that police it. (Don’t use it in your resume, don’t use it in your grade school application.) But this is an example of a gate that’s not worth defending anymore.

R.L.G. takes it from there, explaining that they was used as a singular pronoun for centuries without anyone complaining (and by many notable crafters of language, including Chaucer, Shakespeare, and Swift). He adds that not only is the usage “very unlikely” to produce confusion, but also, it’s ” nearly literally impossible for singular they to be confusing in an actual conversation or in a longer piece of writing.” Further, “t hat still doesn’t prove singular they ungrammatical,” he writes, concluding, along with deBoer and Bryan Garner, that the singular they is ” the most convenient solution” to all of our pronoun trouble. A caveat or suggestion: “Use singular they in relaxed prose, when you know you’re in the company of those who get this right, or if you don’t mind annoying a determined and vocal minority.”

Being one of that determined minority, I disagree. Don’t use it at all. We must stop this, stop it before it goes too far.

I’m all for a certain flexibility and adaptive ease with regard to language and how we use it. I’m happy to add three exclamation points to a sentence or write in ALL CAPS when it seems to fit the moment, especially online. But I see absolutely no reason other than laziness to start subbing our hes and shes with a clunky they, or our hises and hers with theirs . There is a reason we have distinct pronouns, and that is so we can be specific. If we don’t know the specifics, we should try to find them out, or use one of those handy words — he or she or one, for instance — that get around the they problem. Peppering one’s sentences with some hes and shes can be kind of nice, really, a way to assemble a collection of characters who are certainly more real and individualized than a collective they.

There is criticism that the use of he as the generic pronoun is an example of linguistic sexism of a sort, and I agree there’s no need to always use he as the default if you don’t know the gender of the person about whom you are speaking, or if you’re using the pronoun to stand for persons of either gender. You can just as easily swap in a she; mix it up! Make it fun! Keep people on their toes! Maybe even create a new word, and make it happen! The message that something should be easy, that we all understand anyway, that it doesn’t really matter and we should give up the fight may be the most galling part of this argument, though. Since when was writing or creating art with words (if you’re being high-minded) supposed to be convenient? Since when was past history the rule for how we live in the present and future? Break the rules if you must, for a purpose, to make an impact. Don’t do something because it’s easy and everyone else is doing it. If a word sounds like it’s landing with a horrid thump in your ear, it’s landing that way to at least some of your readers. Every time I see a singular they, my inner grammatical spirit aches.

I have no issue with their used in its proper place, as a plural pronoun. That’s completely fine, even necessary, and the usage is quite valuable. But why must we accept their as a singular? I say no. I say, use anything instead. Use he or she . Use one. Use a person’s name. Or rewrite! Pluralize throughout, if you must, for consistency:

“If PEOPLE ARE concerned about their mental health, they should seek professional help.”

Even better, get rid of the they altogether.

“People who are concerned about their mental health should seek professional help.”

But isn’t it better with a he or she?

“Someone who is concerned about his mental health should seek professional help.”

We know this already, but it bears repeating: The easy fix is not necessarily the best one, and they is not the solution to our pronoun ills. The singular they is ear-hurting, eye-burning, soul-ravaging, mind-numbing syntactic folly. Stop the singular they. Stop it now.

O n Tuesday, Merriam-Webster selected its word of the year, not some viral neologism like post-truth or selfie but a word that has been around since the Middle Ages: the pronoun they.

Pronouns are tools that people typically use with all the thought one gives to using doorknobs. Students are taught in early language lessons that every sentence needs a subject and are given a short list of usual suspects: words like he, she, you and they. The latter, they are told, is used to refer to more than one person. Yet that’s not always the case. Merriam-Webster chose the singular form, one that has been gaining currency and causing controversy.

There are two reasons that singular they is on the upswing. One is that it’s a convenient way to refer to an unknown person in a gender-neutral way, versus using cumbersome constructions like “he or she.” In recent years, it has been far easier to find this generic they in mass media because using it makes life easier for readers and writers alike.

In 2015, Washington Post copy editor Bill Walsh announced that his desk would start allowing this usage of they, explaining that it’s the best option in a language that famously lacks a gender-neutral third-person singular pronoun: Using he seems sexist, using she seems patronizing and “alternating he and she is silly,” he wrote, “as are he/she, (s)he and attempts at made-up pronouns.” In 2017, no less an authority than the AP Stylebook also approved this usage “when alternative wording is overly awkward or clumsy.”

The other is that singular they is being used by individuals — who might identify as transgender, non-binary, agender, intersex or even cisgender — who don’t feel like a gendered pronoun fits. This usage of singular they can operate as a form of protest against some of the most fundamental ideas governing society today: namely, that every person can be identified as male or female in a clear-cut manner and that males and females should look and act and be referred to in certain ways. Modern terms like the honorific Mx. and the adjective Latinx have been taken up with similar flair.

Using singular they to refer to an unknown person is both better established in the language and less likely to lead to outrage on Twitter. Though some traditionalists wrinkle their noses at seeing the word themself in a newspaper article, this usage has been around for some 600 years, and people employ it every day in conversation. Kirby Conrod, a University of Washington linguist who studies pronoun usage, provides the example of dealing with bad drivers: It’s unlikely you’d slam your hand on the wheel and exclaim, “Did you see that? He or she cut me off!”

The newer usage of singular they to describe a known individual who is rejecting the yoke of other pronouns has been inching closer to the mainstream for years. In 2015, the American Dialect Society chose it as their word of the year, having seen how people were starting to use it to “[transcend] the gender binary.” In 2017, singer Jennifer Lopez made news when she used singular they on Instagram to refer to a younger family member. (TIME also ran a cover story on non-binary identities that year titled “Beyond He or She“.) And this year, singer Sam Smith announced on the same platform that “My pronouns are they/them.”

This version of singular they causes more consternation, grammatical and political.

It’s unlikely you’d slam your hand on the wheel and exclaim, “Did you see that? He or she cut me off!”

While it’s natural for the usage of pronouns to evolve, just as all language evolves, students are taught that pronouns are the bedrock of language, and it can be discomfiting when the rules about how to use them start to shift. “When there are changes, it can feel much more fundamental,” explains linguist Ben Zimmer, “and that obviously leads to a lot of backlash.”

The backlash has come as singular they has become associated with new protocols that progressives have adopted at schools and conference check-in tables around the country. “What are your pronouns?” everyone is asked, the suggestion being that one should never assume another person’s gender, however obvious it might seem, in part because it is offensive to use words like him or her for individuals who use they and them. For some people, this all amounts to just one more example of hand-wringing liberals trying to control people’s behavior and speech.

Conrod, who identifies as non-binary and uses the pronouns they and them, sums up this objection as people feeling “the social justice police” are creating a world where one “can’t say anything.” In response, Conrod argues that everyone generally agrees that it is rude to misgender a cisgender person, like mistakenly saying “Thank you, ma’am” to a long-haired man, and believes this same attitude should extend to people like them, even if it means doing more work in social situations.

Others balk at using singular they to refer to people like Conrod on the grounds that it is linguistically confusing (e.g. does one say “they is” or “they are”?) or that it just sounds weird.

“If people have trouble now, it’s understandable,” Zimmer says, “because when we’re dealing with something as fundamental as a pronoun, changes like this might seem to go against people’s deeply held feelings about how language works.”

There is, however, historical precedent that proves this kind of evolution can take place. Centuries ago, the pronoun you was used only in a plural sense: Individuals were referred to as thee or thou. Gradually, people started to view you as the more polite way to refer to individuals as well. And there was similar confusion about whether to say “you is” or “you are.”

“There were a lot of animated arguments,” Zimmer explains. This was especially the case among Quakers who preferred thou and considered singular you to be an abomination uttered by those who “are out of the pure language.” In the end, the Quakers lost and English speakers embraced singular you, as well as the verb form that was already in use. Today people say “you are” when referring to singles and doubles alike, with minimal fuss. Using thou, meanwhile, would likely lead to some furrowed brows.

In research about the acceptance of different pronoun usage, Conrod has found that when it comes to people disliking singular they, there seems to be a breaking point around age 35: People of all ages are fairly accepting of using singular they to refer to an unknown person, but those over age 35 don’t like it when it’s used to refer to Mary or John.

Merriam-Webster’s selection of a word of the year is based on data showing that far more people than usual are looking up a particular term. Because of that, Conrod sees the anointment of singular they less as a sign that it has been widely accepted than a signal that more families are probably having arguments about the pronoun over their holiday meals.

“The language is always shifting and normally people aren’t aware of it,” Conrod says. “This time people seem really aware of it and have a lot of opinions.”

Singular they has become the pronoun of choice to replace he and she in cases where the gender of the antecedent – the word the pronoun refers to – is unknown, irrelevant, or nonbinary, or where gender needs to be concealed. It’s the word we use for sentences like Everyone loves his mother.

But that’s nothing new. The Oxford English Dictionary traces singular they back to 1375, where it appears in the medieval romance William and the Werewolf. Except for the old-style language of that poem, its use of singular they to refer to an unnamed person seems very modern. Here’s the Middle English version: ‘Hastely hiȝed eche . . . þei neyȝþed so neiȝh . . . þere william & his worþi lef were liand i-fere.’ In modern English, that’s: ‘Each man hurried . . . till they drew near . . . where William and his darling were lying together.’

Since forms may exist in speech long before they’re written down, it’s likely that singular they was common even before the late fourteenth century. That makes an old form even older.

In the eighteenth century, grammarians began warning that singular they was an error because a plural pronoun can’t take a singular antecedent. They clearly forgot that singular you was a plural pronoun that had become singular as well. You functioned as a polite singular for centuries, but in the seventeenth century singular you replaced thou, thee, and thy, except for some dialect use. That change met with some resistance. In 1660, George Fox, the founder of Quakerism, wrote a whole book labeling anyone who used singular you an idiot or a fool. And eighteenth-century grammarians like Robert Lowth and Lindley Murray regularly tested students on thou as singular, you as plural, despite the fact that students used singular you when their teachers weren’t looking, and teachers used singular you when their students weren’t looking. Anyone who said thou and thee was seen as a fool and an idiot, or a Quaker, or at least hopelessly out of date.

Singular you has become normal and unremarkable. Also unremarkable are the royal we and, in countries without a monarchy, the editorial we: first-person plurals used regularly as singulars and nobody calling anyone an idiot and a fool. And singular they is well on its way to being normal and unremarkable as well. Toward the end of the twentieth century, language authorities began to approve the form. The New Oxford Dictionary of English (1998) not only accepts singular they, they also use the form in their definitions. And the New Oxford American Dictionary (Third Edition, 2010), calls singular they ‘generally accepted’ with indefinites, and ‘now common but less widely accepted’ with definite nouns, especially in formal contexts.

Not everyone is down with singular they. The well-respected Chicago Manual of Style still rejects singular they for formal writing, and just the other day a teacher told me that he still corrects students who use everyonetheir in their papers, though he probably uses singular they when his students aren’t looking. Last Fall, a transgender Florida school teacher was removed from their fifth-grade classroom for asking their students to refer to them with the gender-neutral singular they. And two years ago, after the Diversity Office at the University of Tennessee suggested that teachers ask their students, ‘What’s your pronoun?’ because some students might prefer an invented nonbinary pronoun like zie or something more conventional, like singular they, the Tennessee state legislature passed a law banning the use of taxpayer dollars for gender-neutral pronouns, despite the fact that no one knows how much a pronoun actually costs.

It’s no surprise that Tennessee, the state that banned the teaching of evolution in 1925, also failed to stop the evolution of English one hundred years later, because the fight against singular they was already lost by the time eighteenth-century critics began objecting to it. In 1794, a contributor to the New Bedford Medley mansplains to three women that the singular they they used in an earlier essay in the newspaper was grammatically incorrect and does no ‘honor to themselves, or the female sex in general.’ To which they honourably reply that they used singular they on purpose because ‘we wished to conceal the gender,’ and they challenge their critic to invent a new pronoun if their politically-charged use of singular they upsets him so much. More recently, a colleague who is otherwise conservative told me that they found singular they useful ‘when talking about what certain people in my field say about other people in my field as a way of concealing the identity of my source.’

Former Chief Editor of the OED Robert Burchfield, in The New Fowler’s Dictionary of Modern English Usage (1996), dismisses objections to singular they as unsupported by the historical record. Burchfield observes that the construction is ‘passing unnoticed’ by speakers of standard English as well as by copy editors, and he concludes that this trend is ‘irreversible’. People who want to be inclusive, or respectful of other people’s preferences, use singular they. And people who don’t want to be inclusive, or who don’t respect other people’s pronoun choices, use singular they as well. Even people who object to singular they as a grammatical error use it themselves when they’re not looking, a sure sign that anyone who objects to singular they is, if not a fool or an idiot, at least hopelessly out of date.

The opinions and other information contained in the OED blog posts and comments do not necessarily reflect the opinions or positions of Oxford University Press.

Many teenagers find their parents embarrassing in some way or another, and as my children, now ten and thirteen, started approaching the end of elementary school, I expected my words and actions might come under intense scrutiny soon. Still, I was a little surprised to discover one way in particular my thirteen-year-old found me awkwardly outdated: my occasional use of “he or she” or “his or her” with “someone” or another gender ambiguous person! When I would use such an expression, it was met with an irritated “You can just say ‘they’!”

My daughter’s modern ear heard “he or she” as biased.

As an editor, I am naturally sensitive to language matters, and I took this criticism seriously. I’ve made an effort to modernize my pronoun usage, and in today’s blog I’ll provide tips to avoid gender bias in your pronoun use.

Get a free sample proofread and edit for your document.
Two professional proofreaders will proofread and edit your document.

First, a little review about pronouns, words that may be used in place of a noun, or a person, place, or thing. English pronouns include the following:

Singular

Plural

1 st Person

2 nd Person

3 rd Person

He/him/his, she/her/hers, it/its

The singular pronouns he and she are gendered (considered male and female), which can present problems when the gender of the antecedent (what the pronoun refers to) is unknown or ambiguous, when it is better not to reveal the gender, or when the person to which the pronoun refers identifies as nonbinary (neither male nor female). Using it, the other third person pronoun, which is gender neutral, is rarely appropriate for use with people, as the word it can imply a non- or less-than-human status. Consider, “The person asked if we would give it a drink of water.” Sounds weird, right?

English speakers have made many attempts to manufacture gender-neutral third person pronouns, including zie, ey, ve, e, ter, and others, but none of them has gained significant traction, not even thon, which made it far enough to appear in Merriam-Webster and Funk & Wagnalls for decades but was rarely spoken.

The better option for a gender-neutral third person singular pronoun, the one often used but not always accepted by grammar purists, is they. The use of singular they is not new. Since the fourteenth century, this pronoun has been used as a singular when the gender of the antecedent is unknown or needs to be hidden. Examples of this type of usage can be found in the works of many writers throughout the centuries, including Geoffrey Chaucer, William Shakespeare, and Jane Austin. But some people balk at using they as a singular pronoun because it has always been thought of as a plural pronoun and thus, goes the thinking, is not to be used to refer to a single person.

In conversations, the singular they is commonly used and accepted, as in, “The chef at the new French restaurant on the corner used all of their best recipes on the opening night menu.” The speaker doesn’t necessarily know the chef’s gender, so they say their (did you notice I snuck in another “they”?). And it’s rare anyone bats an eye at such a sentence.

How to use the singular they in writing and speakingMany people are still uncomfortable with using they for a specific, known person, though. It is common to try to fit all individuals into the categories of male or female by using he or she, but not everyone fits into these binary categories. Insisting on using he or she for someone can easily result in error or offense, as when the AP wrote an article earlier this year about singer Sam Smith’s announcement of their nonbinary status and use of pronouns they/them/their and yet referred to Smith using he/him/his throughout the article.

Such contradictions are evidence to our changing use of language and understanding of gender identity. Over time, using the pronoun they fluidly will undoubtedly become part of everyone’s daily speech no matter the purpose.

This transitional place in which we English speakers find ourselves presents a challenge for those writing for formal purposes. A review of the most current editions of the Chicago Manual of Style, MLA, APA, and AP shows agreement on two main rules for pronoun usage:

1. When referring to a person who is gender fluid, nonbinary, or otherwise does not identify with the pronouns he or she, use they. This is a matter of respecting individual rights about identity.

2. When referring to a person whose gender has not been specified or is ambiguous (like the chef in the example above), try one of three strategies to avoid using singular they, he (which may seem sexist), he or she (which is awkward) or she (which may seem condescending) or alternating between he and she (which may be confusing):

Switch from singular to plural. Instead of, “A teacher should be kind to their students,” write, “Teachers should be kind to their students.”

Take out the pronoun: “A teacher should be kind to students.”

Rewrite the sentence: “Students deserve teachers’ kindness.”

Following these guidelines will help you avoid gender bias in pronoun use and help your writing maintain credibility with your audience.

Something to reflect on: in the seventeenth century, the plural and formal second person pronoun you took over for all second person pronoun use, pushing thou aside except in certain English dialects, and this change, like today’s changing use of they, he, and she, caused confusion and controversy. But slowly the dust settled, confusion cleared, and singular you was accepted.

At the rate things are changing now, it seems the acceptance of singular they in speech and formal and informal writing is not too far off.

Sarah P.

Get a free sample proofread and edit for your document.
Two professional proofreaders will proofread and edit your document.

Yesterday I opened a can of worms. There were many worms in the can; some male and some female. I discovered that a few of the worms were married to each other. One couple was having a marital disagreement. They were arguing about grammar, of all things. The fight was about the proper use of gender pronouns. Here is the sentence under dispute:

“When a spouse greets a partner with derision because of an opinion, what should be ___ reaction?”

Fill in the blank. Should you use his, his or her, or their? This is a grammatical conundrum. Your choice will determine whether you will be categorized as “sexist,” “offensive,” “tiresome,” or “ungrammatical.”

Our vernacular has changed over the past years due to our sensitivity over the generic “he.” For some it is a matter of being politically correct. For others it is merely a way of being inclusive of both genders in their writing. In addition it can be simply a matter of using the common language of everyday speech.

There are some who wish to change all pronouns to be gender neutral, going from he/she to zie; from him/her to zim; from his/her to zir; from his/hers to zis; and himself/herself to zieself instead. But rather than debate that issue, let’s look at the use of the singular “they.”

So what is correct? I have polled a number of editors on this subject and find them equally divided. Some trained in journalism and others who are fierce copy-editors are vehemently opposed to the use of the “singular they.” Others claim to be more concerned about simple communication and lay the finer points of grammar aside. Yet even they are not unified on the usage. There is an entire website devoted to the issue as found in the writing of Jane Austen and other classic writers!

Rosalie Maggio, in her book The Nonsexist Word Finder (Beacon Press, 1989) speaks to the issue of gender inclusive language:

“Defenders of the convention most often claim that it is a point of grammar and certainly not intended to offend anyone. That it does in reality offend large numbers of people does not appear to sway some grammarians, nor does the fact that their recourse to the laws of language is on shaky ground. While he involves a disagreement in gender, singular they involves a disagreement in number [as in ‘to each his own’ and ‘to each their own’]. Eighteenth-century [male] grammarians decided that number was more important than gender, although the singular they had been in favor until that time.”

The plural pronoun has been used regularly for years. Few realize that some of the greatest writers in history utilized this method without criticism–Chaucer, Shakespeare, Swift, Goldsmith, Dickens, Fielding, Thackery, Byron, Austen, Orwell, Kipling, and even C.S. Lewis.

In 2015 the Singular They was named “Word of the Year” by American Dialect Society (a group of 200 linguists). Even the venerable Chicago Manual of Style, 17th ed. (2017) now allows for its use.

Richard Lederer and Richard Downs, in their great book The Write Way wrote, “Let the word go out that anyone . . . their is destined to become good, idiomatic English. It already pervades the speech of educated Americans, and daily it grows more common in writing.” (page 161)

Members of the Copyediting-L e-mail list state, “‘They’ with a singular antecedent works well, because it’s already part of everyone’s vocabulary. Like the generic ‘he,’ it entails no new words, just a shift in semantics…[it] is just one item in the toolkit of those who wish to avoid using generic ‘he.’ It isn’t the only item, and it doesn’t fit every situation, but it is useful.” (http://atropos.c2.net/

srm/samples/net/celfaq.htm [link now broken])

My feeling is that it is entirely appropriate to use the “singular they.” We need to adjust, ever so slightly, to accommodate the changes in our language. While not succumbing to the landmine of being politically correct, I do believe that there are appropriate places to use “ungrammatical” words to effectively communicate to our readers.

Richard Lederer provided a wonderful exercise to illustrate the point. Fill in the blank in the following sentence: “Everyone in the building attended the party, and ___ had a wonderful time.” I suspect that nearly everyone supplied the word they.

For a nice, but not definitive, introduction to the subject visit the Wikipedia entry for this topic.

And please note that I am NOT a grammar expert by any means. Heaven forbid I get that much credit. While I am an advocate of great writing and proper use of the English language I am also an advocate of communication. And communication has a tendency to adapt over time, the written word is no exception.

Adapted and abridged from an article called “Opening a Can of Worms” in The Advanced Christian Writer , June 1998. Previous blog version posted September 21, 2009.

The venerable Merriam-Webster dictionary has declared the word “they” its 2019 word of the year. The singular they and its many supporters have won and it’s here to stay. Despite what many language skeptics think, the use of they as a gender-neutral singular pronoun is no mistake; it goes back to the 14 th century.

For decades, transgender rights advocates have noted that literary giants Emily Dickinson, William Shakespeare, William Wordsworth, and Geoffrey Chaucer all used singular they in their writing. In a letter dated Sept. 24, 1881, Dickinson wrote: “Almost anyone under the circumstances would have doubted if [the letter] were theirs, or indeed if they were themself — but to us it was clear.” In “Hamlet,” Shakespeare used “them” in reference to the word mother: “‘Tis meet that some more audience than a mother — Since nature makes them partial — should o’erhear the speech.”

Even the most strident grammarians give pause when faced with evidence that singular they has long been a tool of the trade. Activists have also emphasized that singular they is used all the time in speaking and writing when we don’t know or don’t want to specify the gender of the subject — as in recent commentary about the whistleblower in the Trump impeachment inquiry.

The current usage of the singular they, however, has expanded beyond the historical precedent. A few months before declaring they the word of the year, Merriam-Webster added a new definition to the word: “used to refer to a single person whose gender identity is nonbinary.” Some might view this change as happening too quickly, but it has been a long time coming.

For hundreds of years, pronouns were used to denigrate trans, nonbinary and gender-nonconforming people — especially in the press. When George Wilson, a Scottish immigrant worker, was hauled into the police station in New York’s Lower East Side in 1836 for being both drunk and trans, a reporter for the Journal of Commerce described them using female pronouns from start to finish, stating: “When she arrived there, she went to work in a factory, still retaining her boy’s dress,” despite the fact they lived and worked as a man and were legally married as a man to a woman.

For decades, the transgender community has fought back against this misgendering, using its own publications as a place to critique mainstream newspaper practices and model gender expansive and inclusive language. When Brandon Teena was brutally assaulted and murdered in Nebraska in 1993, headlines were sensational and transphobic. One from the Orlando Sentinel on Jan. 4, 1994, read: “She lived as a man but died a woman.”

In an effort to reclaim Brandon’s story for the community in a respectful way that honored Brandon’s life, Forrest Wolf, a writer for “Transgender Tapestry,” reprinted excerpts from news reports with the misgendering crossed out. Wolf explained: “[PLEASE NOTE that the strike through is a rhetorical device utilized to indicate that a particular word (in this case the pronouns she and her used in connection with Brandon) is deemed by the writer as inappropriate, contradictory or questionable and shows no meaningful or authentic correspondence to that which it refers.” In death, as in life, pronouns matter.

No single author or activist did more to challenge the binary gender in language and publishing than Leslie Feinberg. Feinberg insisted on using “s/he” and “hir” pronouns on the jacket of their 1996 book “Transgender Warriors.” Feinberg was breaking new ground and knew it, stating: “It’s the first time that I know of that any publisher has used that for an author.” Their reason was simple, as they stated: “Neither she or he can adequately address my experience, and the pronoun it has been used to dehumanize us as trans people.”

A decade later in 2006, trans author S. Bear Bergman chose “ze” and “hir” as the gender-neutral pronouns to anchor their book, “Butch is a Noun.” Bergman explains the decision this way: “By using gender-neutral pronouns in this book . I am trying to open up a space in the language for people who are not man- or woman-gendered.”

In researching and writing my forthcoming book on trans history, I quickly realized that I needed to use gender neutral pronouns in reference to everyone who transitioned in some way. I settled on “they/them/their” and told the editors this was nonnegotiable. Much to my surprise and in contrast to earlier experiences in publishing historical writing with the singular they, my manuscript sailed through the editing process. Merriam-Webster’s acclamation for they is an important standardization that further secures the idea in the cultural mainstream.

The dictionary matters because language matters. As history shows, language is a very powerful tool. It can dehumanize and erase. It can empower and render visible. It doesn’t take much to get it right. I’m sure Emily Dickinson would approve.

Jen Manion is an associate professor of history at Amherst College and author of the forthcoming “Female Husbands: a Trans History.”

A cure for the common opinion

Get thought-provoking perspectives with our weekly newsletter.

You may occasionally receive promotional content from the Los Angeles Times.

Every employee is expected to be at their desk by 9.00.

This is an example of what is often referred to as ‘singular they’.

The grammatical subject—every employee—is singular, as is the verb is expected, but the following pronoun, their, is plural. Hence the name. It happens when they, them, their, and themselves refer back to subjects that are grammatically singular:

It was every teen for themselves.

When does it happen?

This construction often occurs after words such as:

  • each
  • every
  • any
  • anyone/anybody
  • everyone/everybody
  • nobody/no one
  • someone/somebody
  • whoever

that are used to make indefinite or general statements, without specifying the individual concerned.

Each and every one of my colleagues at the university will express their own opinion.

I feel that if someone is not doing their job it should be called to their attention.

Everyone was absorbed in their own business.

Nobody wants to return to the car park and find that their car has been clamped.

Why do people use it?

At first glance, such mismatches appear to flout the normal rules of agreement, and that is why many people object to them. However, many of these words, for example everyone, can be thought of as plural in meaning, albeit grammatically singular, so semantically there is not really a mismatch.

Additionally, the practical reason that people often use this form of words is if you are referring to someone of an unknown gender, to use he, him, his, etc. is nowadays considered sexist. Using them, they, or their is a way to avoid making an assumption of gender as there is no gender explicit in these pronouns. Find out more about gender-neutral language. Second, people prefer not to use he or she, him or her, etc. because they are long-winded and can be distracting, especially if they have to be repeated several times in the same sentence or paragraph.

Is it grammatically correct?

Despite objections, there is a trend to use ‘singular they’. In fact, it is historically long established. It goes back at least to the 14 th century, and writers such as Shakespeare, Sidney, Byron, and Ruskin used it:

There’s not a man I meet but doth salute me

As if I were their well-acquainted friend (Shakespeare’s The Comedy of Errors)

You was a plural pronoun before it became acceptable to use it to refer to a singular person. You replaced thy/thee/thou as the singular pronoun during the 1600s. The form existed in speech before it was written down, and similarly, speakers using singular they have paved the way for approval.

According to “A brief history of singular ‘they'”, “The New Oxford Dictionary of English (1998) not only accepts singular they, they also use the form in their definitions. And the New Oxford American Dictionary (Third Edition, 2010), calls singular they ‘generally accepted’ with indefinites, and ‘now common but less widely accepted’ with definite nouns, especially in formal contexts.”

Back to Grammar tips.

You may also be interested in:

Blog Post | 108 KY. L. J. ONLINE | July 30, 2019

The Curious Case of Singular They

Sarah Laytham

Many lawyers consider precision a key aspect of legal writing; wording drastically changes the interpretation of a statute. A contract using the word “shall” rather than “may” could change the reading of said contract, impacting a client’s case. As such, classes throughout the legal curriculum impart the importance of exact words, conciseness, and proper drafting. One instance where this arises is in the use of pronouns and what pronouns are proper to use in legal writing.

Stylebooks are split over the proper usage of the “singular they” pronoun, which is used to reference an indeterminate singular person or entity. For example, the Associated Press Stylebook (AP) recommends limited use of the singular they/them/their pronoun.[1] It recommends singular they only be used in cases where alternative wording is clumsy or awkward—stressing the need to reword a sentence to avoid this usage, if possible.[2] AP style is used largely in newspapers, magazines, and public relations throughout the United States, and therefore is likely one of the styles most familiar to the average person.[3]

The styles used most frequently by the legal community are the Bluebook and Chicago styles, for citation and style guidelines, respectively.[4] Chicago style differentiates between two different usages of the singular they pronoun: used in reference to (1) a known person or (2) an unknown or unspecified person.[5] Chicago style directs writers to respect a person’s pronouns in the case of the first usage, and to use gender-neutral they/them pronouns if those are their preferred pronouns.[6] The second type, used to refer to a generic, unknown person, is accepted for speech and informal writing.[7] Furthermore, Chicago style does not prohibit usage of singular they/them pronouns in formal writing, but recommends avoiding it when possible.[8] Chicago Manual of Style § 5.48, which sets out the guidelines for the usage of the singular they, also suggests looking at § 5.255, which sets out a list of techniques for achieving gender neutrality in writing.[9] This list gives suggestions on how to write around the usage of the singular they in such a way as to keep the writing gender-neutral.[10]

This list is a good start for gender-neutral writing, but some of the suggestions are not feasible, or even go against the aims of good legal writing. The usage of “he or she” in a sentence is not clearer than the use of the term “they,” and if a writer is not careful, can end up creating a rather clunky, awkward sentence. If conciseness is a goal of legal writing, why use three words when one can do just as well? “He or she” does not impart any better understanding of who is being referred to than does “they.”

The Chicago Manual of Style further refers the reader to consider the issue of writer credibility and the usage of biased language.[11] Readers may read into the usage of certain pronouns in such a way as to impact the credibility of the writer.[12] But the truth is that the average person uses the singular they in informal speech as a default; in 2016, the journal American Speech published a study by Darren K. LaScotte that found that about 63% of the respondents consistently used “they” to refer back to an unidentified singular person.[13]

This is important because legal writing emphasizes the importance of clarity, precision, and conciseness, and the avoidance of the “singular they” does not further any of these goals. Rewriting sentences around the use of “they” can end in clunky rephrasing of what could have been stated much more simply. When speaking of an indeterminate third party, “they” is no less precise than “he or she” or the equivalent rewrites. Referring to “them,” rather than “he or she,” certainly increases the conciseness of a statement. But beyond all of this, there’s the issue of inclusivity. The legal profession continues to decry its lack of diversity and its failure to adequately reflect the populace.[14] And yet the profession continues to cling to traditional practices that exclude that same populace, indicating that their presence is not welcome in a legal profession where the use of the singular they is something to be talked around, avoided, rewritten, and excised. For society to change, people must change in order to facilitate it. The use of the “singular they” is one small step in the march of progress and inclusivity in the legal field.

[1]Lauren Easton, Making a Case for a Singular ‘They’, AP Blog(Mar. 24, 2017), https://blog.ap.org/products-and-services/making-a-case-for-a-singular-they.

[3]Associated Press Style, Purdue OWL, https://owl.purdue.edu/owl/subject_specific_writing/journalism_and_journalistic_writing/ap_style.html (last visited July 5, 2019).

[4]Style Guidelines, Am. Bar Ass’n(Apr. 11, 2013), https://www.americanbar.org/groups/construction_industry/about_us/rules_procedures/style_guidelines/.

[5]Chicago Manual, Chicago Style for the Singular They, Chi. Manual of Style(Apr. 3, 2017), https://cmosshoptalk.com/2017/04/03/chicago-style-for-the-singular-they/.

[9]Chicago Manual of Style, § 5.48, 5.255 (17th ed. 2017).

[10]The list consists of nine suggestions. These suggestions are (1) omit the pronoun; (2) repeat the noun; (3) use a plural antecedent; (4) use an article instead of a pronoun; (5) use the neutral singular pronoun one; (6) use the relative pronoun who; (7) use the imperative mood; (8) use “he or she;” or (9) revise the sentence. Id.at § 5.255.

[13]Darren K. LaScotte, Singular They: An Empirical Study of Generic Pronoun Use, 91 Am. Speech 62, 68 (2016).

[14]Allison E. Laffey & Allison Ng, Diversity and Inclusion in the Law: Challenges and Initiatives, Am. Bar Ass’n (May 8, 2018), https://www.americanbar.org/groups/litigation/committees/jiop/articles/2018/diversity-and-inclusion-in-the-law-challenges-and-initiatives/.

**This image is licensed in the public domain: by torbakhopper is licensed under CC BY-ND 2.0

How to use the singular they in writing and speaking

Anne Curzan is the Geneva Smitherman collegiate professor of English and linguistics at the University of Michigan, where she is also dean of the College of Literature, Science, and the Arts.

Some of the most open-minded, inclusive people I know struggle with the singular pronoun “they.” And while it’s hard to unlearn what we were taught was grammatically “wrong,” it’s worth doing. To start, let’s clear away all the non-arguments that clutter the “they” debate to get to the heart of the matter.

Critics often start from the premise that “they” cannot be singular because a pronoun cannot be singular and plural at the same time. That argument is historically, socially and linguistically wrong. A pronoun most certainly can be singular and plural at the same time, as demonstrated by English’s very own pronoun “you.” And, when we look at the record, we discover the pronoun “they” has been used as a singular generic pronoun, alongside its plural uses, for hundreds of years. Shakespeare and Austen both used singular “they” this way, just as many English speakers do now. “But to expose the former faults of any person,” noted Jane Bennet in “Pride and Prejudice,” “without knowing what their present feelings were, seemed unjustifiable.”

In other words, the use of “they” as a singular pronoun, when the gender of the person is unknown or irrelevant, is nothing new. It’s considered wrong only because 200-plus years of grammarians have told us it is wrong, without solidly justifying that judgment. And whatever ambiguity the singular generic “they” may cause, it is clearly something speakers and writers can manage, as I will explain.

What is relatively new is the use of singular “they” to refer to specific people who identify as nonbinary. This leads to a construction such as, “Alex is spending their senior year in Alaska.” I have heard critics describe this construction as unclear, ambiguous, silly, and/or unnecessary. None of these criticisms hold up well.

Let’s start with the issue of clarity. This argument has been pulled out triumphantly against all uses of singular “they” for years, and it isn’t convincing. First, in many instances, we employ singular “they” exactly because the gender of the antecedent noun (the person we are referring to) is unknown or irrelevant, as in: “A serious runner replaces their shoes every few months.” The ambiguity about the runner’s gender is intentional. And there is usually no ambiguity about number: In a sentence like “My neighbor washes their car every day,” it is unambiguous that I am talking about one person, and that person is my neighbor.

How to use the singular they in writing and speaking

Zombie rules are grammar rules that follow you around like the undead. They’re not really grammar rules, though. Some are stylistic choices, while others are made-up nonsense to make English work more like Latin. In this series, you’ll learn why the rules don’t work and what rule you can follow instead.

Zombie Rule: Don’t Use They for a Singular Person.

They and its related forms, their and them, have long been used to refer to one person of an unknown gender:

Each student should bring their book to class every day.

But like the other rules in this series, suddenly the usage, often referred as singular they, became popular. Defenders of the language cringed and cried, “This we will not accept! A writer should know his grammar better!”

Why do people have such a hard time with they being used in the singular? They don’t have a hard time with you being both singular and plural. They, their, and them have been used regularly for singular nouns as far back as 1523. And with the social pressure not to use he, his, and him for all singular nouns, male or female, singular they is gaining more usage and attention.

As with split infinitives, usage experts are slowly coming around to the idea that singular they is grammatical. Yet they will spill lots of ink to convince you not to use it. A writer should feel free to ignore them and use singular they if they desire and if it works in their sentence.

Get writing advice straight in your inbox.
Sign up for Right Touch Editing’s emails!

Zombie Rewrite

Use singular they:

  • With indefinite pronouns (anyone, everyone, someone)
  • When the person’s gender is unknown
  • When the person is gender-nonconforming and doesn’t state a preference
  • When someone states this is their preferred pronoun

Remember to use a plural verb with this plural pronoun. You can also choose to recast the sentence.

A version of this article originally published on August 12, 2013, on Visual Thesaurus.

How to use the singular they in writing and speaking

How to use the singular they in writing and speaking

We all learned during grammar classes in elementary school that “they,” “them,” and “their” can be used as singular pronouns when a person’s gender is unknown. For example, if someone finds a phone and doesn’t know who it belongs to, the person might say “I wonder if they realize their phone is missing yet. I will hold it in safekeeping for them until they come back.”

Some older generations learned that we should default to using “he” as the pronoun in that scenario, and you might run into one of those grammar sticklers in the comment section of social media posts vociferously proclaiming that using singular they is PC, as if they are an English teacher ready to break out a red grading pen.

That’s because in 1745, “A New Grammar” was published that called for “he” to be used as a universal singular pronoun. Interestingly, that book was written by Ann Fisher, a woman who stated that “The Masculine Person answers to the general Name…as, Any person who knows what he says.” Sadly, that sexist idea caught on. Soon after, people were using masculine pronouns to include all people.

In an attempt to ditch the sexist language that literally ignores half the population, we began seeing the enlightened use of “he or she” or the oddly punctuated “he/she” as an attempt to be more inclusive. Unfortunately, that is really clunky and repetitive. You might have learned it in school, but thankfully most people aren’t interested in using it in real life.

While the use of “he” to refer to anyone whose gender wasn’t known was in vogue for the last few centuries, the first known written text using singular they dates all the way back to 1375! “William and the Werewolf” is a Middle English poem published that year using they to refer to one person. It was also used by other writers of the time, including Geoffrey Chaucer and Shakespeare, so it was likely in common usage in every day speech.

Fast forward several centuries and we have finally landed in a space where transgender folks are visible and non-binary identities are finally being recognized. For the last decade, it has become common to hear people refer to themselves or nonbinary friends or family using “they.” And in 2019, Merriam-Webster made it the Word of the Year to encourage more people to get on board.

“But what about using “they” with verbs?” you might be asking. Use a plural verb form with the singular pronoun “they,” for example, write “they are” not “they is.” And even if you are speaking about a person who you know uses singular they as their pronoun, if you refer back to them by name or with another descriptor (“my friend who plays piano”), use a singular verb form with a singular noun. So it would be “My friend Jessica who plays piano is coming to visit. They are going to be a guest with a local musical group.”

Practicing using they as a singular pronoun is pretty easy. You are already using it in your everyday language without even giving it thought. So when you are introduced to someone who uses “they” as their pronoun, make a conscious effort to use it correctly and don’t worry about old grammar rules. They are worth the effort!

Published on May 22, 2019 by Shona McCombes. Revised on November 19, 2020.

Pronouns are words that stand in for nouns. They can refer to specific people and things (e.g. I, you, it, him, their, this) or to non-specific people and things (e.g. anybody, one, some, each).

In academic writing, first-person pronouns (I, we) may be used depending on your field. Second person pronouns (you, yours) should almost always be avoided. Third person pronouns (he, she, they) should be used in a way that avoids gender bias.

Table of contents

  1. Pronoun antecedents
  2. First-person pronouns (I, we)
  3. Second-person pronouns (you)
  4. Third-person pronouns (he, she, they)
  5. Pronoun consistency
  6. Demonstrative pronouns (this, that, these, those)

Pronoun antecedents

The antecedent of a pronoun is the noun that it refers back to. The antecedent is usually mentioned in the text before the pronoun, but sometimes it comes just after it in a sentence.

  • Annie was late to class again because she missed her bus.
  • As they debated the point, the students became increasingly animated.

When you use any type of pronoun, it’s important to ensure that the antecedent is clear and unambiguous. If there is any ambiguity, use the noun instead.

  • After the interview and the written test were complete, it was checked for incomplete answers.

Here it is unclear whether it refers to the interview, the test, or both.

  • After the interview and the written test were complete, the test was checked for incomplete answers.

First-person pronouns (I, we)

Personal pronouns that refer to the author or authors – I, we, my, etc. – are a topic of debate in academic writing. In some scientific disciplines, the first person has traditionally been avoided to maintain an objective, impersonal tone and keep the focus on the material rather than the author.

However, first-person pronouns are increasingly standard in many types of academic writing (though they are still more prevalent in some fields than others). Some style guides, such as APA, require the use of first person pronouns when referring to your own actions and opinions.

If in doubt about whether you should use the first person, check with your teacher or supervisor.

Using first-person pronouns in academic writing

Don’t overuse first-person pronouns in academic texts – make sure only to use them when it’s appropriate to do so, as in the following situations.

Note that the plural we/our should only be used if you are writing with coauthors. If you are writing the paper alone, use the singular I/my.

How to avoid first-person pronouns

If you have been told not to use first-person pronouns, there are three approaches you can take.

First-person sentence Revision Revised sentence
We interviewed 12 participants. Use the third person The researchers interviewed 12 participants.
I argue that the theory needs to be refined further. Use a different subject This paper argues that the theory needs to be refined further.
I checked the dataset for missing data and outliers. Use the passive voice The dataset was checked for missing data and outliers.

Each of these approaches has different advantages and disadvantages. For example, the passive voice can sometimes result in dangling modifiers that make your text less clear. Therefore, if you are allowed to use first-person pronouns, retaining them is the best choice.

There are some types of academic writing where first-person pronouns are always acceptable – for example, in application documents such as a personal statement or statement of purpose.

Avoid the editorial we

Don’t use the first person plural to refer to people in general. This is sometimes called the “editorial we,” as it is commonly used in newspaper editorials to speak on behalf of the publication, or to express a widely shared opinion or experience.

However, in academic writing, it’s important to be precise about who you are referring to and to avoid broad generalizations. If possible, specify exactly which group of people you are talking about.

  • When we are given more freedom, we can work more effectively.
  • When employees are given more freedom, they can work more effectively.
  • As we age, we tend to become less concerned with others’ opinions of us .
  • As people age, they tend to become less concerned with others’ opinions of them .

Using we in this way is acceptable if you want to emphasize the shared experiences of a particular group to which you belong. Just make sure it is clear exactly who you are referring to.

  • It is important to be aware of our own biases.
  • It is important for educators to be aware of our own biases.

What is your plagiarism score?

Compare your paper with over 60 billion web pages and 30 million publications.

  • Best plagiarism checker of 2021
  • Plagiarism report & percentage
  • Largest plagiarism database

Senior reporter, law & politics, DC.

People of a certain age learned funny rules about writing in English. Like don’t use like. And never start a sentence with because, and, or but. Because grammar.

But linguists insist English doesn’t need us to be stiff on the language’s behalf. It’s flexible and can accommodate a transforming society and new technologies, according to University of Michigan English professor Anne Curzan, an expert on gender and language.

Speaking at the annual American Copy Editors Society (ACES) conference in March, Curzan reassured word nerds. “People have been worried this language will fall apart for a long time. It’s not going to fall apart.”

Language changes. Resisting, or insisting that traditional rules still apply, is futile and foolish. Even many of the English-language standard bearers agree: for example, in May, the Associated Press will update its style guide. One of the major changes that signals a shift in societal thinking is that ”they” is now officially singular (as well as plural) and an appropriate gender neutral choice.

Mignon Fogarty—who covers English as the “Grammar Girl” on the guidance site Quick and Dirty Tips—explains what this means, practically speaking, for your writing:

  • The AP Stylebook now allows writers to use they as a singular pronoun when rewriting the sentence as plural would be overly awkward or clumsy. Example: The Obama administration told public schools to grant bathroom access even if a student’s gender identity isn’t what’s in their record.
  • The style also allows writers to pair they with everyone in similar situations.
  • In stories about people who identify as neither male nor female or ask not to be referred to as he/she/him/her: Use the person’s name in place of a pronoun, or otherwise reword the sentence, whenever possible. If they/them/their use is essential, explain in the text that the person prefers a gender-neutral pronoun. Be sure that the phrasing does not imply more than one person.
  • his, her. AP style used to be to use he when gender is not known. This entry now refers to the entry on they, them, their.

To those of us born into a world where man was the standard and woman stood in his shadow, linguistically, and in life, that last change is notable indeed. He is no longer the go-to when gender is unknown, nor an appropriate gender neutral. The seemingly tiny linguistic shift is socially seismic. By transforming our writing, we also change our minds and rewire thought— and who can say what influence this linguistic fluidity will have on the thinking of future children?

But the singular use of “they” also hearkens back to the past, according to Curzan. The English professor says the new usage is actually classic, dating back to the 1300s, and has been used by great English writers over the centuries to reflect the singular indistinct gender in literature.

Fogarty says ACES is where all the big linguistic news breaks. “It’s where we first heard in 2011 that the Associated Press would no longer use a hyphen in email and in 2016 that the Associate Press would lowercase internet…and now today, the AP is leading the charge again.”

And everyone needs to get with the program, or at least learn linguistic flexibility. Attachment to formulations of the past reveal not only our obsolescence but a failure to understand language. John McIntyre at The Baltimore Sun, who writes about writing, points out that what’s right depends on context. He notes, ”The range of standard English is a continuum, and working effectively in it requires judgments rather than the mechanical application of rules, some of them bogus.”

  • Download citation
  • https://doi.org/10.1080/15290824.2018.1419037
  • CrossMark

Editorial

  • Full Article
  • Figures & data
  • References
  • Citations
  • Metrics
  • Reprints & Permissions
  • PDF

Growing up in the 1950s and 60s, I was subject to constant correction of my grammar when speaking at home, the legacy of a school-teacher grandmother and a well-read father. One of these corrections focused upon whether to use singular or plural pronouns in a sentence such as “Everyone drank a glass of milk with his dinner.” (In those days, “his” was the accepted standard for both genders.) This was in contrast to the grammatically forbidden “Everyone drank a glass of milk with their dinner.” The latter sentence was–and often still is–considered incorrect because “everyone” is singular and “their” is plural, thus a mismatch within one sentence.

In the 1970s during the women’s movement, usage progressed to the more inclusive “Everyone has his or her favorite style of dance” (or his/her), but the rule remained the same: “everyone” is singular. This gets awkward with longer sentences such as “Everyone knows that the best way to take care of a leg injury is to rest his or her leg so that he or she can recuperate quickly.” (Some people combine he and she into “s/he.”) It is grammatically correct, but inelegant.

Then in the 2000s, a new concern arose about how to address persons who did not consider themselves either male or female. Whether gender-fluid, transgender, gender-queer, androgynous, or intersex, some people did not feel comfortable identifying as male or female. People outside the gender binary began to elect alternative pronouns, and most commonly that pronoun was “they,” as in “They went outside to get the mail,” when speaking about a single person. Since this was a re-purposing of a word previously used only to indicate two or more people, it became confusing.

In addition to the confusion of using the singular “their” as a gender alternative was the problem of common usage, as in “Everyone loves their dance teacher.” This is ubiquitous in conversation, even among those who would never commit such a grammatical “faux-pas” on paper. However, perhaps in 2018 it is appropriate to ask if using “their” to indicate the singular should still be considered incorrect, since it is so commonly used, and language does evolve and change.

The latest version of the Chicago Manual of Style (CMS) ( 2017 ) allows for a few different uses of “they” to indicate the singular. First, “they” may be used as a substitute for the generic he when referring to someone whose gender is unknown. (Ex. Does anyone want their coffee cup refilled?) CMS accepts this usage for speech and informal writing. While they do not prohibit it in formal writing, CMS suggest avoiding it by using alternative wording that does not rely on the generic use of “he,” such as making the sentence plural (Chicago Manual of Style, 5.255–256). However, The University of Chicago Press has recently published books that use “they” in place of the generic “he,” citing the reasons of context and author preference (Chicago Manual of Style Shop Talk 2017 , p1/4).

Finally, there are the situations where “they” refers to a single person who does not want to be called either “she” or “he.” CMS 2017 advises that “‘a person’s stated preference for a specific pronoun should be respected.’ This usage is still not widespread either in speech or in writing, but Chicago accepts it even in formal writing” (Chicago Manual of Style Shop Talk 2017 ). Although it refers to a singular person, “they” takes a plural verb, as in “They prefer Gene Kelly to Fred Astaire.”

As of issue 18(3), Journal of Dance Education is switching to the latest Chicago Author-Date style for writing references from a modified version as an additional platform to acknowledge the gender identity of authors, since authors’ first names will be included in the references. This decision in conjunction with the flexible approach to use of “they” and “their” will be reflected in forthcoming issues.

We will continue to follow the CMS recommendation that in formal writing, such as JODE articles, use of the singular “they” is best avoided, with the exception of referring to a non-binary person. Authors who find it restrictive or incorrect to use the pronouns “he” or “she” when referring to an individual who does not identify as specifically either male or female may use “their” as a substitute. In addition, should an author have a different specific reason for use the singular “they” in a journal article, please consult the editor.

Since the use of the singular “they” is not yet common in scholarly journals, we ask that authors include an endnote to guide readers in understanding that the singular use of “they” is not a mistake. JODE editors hope that offering these new options to authors will make our journal more inclusive and welcoming.

Gender neutrality in language minimizes assumptions about the gender or sex of people referred to in writing or speech.

Learning Objectives

Give examples of gender-neutral language

Key Takeaways

Key Points

  • Gender neutrality in English aims to minimize assumptions about the gender or biological sex of people referred to in speech.
  • Proponents of gender- neutral language argue that the use of gender-specific language often implies male superiority or reflects an unequal state of society.
  • Proponents of gender-neutral language claim that linguistic clarity, as well as equality, would be better served by having “man” refer unambiguously to males, and “human” to all persons.
  • Proposed alternatives to the generic “he” include “he or she,” “s/he,” or the use of “they” in the singular.
  • In some cases, when writing or speaking about a person whose gender is unknown, ambiguous, or unimportant, gender-neutral language may be achieved by using gender-inclusive, gender-neutral, or epicene words in place of gender-specific ones.
  • Gender-neutral language may also be achieved by parallel usage of existing gender-specific terms.

Key Terms

  • epicene: Refers to the loss of gender distinction, often specifically the loss of masculinity.
  • gender-neutral language: Used to eliminate (or neutralize) references to gender when describing people.
  • singular they: A pronoun that is gender neutral and refers to a single person when paired appropriately with a gender-neutral antecedent.

Gender-neutral language is neither masculine nor feminine and avoids using gender specific pronouns such as “he” or “she.” The purpose of gender neutrality in writing is to minimize assumptions about the gender or sex of people.

The Importance of Gender-Neutral Language

Proponents of gender-neutral language argue that gender-specific language (such as policeman or waitress) often implies male superiority or reflects an unequal state of society. According to The Handbook of English Linguistics, generic masculine pronouns (such as he) and gender-specific language serve as examples of how, historically, society has treated men as the standard for all humans. Words referring to women often devolve in meaning, and frequently take on sexual overtones. In essence, the use of masculine pronouns when referring to subjects of mixed or indeterminate gender is frowned upon in academic writing. The following sentence is a good illustration of avoiding sexist language by using the gender neutral ” humanity ” and “human” rather than the gender-specific “mankind”: “Since then, humanity has entered a new phase of spiritual development, an evolution of high faculties, the very existence of which in human nature our ancestors scarcely suspected.” Using gender-neutral pronouns avoids presumptions of male superiority.

Guidelines for Gender-Neutral Language

In most cases of writing or speaking about a person whose gender is unknown, ambiguous, or irrelevant, gender-neutral language may be achieved through the use of gender-inclusive, gender-neutral, or epicene words (having characteristics of both sexes) in place of gender-specific ones. If no gender-inclusive terms exist, new ones may be coined. It is also important to consider parallel usage of existing gender-specific terms.

When possible and contextually appropriate, use nouns and pronouns that are gender-neutral rather than gender-specific.

  • Instead of: waitress; businessman; workman; mailman
  • Use: server; businessperson; worker; mail carrier
  • Instead of: mankind; man-made; man hours; man-sized job
  • Use: humankind; synthetic; working hours; large job

When referring to people in general, use plural pronouns “s/he” or “he or she” instead of gender-linked pronouns.

  • Instead of: She looks for premium products and appreciates a stylish design.
  • Use: They look for premium products and appreciate a stylish design.
  • Instead of: Before a new business-owner files tax returns, he should seek advice from a certified public accountant.
  • Use: Before a new business-owner files tax returns, she or he should seek advice from a certified public accountant.

When a singular pronoun is needed, use the “singular they” with a singular antecedent. In these examples, the antecedents are “the patient” and “someone.”

  • Instead of: The patient should be informed of how much he will need to pay prior to the procedure.
  • Use: The patient should be informed of how much they will need to pay prior to the procedure.
  • Instead of: Someone left his lunch in the break-room microwave.
  • Use: Someone left their lunch in the break-room microwave.

When in doubt, use gender-neutral salutations.

  • Instead of: Dear Sir; Dear Gentlemen
  • Use: Dear Personnel Department; Dear Switzer Plastics Corporation; Dear Director of Research

Additionally, many editing houses, corporations, and government bodies have official policies favoring in-house use of gender-neutral language. In some cases, laws exist to enforce the use of gender-neutral language in certain situations, such as job advertisements. Different authorities have presented guidelines on when and how to use gender-neutral, or “non-sexist” language. Several are listed below:

  • The Publication Manual of the American Psychological Association has an oft-cited section on “Guidelines to Reduce Bias in Language.”
  • American Philosophical Association—published in 1986
  • The Guardian—see section called “gender issues”
  • “Avoiding Heterosexual Bias in Language,” published by the Committee on Lesbian and Gay Concerns, American Psychological Association.

Active Voice vs. Passive Voice

In grammar, “voice” refers to the relationship between the subject and the verb—that is to say, how the action is performed.

By Merrill Perlman

They is here.

Two major style manuals are now allowing the singular use of “they” in certain circumstances. While this is a victory for common sense, the paths taken are unusual in the evolution of usage.

Both manuals, the Associated Press Stylebook and the Chicago Manual of Style, emphasize that “they” cannot be used with abandon. Even so, it’s the middle of the end for the insistence that “they” can be only a plural pronoun.

To recap: In English, there is no gender-neutral pronoun for a single person. In French, for example, the pronoun on can stand in for “he” or “she.” English has no such equivalent; “it” is our singular pronoun, so devoid of gender that calling a person “it” is often considered insulting. We could use “one,” but that is a very impersonal pronoun.

The need for a singular personal pronoun occurs largely in two situations. The most common is when speaking generically: “Every time someone gets too close to that cliff, _____ dies.” Because you don’t know whether the next person will be male or female, you can’t insert the correct pronoun. In spoken language, we commonly resort to “they” in that situation (changing the verb to “die” in the process). Similarly, when using a singular noun that refers to a group of people, we have no inclusive pronoun: “Everyone needs to be sure to tighten ______ safety belt before approaching the cliff.”

For hundreds of years, anyone writing formally would default to “he.” Advances in women’s rights led to the clumsy “he or she.” Many writers alternate “he” or “she.” This twisting and turning is because what’s known as “the epicene they” has been considered incorrect.

Yet nearly everyone uses it in speech, as in “everyone knows they should use singular pronouns with singular nouns.” It’s been so used for hundreds of years.

But that’s not the “they” the style guides have let loose. Simply, the singular “they” will be allowed if someone does not identify as “he” or “she.”

We’ve written about this topic several times, most recently last year , noting that The Washington Post was allowing the singular they for someone who did not want to be “he” or “she,” and that The American Heritage Dictionary was including “they” as a singular in both the generic and identification uses.

The ramparts have been falling quickly. The big breach came at the annual conference of ACES: The Society for Editing (more formally the American Copy Editors Society), where both AP and Chicago announced their changes.

The AP Stylebook , used by many news organizations, includes its changes on “they” as part of what Paula Froke, lead editor of the stylebook, called an umbrella approach to gender issues in the new edition. (Though the 2017 printed edition will not be out for a couple of months, the changes are effective immediately and available in the online stylebook.)

“We offer new advice for two reasons,” Froke told the ACES conference . “Recognition that the spoken language uses they as singular and that we also recognize the need for a pronoun for people who don’t identify as a he or a she.”

That last is the driving reason for the change, and the stylebook entries reflect as much.

In stories about people who identify as neither male nor female or ask not to be referred to as he/she/him/her : Use the person’s name in place of a pronoun, or otherwise reword the sentence, whenever possible. If they/them/their use is essential, explain in the text that the person prefers a gender-neutral pronoun.

On “they” as a generic pronoun, the stylebook is a little less open:

They/them/their is acceptable in limited cases as a singular and/or gender-neutral pronoun, when alternative wording is overly awkward or clumsy. However, rewording usually is possible and always is preferable. Clarity is a top priority; gender-neutral use of a singular they is unfamiliar to many readers. We do not use other gender-neutral pronouns such as xe or ze .

Usage example: A singular they might be used when an anonymous source’s gender must be shielded and other wording is overly awkward: The person feared for their own safety and spoke on condition of anonymity .

Arguments for using they/them as a singular sometimes arise with an indefinite pronoun ( anyone, everyone, someone ) or unspecified/unknown gender ( a person, the victim, the winner ). Examples of rewording:

All the class members raised their hands (instead of everyone raised their hands ).

Chicago, used by many books, magazines, and academic publishers, has always been more formal than newsroom style, and that’s reflected in its entries on “they,” appearing in the 17 th edition this fall. As Carol Saller, editor of Chicago ’s Q & A , said , some changes are “hard to describe and not easy to put in little bullet points.”

Demonstrating Chicago ‘s permissible uses of “they,” Saller used the sentence “Carly cleared their voice and spoke.” In that instance, Carly does not identify as male or female, so neither “his” nor “her” is appropriate there. Chicago will also allow “themself” in a similar situation, with the entry reading: “ Themself (like yourself ) may be used to signal the singular antecedent (though some people will prefer themselves ).”

About “they” as a pronoun of preference, Saller told the ACES audience: “This form of the singular they is not very controversial although it is still not found frequently in either formal or informal writing.”

But on “they” as a generic, Chicago, too, holds the line:

They and their have become common in informal usage, but neither is considered fully acceptable in formal writing, though they are steadily gaining ground. For now, unless you are given guidelines of the contrary, be wary of using these forms in a singular sense.”

In other words, for both AP and Chicago, the “they” that is more acceptable is the one found less often in spoken and written usage.

That’s a twist. Style guides, like dictionaries, follow the language, not lead it, and they often accept usage years after it has become embraced by users, if not by language sticklers. (As an example, see the outcry over AP ’s acceptance of the equivalence of “over” and “more than,” a distinction imposed with no explanation by William Cullen Bryant.)

The “acceptable” uses of “they” are being encouraged more by issues of gender identity than by common usage, but the impact is the same. Though some might claim the style guides are caving in to political correctness or barbarism, in fact, these changes are too long in coming.

And it’s now only a matter of time before the generic singular “they” can come out into the light as well.

Merrill Perlman managed copy desks across the newsroom at the New York Times, where she worked for twenty-five years. Follow her on Twitter at @meperl.

by Klazien Tilstra

Klazien Tilstra, a BA student at the English Department of the University of Leiden, just finished her BA thesis. The title is “Attitudes to the Usage of Singular They, 40 years on. A Survey among Editors”, and here follows a summary, written by herself.

How to use the singular they in writing and speaking The point of departure for my thesis was the book Attitudes to English Usage, published in 1970 and written by W.H.Mittins, Mary Salu, Mary Edminson and Sheila Coyne. The context of the book is the “battleground” of prescriptive versus descriptive approaches to language use, the first focusing on “correctness” as laid down in “rules”, and the second concentrating on actual usage. Mittins et al. asked about 500 people to judge as acceptable or not acceptable the use of 55 debatable sentences, among which was the use of singular they (the use of they to refer to a singular sex-indefinite referent, as in Everyone has their off-days. About 80% of their target audience consisted of people with an educational background, of whom Mittins et al. expected to choose a middle position between a prescriptive and a descriptive approach. Their inquiry revealed that 72% of the respondents accepted the use of singular they in informal speech, while only 19% accepted the use of singular they in formal writing.

The central question of my thesis was whether the acceptability of the use of singular they in formal writing had increased since the 1970’s. In order to find an answer I conducted an on-line survey among members of SENSE, a network organization of native-speaking English editing professionals. I assumed that they would show similar attitudes to language use as the educators in the inquiry of Mittins et al., and that this would make the results of my survey to a certain extent comparable to their inquiry. I asked the editors’ judgments about four sentences, each with three variants to refer to a sex-indefinite antecedent: one using the pronoun they, one using he, and one using he or she, assuming that a comparison would enrich the view on the present attitude to the use of singular they.

The survey had a response of 41 editors: I am very grateful for them to contribute to the survey! And although the results should be treated with caution – a non-random sample of 41 editors of a group of about 400 is not per se representative for the group as a whole – the results confirm the observation of Huddleston and Pullum (The Cambridge Grammar of the English Language 2002) that the acceptance of singular they has increased. Mittins et al. showed an average acceptance rate of 19% in formal writing, while my survey shows an average acceptance rate of 63%. The results also indicate that the use of singular they, on average, met with more approval than disapproval, and preferred to the use of the alternatives he and he or she.

As might be expected at a time in which sexist language is not socially accepted anymore, the results also show that the attitudes to the use of sex-indefinite he are rather negative: more than 80% of the respondents rejected the form. Surprisingly, the attitudes to the use of he or she are also rather negative: more than 75% of the respondents rejected the use of he or she to refer to a sex-indefinite referent, calling the phrase “clumsy”, “fussy” or “clunky”. As a non-sexist alternative to the use of sex-indefinite he, it is not clear to me why the acceptance of the use of he or she is so low.

Many respondents used the space offered in the survey to comment, and suggested rewriting the sentences. Rewriting a sentence with a debatable pronoun to refer to a sex-indefinite referent is what Huddleston and Pullum (2002) call an avoidance strategy. The suggestions may indicate that the issue of singular they to refer to a singular sex-indefinite referent still produces tension, and that avoidance is seen as an attractive option. It may be that many respondents would agree with Kolln and Gray (Rhetorical Grammar: Grammatical Choices, Rhetorical Effects 2010), who, taking a rhetorical point of view, give the advice to keep the target audience in mind and, to reach the intended effect, avoid problems.

Although Mittins et al. hadn’t done so, I also looked at the relationship between the attitudes to the use of singular they and the sociolinguistic variables gender and age. I expected that women and younger people would show a more tolerant attitude to the use of singular they. Unfortunately, my sample was too small to make statistically relevant correlations. I also looked at the relationship between the attitudes to singular they and the linguistic, i.e. British or American English, background of the respondents. Mittins et al. (1970: 102) suggest that writers from England are more inclined to take a prescriptive approach than writers from the US. I found a statistically relevant correlation for this which suggested that Mittins et al. were right.

The survey gave me the opportunity, as Bodine called it in her article “ Androcentrism in Prescriptive Grammar: Singular ‘They’, Sex-Indefinite ‘He’, and ‘He or She’” (1975), to study language change in progress. In the 1970’s, Bodine pointed at the relevance of the issue of singular they by stressing that personal reference is one of the most socially significant aspects of language, and predicted a change in the attitudes to the use of singular they as a consequence of feminists’ protests against the use of sex-indefinite he. The results of my survey indicate that her prediction has come true.

Bodine, Ann (1975). Androcentrism in Prescriptive Grammar: Singular ‘They’, Sex-Indefinite ‘He’, and ‘He or She’. Language in Society, Vol 4. No.2 (Aug., 1975), 129-146.

Huddleston, R. , Pullum, G.K. (2002). The Cambridge Grammar of the English Language. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.

Kolln, Martha and Gray, Loretta (2010). Rhetorical Grammar: Grammatical Choices, Rhetorical Effects, Boston: Pearson Education, Inc. [6 th ed.].

Mittins, W., Salu, M., Edminson, M. and Coyne, S. (1970). Attitiudes to English Language. London: Oxford University Press.

How to find the blue ring in the legend of zelda

The Legend of Zelda

The Legend of Zelda (NES)

Where can I find The Blue ring in Legend of zelda?

Accepted Answer

I would assume you’re talking about the first quest. If so, from where you start the game, go up one screen, left 3 screens, and up 3 screens. When you get there, you’ll need to touch the middle statue in the higher row. This will reveal a staircase that will take you to the shop where you can buy the blue ring for a whopping 250 rupees.

As for the second quest, from where you start the game, go right 4 screens, up two screens, right two screens, up 4 screens, and right two screens. This will bring you to an area with a bunch of peahats (those floating things that are only vulnerable when they stop) and some green trees, one of which you can enter to play the money making game. You will actually have to walk through the wall to the north (not certain of which point, but it’s near the open tree.) and you will find a cave you can enter that contains the blue ring shop. This same cave contains a 100 rupee bonus in the first quest, so you should come here in the first quest, as well.

Anyway, I hope you find this info helpful and good luck with the rest of your game!

Other Answers

Link463’s answer is perfect.

Be advised that the Blue Ring reduces enemy damage by one half. So it is an excellent defensive item that is yours to keep. If you don’t have enough rupees (250), try looking for money hidden under bushes and inside caves all over the world map. It is strongly recommended that you have the Blue Ring before attempting Level 5, although if you get it earlier, it can only help you.

More Questions from This Game

Game Detail

  • Platform:NES
  • Genre:Action Adventure » Open-World
  • Developer/Publisher:Nintendo
  • Release:August 22, 1987
  • Also Known As:Zelda no Densetsu 1 (JP), Zelda no Densetsu 1: The Hyrule Fantasy (JP), A Lenda de Zelda (SA)
  • Franchise:Legend of Zelda

Game Trivia

AIM AT THE EYES OF GOHMA

Sign Up or Log In

To use this feature, you need to be logged in to GameFAQs. Please log in or register to continue.

09 (Oracle of Ages)

Item Shop (The Legend of Zelda)
Underneath a Sarcophagus Statue in the Sea of No Return, just southeast of the entrance to the Ancient Tomb. (Oracle of Ages)

250 Rupees (The Legend of Zelda)

Reduces the damage inflicted by an enemy by half [1] [2]

The Blue Ring is a Magical Ring that Link can acquire in The Legend of Zelda and Oracle of Ages, which reduces the damage he takes by half.

Contents

  • 1 The Legend of Zelda
  • 2 Oracle Games
    • 2.1 Oracle of Ages
    • 2.2 Oracle of Seasons
  • 3 Non-Canon Appearances
    • 3.1 BS The Legend of Zelda
  • 4 References

The Legend of Zelda

The Blue Ring can be bought from a travelling Merchant in one of his secret Item Shops. It costs 250 Rupees, making it the most expensive item in the game. When purchased by Link, this item changes his outfit from green to a light blue color. This altered tunic cuts all damage dealt to Link by enemies in half. [1] This item can be purchased as soon as Link has collected 250 Rupees; no completion of any dungeon is necessary. Furthermore, it is a completely optional item.

Once acquired, Link cannot revert to his green outfit during the playthrough.

Oracle Games

Oracle of Ages

While progressing through the Ancient Tomb, Link acquires the dungeon item, the Power Glove. This item allows Link to lift large objects, including the blue Sarcophagus Statues that are found just outside the Ancient Tomb within the Sea of No Return.

At the east end of the Sea of No Return, there is a Sarcophagus Statue that is surrounded by several Blue Darknuts and Blue Lynels. Lift up this statue to reveal a Treasure Chest. Open it up to get a Seed Ring, which turns out to be the Blue Ring.

When equipped, the Blue Ring doubles the damage Link is willing to withstand. Unlike the Armor Ring L-2, which also doubles Link’s ability to withstand damage, the Blue Ring has no effect on the damage that Link does when he attacks enemies.

A similar ring affecting Link’s Strength can be acquired in the form of the Red Ring. There is another color-based ring that combines the effects of the Blue and Red Ring in the form of the Green Ring.

Oracle of Seasons

There is no way to acquire the ring in Oracle of Seasons alone, but it can be acquired by using the Ring Secret in a Linked Game. It functions in exactly the same way as Oracle of Ages if equipped.

Non-Canon Appearances

This section describes a subject that is or may be outside the core Zelda canon.

BS The Legend of Zelda

The Blue Ring is found in an Item Shop west of the dock to Level 4, and first becomes available after the hero has bought a Blue Candle at the beginning of Week 2. As standard it costs 250 rupees, but the Starting Screen cave Old Man casts a spell on merchants to temporarily reduce the price of all shop items, including the Blue Ring, to half price between 20 and 28 minutes into Week 2.

As in other games, it reduces damage taken by 50% compared to default.

You can jump right into Dungeon One if you like, but you can also grab an extra heart, stock pile some rupees, grab some handy gear, and learn enemy layout before you start. Its up to you.

Blue Ring

The blue ring costs 250 rupees, and is hidden in the upper right corner of map. To get there from the start of the game, travel:

Right 4 screens

Right 2 screens

Right 2 Screens.

There is a secret entrance to the shop on the upper tree line in the middle. Just push through along the middle of the tree line to find it, but don’t bother coming here without the 250 rupees!

Rupees

100 Rupees! There are two ponds side by side in the game, this screen is found south of the East pond (fairy location from Quest 1). You will need the Candle to burn the lower left green bush.

How to find the blue ring in the legend of zelda

30 rupees! Find the below screen from the starting screen by going right one screen, and up two. You will need a candle to burn the bush.

How to find the blue ring in the legend of zelda

30 rupees! Find the entrance one screen east of the northern most graveyard and west of the northwest warp point. It was the dungeon entrance in the first quest.

How to find the blue ring in the legend of zelda

30 rupees! From the first dungeon entrance, go one screen right (accross the bridge) and one screen down. You will need the candle.

How to find the blue ring in the legend of zelda

30 rupees! From the first dungeon entrance, go one screen right (accross the bridge) and one screen up. You will need the candle.

How to find the blue ring in the legend of zelda

30 rupees! From the northern desert, travel right two screens. You will need a bomb.

How to find the blue ring in the legend of zelda

30 rupees! From the northern desert, travel right two screens, and down one. You can also just go down one screen from the coins found above 😉

How to find the blue ring in the legend of zelda

10 rupees! There are several 10 coin locations scatered about, but whats the point in listing them all here. you can grab 10 coins by killing a few badies easy enough.

Not a bad idea to grab a key before you tackle the second/third dungeons. If you have the extra rupees (100).

You will need to have food for the 3rd dungeon, so not a bad idea to have it ready.

Power Braclet

Handy for pushing heavy bolders, and fast traveling around the map. It can be found in the same place as the First quest under the Armos Knight.

Letter

You need the letter to start buying potions, and gaining the ability to heal yourself without hearts or faries. Grab the letter in the second quest by pushing one of the rocks in the north/west most grove of dead trees. It is north of the grave yard, but if you start from the eastern graveyard exit you will work your way east a couple screens, then north, then east, then north, then west a couple screens, north one, and west a couple more. Then head south one screen. You will need the power braclet to move the bolder.

Hearts

There is only one heart you can grab before doing a couple dungeons, since the other non-dungeon hearts require a raft or flute. The one heart you can snag early is near the begining. From the starting screen go right 4 screens. Bomb the top wall 2 blocks in from the top right.

Table of Contents

What does the blue ring do on Zelda?

How to find the blue ring in the legend of zelda

The blue ring reduces the damage inflicted by the enemy by half, and the red ring reduces damage to one quarter. In The Legend of Zelda, Link can equip the Blue Ring to take half the amount of damage he would normally.

How do you get the blue ring in Zelda?

The Legend of Zelda The Blue Ring can be bought for 250 Rupees in a shop hidden underneath an Armos; in the First Quest, the shop is located in the southern parts of Hyrule, and in northeastern Hyrule in the Second Quest. When Link wears the Blue Ring, his previously green clothing turns a light blue.

How much is the blue ring in Legend of Zelda?

The Legend of Zelda The Blue Ring can be bought from a travelling Merchant in one of his secret Item Shops. It costs 250 Rupees, making it the most expensive item in the game.

How do you get the power ring in Legend of Zelda?

The Power Ring L-1 can be found in the Explorer’s Crypt in Oracle of Seasons and the Spirit’s Grave in Oracle of Ages. The Magic Ring can be appraised at Vasu Jewelers for 20 Rupees. When worn, it increases Sword damage while also increasing damage taken by Link.

What does the red ring do in Zelda?

The Red Ring has one use: it cuts down damage dealt to Link by enemies to a quarter compared to his original tolerance. This is shown through a change in Link’s tunic. The Red Ring changes his tunic to a brownish-reddish color, compared to the iconic green.

Where do I get the blue flame in breath of the wild?

How to get the blue flame to Hateno Ancient Tech Lab. Grab the torch by the front door and glide off the cliff to the waypoint on the map, which takes you just north of the village. At the blue flame furnace there, light your torch.

What’s red ring of death on Xbox?

Three red lights on the Xbox 360’s ring indicator representing a “General Error requiring service of the Console or Power Adapter,” commonly nicknamed the “Red Ring of Death.” The three red lights on the Ring of Light indicate that a General Hardware Failure error occurred.

What does the Red Ring in Zelda do?

The Red Ring has one use: it cuts down damage dealt to Link by enemies to a quarter compared to his original tolerance. This is shown through a change in Link’s tunic. In the Second Quest, the Red Ring is still found in the final dungeon of the game.

How do you get the blue flame back?

To carry the blue flame you must equip any wooden tool or weapon and use it as a torch. Once your torch is light, light the lantern throughout town all the way back to the professors lab which wil conclude Locked Mementos.

How do you get blue flame without a torch?

You don’t have to use torches – any wooden weapon will work. For example, a Bokoblin club. The sturdier the weapon, the longer it will last.

How do you get the blue ring in Legend of Zelda?

The Legend of Zelda In The Legend of Zelda, Link can equip the Blue Ring to take half the amount of damage he would normally. In the First Quest, it can be purchased for 250 Rupees in a Shop within a Cave accessed through a staircase hidden beneath an Armos.

Where can I find the blue ring in the second quest?

In the Second Quest, it is sold for 250 Rupees in a different location in the northeastern portion of Hyrule. While Link has the Blue Ring equipped, his tunic is white.

How do you get the blue ring in Dark Souls 2?

Appraise the ring. Go to Vasu the Jeweler’s shop found in Horon Village, right at the middle of the game map. Talk to him, and he will appraise the unknown ring you found for 20 Rupees, turning it into the Blue Ring.

Where can I find the blue ring in the Oracle?

The Legend of Zelda: Oracle of Ages and Seasons. In Oracle of Ages, the Blue Ring can be found in a Treasure Chest located directly southeast of the Ancient Tomb. The chest is located underneath a large statue that requires the Power Glove to lift. The effect of the Blue Ring is similar to the Armor Rings, but unlike those,…

The Red Ring is available for only ten minutes during Week 4, between 25 and 35 past the hour, before Ganon takes it to prevent the hero from obtaining it. In MAP1, it is found by burning a the left of a pair of bushes in a clearing, one screen north of Level 3.

Table of contents

What does the ring do in Legend of Zelda?

The Blue Ring is a recurring item in the Legend of Zelda series. It is a ring set with a large blue stone; when worn, it reduces the amount of damage dealt to Link by half.

How do you get the Red Candle in Zelda NES?

The Red Candle is an upgrade to the Blue Candle that can be obtained in Level 7 of the First Quest and the Second Quest. When used, the Red Candle will emit a temporary red Fire to a short distance in front of Link, which can illuminate dark rooms within Dungeons and damage certain enemies.

What does the red ring do?

Three red lights on the Xbox 360’s ring indicator representing a “General Error requiring service of the Console or Power Adapter,” commonly nicknamed the “Red Ring of Death.”

How many rings does Zelda have?

There are 64 Rings in a total, many are found within specific locations of particular games. Other are randomly found by bumping into Maple, inside of a Gasha Nut, or through a Fortune Link. Rings that are exclusive to one game can be transferred to the other game using the Ring Secret.

What does the ring do in Legend of Zelda?

The Blue Ring is a recurring item in the Legend of Zelda series. It is a ring set with a large blue stone; when worn, it reduces the amount of damage dealt to Link by half.

How do you get the blue ring in Legend of Zelda?

The Blue Ring can be bought from the secret shop here for 250 Rupees. Approach the secret shop merchant, and talk to him to purchase and obtain the Blue Ring.

How do you get the Red Candle in Zelda NES?

The Red Candle is an upgrade to the Blue Candle that can be obtained in Level 7 of the First Quest and the Second Quest. When used, the Red Candle will emit a temporary red Fire to a short distance in front of Link, which can illuminate dark rooms within Dungeons and damage certain enemies.

How many rings are in The Legend of Zelda?

There are 64 Rings in a total, many are found within specific locations of particular games. Other are randomly found by bumping into Maple, inside of a Gasha Nut, or through a Fortune Link. Rings that are exclusive to one game can be transferred to the other game using the Ring Secret.

What does the ring do in Zelda?

The Blue Ring is a recurring item in the Legend of Zelda series. It is a ring set with a large blue stone; when worn, it reduces the amount of damage dealt to Link by half.

Where is the ring in Legend of Zelda?

How many rings are in The Legend of Zelda?

There are 64 Rings in a total, many are found within specific locations of particular games. Other are randomly found by bumping into Maple, inside of a Gasha Nut, or through a Fortune Link. Rings that are exclusive to one game can be transferred to the other game using the Ring Secret.

How do you get the red ring in Legend of Zelda?

In Oracle of Seasons, the Red Ring can be obtained from an Old Man in North Horon after defeating all four Golden Monsters in Holodrum. The Magic Ring can be appraised at Vasu Jewelers for 20 Rupees. When worn, it doubles Sword damage.

How do you get the red candle in Legend of Zelda?

The Red Candle is an item from The Legend of Zelda. It is found in Level 7. It functions as a higher level version of the Blue Candle, serving to burn bushes in the Overworld to reveal hidden staircases and illuminate dark rooms in dungeons.

Where do you get the candle in Zelda?

The Candle is an item from Zelda II: The Adventure of Link. Link finds it in the Parapa Palace, guarded by an orange Iron Knuckle. The candle automatically lights caves and without the candle, the caves are so dark that the enemies within are invisible, making the longer ones exceptionally difficult to cross.

Where is the red candle in Zelda second quest?

The Red Candle, similarly to most items in the game, is found a side-scrolling section that can be entered via a staircase.

What does the power bracelet do in Zelda NES?

The Power Bracelet is a recurring item in the Legend of Zelda series. This magical bracelet, when worn, bestows great strength to its wearer, allowing Link to grab and pick up objects he cannot pick up with his bare hands.

What does the ring do in Legend of Zelda?

The Blue Ring is a recurring item in the Legend of Zelda series. It is a ring set with a large blue stone; when worn, it reduces the amount of damage dealt to Link by half.

Where is the Red Ring in Legend of Zelda?

In Oracle of Seasons, the Red Ring can be obtained from an Old Man in North Horon after defeating all four Golden Monsters in Holodrum. The Magic Ring can be appraised at Vasu Jewelers for 20 Rupees. When worn, it doubles Sword damage.

How do you get the Red Ring in Oracle of Ages?

The Legend of Zelda: Oracle of Ages and Oracle of Seasons The Red Ring can be obtained after defeating the Golden Darknut, Golden Lynel, Golden Moblin and Golden Octorok. After defeating them, Link must use the stump east of Gnarled Root Dungeon to change the season to summer.

How many rings does Zelda have?

There are 64 Rings in a total, many are found within specific locations of particular games. Other are randomly found by bumping into Maple, inside of a Gasha Nut, or through a Fortune Link. Rings that are exclusive to one game can be transferred to the other game using the Ring Secret.

How many rings does Zelda have?

There are 64 Rings in a total, many are found within specific locations of particular games. Other are randomly found by bumping into Maple, inside of a Gasha Nut, or through a Fortune Link. Rings that are exclusive to one game can be transferred to the other game using the Ring Secret.

What do the rings do in Zelda?

The Legend of Zelda Manual Comment The blue ring reduces the damage inflicted by the enemy by half, and the red ring reduces damage to one quarter. In The Legend of Zelda, Link can equip the Blue Ring to take half the amount of damage he would normally.

What does blue ring do Legend of Zelda?

The Blue Ring is a Magical Ring that Link can acquire in The Legend of Zelda and Oracle of Ages, which reduces the damage he takes by half.

Watch How do you get the red ring in legend of zelda Video

Table of Contents

What does the Red Ring do in Zelda NES?

The Red Ring has one use: it cuts down damage dealt to Link by enemies to a quarter compared to his original tolerance. This is shown through a change in Link’s tunic. The Red Ring changes his tunic to a brownish-reddish color, compared to the iconic green.

How do you get the blue ring in Zelda NES?

Go to Vasu the Jeweler’s shop found in Horon Village, right at the middle of the game map. Talk to him, and he will appraise the unknown ring you found for 20 Rupees, turning it into the Blue Ring.

What does the red candle do in Zelda?

The Red Candle is an upgrade to the Blue Candle that can be obtained in Level 7 of the First Quest and the Second Quest. When used, the Red Candle will emit a temporary red Fire to a short distance in front of Link, which can illuminate dark rooms within Dungeons and damage certain enemies.

Can Master Sword break?

The Master Sword breaks, but it doesn’t break like any other weapon in Breath of the Wild. Instead, its power drains. After several minutes, you can use it again. If you’re looking for the Master Sword, check out our guide.

Where is Power Bracelet in Zelda NES?

Bottle Grotto
The Power Bracelet is found in the second dungeon, Bottle Grotto. It allows Link to pick up heavy objects like pots, rocks and skulls, as well as some enemies.

How do I get the White Sword in Legend of Zelda?

The Legend of Zelda It can be obtained once Link has five Hearts in his Life Gauge. The White Sword does twice as much damage as the original Sword. Link is given the White Sword by the White Sword-Giving Old Man in a cave in the northeast of Hyrule near a waterfall, which is guarded by a Lynel.

How do you get the red ring in Legend of Zelda?

In Oracle of Seasons, the Red Ring can be obtained from an Old Man in North Horon after defeating all four Golden Monsters in Holodrum. The Magic Ring can be appraised at Vasu Jewelers for 20 Rupees. When worn, it doubles Sword damage.

Where can I get a blue ring?

The Blue Ring can be bought for 250 Rupees in a shop hidden underneath an Armos; in the First Quest, the shop is located in the southern parts of Hyrule, and in northeastern Hyrule in the Second Quest. When Link wears the Blue Ring, his previously green clothing turns a light blue.

How do you get the Power Bracelet in Zelda NES?

In The Legend of Zelda, the Power Bracelet is obtained by activating an Armos in the northwestern region of Hyrule, either destroying it or tricking it to move from on top of it. Through the Power Bracelet, it is possible to push rocks on the overworld aside, revealing secrets.

How many heart containers are in The Legend of Zelda?

The Legend of Zelda features 13 heart containers scattered across Hyrule. Eight of them will be obtained from defeating bosses; another five appear in secret locations across the map. This page shows the location of the extra five Heart Containers for the First Quest, as well as the locations for the Second Quest further down.

What is The Legend of Zelda?

Welcome to The Legend of Zelda! This is the original adventure that kicked off an epic franchise. This guide covers the original NES version of the game released in North America, so be aware there may be regional differences. This guide is intended to be thorough and comprehensive as I can make it.

How many hidden hearts are there in Hyrule?

However, there are five hidden heart containers scattered throughout Hyrule’s Overworld. The following is a guide to the Hidden Hearts Five. Note: You can get these hearts in any order, as long as you have the requisite item.

Can you still find everything hidden away in Zelda games?

Over thirty years later, most fans still haven’t found everything hidden away in The Legend of Zelda or The Adventure of Link for the NES. Finding hidden elements in a game will always feel special to the players discovering them.

Etsy предоставляет возможность прямой связи покупателей и продавцов со всего мира. Когда вы используете сервисы Etsy (мы будем называть etsy.com, Pattern by Etsy, наши мобильные приложения и другие сервисы нашими «Сервисами»), вы несете ответственность за соблюдение этой политики, независимо от вашего местоположения.

Эта политика является частью наших Условий использования. Используя любые наши Сервисы, вы соглашаетесь с этой политикой и нашими Условиями использования.

Как транснациональная компания из США, ведущая деятельность в других странах, Etsy должна соблюдать экономические санкции и торговые ограничения, включая введенные Управлением по контролю за иностранными активами (OFAC) Министерства финансов США. Это означает, что Etsy или кто-либо, пользующийся нашими Сервисами, не может участвовать в транзакциях, в которые вовлечены определенные люди, места или изделия из этих мест, указанные государственными органами, такими как OFAC, в дополнение к торговым санкциям, предусмотренным соответствующими законами и нормами.

Эта политика действует в отношении всех, кто использует наши Сервисы, независимо от их местоположения. Решение об ознакомлении с такими ограничениями остается за вами.

Например, эти ограничения в целом запрещают, кроме прочего, транзакции, в которых участвуют следующие стороны:

  1. определенные географические регионы, такие как Иран, Крым, Куба, Северная Корея, Сирия, Россия, Беларусь, Донецкая Народная Республика («ДНР»), Луганская Народная Республика («ЛНР»), а также любые физические или юридические лица, ведущие деятельность или находящиеся на этих территориях;
  2. физические или юридические лица, состоящие в санкционных списках, таких как Список лиц особых категорий и запрещенных лиц (SDN) или Список иностранных лиц, уклоняющихся от санкций (FSE) организации OFAC;
  3. граждане Кубы независимо от их местоположения, не имеющие гражданства или вида на жительство за пределами Кубы; и
  4. изделия, из Ирана, Крыма, Кубы и Северной Кореи, за исключением информационных материалов, таких как публикации, фильмы, постеры, грампластинки, фотографии, кассеты, компакт-диски и определенные произведения искусства.
  5. Любые товары, услуги и технологические решения из ЛНР и ДНР за исключением информационных материалов и сельскохозяйственной продукции, в том числе продуктов питания для людей, семян сельскохозяйственных культур или удобрений.
  6. Импорт в США следующей продукции российского происхождения: рыба, морепродукты, алмазы непромышленного назначения и любая другая продукция, согласно периодическим указаниям министра торговли США.
  7. Экспорт из США либо гражданами США предметов роскоши и любых других товаров, согласно указаниям министра торговли США, любому лицу, находящемуся в России или Беларуси. Список и определение «предметов роскоши» приведены в «Дополнение № 5 к Разделу 746», опубликованном Федеральным реестром США.
  8. Изделия, изготовленные за пределами США и попадающие под действие Закона о тарифах США и связанных с ним законов о запрещении принудительного труда.

Для защиты нашего сообщества и торговой площадки Etsy предпринимает меры для соблюдения режимов санкций. Например, Etsy запрещает участникам пользоваться своими аккаунтами в определенных географических регионах. Если у нас есть основания полагать, что вы управляете своей аккаунтом из места, находящегося под санкциями, например, любого из перечисленных выше санкционных мест, или иным образом нарушаете какие-либо экономические санкции или торговые ограничения, мы можем приостановить или прекратить использование вами наших Сервисов. Как правило, участникам не разрешается выставлять на продажу, покупать или продавать изделия из регионов, находящихся под санкциями. Сюда входят изделия, появившиеся ранее санкций, поскольку у нас нет возможности проверить, были ли они вывезены из запрещенного места. Etsy оставляет за собой право обращаться к продавцам с запросом предоставить дополнительную информацию, раскрыть страну происхождения изделия на странице товара или предпринять другие шаги для соблюдения обязательств. Мы можем отключить товары или отменить транзакции, представляющие опасность нарушения этой политики.

Кроме соблюдения требований OFAC и применимых местных законов, участникам Etsy следует иметь в виду, что другие страны могут вводить собственные торговые ограничения и что определенные изделия могут не допускаться к экспорту или импорту согласно международным законам. Когда в транзакции участвуют лица из разных стран, вам следует изучить законы любых соответствующих стран.

Наконец, участникам Etsy следует иметь в виду, что сторонние платежные системы, например PayPal, могут самостоятельно отслеживать транзакции на предмет соблюдения санкционных требований и могут блокировать транзакции в рамках собственных программ, обеспечивающих соблюдение требований. Etsy не имеет власти или контроля над процедурами независимого принятия решения в таких системах.

Экономические санкции и торговые ограничения могут применяться к порядку использования вами Сервисов и могут изменяться, поэтому участникам следует регулярно проверять источники информации о санкциях. За юридической консультацией обращайтесь к квалифицированному специалисту.

Вы можете прочитать эту политику на вашем языке, но помните, что версия этого документа на английском имеет преимущественную силу в отношении использования вами сервисов Etsy. Язык можно изменить в настройках аккаунта.

Best level Information and References website . Search all about level Ideas in this website.

Zelda Level 9. This dungeon is one of the hardest dungeons in the entire the legend of zelda series,. We identified it from reliable source.

Let’s Play The Legend of Zelda (NES) Walkthrough Part 9 from www.youtube.com

Related light arrow arrow bow. It cuts down damage dealt to link by enemies to a quarter compared to his original tolerance. It is here that link journeys to free princess zelda from her cruel captor, gannon.

Let’s Play The Legend of Zelda (NES) Walkthrough Part 9

Its submitted by dispensation in the best field. This is shown through a change in link’s tunic. The red ring is an upgrade to the blue ring, and is one of two main items found in level 9: Finishing up the legend of zelda live stream.

This is shown through a change in link’s tunic. Link can only enter this dungeon if he has already collected all eight triforce shards, making the triforce of wisdom. The red ring is an upgrade to the blue ring, and is one of two main items found in level 9: If link obtains the red ring while having the blue.

The red ring is an upgrade to the blue ring, and is one of two main items found in level 9: Its submitted by presidency in the best field. We take on this nice of zelda nes dungeon 9 map graphic could possibly be the most trending topic behind we ration it in google pro or facebook. We identified it.

We take on this nice of zelda nes dungeon 9 map graphic could possibly be the most trending topic behind we ration it in google pro or facebook. It is here that link journeys to free princess zelda from her cruel captor, gannon. In use with midi controllers and vst plugins. Its submitted by presidency in the best field. Level.

We take on this nice of zelda nes dungeon 9 map graphic could possibly be the most trending topic behind we ration it in google pro or facebook. Dungeon location level 9, in the second quest, is found on death mountain, in the absolute northwesternmost screen of the entire overworld. Finishing up the legend of zelda live stream. Level 9.

Link can only enter this dungeon if he has already collected all eight triforce shards, making the triforce of wisdom. However, there is a trick here in the first room. We agree to this nice of zelda dungeon 9 map graphic could possibly be the most trending topic like we ration it in google pro or facebook. The legend of.

The silver arrow is a type of arrow in the legend of zelda and a link to the past. Death mountain a link to the past pyramid of power. Link can only enter this dungeon if he has already collected all eight triforce shards, making the triforce of wisdom. However, there is a trick here in the first room. Audio.

Death mountain, with the other being the silver arrow.the red ring has one use: The legend of zelda level 9: The twelve stone statues in this room are completely harmless and will not attack you. It is here that link journeys to free princess zelda from her cruel captor, gannon. Can be used in fl studio, ableton live, pro tools,.

Link can only enter this dungeon if he has already collected all eight triforce shards, making the triforce of wisdom. This dungeon is one of the hardest dungeons in the entire the legend of zelda series,. The red ring is an upgrade to the blue ring, and is one of two main items found in level 9: The twelve stone.

Level 9 is the ninth and final dungeon of the second quest of the legend of zelda, and the eighteenth and final dungeon in the game overall. The red ring is an upgrade to the blue ring, and is one of two main items found in level 9: It cuts down damage dealt to link by enemies to a quarter.

It is here where ganon has imprisoned princess zelda. We take on this nice of zelda nes dungeon 9 map graphic could possibly be the most trending topic behind we ration it in google pro or facebook. Its submitted by dispensation in the best field. Its submitted by presidency in the best field. Finishing up the legend of zelda live.

Level 9 (second quest) once again, we find ourselves at the very final dungeon. The door to the north is locked and you’ll need a small key to unlock it. Death mountain a link to the past pyramid of power. However, there is a trick here in the first room. Zelda nes dungeon 9 map.

The red ring is an upgrade to the blue ring, and is one of two main items found in level 9: In the legend of zelda, link can equip the red ring to take a quarter of the amount of damage he would normally and half the amount of damage with the blue ring equipped. We take on this nice.

In the legend of zelda, link can equip the red ring to take a quarter of the amount of damage he would normally and half the amount of damage with the blue ring equipped. Here are a number of highest rated zelda nes dungeon 9 map pictures on internet. This dungeon is one of the hardest dungeons in the entire.

Level 9 is the ninth and final dungeon of the second quest of the legend of zelda, and the eighteenth and final dungeon in the game overall. If link obtains the red ring while having the blue ring equipped, it will replace the blue ring as an upgrade. Its submitted by dispensation in the best field. We take on this.

We identified it from honorable source. It is here that link journeys to free princess zelda from her cruel captor, gannon. We agree to this nice of zelda dungeon 9 map graphic could possibly be the most trending topic like we ration it in google pro or facebook. Can be used in fl studio, ableton live, pro tools, reaper, cubase,.

The legend of zelda level 9: Audio commentary by ken gagne of gamebits. Zelda nes dungeon 9 map. Death mountain a link to the past pyramid of power. Its submitted by presidency in the best field.

This is shown through a change in link’s tunic. Level 9, also known as the skull , is the ninth and final dungeon of the first quest in the legend of zelda. It is here where ganon has imprisoned princess zelda. We identified it from reliable source. Death mountain, with the other being the silver arrow.the red ring has one.

This is shown through a change in link’s tunic. Its submitted by dispensation in the best field. It is here where ganon has imprisoned princess zelda. Dungeon location level 9, in the second quest, is found on death mountain, in the absolute northwesternmost screen of the entire overworld. The red ring is an upgrade to the blue ring, and is.

The door to the north is locked and you’ll need a small key to unlock it. Level 9 (second quest) once again, we find ourselves at the very final dungeon. Level 9, also known as the skull , is the ninth and final dungeon of the first quest in the legend of zelda. Its submitted by dispensation in the best.

We agree to this nice of zelda dungeon 9 map graphic could possibly be the most trending topic like we ration it in google pro or facebook. It is primarily used to defeat ganon in the games it is found in. However, there is a trick here in the first room. If link obtains the red ring while having the.

Dual Purpose in the West Barrens

Share this story

  • Share this on Facebook
  • Share this on Twitter

Share All sharing options for: Zelda Breath of the Wild Champions’ Ballad guide: Takama Shiri shrine walkthrough and puzzle solutions (EX Champion Urbosa’s Song)

This story is part of a group of stories called

The Legend of Zelda: Breath of the Wild is an enormous open-world game on the Nintendo Switch and Wii U. This guide and walkthrough will show you everything you need to know from the locations and solutions for every shrine to Captured Memories, the best meal in the game, The Master Trials DLC and more.

In this The Legend of Zelda: Breath of the Wild guide, we’ll show you how to find Takama Shiri shrine in the West Barrens of the Gerudo Desert. You’ll need to find this shrine as part of the EX Champion Urbosa’s Song main story quest.

The Champions’ Ballad adds a new main story quest for you to take on after you’ve tamed all four Divine Beasts. The first stage of EX The Champions’ Ballad presents you with a new series of challenges on the Great Plateau. After that, you must complete a series of challenges for each of the Champions.

  • Nintendo
  • Nintendo
  • Nintendo
  • Nintendo
  • Nintendo
  • Nintendo
  • Nintendo
  • Nintendo
  • Nintendo
  • Nintendo

To begin EX Champion Urbosa’s Song, you must find the stone monument with hints to the three trial locations. The monument’s location was marked on your map when the One-Hit Obliterator split apart.

The stone monument is in the high mountains on the far eastern edge of Hyrule’s southwestern desert in a location named East Gerudo Mesa. It’s to the east of Divine Beast Van Naboris and north of Suma Sahma shrine. It’s slightly easier and quicker (and downhill) to warp to Suma Sahma and then start trekking north. Shield surf past any enemies that pop up (or fight them if you want), then paraglide across the gap to land on the pillar where the stone monument sits.

How to find the blue ring in the legend of zelda

The stone monument displays three satellite-looking images of the nearby area, and Kass’ song gives you hints about what you’ll be doing there. With a little detective work and your map (or just by looking at the image above), you’ll be able to find the approximate locations of your trials.

  • Nintendo
  • Nintendo
  • Nintendo
  • Nintendo
  • Nintendo
  • Nintendo
  • Nintendo
  • Nintendo
  • Nintendo

To reveal this shrine, you’ll need a sand seal (and a shield). Warp to Daqo Chisay shrine in front of Gerudo Town. You can borrow one of the sand seals right out front, or you can go into town and rent one.

Once you’re surfing behind your seal, turn and head northwest. Once you pass the town completely, turn a little more west (about where Kilton’s Fang and Bone is). You’ll see the first ring sitting in the sand.

This course isn’t really tricky, but the rings are far apart, so you’ll have to keep mashing the dash button to spur your seal along. The shrine will appear in the ruins in the northwest corner of the Gerudo Desert.

  • Nintendo
  • Nintendo
  • Nintendo
  • Nintendo
  • Nintendo
  • Nintendo
  • Nintendo
  • Nintendo
  • Nintendo
  • Nintendo
  • Nintendo
  • Nintendo
  • Nintendo
  • Nintendo
  • Nintendo
  • Nintendo
  • Nintendo
  • Nintendo
  • Nintendo
  • Nintendo
  • Nintendo
  • Nintendo

There are two ways to complete this shrine.

The first is to protect yourself from being electrocuted and, essentially, brute force your way through. You can use the rubber set or the thunder helm to do this, or make an electro elixir (some electric darners and a monster part). All of the steps below will still apply if you’re immune to electricity, but we’re going to lay out how to do it if you don’t have any way to protect yourself.

  1. Walk forward and use magnesis to arrange the two metal blocks into a bridge. Place the blocks toward the left side of the platform so they don’t become electrified. Cross over to the far side — where the closed grate is — then turn around. Move both blocks over to the left so they complete the circuit and open the door.
  2. In the next room, don’t step on the first metal block yet — it’s electrified. Move the second metal block as far away from you as you can, then use the first block to follow the catwalk around to the right.
  3. Before you get out of range, turn around and grab the first metal block again. Swing it all the way to your right, pushing the other block on its rail against the wall below the exit.
  4. Follow the catwalk around to the end. Grab the leftmost block on the far rail — the one right in front of the power supply — and push both blocks against the righthand wall. This should break the circuit and let you cross to the other platform.
  5. On the other platform, turn around. Grab the first block on each rail and slide them right to complete the circuit. This leaves the other two blocks as a walkway for you to exit the room. Head up the stairs into the next room.
  6. There are two circuits in this room. The first one we’ll turn on is for the treasure chest. Move the right block on the middle rail left about one block-width — so that it’s still getting power from the bottom. Move the left block on the middle rail to the right until it’s just barely touching the right block.
  7. Move the left block on the bottom rail to the right until it’s getting power from the others. That should complete the circuit for the chest. Run behind the metal blocks and through the hallway. Open the chest for a quick shot royal bow.
  8. Return to the front of the room. Move both blocks on the middle rail all the way to the right. Move the right block on the bottom rail one width to the left — so that it’s disconnected from the power, but still lets you climb. Climb up on top of the second row of blocks, then turn right. Follow the catwalk around to the front of the room.
  9. Slide both blocks on the bottom rail all the way to the right.
  10. Slide both blocks on the middle rail to the middle — this should complete the circuit for the exit. It will look like stairs going up and to the left.
  11. This leaves the right block on the top rail unpowered so you can climb it up and out.
  12. Head through the door and claim your Naboris’s emblem from the monk.

The Legend of Zelda: Breath of the Wild guide and walkthrough

Check out our full Breath of the Wild guide to find everything in the game and its DLC.

To begin collecting Rings, visit the jewellery store in Lynna City and talk to the owner, Vasu. He will give you an L-1 Ring Box. This can only hold one Ring at a time (the rest he stores for you); you can eventually get an L-2 Ring Box (holds 3 Rings) or an L-3 Ring Box (holds 5 Rings). Once you have the Ring Box Vasu gives you the File:Zelda Oracles Ring 01.png No. 1 Friendship Ring. He then teaches you how to appraise Rings. The first time his service is free, after that it’s 20 Rupees per Ring.

When you find Rings they will be unusable and appear as a mere number in your inventory beside the File:Zelda Oracles Ring 00.png icon. By returning to Vasu and having them appraise they become usable. You can only have one of each Ring in your collection; Vasu buys duplicates for 30 Rupees.

Once you have some Rings you can add them to your Ring Box by talking to Vasu and selecting “List”. To equip a Ring, go into your inventory and activate it; an “E” shows you the ring is equipped and in effect.

Except for a handful that are only acquired in certain places all Rings can be acquired by various methods, including:

  • Planting a Gasha Seed and collecting the resulting Gasha Nut
  • Bumping into Maple and stealing any Rings she drops
  • From the Chest Game in Lynna City

Rings can be transferred between games by the snake in Vasu’s jewellery shop. Talk to the Red Snake and he’ll give you a password to transfer the ring; alternatively, using a link cable, talk to the Blue Snake and the ring will be transferred directly. The Blue Snake can also randomly generate some rings if Link talks to it simultaneously in two linked Game Boys.

Contents

  • 1 Ring list
    • 1.1 Legend
    • 1.2 Table
  • 2 Ring boxes

37 rings can be obtained in either game, 9 in Oracle of Ages only, 9 in Oracle of Seasons only, 9 only in a linked game.

Legend Edit

Triangles represent the effect a ring has on your abilities.

  • ▲ – Up 25%
  • ▲▲ – Up 50 %
  • ▲▲▲ – Up 75%
  • ▼ – Down 25%
  • ▼▼ – Down 50%
  • ▼▼▼ -Down 75%

There are a lot of different rings with different effects, therefore choosing one can be difficult. Sorting the table by Effect, you will see at a glance rings with similar effect:

  • Attack: rings that improve or modify attack;
  • Defense: rings that either improve defense or help healing;
  • Items: rings that allow to get more or better items;
  • Movement: rings that improve abilities related to movement;
  • Void: rings with no effect.

Sorting rings by Location you will see at a glance which rings can be found in which game: both games, Oracle of Ages only (OoA), Oracle of Seasons only (OoS) or in a linked game only.

The “Effect” categories are not quotes from the game, but are used to clarify each ring’s bonuses and use. Sorting the Effect column alphabetically orders the rings by relevance. Each effect category includes a dozen rings: more categories could be confusing, less categories would make the ring sets confusingly big. For sorting purposes, the entries in the Effect column must start with one of the following: attack, defense, movement, items, void. The entries in the Location column must start with one of the following: OoA, OoS, Both, Link.

Many rings can be obtained from random sources, most notably the Gasha nuts. Different sources can provide rings of different rarity, from 1 (common) to 5 (rare):

  • Rarity tier 1: Gasha nut; Blue Snake; Treasure Chest game; Lynna city shop (300 R.).
  • Rarity tier 2: Gasha nut; Blue Snake; Treasure Chest game; Maple; Wild Tokay game.
  • Rarity tier 3: Gasha nut; Blue Snake; Treasure Chest game; Maple; Lynna village GBA shop.
  • Rarity tier 4: Gasha nut; Blue Snake.
  • Rarity tier 5: Gasha nut.

The Location column gives priority to the locations where it is easier to get the ring:

  1. If a ring is at a fixed location, all you have to do is get there and appraise it.
    These ring are marked as OoA or OoS or Both or Link (i.e. Linked game)
  2. If a ring is from a random effect (e.g. Gasha nuts), there is also a probability you get a different ring.
    These rings are marked as “Both, random“, unless they also fall in the category above.
  3. If a ring is from a mini-game prize, not only there is a probability you get a different ring, but also you need skill to obtain the ring.
    These rings are marked with the location of the mini-game, either OoA or OoS.

If you sort the table by Ring, rings with similar appearance will be displayed near each other.

The Second Quest is a much harder version of the game, where items are harder to find, some enemies are stronger and there are some new enemies, dungeons have different layouts, dungeons are more difficult to complete. This page explains how to start the Second Quest and what to do at the beginning.

How to Start the Second Quest

You can either win the game and press START after the credits roll to turn your saved game into a Second Quest slot, or you can create a new save slot with the name ZELDA to start the Second Quest right away.

Get the Wooden Sword

Go into the cave and get the wooden sword.

Get Bombs

Now you should get some bombs. Blue Moblins and Blue Octoroks drop them, so go east, then north twice, then keep going east until you start encountering Blue Moblins. Explore this green forest until you have some bombs from killing Blue Moblins.

Get 60 Rupees

There are some free rupees for the taking that will quickly get you to 60 rupees. You will need even more rupees soon, so get these rupees even if you already have 60 or are close to it.

If you are in the green forest as described in the “Get Bombs” section above, go to the northernmost area of the forest, where there are two armos statues. Touch the rightmost statue to make it move, then go down the stairs to get 30 rupees.

Go back outside. Go one screen north, then put a bomb on the wall to the right of the stairs. Go in to get 30 rupees.

Get the Blue Candle

From there, go south twice, then east, and touch the rightmost statue to reveal stairs. Go down to get 10 rupees. (You’ll need them soon.) Then go west, south, and east. Go into the cave and buy the Blue Candle.

Get More Rupees

You are going to need 250 rupees. Go west three times and use the Blue Candle to burn the bottom-left bush. Go down to get 10 rupees.

Go west five times and burn the bottom-left bush to get another 10 rupees.

Then go west, south, west two times, and north. Burn the bottom-most bush to get 100 rupees.

Go west twice and burn the bottom-right bush to get 10 rupees.

Go east four times, then south, then east four times, then north twice. Burn the upper-right bush in the corner to get 30 rupees.

Go north twice and burn the bottom-right bush to get 30 rupees.

You should have a lot of rupees by now. If you haven’t yet reached 250, go east and kill some red Leevers for a chance to get blue rupees, then go to the south-middle and southeast parts of the map to kill blue Tektites and red Leevers, both of which have a chance of dropping blue rupees.

Get the Blue Ring

Go to the southeast corner of the map, then go north until you can’t go north anymore. Follow the water’s edge until you reach the end of the water, and go east. You will see some trees. There is a secret passage north of the bottom-middle tree stump. Go up through the north wall there to find a hidden building. Go inside and get the Blue Ring.

Go to Dungeon 1

Now you should go to the big lake in the center of the map. On the east side of that lake, there is a bridge. Cross it and enter the tree to go to dungeon 1.

How to find the blue ring in the legend of zelda

Nintendo has set a strange new precedent with the release of Legend of Zelda SP on the Switch: it’s essentially the original NES game but with Link starts loaded up with good gear and cash. In a way it’s no different from a cheat code, but the way it’s executed feels like a missed opportunity.

The game itself (SP stands for “special”) is described by Nintendo in the menu as a “souped up version” of the original: “Living the life of luxury!” It’s a separate entry in the menu with all the other NES games you get as part of the company’s subscription service.

You’re given the white sword, big shield, blue ring and power bracelet, plus 255 rupees to replace that shield when a Like-like eats it. Basically they’ve given you all the stuff you can find on the overworld (including max bombs and keys), but no items you’d get from inside a dungeon. You also have six hearts, and traveling around a little bit I determined these were awarded by raiding nearby hidden areas, not simply assigned. Secret passages are already revealed, and so on.

Because it skips the title screen and save game selection it seems like someone must have essentially played through the game to this point (or more likely edited the values in game RAM) and then walked to the classic starting point and made a save state that automatically loads when you start or reset the game. This means the only way to save is to use the Switch’s built-in save states, not the rather inconvenient save method the game used.

How to find the blue ring in the legend of zelda

It’s plain enough that this will be a less frustrating way to explore this famously difficult game, but it seems untrue to Zelda’s roots. I understand perhaps gifting the player some of the impossible to find things like a heart hidden inside a random block here or there. Getting some bombs to start is great too, and maybe even the rings (warping is helpful, and the game is pretty punishing, so damage reduction is nice). But the white sword?

For one thing, a player experiencing the game this way misses out on one of the most iconic moments in all gaming — “It’s dangerous to go alone. Take this!” Then the ritual lifting of the wooden sword. And then setting out into the world to die again and again.

And for me, the white sword was always sort of a rite of passage in the game — your first big step toward becoming powerful. You earned it by finding those extra heart containers, perhaps after asking in vain after it before you were ready. Once you have it, you’re cutting through enemies like butter.

How to find the blue ring in the legend of zelda

To make it the default sword and to skip these steps seems like it causes the player to miss out on what makes Zelda Zelda.

To be fair, it’s not the only version of the game you can play — the original is available, too. But it seems like a missed opportunity. Why not just have a save game you can load with this stuff, so you can continue playing as normal? Why not have the option baked into the launch of the original Zelda — have a couple secret save states ready with differing levels of items?

Nintendo has the opportunity to introduce a new generation to classic NES games here, having provided a rather bare-bones experience with the NES Classic Edition. Why not enhance them? Include the manual, god mode, developer commentary? This is the legacy the company has been stewarding for decades, and what better than to give it the respect it deserves?

I’m probably overthinking it. But this Zelda SP just seems like a rushed job when players would appreciate something like it, just not so heavy-handed. It’s not that these games are inviolable, but that if they’re going to be fiddled with, we’d like to see it done properly.

Over 30 years ago, Nintendo launched the original “Legend of Zelda” — a sprawling, 8-bit epic that captured the hearts of millions of people around the world.

This week, Nintendo re-released the game in a brand new form: “The Legend of Zelda: Living the life of luxury!”

Better still, the game is free if you’re already a paying subscriber to Nintendo Switch Online — the $20/year service that offers access to a growing library of classic Nintendo Entertainment System games. The game was added as a “save state” within the standard, original version of “The Legend of Zelda.”

So, what in the world is it?

Nintendo called it a “souped-up” version of the original game. “You’ll start with a ton of rupees and items! You’ll begin with all equipment, including the White Sword, the Magical Shield, the Blue Ring, and even the Power Bracelet,” a description from Nintendo’s eShop said. For anyone not familiar, that means that the game’s main character, Link, will start the game with a load of in-game money (rupees) and powerful weapons. It’s kind of like playing the game with a cheat code that grants you a bunch of free stuff.

There’s also a second, more difficult version of the game, unlocked by completing the initial quest.

This “souped-up” version of a classic game is the first of many such versions coming to Nintendo Switch Online .

“Special save data for other NES titles will become available in the future, offering fun new entry points into fan-favorite games,” Nintendo said in an announcement Wednesday morning.

As of October, Nintendo Switch Online has 23 games — not including this new version of “The Legend of Zelda” — playable through its online library. Nintendo is promising to bring that total up to 29 by the end of 2018.

The subscription service launched in late September exclusively on Nintendo’s hybrid portable/home console, the Nintendo Switch. For $20/year, subscribers get access to a growing library of classic NES games, are able to play Switch games online, and can back up game saves to the cloud.

Take a look at this month’s three new games in this video:

How to find the blue ring in the legend of zelda

How to find the blue ring in the legend of zelda

How to find the blue ring in the legend of zelda

How to find the blue ring in the legend of zelda

A tribute to Legend of Zelda in a unique men’s wedding band! This ring comes with 2 lab created Blue Diamonds for nice accent stones. Also available with lab created Emeralds, or sapphires upon request.

This 7mm wide wedding band is made from recycled silver and is handmade with a comfort fit to your size. The ring is carved from wax, then cast in the metal. From there it is finished by hand to achieve a great wearable look.

Ring Specs:
● 7mm width
● 1.5mm Thickness- good weight, sturdy construction
● (2 qty) 2mm round lab created Blue Diamonds. An eco friendlier solution to new mining.
● Recycled Sterling Silver

I offer BRUSHED or POLISHED finishes on these rings. Shown in the photo is a polished finish. I also offer a brushed satin finish, please let me know your preference when ordering.

Please allow 3-5 weeks from order to ship date. (Rush orders possible for a rush fee, please message about due date). Exact ring size needed before creating your ring, see sizing info for best ways to get your size before ordering.

● Sizing: It is important for gold that you provide your EXACT finger size. Each ring is handmade to your specifications, so your band may have to be re-made from scratch if a new size is required. I can ship you ring sizers for a very reasonable price to make sure you get sized properly. I strongly recommend going to a few wedding ring stores to get sized before purchase, most will gladly do it for free!

Eco friendly silver and gold is metal that has been refined from old gold jewelry such as estate jewelry and gold coins. The hope is to reduce the impact done from mining by recycling the metal instead. The metal composition and color are identical to commercial golds on the market.

Moissanite is a lab created gemstone that is near colorless, extremely durable, with a brilliance that can even outshine diamond. It has become a great alternative to diamond in that it offers a lower price point than comparable diamonds in size, and does not depend on the traditional mining methods that have been roiled in controversy. It is created from Silicon Carbide, a rare mineral found in meteors and stardust. Charles & Colvard are the leading manufacturer of synthetic moissanite, and have perfected a gemstone that has a hardness of 9.25, proving to be only topped by diamond on the hardness scale. To learn more about Moissanite, please visit the website of Charles and Colvard: http://www.charlesandcolvard.com/moissanite

About Canadian Diamonds:

Canadian Diamonds- certified, conflict free, cut and polished through ethical and strict codes of conduct. Sourced in the Canadian Arctic.

Subject to the strictest standards through CanadaMark, the Government of Northwest Territories, and designed to protect the the Arctic environment though careful monitoring of every step.

14k yellow Gold and 14K rose gold:

14k gold is 58.3% pure gold, and 41.7% other metals to alloy for a more durable product. 14k Yellow has a traditional yellow most people are familiar with, but not rich as 18k or 22k that contains more pure gold. Rose gold contains copper alloys to create the pinkness that is so unique to it.

18k gold is 75% pure gold, and 25% other metal alloy. This creates a warmer tone to the pinkness than 14k. Very durable, has an extra fine color quality when seen on the hand.

Palladium White Gold:

An alloy of white gold and palladium ( a cousin metal to platinum, but more economical, not as dense). Not quite as brittle as white gold is, and not quite as common as 14k white.

Platinum is one of the whitest precious metals, and does not require rhodium plating to retain it’s whiteness. It has good resistance to wear and tear compared to white gold. Naturally hypoallergenic, platinum is a good choice for people who have metal allergy issues.

Platinum is one of the densest precious metals on the market, and will be noticeably heavier than comparable rings of the same size. Over time, your platinum jewelry may develop a natural patina, which can very quickly be re-polished back to it’s original shine. Platinum is one of the most secure ways to hold your stones in place, and holds it’s value over time very well.

*** Since every wedding ring I make is handmade, the exact finish of your ring may vary slightly. Each one is one of a kind and unique. Photo represents a very standard studio production item for a client.

*Please Read- info below about fabrication and shipping time before ordering*

● Fabrication Time:Sizes 4-13 ready to ship in 3-5 weeks. Message me if you have a specific timeline, I will always let you know if I can accommodate your deadline! Rush fees may apply.

Items Under $200:

USPS First Class Mail. Shipping time estimated 3-5 business days. Usually within 3 business days, your item will arrive.

USPS priority mail with tracking and insurance. Delivery once shipped usually takes between 2-3 days at most. If you need rush shipping (express mail), please message me for a shipping upgrade before purchase.

● Awesome!
A portion of all my monthly proceeds go to “La Puente” community resource center. La Puente is a 501(c)(3) non-profit organization in Colorado’s San Luis Valley providing emergency shelter, food assistance, transitional housing, self-sufficiency services, homeless prevention, community outreach services, and job training for the homeless and other community members in crisis.

By Natalie Clayton published 2 March 22

The Lands Between are more of a link to Souls’ own past.

How to find the blue ring in the legend of zelda

Elden Ring’s open world is a triumph. What could have been an ill-informed case of bigger equals better turned out better than I could have hoped—From Software reframing what a Souls game can look like with a bleak, sprawling world that retains so much of what made previous games click.

But please, stop with the Zelda: Breath of the Wild comparisons, yeah?

I suppose it’s not entirely uncalled for. Over the past decade or so, open-world has gained a far more specific definition in the cultural consciousness than simply “map big”. Open world means a very specific kind of big budget (usually Ubisoft) action game. It means checklists, it means climbing towers to reveal activities and clearly-marked secrets.

In that sense, The Legend of Zelda: Breath of the Wild (BOTW) is an outlier. Nintendo’s landmark 2017 RPG didn’t just depart from the series’ established format for a vast open Hyrule, it pointedly ignored the established rules for doing so. BOTW has towers, but they only reveal the topology of the map, not its secrets. There are vast fields that exist purely to create scale, environmental secrets that require lateral thinking to unlock, and a climbing system that means you really can go anywhere, no matter how out-of-bounds a location may seem.

BOTW is undeniably an influential game. But in being so divergent from the Ubisoft mould, Breath of the Wild has also become shorthand for all other open worlds. Games that have massive maps but are, y’know, good. Not like those other ones.

feels like as time goes on we’re attributing nearly all enjoyable open world mechanics to BOTW BOTW did not invent “freedom to go anywhere but you might get your ass kicked” for exampleFebruary 25, 2022

There are similarities to be made, for sure. The Souls games have always been a wee bit Zelda, a third-person action RPG where you explore puzzlebox dungeons, lock onto baddies to strafe around them as you get cheeky hits in. Like BOTW, Elden Ring obfuscates its dungeons and secrets—but then, Souls has always been about hiding everything from the stakes of its world to the dagger behind a hidden wall.

The big difference, for me, is intent—and how that intent defines the very shape of the world. Breath of the Wild wants to feel like you’re running joyfully through fields and hills, and so its world is broad, expansive, rarely if ever directing you to anything in particular. You’re not directed by roads or closed environments so much as wanting to shoot towards a new strange shape on the horizon, or an oddly-contoured hill on the map, and that climbing mechanic means you can always finagle your way into somewhere that seems out-of-bounds.

When I think of games inspired by Breath of the Wild, I think of Sable. That game saw the expressive exploration of Zelda and decided to ditch combat entirely, focusing entirely on the sheer thrill of climbing weird rock formations, messing with beetles and delving into ancient ruins (be they stone temples or ancient ships). A world designed in such a way that simply travelling and soaking in the vibes is enough for the cost of admission.

Elden Ring, meanwhile, feels more of a successor to ideas laid down all the way back in Dark Souls 1. That game had a winding game world of layered paths and regions that you could freely explore, but that always led somewhere. Unlocking new areas always took a bit of figuring out, and if you were stuck on one boss you could usually go off and find another path to work your way down.

Elden Ring is still, ultimately, a game of roads—paths that define the very shape of the landscape. Impassable cliffs and mountain ranges guide you just as much as the golden path emitted from Sites of Grace, funnelling you towards the next major (or minor) dungeon, the next bonfire, the next boss, the next hand-placed encounter. The difference here is that those roads have fields and bogs and hillsides filling the space between, and those in-between spaces are packed with even more of FromSoft’s obscurities.

If BOTW was a game about always looking over the horizon, then Elden Ring’s world is one precision engineered to create that Dark Souls on a grand scale. There are boundless secrets to find off the beaten track, but you’ll rarely veer so far off course that you’ll find yourself more than a stone’s throw from something valuable. It’s a map that’s deeply concerned with how it slowly unveils its scale, and those narrower paths mean new locations are denser with detail and considered combat challenges.

Sure, there is Breath of the Wild in how Elden Ring refuses to signpost its secrets. But there’s also a bit of Elder Scrolls in its tile-based stone catacombs, a bit of Far Cry in its stealthy bandit camps. I guess ultimately what I’m asking is that we be less reductive in how we talk about games. Saying Elden Ring is like BOTW feels like that infamous line about Far Cry 3 being Skyrim with guns. Each of these games has open worlds full of things to do, but the comparisons rob these games of the nuances that make them special.

Is Elden Ring comparable with Zelda? Kinda, sure. But if that’s the link you’re making you’re missing so much of why Elden Ring works at all.

Elden Ring guide: Conquer the Lands Between
Elden Ring bosses: How to beat them
Elden Ring dungeons: How to defeat them
Elden Ring paintings: Solutions and locations
Elden Ring map fragments: Reveal the world
Elden Ring co-op: How to squad up online

Where is the blue ring in Zelda NES?

The Blue Ring can be bought for 250 Rupees in a shop hidden underneath an Armos; in the First Quest, the shop is located in the southern parts of Hyrule, and in northeastern Hyrule in the Second Quest. When Link wears the Blue Ring, his previously green clothing turns a light blue.

How much is the blue ring in Legend of Zelda?

The Legend of Zelda The Blue Ring can be bought from a travelling Merchant in one of his secret Item Shops. It costs 250 Rupees, making it the most expensive item in the game. When purchased by Link, this item changes his outfit from green to a light blue color.

What does the red ring do in Zelda NES?

The Red Ring has one use: it cuts down damage dealt to Link by enemies to a quarter compared to his original tolerance. This is shown through a change in Link’s tunic. The Red Ring changes his tunic to a brownish-reddish color, compared to the iconic green.

Where is the power ring in Legend of Zelda?

The Power Ring L-1 can be found in the Explorer’s Crypt in Oracle of Seasons and the Spirit’s Grave in Oracle of Ages. The Magic Ring can be appraised at Vasu Jewelers for 20 Rupees. When worn, it increases Sword damage while also increasing damage taken by Link.

How do you get the blue tunic in Zelda?

You need to find at least one of these areas and restore a piece of memory, then go back and talk to Impa in Kakariko Village. Once you’ve done this, she’ll reward you with the Champion’s Tunic, the iconic blue clothing Link is featured in.

What happens when you beat Zelda NES?

After you beat your first game in The Legend of Zelda, you will be able to play through the game again in the Second Quest. The only thing different in the Second Quest is that everything is in different locations. It will also list items in the game.

How do you get the red ring in Zelda?

In Oracle of Seasons, the Red Ring can be obtained from an Old Man in North Horon after defeating all four Golden Monsters in Holodrum. The Magic Ring can be appraised at Vasu Jewelers for 20 Rupees. When worn, it doubles Sword damage.

What is the easiest memory to find in breath of the wild?

The second memory is one of the easiest to discover in Breath of the Wild as it’s positioned near to the Great Plateau where you start your game. If you head to the west of Lake Kolomo, there’s a small path that leads towards the lake. Head to the end of it and then turn to your left.

Where can I find the blue ring in Legend of Zelda?

Link463’s answer is perfect. Be advised that the Blue Ring reduces enemy damage by one half. So it is an excellent defensive item that is yours to keep. If you don’t have enough rupees (250), try looking for money hidden under bushes and inside caves all over the world map.

How does the red ring work in The Legend of Zelda?

The Legend of Zelda. The Red Ring cuts the damage from enemy attacks done to Link by three quarters, whereas the Blue Ring cuts the damage by only one half.

What happens when Link gets the red ring?

In The Legend of Zelda, Link can equip the Red Ring to take a quarter of the amount of damage he would normally and half the amount of damage with the Blue Ring equipped. If Link obtains the Red Ring while having the Blue Ring equipped, it will replace the Blue Ring as an upgrade.

Where do you get the red ring in RuneScape?

The Red Ring cuts the damage from enemy attacks done to Link by three quarters, whereas the Blue Ring cuts the damage by only one half. The ring can be obtained in Level 9 (both during the 1st and 2nd quests), the final dungeon in the game.

Where do you find the blue ring in Legend of Zelda?

The Blue Ring is a recurring item in two versions of the Legend of Zelda game. It appears both on the Legend of Zelda and The Oracle of Seasons.

The Legend of Zelda. The Red Ring cuts the damage from enemy attacks done to Link by three quarters, whereas the Blue Ring cuts the damage by only one half.

In The Legend of Zelda, Link can equip the Red Ring to take a quarter of the amount of damage he would normally and half the amount of damage with the Blue Ring equipped. If Link obtains the Red Ring while having the Blue Ring equipped, it will replace the Blue Ring as an upgrade.

The Red Ring cuts the damage from enemy attacks done to Link by three quarters, whereas the Blue Ring cuts the damage by only one half. The ring can be obtained in Level 9 (both during the 1st and 2nd quests), the final dungeon in the game.

Go to Vasu the Jeweler’s shop found in Horon Village, right at the middle of the game map. Talk to him, and he will appraise the unknown ring you found for 20 Rupees, turning it into the Blue Ring.

Location and Uses. The Power Ring L-1 can be found in the Explorer’s Crypt in Oracle of Seasons and the Spirit’s Grave in Oracle of Ages. The Magic Ring can be appraised at Vasu Jewelers for 20 Rupees. When worn, it increases Sword damage while also increasing damage taken by Link.

Where do you get the silver arrow in Zelda?

The Legend of Zelda So be alert! In The Legend of Zelda, the Silver Arrow is found in Level-9 of both the First Quest and the Second Quest. After hitting Ganon 15 times with the Sword, 8 times with the White Sword or 4 times with the Magical Sword, Link must use a Silver Arrow to finish him off.

How to find the blue ring in the legend of zeldaSource: Rebecca Spear / iMore

What you need to know

  • The Legend of Zelda series is an action adventure gaming franchise that started on the Nintendo Entertainment System.
  • The fourth entry in the series, Ocarina of Time, brought the series into 3D for the first time.
  • Ocarina of Time was added to the list of greats in the World Video Game Hall of Fame this year, after a lengthy nomination process.

Ocarina of time has been lauded among the Zelda games as being one of the best ever since its release in 1998. Now, it gets to wear that badge with pride. The National Museum of Play is home to the World Video Game Hall of Fame, where the best of the best are given their dues.

An ongoing project since 2015, the Hall of Fame is currently home to 36 games, from Tetris to Super Mario Bros. to The Sims. While anyone can nominate a game, the final selections are made “on the advice of journalists, scholars, and other individuals familiar with the history of video games and their role in society”. Games are chosen according to four main criteria: icon status, longevity, geographical reach, and influence.

This year, The Legend of Zelda: Ocarina of Time was inducted alongside the iconic Sid Meier’s Civilization, Ms. Pacman, and Dance Dance Revolution. Anyone who’s been a fan of gaming over the years know how influential these titles are, having directly impacted many games in their respective genres.

If you’re itching to play Ocarina of Time but don’t happen to have a Nintendo 64 handy, you can always play it on your Nintendo Switch via their Nintendo Switch Online + Expansion Pack service, which includes tons of Nintendo 64 games, Sega Genesis titles, and DLC packs for various popular Nintendo games.

Retro everything

Nintendo Switch Online Expansion Pack

Lots of retro goodness under one roof.

The Nintendo Switch Online Expansion Pack offers not only online connectivity, but access to cloud saves, Nintendo Entertainment System, Super Nintendo Entertainment System, Nintendo 64, and Sega Genesis titles. Subscribers get special offers for retro-themed controllers, and Animal Crossing: New Horizons players can access the Happy Home Paradise DLC for free if they’re a subscriber.

Nintendo and iOS gaming recap: Breath of the Wild 2 spoilers are out there

This week, plot points for Zelda BotW2 and the Super Mario Bros. movie appeared online. We also learned that things aren’t as happy as they might seem working for Nintendo of America. Additionally, some new games are coming to iOS in the near future.

watchOS 9 needs to improve some long overlooked aspects of the software

How can watchOS 9 make the Apple Watch even better? I have some ideas.

Review: Sonix’s MagSafe-compatible phone ring adds stylish functionality

Are you looking for a cute and stylish way to have a better grip on your MagSafe phone? Then you may want to consider the Sonix Magnetic Removable Phone Ring.

Stay fit at home with these Nintendo Switch workout games

The portability of the Nintendo Switch makes it a great way to stay fit, even if you’re on the go. Check out these best workout games for the Nintendo Switch and keep up with your fitness.

How to set up a small solar

Author – Alycia Gordan

Clean energy is gaining ground rapidly just when greenhouse gases and carbon emissions are immensely hurting our ecosystem. Worldwide, two-thirds of solar power capacity have been installed since 2011. Fortunately, India has kept pace with the rapid development of clean solar power. Reports indicate that solar power generation in India increased by a whopping 86% in 2017.

It is now ideal to use solar power not only in commercial units but also for residential ones. The costs of installing a solar power unit have steadily dropped, but you can always try the DIY option to keep it within your budget. You can save money by setting up a solar with solar photo-voltaic (PV) system yourself by reading this simple guide to set up solar power. Here is an in-depth look at how you can build and install a solar power unit for your home:

Step-by-step guide to set up solar power unit

How to set up a small solar

Step 1: Gather solar power components

It all begins with gathering the basic ingredients of a solar power unit. You will need four major items – solar panels, charge controller, inverter, and a battery pack. In addition to these items, you will require a breaker, meter, MC4 connector, and fuses among other things. Keep in mind that it is essential to read the solar panel module instructions.

Step 2: Calculate your power load

How to set up a small solar

Before getting to the solar installation task, it is crucial to sum up the power that you use at your home. This isn’t rocket science. All you have to do is to note down the home appliances that you use on a daily basis, which include television, lights, fan, and so on. Next, add the time for which these appliances run in a day. Go through the specification chart in your household electric appliances to check their usage duration or run time, and their power rating.

Now calculate the ‘Watt-Hour’ by multiplying the runtime of an appliance with its power rating. Follow this step for each electrical device, then sum up the individual watt-hour numbers to get the grand total. You can also simplify this calculation by using an online off-grid load calculator.

Step 3: Select and charge the battery

How to set up a small solar

A major hiccup with solar power is that it doesn’t provide electricity when the sun goes down. However, you can easily crack this problem by using a battery. A lead-acid or a lithium-ion battery stores solar power generated during the daytime and discharges it at night. This provides a steady supply of energy, provided you have selected the optimum battery storage capacity. You will need a power controller to monitor your battery’s charging. These come between the panels and the battery. Such controllers are typically fitted with a small LED light that announces the charging state of the battery, and it adjusts the power that flows into the battery.

Step 4: Set up the inverter

How to set up a small solar

Solar arrays produce electricity in direct current (DC), but electrical appliances use power in the form of alternating current (AC). Inverter is a device that saves the day by allowing you to use electrical devices without using adaptors. Inverters come in varying power wattages and types including square wave, modified sine-wave, and pure sine-wave inverters. Square waves are not compatible for all devices, while the output of modified sine wave is not suitable for certain appliances such as a fridge. This makes a pure sine wave inverter the best choice for your solar system.

Step 5: Fix the solar panels on your roof

How to set up a small solar

Once the battery, controller, and inverters are ready, you need to get started with mounting the solar panels. Select the best spot for the panels on the roof or on open ground that receives an unhindered supply of the sun’s radiation. You can either make a mounting stand yourself or get it from the market. The tilt of the mounting stand should almost be equal to the latitude angle of your location. The proper setting of the solar panels is critical for their operation & maintenance. Hence, it is essential to ensure that the panels face the sun throughout the day.

In the last phase of this step, wire the solar panels. You can trace a small junction box at the back of the solar panel. The junction box has negative and positive signs of polarity. In a large sized-panel, the junction box has terminal wires too with an MC4 connector. However, you will have to align the junction box with external wires yourself if you use small solar panels. Use the black and red wire for negative and positive terminal connections, respectively.

Step 6: Connect the solar panels with battery

You need to connect the solar panels with the battery. In certain PV systems, these come paired together, so you don’t have to put in the additional effort. In cases that are not given as a single unit, you need to make series and parallel connections. You can make a series connection by connecting a device’s positive terminal with another device’s negative terminal. For a parallel connection, you need to connect one device’s negative terminal with another device’s negative terminal and so on.

Step 7: Setup stands for inverter and battery

How to set up a small solar

Your residential solar unit is incomplete without stands for the battery and inverter. Again, you have the option of building the stands or getting them. Once the allocated positions for the inverter and battery are ready, you can start working on the wiring. Start with wiring the controller. The first connection from the left is for connecting the controller with the solar panels. The second connection is for pairing the battery with the controller. The last connection is for connecting the controller to the direct DC load connection.

For connecting the solar panel with the charge controller, you will need a separate connector called an MC4 connector. Once the controller is connected to the battery, its LED lights should light up. Similarly, you will have to connect the inverter terminal with the battery’s terminal.

Following these steps can guide you to set up a solar power unit at your home. The high costs incurred in installing one can be reaped later on as solar energy is not only clean but also a cost-effective investment.

Author Bio

Alycia Gordan is a tech junkie and a freelance writer who loves to read and write articles on healthcare, technology, fitness and lifestyle. You can find her on Twitter: @meetalycia

A simple solar system that helps power your entire house and stores energy isn’t as easy to set up as you’d think. To ensure that you capture some of the sun’s energy while you save up enough for a whole-home solar system we’re offering a few DIY solar tips.

In our previous post, “DIY solar,” we walked everyone through the process of installing solar systems. Today we’re going more into detail about how you create a minimalist off-grid solar setup without spending too much. Let’s dive in!

How Solar Works

Solar panels are actually quite simple. Most people think that they’re extremely complex, but the technology has been around for decades now. To capture and absorb sunlight and then turn it into electricity that you can use throughout your home, even a simple solar system needs all of the basic components.

Basic Components of a Solar Energy System

How to set up a small solar

The first thing you’ll need to start capturing and converting the sun’s energy is a solar panel! Solar panels are made up of 100’s of photovoltaic cells that capture solar energy as DC current, and then transfer that energy through DC wiring to an inverter.

From the inverter, AC energy can be used to power your TV or charge your electric car. When your solar energy system is set up and running, the AC current first goes to your fuse box, where it’s distributed throughout the house, and then to a battery or back to the electrical grid for your neighbors to use. There are far more moving pieces for more complex solar energy systems, but the concept is generally the same.

The Minimalist Solar Setup

If you want a simple solar setup that you can use to charge a battery when you go camping or to live out of your van, then here are the components you’ll need for a minimalist solar setup. In this post we’re covering the components of this system, in our previous post, DIY Solar Guide, you’ll find everything you need to start setting up your at-home or on the road solar system. Here’s what you need for a truly minimalist solar power system.

Components

  • 100 amp hour deep cycle battery
  • 100-200 watt solar panel
  • 20 amp MPPT charge controller
  • 750-watt inverter

This specific system is pretty easy to expand if you need more power. All you’ll need to do is wire another solar panel in series and purchase a larger battery. When it comes to the overall cost of this system, you can expect to spend anywhere from $1,200 to $2,000 depending on the battery you choose. Lead cell batteries will be significantly cheaper than lithium-ion batteries, but they likely won’t hold a charge for as long or last as long.

Solar Panels

While batteries are an essential part of solar energy systems, you won’t have any power to fill the battery if you don’t first get a solar panel. For a rugged and on the go system, there are two options to choose from. The first is a glass solar panel and the second is a flexible solar panel.

Glass Solar Panel

How to set up a small solar

Glass solar panels are the most common type of solar panels and they’re much cheaper than flexible solar panels. Glass panels can last quite a few years and typically provide the most return on investment. Some of the drawbacks of these panels include their weight and difficulty in mounting. If you were to try and mount them to the top of a car you’d definitely have a bit of a struggle, to say the least.

Flexible Solar Panel

Flexible solar panels are easier to mount, more lightweight, and can be mounted flush to the roof of a vehicle. The downside of a flexible panel is that it’s much more expensive and they don’t last nearly as long. So, while it’s not ideal when it comes to price point and longevity of life, flexible panels offer more versatility.

While we are solar experts, we did get a little help putting this post together and found mobile-solarpower.com to have some awesome resources, including their own guide to a minimalist setup.

If you’re looking for a more permanent solar setup for your home or business, we’d love to hear from you! At Sun Badger Solar we provide all things solar and can give you a free estimate for what it would cost to power your home with solar. Reach out to us today to learn more!

Try these budget alternatives to get the benefits of solar energy without the high price.

Alina Bradford has been writing how-tos, tech articles and more for almost two decades. She currently writes for CNET’s Smart Home Section, MTVNews’ tech section and for Live Science’s reference section. Follow her on Twitter.

While solar panels have been getting cheaper for years, they’re still a big investment. Even though there are ways to make solar panels more affordable and they’re almost bound to save you money in the long run it can be a tough decision to make . If making your entire home solar is out of budget, you can still add smaller and less expensive solar elements that help save on electricity.

Let’s take a look at your options.

Outdoor solar lights

There are a multitude of stationary and portable lights that can run on solar power that you can easily add to your home.

Start your solar journey in your yard. I personally have solar walkway lights by my front door and solar twinkle lights decorating my garden. The installation process for these types of lights are pretty simple — you just place the lights where you want them and make sure the solar panel is turned toward the sky.

While lighting your yard, don’t forget about your porch light. For less than $50, you can grab a solar option like the Gama Sonic Solar Outdoor Wall Lantern ($42).

Device chargers

Your phones and tablets need a daily recharge, so why not make the energy source green? Solar power banks, like the Portable Solar Power Bank ($15) and the Kiizon Power Bank ($30) come with USB ports that you can use to charge your phone, as well as other small gadgets. The best part is that these banks are portable, so you’re never tethered to a wall outlet.

The downside is that the solar power banks charge your devices slower than a wall outlet. Luckily the banks can recharge with sunlight during the day and store that energy to charge your devices at night — when you don’t really need them to charge quickly.

No matter which solar-powered charger you choose, look for one that can charge your devices while also recharging itself in the sunlight. Also, check to see how many items it can charge at once and if it protects your device from being overcharged.

23 Tips to Help You Save Money on Your Electric Bill

Power small appliances with solar energy

Don’t stop at powering your devices with solar. You can also power your small kitchen appliances — like your coffee maker, toaster, Instant Pot, slow cooker or sandwich maker — without plugging them into a wall. While the monetary savings on your electricity bill will be small, the planet will still benefit from your use of renewable energy. Plus, during blackouts you’ll still be able to cook.

All you’ll need is a 25-watt power bank you can stick in a window and a DC-to-AC inverter to make it happen. The inverter simply plugs into the power bank, so it’s very easy to set up.

If you want an all-in-one solution, Goal Zero makes solar power kits with large storage batteries. It has everything you need to power your small appliance.

Once you have it set up, just plug your small appliance into the power bank. They’ll run just like normal. The only drawback is that you can only power one appliance at a time, unless you have multiple power banks.

Try a solar water heater kit

Your typical water heater uses around $440 dollars worth of electricity per year. You can save that money by going solar. There are solar water heater kits you can buy for $250 to $1,200, so they pay for themselves very quickly.

There are three different types of solar water heaters. One thing they all tend to have in common is that they heat the water and then store it in insulated storage systems to keep the water warm until it is needed.

Batch collectors, also called integrated collector storage systems, are the oldest types of solar water heaters and they are still popular because they need very little sunshine to heat water and they are simple to install.

You likely already know that anything painted black absorbs sunlight and gets hot quickly. Batch collectors use large black tanks or tubes to collect solar heat to warm the water inside of them.

Flat-plate collector water heaters have a heat absorbing plate that collects heat from the sun, then transfers the heat to copper tubes. As the tubes heat up, so does the water inside them. The plates are usually installed on top of the roof to get the maximum amount of light during the day. The problem with this style of heater is it isn’t as dependable to heat water as consistently as some of the other choices.

Evacuated tube collectors are considered the most productive solar water heaters. Glass or metal tubes full of water or heat transfer fluid are placed inside larger glass tubes, creating a vacuum. In this vacuum, very little heat is lost, so the water is heated very efficiently. Another benefit is it can even be used in outdoor temperatures as low as 40 F, according to the Environmental Protection Agency.

Some things to look for when buying a solar water heater kit are durability and the amount of water the heater can heat up at a time. When it comes to durability, be sure that any outside components are hail-proof, especially if you’re putting a plate on your roof. For the flow rate, look for heaters that can provide at least 2.1 gallons of hot water per minute.

Decide whether do-it-yourself solar panels are worth the extra effort.

If you’re a homeowner, it’s not hard to see the appeal of solar panels. Whether you are conscious of your carbon emissions or your budget (or both!), installing DIY solar panels can shrink your impact on the planet and lower the monthly energy bill .

But while the DIY solar panels can be an elegant and eco-friendly option in some situations, they aren’t a one-size-fits-all solution for everyone’s energy-related issues. Below, we’ll walk you through the pros and cons of undergoing the DIY project of installing your own solar panels. And we’ll help you decide if you want to take on the task or pursue another option like a solar power purchase agreement or having solar panels installed professionally.

Costs

One of the primary appeals of any DIY project, other than the satisfaction of a job well done, is saving money. When you choose to install solar panels on your property yourself, it means that you won’t have to pay for anyone else’s expertise or labor, which typically adds a considerable amount of cost to the project.

According to research conducted by the US Department of Energy’s National Renewable Energy Laboratory, labor typically accounts for about 10% of the total price tag for installing solar panels. Given the average cost for installing solar panels is $18,500, that means a savings of nearly $2,000. That’s a significant amount of money to keep in your bank account.

However, there is a trade-off. If you aren’t paying someone else to do the work of installation, it means you are doing it yourself. That means a significant amount of manual labor and time spent to set up the system, which you’ll be doing on your own. You also may not be able to claim certain incentives offered to homeowners who install solar panels. Some of the tax rebates that states offer for going green require a certified company to do the installation for you. To make sure you’re actually saving money, it’s worth checking into these incentives and how much they will save you.

Installation

It is possible to do the process of installing solar panels on your own. There are solar systems designed specifically for DIYers that, while sometimes time-consuming, should be more than doable.

It’s worth noting, though, that many DIY solar panels are not designed to hook up to the traditional energy grid. They are designed more for off-grid purposes, like powering RVs or other spaces that are not typically served by a standard utility. If you are only looking to supplement your traditional energy source, DIY solar panels can get the job done. If you are looking to power your entire home with solar power, it might be better to trust an expert.

Installing a full solar energy system requires at least some knowledge of electrician work so you can properly handle the wiring and other technical aspects. You will likely have to work in relatively dangerous settings, including doing work on your roof and working with buried wires. The stakes are high for a mishap; crossed wires can result in malfunction and even electrical fires. It also may be illegal for you to do this work without a professional’s help, depending on your municipality’s zoning laws.

As always, consult a qualified professional if you have any questions about your home install project.

As mentioned, most DIY solar panel projects are not meant to replace traditional energy sources. They offer the ability to supplement power from the grid or power smaller spaces like an RV or a tiny home. But for a full-size home, a professionally installed solar system is likely best.

There are some settings that are ideal for a DIY solar project. If you have a garage or shed that requires electricity, you can go off the grid and keep it powered with solar panels. DIY solar panels often offer a bit more flexibility in size and placement, so they can be set up in an alignment that works best for you in these settings. DIY solar panels are also useful as a backup option if you were to lose power for the electrical grid, as long as you have a functional solar battery to store the generated power .

  • How to set up a small solar

How to set up a small solar

How to set up a small solar

How to set up a small solar

How to set up a small solar

Installing your DIY home solar power system is much less expensive than hiring a professional contractor to do the work. But even with today’s available incentives, the cost of a photovoltaic system is a significant investment.

What if your budget won’t accommodate a system large enough to meet all of your power needs?

Switching to solar power doesn’t have to be an all-or-nothing venture. In fact, you can start out on a smaller scale and add to your DIY home solar array when your budget allows.

Using DIY Home Solar to Supply Part of Your Energy Needs

When you design your DIY solar kit or custom system, you are in control.

You don’t have to choose a large system, sized to supply all of your home’s power needs. Instead, you can opt for whatever size you can comfortably afford. Using the sun’s free energy for even part of your electricity needs will still save money.

Your home is already connected to the utility grid — that’s where your electricity comes from. When you install a DIY solar system, you don’t lose that connection. It’s there as a backup for those times that your photovoltaic panels do not produce enough energy for your home, and for nighttime electricity.

If you choose a smaller solar array, the grid power will kick in and supply the additional electricity your household needs.

Micro-Inverters Allow for Future DIY Home Solar Expansion

Your DIY solar energy system will use an inverter to convert the sun’s direct current (DC) to alternating current (AC) power, the type your home uses. While a string inverter is the less expensive choice, you may want to choose micro-inverters instead, if you plan on adding future panels to your photovoltaic array.

Installing a string inverter will limit the expansion possibilities for your DIY solar array. This type of inverter converts the DC power of a string or series of photovoltaic panels, and every model has a maximum capacity. Once you reach the maximum, you can’t add more panels without replacing the inverter or buying a second one.

With micro-inverters, DIY solar expansion is easy. Each inverter is designed to convert the power of just one photovoltaic panel. So when you want to add another panel, you simply add another micro-inverter.

Additional Considerations for Expanding Your DIY Home Solar Array

If you decide to start smaller with your photovoltaic system, plan your expansion carefully. We recommend using panels of the same make and model (whenever possible) for an expansion. If yours are no longer in production, however, you can select components that will be compatible with your existing system.

Before you expand your system, be sure to check with your electrician to determine whether any modifications will be required to the wiring system. Finally, ensure that you don’t need to update your original building permit or get a new one for the expansion.

Whether you want to expand a system at your home or install your own PV array with the intent of expanding in the future, Solar GOODs is the place to go. We’re your DIY solar superstore, with everything you need to design and install your solar kit or custom system. Visit us online today to learn more about how much money you can save with a DIY home solar energy system.

  • ‘)” data-event=”social share” data-info=”Pinterest” aria-label=”Share on Pinterest”>
  • ‘)” data-event=”social share” data-info=”Reddit” aria-label=”Share on Reddit”>
  • ‘)” data-event=”social share” data-info=”Flipboard” aria-label=”Share on Flipboard”>

How to set up a small solar

Related

  • Remodeling Contractor Business Tips
  • How Water Damage Restoration Companies Make Money
  • Utilities Needed for a Business
  • What Kinds of Business Licenses Are There?
  • How to Start a Renewable Business

Solar power is one of the cornerstones of the renewable energy sector. There are many opportunities for lucrative business startups. Opportunities exist in every area of solar power, from installation and repairs to sales and service. To start a solar power business, find a niche in the industry that isn’t saturated in your area, and establish yourself as an expert when it comes to solar energy rebates, home energy needs and ability to work with utility companies.

Select a Market Niche

Do some research on the biggest needs in your area. Some solar niches are at saturation points in local markets. While some solar companies might offer more than one product or service, most focus on a niche that is underserved and that they can excel at.

Seller of solar equipment: Solar equipment is more than just the solar panels. This area covers everything from replacement batteries to solar water heater products. There is also a growing trend for personal solar items, such as backpack panels, phone chargers and other novelty items based on solar power.

Distributor: Work with manufacturers to find distribution channels for new and existing products. Become the middleman between manufacturer and installer or retail location.

Installation of products: Solar panel installation is a heavily marketed area because of the extensive rebates offered to homeowners. More than just solar panels, solar water heaters, pool heaters and ancillary solar needs are served by installation experts.

Service and maintenance: Once the products are installed, consumers must maintain them regularly to keep their systems working optimally. Maintenance includes cleaning panels, assessing battery function and checking wiring.

Required Business Licenses

Check with your state about the required licenses to install solar power. Not every state requires licensing. Some states require providers to have an electrician’s or plumber’s license or both. A growing number of states have established a solar contractor license that focuses on the duties of a solar power contractor under an electrician or plumbing category.

Start with your local building code department to see what license is required in your area.

Investigate Available Certifications

There is also a voluntary certification offered through the North American Board of Certified Energy Practitioners (NABCEP) and Green-e. These certifications are based on experience, training and passing an exam. The benefit to self-certification is it gives you a more professional appearance when approaching clients and helps establish standards of excellence among solar power providers.

Establish the Business Entity

Depending on the niche, you can look to buy into a franchise. Whether you buy a franchise or start independently, register the business with the secretary of state, obtain a federal tax identification number from the Internal Revenue Service, and obtain any seller’s permits or other state requirements through the local franchise tax board or state comptroller.

Obtain Business Insurance

Obtain the proper types of insurance. At minimum, you need a general liability insurance policy for the business. Most policies for contractors provide a minimum of $500,000 in general liability coverage. Review the amount of business property and inventory you keep as well, and make sure there is enough coverage for loss due to fire, theft, vandalism and other common perils.

If your company has full-time employees, you also need workers’ compensation insurance. Get commercial auto coverage for any vans, trucks and sales vehicles used for your business.

Become the Expert in Your Niche

Being the expert is more than just knowing your products inside and out. Understanding how government rebates and incentive programs work is a huge part of how solar power companies market themselves and sell services. Consumers are more likely to buy something being paid for by someone else, and if you can show them the incentives, you improve your opportunities for client acquisition.

Network with other solar power experts in your area who aren’t in your niche. Become valued resources and referral networks for each other.

To most of us, solar power still seems like a thing of the future. Yeah, we know some people live off the grid with them, and some folks can afford to line their roofs and heat their pools with them. Not most of us.

But it turns out that you can generate real, usable solar power in your very own home (or wherever), and it’ll cost you less than $300. What’s the catch? Oh, nothing. You just have to build the generator yourself.

And however am I supposed to do that, you might ask? Well, by following this handy 8 step guide from rain.org, of course.

Get ready for solar power.

Building Your Very Own Solar Power Generator in 8 Easy Steps

1. Buy Yourself a Small Solar Panel

For about $100 you should be able to get one rated at 12 volts or better (look for 16 volts) at an RV or marine supplies store or from Greenbatteries Store.

2. Buy Yourself a Battery

We recommend rechargeable batteries from these green companies: Greenbatteries Store and Batteries.com. Get any size deep cycle 12 volt lead/acid or gel battery. You need the deep cycle battery for continuous use. The kind in your car is a cranking battery—just for starting an engine. Look for bargains, the cheapest ones should cost about $50-60.

3. Get a battery box to put it in for $10.

(This is good for covering up the exposed terminals in case there are children about If you going to install the system in a pump shed, cabin, or boat, skip this.) Buy a 12 volt DC meter. Radio Shack has them for about $25.

4. Buy a DC input.

I like the triple inlet model which you can find at a car parts store in the cigarette lighter parts section for about $10. This is enough to power DC appliances, and there are many commercially available, like fans, one-pint water boilers, lights, hair dryers, baby bottle warmers, and vacuum cleaners. Many cassette players, answering machines, and other electrical appliances are DC already and with the right cable will run straight off the box.

5. Invest in an Inverter.

If you want to run AC appliances, you will have to invest in an inverter. This will convert the stored DC power in the battery into AC power for most of your household appliances. I bought a 115 volt 140 watt inverter made by Power-to-Go at Pep Boys for $50. Count up the number of watts you’ll be using (e.g., a small color television(=60 watts) with a VCR(=22 watts), you’ll need 82 watts). A variety of cheap inverters from 100 watts to 3000 watts can be had from Lane’s Professional Car Products. Type “inverters” into his search bar.

6. Attach meter and DC input.

Use a drill to attach the meter and DC input to the top of the box.

7. Use insulated Wire to Attach the Meter to the Wingnut Terminals on the Battery.

Connect the negative (-) pole first. Only handle one wire at a time. Connect the DC inlet to the battery in the same way. Connect the solar panel to the battery in the same way.

8. Close the Lid

I use a bungee cord to keep it tight. Put the solar panel in the sun. It takes 5-8 hours to charge a dead battery; 1-3 hours to top off a weak one. It will run radios, fans, and small wattage lights all night, or give you about 5 hours of continuous use at 115 volt AC, or about an hour boiling water. This system may be added on to with larger panels, inverters, and batteries.

That’s quite a project that’ll kill an idle Sunday afternoon—and power a good deal of your electrical equipment. And save you a bunch of money. Happy solar building.

How to set up a small solar

Synopsis

  • Abc Small
  • Abc Normal
  • Abc Large

Electric power is a vital necessity for a variety of domestic, commercial and industrial applications. Each of these applications demands electric power that is compatible with the applications. Traditional methods of generating electric power include hydropower, thermal power and nuclear power. These days other forms of generating electricity such as solar power and wind power are becoming popular because of the renewable nature of the primary source of energy. A popular way of providing electricity drawn from solar energy is to set up a commercial solar power plant in India.

Working of solar power plant

Typically, the working of a solar power plant comprises a bank of solar panels receiving sun’s energy which is converted into DC electric power by photovoltaic (PV) effect produced by the PV cells in the panels. This DC electric power is fed to a battery which stores the energy. This DC power is converted to AC power by means of an inverter and the AC output of the inverter feeds the mains from where various applications draw electric power.

Factors to be considered
A solar power plant setup suitable for commercial application needs to be carefully planned so as to ensure the investment made on the solar power plant is properly utilized. In order to build a commercial solar power plant the following factors should be considered:

Output Required

The first thing to be determined is the load required to run the various machinery and equipment in the commercial establishment. This is important to determine the number of solar panels required to generate the power needed at the establishment. To begin, the average daily load is to be calculated which is expressed in watts. In addition, the type of power required – single phase, three phase, AC or DC – should also be determined.

For instance, if a solar panel can produce 300 W when exposed to the sun for 1 hour then it produces 2400 W in 8 hours of sunshine. This means that this solar panel can produce 2.4 kWh per day of 8 hours sufficient to run lighting and electrical appliances in a regular Indian household. However, for commercial applications the requirement would be higher and more panels are required. If a small scale unit consumes 240 kWh of electricity every day then the solar power plant would require 100 solar panels to produce the electricity required per day.

If each panel chosen is of 77 x 39 inches size (approximately 21 sq ft) then the area required to house 100 panels would be 2100 sq ft. This could be a rooftop or a backyard. Additionally, if the weight of each solar panel is about 50 lb then this would mean that the rooftop or backyard must support about 2 tons of overall weight.

This is important because the cost of solar panels constitutes 50-60% of the total cost of the commercial solar power plant.

Battery
The electricity generated from the solar panels can be used to charge a battery/batteries attached to the system. Lead acid batteries are the most widely used batteries and are generally available in 6 V or 12 V.

Inverter

The process of solar power plant involves the generation of DC power from solar panels and this needs to be converted into AC power so that it can be used to power various machinery in a business unit. An inverter serves that purpose and more importantly, the power being supplied has to match the voltage and frequency required by the industrial unit’s machinery and equipment.

Network
In order to ensure the flow of required electric power from the solar power plant the various components need to be interconnected through adequate cables, various types of switches, fuses, protection devices and earthing cables. The output from the solar power plant can be fed into the mains of a business unit so as to provide required electric power whenever needed.

Types of solar power plants
There are three types of commercial solar power plants – on-grid, off-grid and hybrid – that can be developed to suit certain types of requirements.

The on-grid type is compatible with the AC power of the grid supply. This system supplies power directly from the solar power plant during day time and if the supply is insufficient it allows supply from the grid. This system also enables the earning of revenue by supplying excess power generated to the grid through net metering.

The off-grid system is independent of the grid supply. This is useful when grid supply is erratic or when there is no grid supply at all.

The hybrid system is a combination of off-grid and on-grid system. This offers many advantages such as acting as standby power and generating revenues when excess power is supplied to the grid.

As can be seen from the above, there are many factors to be considered to set up a commercial solar power plant in India. These factors also determine the commercial solar panels cost in India and it is imperative that all factors be considered before installing a solar power plant.

Many factors determine the commercial solar panels cost in India and it is imperative that all factors be considered before installing a solar power plant.

Related

  • Amorphous solar panels: With tech advancements, these can someday be integrated onto clothing items
  • Solar heating panels: Systems that reduce energy bills and enable lower carbon footprints
  • Silicon solar panels: These can become a source of free electricity
  • Thin film solar panel: Most suitable for applications with large rooftops or wide open spaces
  • Solar array: Panels that can be used for heating, power generation and lighting

Electric power is a vital necessity for a variety of domestic, commercial and industrial applications. Each of these applications demands electric power that is compatible with the applications. Traditional methods of generating electric power include hydropower, thermal power and nuclear power. These days other forms of generating electricity such as solar power and wind power are becoming popular because of the renewable nature of the primary source of energy. A popular way of providing electricity drawn from solar energy is to set up a commercial solar power plant in India.

Working of solar power plant
Typically, the working of a solar power plant comprises a bank of solar panels receiving sun’s energy which is converted into DC electric power by photovoltaic (PV) effect produced by the PV cells in the panels. This DC electric power is fed to a battery which stores the energy. This DC power is converted to AC power by means of an inverter and the AC output of the inverter feeds the mains from where various applications draw electric power.

Factors to be considered
A solar power plant setup suitable for commercial application needs to be carefully planned so as to ensure the investment made on the solar power plant is properly utilized. In order to build a commercial solar power plant the following factors should be considered:

Output Required
The first thing to be determined is the load required to run the various machinery and equipment in the commercial establishment. This is important to determine the number of solar panels required to generate the power needed at the establishment. To begin, the average daily load is to be calculated which is expressed in watts. In addition, the type of power required – single phase, three phase, AC or DC – should also be determined.

For instance, if a solar panel can produce 300 W when exposed to the sun for 1 hour then it produces 2400 W in 8 hours of sunshine. This means that this solar panel can produce 2.4 kWh per day of 8 hours sufficient to run lighting and electrical appliances in a regular Indian household. However, for commercial applications the requirement would be higher and more panels are required. If a small scale unit consumes 240 kWh of electricity every day then the solar power plant would require 100 solar panels to produce the electricity required per day.

If each panel chosen is of 77 x 39 inches size (approximately 21 sq ft) then the area required to house 100 panels would be 2100 sq ft. This could be a rooftop or a backyard. Additionally, if the weight of each solar panel is about 50 lb then this would mean that the rooftop or backyard must support about 2 tons of overall weight.

This is important because the cost of solar panels constitutes 50-60% of the total cost of the commercial solar power plant.

Battery
The electricity generated from the solar panels can be used to charge a battery/batteries attached to the system. Lead acid batteries are the most widely used batteries and are generally available in 6 V or 12 V.

Inverter
The process of solar power plant involves the generation of DC power from solar panels and this needs to be converted into AC power so that it can be used to power various machinery in a business unit. An inverter serves that purpose and more importantly, the power being supplied has to match the voltage and frequency required by the industrial unit’s machinery and equipment.

Network
In order to ensure the flow of required electric power from the solar power plant the various components need to be interconnected through adequate cables, various types of switches, fuses, protection devices and earthing cables. The output from the solar power plant can be fed into the mains of a business unit so as to provide required electric power whenever needed.

Types of solar power plants
There are three types of commercial solar power plants – on-grid, off-grid and hybrid – that can be developed to suit certain types of requirements.

The on-grid type is compatible with the AC power of the grid supply. This system supplies power directly from the solar power plant during day time and if the supply is insufficient it allows supply from the grid. This system also enables the earning of revenue by supplying excess power generated to the grid through net metering.

The off-grid system is independent of the grid supply. This is useful when grid supply is erratic or when there is no grid supply at all.

The hybrid system is a combination of off-grid and on-grid system. This offers many advantages such as acting as standby power and generating revenues when excess power is supplied to the grid.

As can be seen from the above, there are many factors to be considered to set up a commercial solar power plant in India. These factors also determine the commercial solar panels cost in India and it is imperative that all factors be considered before installing a solar power plant.

How to set up a small solar

Renewable energy increased 575% in the last 4 years in New York City, with solar panels remaining one of the leading sources New Yorkers rely on for their clean energy. Some homes can’t install solar due to roof or shade issues, thus creating a space in the market for solar farms. Solar farms are becoming popular among people in this niche who have issues installing solar or just generally dislike the look of solar panels.

Solar farms are made up of acres of solar panels leased by landowners to people who do not want, or are unable to put, solar panels on their own homes. Leasing your land for solar can potentially be a fruitful business that adds to yearly revenue if the land is receiving a lot of sunlight. However, there are several key factors to understand before jumping into a solar farm.

How to set up a small solar

Things to consider before starting a solar farm:

How Much Does Solar Installation Cost Per Acre?

Typically a solar farm has around 1 megawatt (mW) of land to power about two hundred households around the area. The cost of installing 1 mW of solar panels would run the landowner around one million dollars. However, many farms are a lot smaller and require less money to install solar. This depends on the land and location of the solar panel installation . Each case would be different depending on the project and scale the landowner would want to build at.

How Suitable is Your Land?

Land that is suitable for solar farming has many different requirements. First up is a sunny platform for the solar panels to rest on. Having flat land will allow more energy to be absorbed by the solar panels and is generally preferable – especially when the land is facing south towards the sun. The sun energy in the area can be tested with tools like PVWatts to see how much energy the land is able to produce.

Knowing The Land

If you are someone who wants to start a solar farm , get to know the area around your land. Learn where the power lines and electricals will be placed to prevent damage towards the farming capabilities of the land. Know where the access roads are to prevent damage towards other parts of the land such as drainage due to excess water going onto the fields or any other damage that can be done to your property. Also, understand what is around the area of the farm to know what other buildings may cause problems with either the solar installation or even just getting light onto the panels. As a potential future solar farm owner, understanding what may cause shade to the panels is key to successful power maximization.

Knowing Your Community

Understanding the people who live around you will give you a better understanding of who actually wants to switch to renewable resources. Being able to look into neighbors or communities that are interested in switching will give you a better idea of who wants to lease and how long people would like to lease for.

Understanding the Taxes

Solar farms are just like regular farms with different regulations and taxes. It is considered a real property once the panels have been permanently put in place. The land is taxable unless it qualifies for any exemptions. There will be a five year rollback tax period for those who use the land for agricultural purposes. There is also another exemption for a fifteen-year period towards real property taxes from the land increasing in value for certain qualifying systems. Although, after fifteen years, there can be an effect on the tax liability going forward.

Removal of the Solar Panels

Probably the most tedious part of the whole solar process is when you finally decide to take down the solar panels and consider making the land agricultural again. The removal of the solar panels should be a part of the contract with the solar company. Determine who is responsible for removing the panels and who is responsible for the cost of the panel removals in the contract. Dismantling costs should be covered early in the contract to protect the land owner from any extra costs that may be associated with the removal process.

As the trend of clean and reusable resources continues to rise and gain traction, more people will likely switch to a clean energy source. Being at the front lines of leasing energy to homeowners gives you a serious head start.

By Kasey Liu

To speak to a team member at YSG about using your land for a solar farm, call us now at 212.389.9215 or send an email .

Let’s face it, installing an off-grid solar power system to a small cabin, shed or barn can be a bit of a challenge for anyone unfamiliar with solar power.

For starters, there is the task of figuring out how and where to attach the solar panels. And then of course, figuring out everything else – from batteries, to wiring, controlling the charge and more.

One thing is for sure, we certainly qualified as rookies when it came to installing solar power to our tiny cabin at the farm. ( See : Tiny Off-Grid Cabin Project)

Other than a few small solar lighting projects, we had never tackled installing “real” solar power.

And by real power, we mean enough energy to run indoor and outdoor lighting, a coffee maker, laptops, TV, and a few other small appliances when needed.

We knew although our system wouldn’t need to be huge, it had to contain the basics:

  • Solar panels for charging
  • A battery or battery bank for storage
  • A charge controller to control the battery charge
  • Wiring / electrical panel / outlets

And we also knew it would have to be easy enough for two “solar rookies” to figure out.

As you will see below, the project actually turned out to be quite simple to install. And that includes an easy and economical way to install solar panels to a roof as well.

The Answer To Installing Off-Grid Solar Power With Ease

Assembling and wiring all of the various components of a solar system can be a complicated process for a novice. Not to mention, it can get quite expensive. Especially if you make any mistakes along the way.

For us, the ultimate answer was to use a component Kodiak/Apex solar panel & generator system from a company called Inergy.

The panels and wiring all fit and plug together with ease. And in place of using a separate controller and battery system, a single small battery/generator unit placed in the cabin handles storing and dispersing the electric.

More importantly, it eliminated the need for us to install an electrical panel and outlets in such a small space. For us, it was a huge savings in time and money.

Making it even better, the battery power pack and outlet unit is portable. Meaning, when we need to, we can easily just lift it up and take it anywhere on the farm where we might need instant remote power.

Here is a quick look at how we installed our system, including a simple and inexpensive way to install solar panels to any roof.

Installing The Solar Panels To The Roof – Without Spending A Fortune!

Any solar power application starts of course with solar panels. Without them, nothing can ever be charged or used.

We chose to use (2) 150 watt solar panels to power our system. The two panels are enough to charge our battery/generator system completely in about 8 hours of decent sunlight.

We did a lot of research before installing our panels. And honestly, the more research we did, the more confused we became.

There are so many methods and products to install panels. You can use brackets, special clamps, or even complete rail systems to install multiple panels.

One thing is for sure, most of them are incredibly expensive!

So we decided to install our panels using 2 x 4’s and a little DIY ingenuity. Although are roof is metal, this method would work for a shingled roof as well.

The Install

We first installed an aluminum “L” channel on the back of the two panels to connect them together. Each panel had an electrical connector as well that pig-tailed them together.

Using small bolts and screws, we attached it to the panel, leaving the other portion of the “L” as a cleat.

How to set up a small solar

We then installed (4) 2 x 4’s onto the roof with 3″ long galvanized roofing screws. Each 2 x 4 measured 36″ in length, just slightly shorter than the panels and the “L” cleat.

As an added precaution, we used a silicone sealer on the back of the wood to help keep any water out as the screw went into the metal roof and the studs below.

From there, we simply slipped the outside of the “L” cleat over the edge of the wood.

To complete the panel install, we ran screws through the aluminum channel into the edge of the 2 x 4’s. And just like that, our 2 solar panels were in place for a grand total of about $5 in wood!

Getting Power Inside The Cabin

From there, the rest of the solar install was a cinch!

Since the Inergy units are plug and use, we simply ran the heavy duty charging cord from the panels into the cabin.

All that was left was to plug it into the solar generator / battery pack, and we had full power!

The generator pack has 6 standard outlets, 2 USB charging ports and even a 30 amp outlet. And it has worked beautifully in the cabin.

We use it nightly to power our outside lights, and we have used it inside for everything from lights to making coffee. It has even helped to create an instant pot dinner in the cabin with ease!

Here is to a little off-grid cabin living! Jim and Mary

How to set up a small solar

How much does it cost to build a solar farm?

Renewable energy is expected to account for more than half of global electricity by 2035, with solar power playing a leading role.

From ground-mount solar developments, to rooftop solar schemes and the emerging area of floating solar PV, solar is the third biggest renewable power source in the world, with more than 570GW installed capacity by the end of 2019.

In the UK, solar farms are now a familiar sight. There continues to be a constant flow of new planning applications, with new sites totalling 2.6GW being added to the pipeline in the first six months of 2020 alone.

So, what considerations need to be made when developing a solar farm, what might a project of this nature cost and how might one be funded?

What is a solar farm?

Solar farms – also referred to as utility-scale or grid-scale solar pv plants – comprise of rows of solar panels that are placed on special frames and fixed within the ground. In the UK, they will typically cover an area ranging in size from 1acre to 100+ acres. However, in countries including China, India and the US, they’ve been known to reach sizes of more than 13,000 acres.

The ideal location to build a solar farm is on land that is flat, or on a south-facing slope. Due to their scale, the clean electricity generated by a solar farm will usually be fed back into the local electricity grid, so suitable sites will also need to have a grid connection. Being in close proximity to overhead cables and a substation is usually a good indicator that a connection application may be successful.

For every 5MW of capacity installed, a solar farm will typically produce enough energy to power more than 1,350 homes, while saving 1,200 tonnes of carbon annually – based on an average annual consumption of 3,600 kWh of electricity per home. Around 20 acres of land is usually required for every 5MW of capacity installed.

How to set up a small solarWhy are solar farms so popular?

Solar installations are silent to run, unobtrusive and require little maintenance. Along with advances that have been made in the technology itself and the flexibility of its application, a key factor behind the strong growth of the solar market is cost – prices having plummeted by around 82% since 2010.

In the case of farms and agricultural holdings, solar farms provide a number of additional advantages. The land used for a solar farm can continue to be used for the grazing of small livestock and can easily be converted back to its original form in the future.

The capabilities of specialist operations and maintenance services have also increased. Such services can be used to monitor the performance of solar assets, and as well as acting reactively to rectify any dips in output, will carry out proactive and predictive maintenance that can help enhance performance and return on investment.

The use of energy storage technology, such as battery storage units, which can be co-located alongside solar farm developments is also helping increase their efficiency. Battery storage units can store green power, releasing it when it is most needed. This ensures that as much renewable energy as possible is being captured and used. They can also open the door to new revenue streams by helping National Grid to balance supply and demand.

Funding a solar farm

Every project is different and the overall cost of an individual solar farm will be influenced by a number of factors, including:

  • Size/capacity of the site
  • Location
  • The solar technology and other components used
  • Whether there’s an existing grid connection
  • EPC contractor used
  • Type of Operations & Maintenance contract put in place
  • Ongoing security measures implemented

With other variables also impacting on the cost, including events such as COVID-19, it is very difficult to provide a general guide to the potential development costs with any real accuracy. If you are considering using land for a solar farm, it is best to speak to an experienced developer who can assess your requirements and the best potential use of the land available.

The three main funding routes are:

  1. Self-funded

Landowners with sufficient capital available may choose to self-fund a project and would receive the full benefit of the technologies installed and any revenue generated.

Many energy companies operate Power Purchase Agreements (PPAs) for generators who meet certain installed capacity thresholds. These are perfect for generators and also ‘prosumers’ who are both a generator and consumer, as they allow the sale of any electricity that isn’t used.

  1. Part-funded

Another funding option is a partially funded model, whereby an agreement is drawn up with a developer for how the costs, revenues and other benefits will be split. This is not such a common approach with landowners, but it is a possibility for certain landowners interested in having a stake in the development.

  1. Land lease

The most popular option for landowners is to lease land to a developer in return for a guaranteed long-term rental income. At Anesco, for example, we offer competitive rental payments, which are also RPI linked. This reduces risk while guaranteeing the landowner an income stream for the term of the agreement. In some instances, a further payment linked to site revenue may also be available.

Rental income is usually inflation-linked, with many developers looking to secure agreements of up to 40 years, or potentially longer. Developers may also want rights to install battery storage alongside the solar array, either from the outset, or a later date, so this should be factored into discussions about rental payments.

Large-scale solar power on the rise

The number of solar farms under development in Australia has exploded in recent years. After several years of market and policy uncertainty and with costs coming down, solar farm developers and investors are now feeling confident about the prospects of medium and large-scale solar power.

Solar farms are distinguished from standard commercial solar installations in their size, location and purpose; solar farms are generally in the megawatt-scale (as opposed to kilowatt-scale), are ground-mounted as opposed to roof mounted, and will either be built to sell energy into the grid or to a designated purchaser – usually heavy energy user or electricity retailer.

Solar Choice has developed or is currently developing of a number of solar farms ranging in size from 2 megawatts to 200 megawatts throughout Australia, including the Mount Majura Solar Farm in the ACT and the 2GW Bulli Creek Solar Farm in Queensland.

NexTracker single-axis tracker at Mount Majura Solar Farm.

Solar farm rental incomes vs owning the solar farm

For landowners, most straightforward way to benefit from a solar farm is a long-term rental payment for use of their land. Because developing, paying for and maintaining a solar farm out of your own pocket may be expensive and the risks involved potentially quite high, it is generally better to leave this part of the process to an experienced developer.

For those intent on paying for and owning the solar farm themselves, it’s important to consider who will purchase the energy generated. There are essentially three options:

  • You will consume the energy directly yourself. This is really only an option if you have heavy daytime electricity loads, e.g. on an industrial farm or other large facility.
  • You will have a power purchase agreement (PPA) with another entity. In this case, you will have reached an agreement with a large energy consumer or electricity retailer to purchase the energy that your solar farm produces at a predetermined rate. PPAs generally require time, skill and experience to negotiate successfully.
  • You will sell the energy into the grid / on the National Electricity Market (NEM). If the site of your proposed solar farm is on the east coast of Australia or part of one of the other, smaller grids throughout the country you may consider simply building the farm and trying your luck with revenues on the open or regulated market. This approach is the riskiest of the three, as wholesale electricity markets can be volatile and unpredictable.

Solar farms: What else do you need to consider?

Circumstances vary from region to region and from property to property. If you are interested in owning and running a solar farm, Solar Choice can offer you professional consultancy and management advice on your project.

You can register your interest with us by filling out this form.

We sell a range of DIY Solar Power Systems suitable for camping, cabins or week-enders, or energy conscious Spartans.

These systems are designed to be easy on the budget and are not meant to run air conditioners or similar. To get an idea what you can run on these systems please read the DIY Solar System information pages and fill in the corresponding appliance form to find out whether or not a DIY Solar Kit will suit your needs.

All systems include at least one solar panel, solar battery charge regulator, deep cycle battery, fuses, breakers, sockets & cables. Some even come with battery enclosure. Our systems are “plug n play” – no technician required!

How to set up a small solar

How to set up a small solar

How to set up a small solar

How to set up a small solar

How to set up a small solar

Categories

+ – Best Sellers

  • DIY Solar Kits
  • $ Specials

+ – Pumping

  • Bore Pumps
  • DC Pumps
  • Fire Fighting
  • Household 230V
  • Swimming Pool
  • Parts & Accessories

+ – Solar Components

  • Batteries
  • Battery Accessories
  • Battery Chargers
  • Generators
  • Inverters
  • Inverter Accessories
  • Meters
  • Pre-wired Base Kits
  • Regulators
  • Regulator Accessories
  • Solar Panels

+ – Install Hardware

  • Cables
  • Cable Accessories
  • Distribution Boxes
  • Fuses & Breakers
  • Junction Boxes
  • Labels & Signs
  • Lugs & Terminals
  • Plugs & Sockets
  • Solar Frames
  • Switches

+ – Lighting

+ – Household

  • Compost Toilets
  • Solar Hot Water Systems

+ – Gadgets

  • Books on Solar Power
  • Fans
  • Small Appliances
  • Tools
  • Voltage Converters

Manage Account

+ – My Account

  • Sign In
  • Shopping Cart
  • Checkout
  • My Account
  • Account Settings
  • Change Password
  • Address Book
  • Order History
  • Install Map
  • Shopping Cart
  • Phone us
  • Email us
  • MapInstall Map
  • |
  • Privacy Policy
  • |
  • Terms & Conditions
  • |
  • Shipping & Returns
  • Privacy & more
  • |
  • Sitemap
  • |
  • Investors
  • |
  • Jobs
  • |
  • Agents
  • |
  • Contact us

Rainbow Power Company Ltd

We install solar systems in Northern NSW and Southern QLD.

QLD:
Gold Coast (from Coolangatta to Southport), Nerang and Hinterland (Beaudesert) and out West (Warwick, Stanthorpe, Killarney)

NSW:
Northern NSW (Tweed Heads to Iluka, including Evans Head, Byron Bay and Ballina); the Far North Coast Hinterland (Yamba via Lismore to Murwillumbah) and out West (Casino to Tenterfield, including Drake and Tabulam, as well as Woodenbong and Bonalbo)

We also have sales agents in
Grafton:contact Andy Wilkinson directly on 0409 508 144, and
Tenterfield:contact Diamond J Legend directly on 0425 769 444.

There are two ways you can recoup some of the costs of setting up and maintaining your rooftop solar and battery system. The first way is through government rebates, which can contribute to the cost of purchasing and setting up your system, depending on where you live and what programs are available. Once you have your system installed, the second way is by selling some of the electricity you generate back into the grid, which is called a feed-in tariff.

Government rebates

There are federal and state rebates available for rooftop solar and battery storage which can significantly reduce the cost of purchasing and installing a solar system.

We have compiled a list of the major schemes operating in Australia but there may be more rebates available to you. You can search for federal and state government rebates on the Federal Government’s energy rebates webpage.

Generally, when you receive a quote for a solar or battery storage system, the retailer will show any rebate amount that you are receiving.

National

The Small-scale Renewable Energy Scheme (SRES) provides a financial incentive for individuals and businesses to install small-scale renewable energy systems such as rooftop solar, solar water heaters and heat pumps. This occurs in the form of small-scale technology certificates (STCs), which are issued up front for a system’s expected power generation (based on its installation date and geographical location) until the SRES expires in 2030.

The price of STCs changes according to market conditions. The total level of subsidy you receive will depend on several factors, including the location and size of the solar system and the price of STCs at the time the system was installed.

More comprehensive information about how STCs are calculated and what you can expect in return is contained in our Guide to Installing Solar for Households and via the Clean Energy Regulator.

The Large-scale Renewable Energy Target (LRET) is also run by the Federal Government and intended for generating large-scale renewable energy in the form of power stations. More information on the LRET can be found on the Clean Energy Regulator’s website.

Australian Capital Territory

The ACT Government has committed to subsidising up to 5000 battery storage systems in ACT homes and businesses. More information can be found through the link below.

Queensland

The Queensland Government provides interest-free loans and grants for solar systems and battery storage to eligible home owners and small businesses. More information can be found through the link below.

South Australia

The South Australian Government provides a subsidy for the cost of battery storage and low interest finance. More information can be found through the link below.

Victoria

The Victorian Government will subsidise the cost of installing solar and battery storage from 1 July 2019. More information can be found through the below links.

Feed-in tariffs

A feed-in tariff is the rate you are paid for any electricity generated by your rooftop solar system that is fed back into the grid.

Feed-in tariffs are generally available for residential systems and do not necessarily extend to commercial customers. However, in most cases, commercial customers should be able to negotiate a rate with their electricity retailer.

Almost all feed-in tariffs offered now are ‘net’ feed-in tariffs. This means that the electricity produced by your solar panels will be used in your home first, and you will only be paid for excess electricity that is exported to the grid.

Feed-in tariffs differ from state to state and from retailer to retailer. In some states the government regulates a minimum rate, and in other states it is up to you to negotiate a deal with your electricity retailer.

There is no government-regulated minimum retailer payment in New South Wales or southeast Queensland. It is worth shopping around to find out which electricity retailers offer the best rates for solar customers.

Questions to ask your electricity retailer

  • What price will they pay you for exported electricity (in cents per kWh)?
  • What is the cost of the electricity you purchase from your retailer (in cents per kWh), and will you lose your off-peak rates once you install solar?
  • Will you be charged a higher daily fixed charge if you install solar?
  • How will you be paid for electricity you produce? Will you receive cash or a credit on your electricity bill?
  • Are there any penalty clauses (termination costs) or other administration fees?
  • Will your metering need to be upgraded so you can receive the feed-in tariff, and are there any costs involved?
  • How often will excess energy be calculated (e.g. instantaneously, daily or quarterly)?

For more information on feed-in tariffs, you can visit the website of your relevant state government body by using these links:

Sign up to our newsletter

Get the latest clean energy news, jobs and event invites straight to your inbox.

Did you know over 27% of Australia’s electricity generation now comes from renewable energy

India is on the cusp of a solar revolution and we at Tata Power Solar have been right at the forefront, leading the move towards sustainable energy solutions.

Investing in rooftop solutions leads to great savings, while protecting the environment. Tata Power Solar offers solar rooftop for home. Save and Earn from your idle rooftop space.

Calculate the power generation and know Your Savings on the electricity bill – Tata Solar Mate

Together with our partners, we offer a variety of financing options
for our residential customers.

TATA POWER SOLAR GRID-TIE ROOFTOP SOLUTIONS

Grid-tie system

  • 1 kVA Grid Tie Solar Inverter (Single Phase)
  • 4 nos Modules of 320Wp each
  • Cables & Other Accessories
  • You generate 1,400 units annually
  • 2 kVA Grid Tie Solar inverter (Single Phase)
  • 7 nos Modules of 320Wp each
  • Cables & Other Accessories
  • You generate 2,800 units annually
  • 3 kVA Grid Tie Solar inverter (Single / Three Phase)
  • 10 nos Modules of 320Wp each
  • Cables & Other Accessories
  • You generate 4,200 units annually
  • 5 kVA Grid Tie Solar inverter (Single / Three Phase)
  • 16 nos Modules of 320Wp each
  • Cables & Other Accessories
  • You generate 7,000 units annually
  • 8 kVA Grid Tie Solar inverter (Three Phase)
  • 24 nos Modules of 320Wp each
  • Cables & Other Accessories
  • You generate 8,400 units annually
  • 10 kVA Grid Tie Solar inverter (Three Phase)
  • 32 nos Modules of 320Wp each
  • Cables & Other Accessories
  • You generate 14,000 units annually

Off-grid system

  • 2 kVA PCU
    (Single Phase)
  • 4 nos Modules of 320Wp each
  • 2 nos Batteries of 12V / 150Ah each
  • Cables & Other Accessories
  • You generate 1,400 units annually
  • 3.75 kVA PCU
    (Single Phase)
  • 6 nos Modules of 320Wp each
  • 4 nos Batteries of 12V / 150Ah each
  • Cables & Other Accessories
  • You generate 2,600 units annually
  • 6.25 kVA PCU
    (Single Phase)
  • 12 nos Modules of 320Wp each
  • 8 nos Batteries of 12V / 150Ah each
  • Cables & Other Accessories
  • You generate 5,000 units annually
  • 7.5 kVA PCU
    (Single Phase)
  • 16 nos Modules of 320Wp each
  • 10 nos Batteries of 12V / 150Ah each
  • Cables & Other Accessories
  • You generate 7,000 units annually

Tata Power Solar has devised NOC as a tool to provide value added services to customers.

Fuel your devices with the power of the sun.

By Natalie Wallington | Updated Mar 23, 2022 8:32 AM

How to set up a small solar

Working from your living room couch may be more enjoyable than a stuffy cubicle, but both setups can keep you feeling tethered to a power outlet. Luckily, there’s an easy way to cut that cord and move your workspace outdoors—without worrying about charging battery packs ahead of time.

Portable solar panels are gaining popularity as folks look for a simple, sustainable way to juice up their devices while off the grid. Whether you’re a hardcore backpacker heading deep into the wilderness or a sunbather hoping to get some work done in your local park, there’s a personal solar panel out there suited to your needs.

Why buy a portable solar panel?

When you think of solar panels, you probably imagine a vast field of shiny black slabs angled toward the sun. The portable versions of those stationary arrays employ the exact same energy-capturing technology, just bundled within lightweight, compact designs. This makes them ideal for a variety of uses, from powering a recreational vehicle to charging your electronics on the go.

Portable solar panels are also a great way to familiarize yourself with renewable energy. While you may not be ready to install a solar roof on your house, charging a phone or laptop with a small panel can help you gauge the light levels in your area and see how well solar power may be able to meet your needs.

Factors to keep in mind

Even though most portable solar panels are easy to set up and simple to use, there’s always a lot to consider when investing in a new piece of technology. We’ve gathered what we think are the most important factors to think about before you start powering up in the great outdoors.

Wattage

Start by figuring out how much electricity you need. Some personal panels are available in a number of different wattages—a measure of pure electrical power. For example, the Goal Zero Boulder Briefcase, a panel that folds into a compact rectangle with handles for easy portability, is available in 50-watt, 100-watt, and 200-watt varieties. The designs with higher wattages are larger and more expensive, so the best panel for you will depend on what electronics you’re hoping to power. Make sure you read our guide on how to properly charge devices when you’re done here.

Lower-wattage panels won’t prove useless in your mission to stray away from traditional energy sources, but they may charge your devices more slowly than you’re used to. For best results, take a look at your device’s specifications and figure how much power their charging cables allow in. This can help prevent you from buying a panel with a wattage that exceeds your devices’ limits.

Power storage options

Many portable panels come with the necessary cables and batteries you’ll need to store electricity for later. A power bank is especially helpful if you hope to use solar energy when there’s no sun: illuminating a campsite at nighttime, charging your phone during a thunderstorm, or keeping your laptop running on a cloudy afternoon are all good examples. If you want to stock up on solar power, consider purchasing a kit that includes the necessary batteries, converters, and cables.

It’s also possible to skip the accessories and use your solar power instantly. Many portable panels have USB ports that allow you to charge your electronics directly. A small, lightweight option may be all you need to keep your phone or laptop running on a sunny day. Foregoing batteries and cables can also help keep the cost of your solar setup low.

Portability

The size, weight, and design of your personal solar panel will all determine its portability. If you’re planning to drive to a sunny field to get some work done, a heavier and more bulky panel might be fine: you can keep it in your car until you reach your destination, so its size and weight won’t be an issue. On the other hand, backpackers and hikers should choose small, lightweight panels that won’t become a burden on long outdoor treks. Before you buy, make sure you check a panel’s weight and dimensions, as well as those of all its accessories.

Weather resistance

While most solar panels are at least somewhat weather-resistant, not all of them are truly waterproof. The last thing you want is to ruin your brand-new gadget and be stuck without electricity simply because it wasn’t designed to withstand the elements. Depending on the intensity of your outdoor excursions and the weather in your area, make a point to determine your panel’s hardiness before you buy.

Price

The last factor to consider is how much money you’re willing to spend on your new portable solar panel. It’s unlikely that such a small panel will ever pay for itself through the electricity it produces, but the freedom and access to the outdoors it can provide you is inherently valuable.

Price will vary depending on your panel’s power output, energy storage components, and overall bulk. It’s possible to find small power packs with solar components in the $20 to $30 range, but a larger (and more powerful) panel can cost as much as a few hundred dollars. No matter your needs, there’s a panel out there that can help you venture off the beaten path.

How to set up a small solar

Natalie Wallington is a contributing writer for PopSci’s DIY section. Her reporting on social and environmental justice has appeared in the Washington Post, Audubon Magazine, VICE News, and elsewhere. In her spare time, she collects stationery and naps on the couch with her retired racing greyhound. Visit her website to see more of her work.

How to set up your solar panel connection

When it comes to solar panel connection, there are a few ways you can connect multiple 4WD solar panels . You can use a parallel or series connection, or a combination of the two.

The diagram below illustrates how to wire solar panels in series or parallel.

Series

Wiring multiple solar panels in series means you are wiring each panel to the next. This solar panel connection creates a string circuit. The wire that runs from the solar panel’s negative terminal is connected to the next panel’s positive terminal, and so on. Connecting in series is one of the easiest ways to connect your solar power systems.

Connecting two fixed solar panels in this way (same wattage) will multiply the system voltage by 2 and keep the output current at the same level.

Parallel

Connecting solar panels in parallel is a slightly different process. All of the positive terminals of the solar panels are connected together, and all of the negative terminals of the solar panels are connected together. It’s similar to when you jump-start a car – positive to positive, and negative to negative.

Connecting two portable solar panels , or any other type of solar panel, (same wattage) in parallel will multiply the total power output current by 2 and keep the system voltage at the same level.

Parallel solar panel connections should be made using ‘Y’ connectors available at REDARC. To have a complete and efficient system, it’s also wise to incorporate a solar regulator into your solar energy set up.

How to set up a small solar

6 steps to Off-grid Solar

Are you interested in designing an off-grid solar system? Here are the 6 steps to get you started.

#1) Figure out how much power you need

This is the most important step, and many people try to skip over it. Don’t!

Planning a solar system without knowing how much power you need is like planning a car trip and not knowing how far you are going, and in what vehicle. Ok, now go buy gas for the trip. How much? Well, that depends on your distance and gas mileage. Same with solar. You can’t just say I’m going to by 2 solar panels and a battery and hope it will be enough for my needs. Use our load calculator and enter what you will be powering with your solar power system. You’ve got to remember absolutely everything that will be powered by your system – seemingly little changes can make a big difference.

#2 Calculate the amount of batteries you need

Now that you know how much power you need, you need to figure out how many batteries you need to store it.

  • Do you need only enough storage for a day or two or do you need to have enough batteries to store 3 or 4 days, or more, worth of power?
  • Do you have another power source, like a generator or turbine, that will kick in if the sun doesn’t shine?
  • Will you be storing the batteries in a warm room or will they be in a cold location?

Batteries are rated for storage at around 80 degrees Fahrenheit. The colder the room, the bigger the battery bank you need – by over 50% more for below freezing. Each of these answers affects the size, and cost, of your battery bank.

What voltage battery bank do you need – 12V, 24V, or 48V? Generally, the larger the system, the higher voltage battery banks are used to keep the number of parallel strings to a minimum and reduce the amount of current between the battery bank and the inverter. If you are just having a small system, and want to be able to charge your cell phone and power 12V DC appliances in your RV, then a basic 12V battery bank makes sense. But if you need to power much over 2000 watts at a time, you’ll want to consider 24 volt and 48 volt systems. Besides reducing how many parallel strings of batteries you’ll have, it’ll allow you to use thinner and less expensive copper cabling between the batteries and the inverter.

Use our off-grid calculator to calculate what size battery bank you need based on these answers.

#3 Calculate the number of solar panels needed for your location and time of year

The second half of our off-grid calculator can help you figure out how many solar panels you’ll need for your solar system. After knowing how much energy you need to make per day from the load calculator, you’ll need to tell it how much sunshine you’ll have to harvest from. This available energy from the sun for a location is referred to as “sun hours.”

The number of “sun hours” is how many hours the available sun shining on your panels at an angle throughout the day equals sunlight, as if it were shining directly on your solar panels when they get the most power. As you know, the sun isn’t as bright at 8AM as it is at noon, so an hour of morning sun may be counted as half an hour, where the hour from noon to 1PM would be a full hour. And unless you live near the equator, you do not have the same number of hours of sunlight in the winter as you do in the summer.

You want to take the worst case scenario for your area, the season with the least amount of sunshine that you will be using the system. That way, you do not end up short on solar energy for part of the year. If it’s a summer camp, you don’t need to plan for winter, but if it is a year-round home, or a hunting cabin, you need to tell it the number of sun hours that correspond to winter.

#4 Select a solar charge controller

Alright, so we have batteries and we have solar, now we need a way to manage putting the power from the solar into the batteries. An extremely rough calculation to figure out what size solar charge controller you need is to take the watts from the solar, and divide it by the battery bank voltage. Add another 25% for a safety factor.

Now there’s a bit more to consider with selecting the charge controller. Charge controllers are available with two major types of technologies, PWM and MPPT. In short, if the voltage of the solar panel array matches the voltage of the battery bank, you can use a PWM charge controller. So, if you have a 12V panel and a 12V battery bank, you can use PWM. If your solar panel voltage is different than the battery bank, and can’t be wired in series to make it match, you need to use an MPPT charge controller. If you have a 20V solar panel and you have a 12V battery bank, you need to use MPPT charge controller.

#5 Select an inverter

Now that we have efficiently charged batteries, we need to make the power usable. If you are only running DC loads straight off your battery bank, you can skip this step. But, if you are powering any AC loads, you need to convert the direct current from the batteries into alternating current for your appliances. It is very important to know what type of AC power you need. If you are in North America, the standard is 120/240V split phase, 60Hz. In Europe and much of Africa and some countries in South America, it is 230V single 50Hz. In some islands, it is an interesting mixture of both. Some inverters are configurable between voltages and/or frequencies, many are fixed. So check the specs carefully of the inverter you are interested in to make sure it matches your needs.

If you do have the North American standard, you must figure out if you have any appliances that use 240V, or if they are all just 120V. Some inverters are able to put out 240V, and you can wire the output to use either 120V or 240V. Other inverters are stackable, each one outputting 120V, but when wired together, or stacked, can create 240V. And others are only capable of outputting 120V, and cannot be stacked. Again, read the specs to determine which inverter is right for you.

You also need to know how many watts total your inverter will need to power. Luckily, way back in step one, you created a loads list that figured out both the constant watts and surge requirements of your loads. Please note that an inverter is designed for a specific voltage battery bank, like 12, 24 or 48 volt, so you need to know what voltage battery bank you are going to have before you settle on the inverter. Keep this in mind if you think you may be growing your system in the future. If you plan on having a higher voltage battery bank later, be aware that the lower voltage inverter won’t work in the new bigger system. So either plan ahead and go with the higher voltage to begin with, or plan on changing out your inverter in the future.

#6 Balance of system

OK, we’re kind of cheating by lumping everything else into one final step for balance of system, but there are a lot of other little components needed, including:

  • the fuses and breakers for over current protection
  • what breaker boxes will be used
  • how you are going to mount the solar panels
  • what size wire you will need

Once you’ve gone through these 6 steps, you’ll be off and running to designing your own DIY off-grid solar system.

Updated: August 28, 2019

OFA supports solar power on buildings, in fencerows or in small plots of land, or in otherwise vacant areas such as hydro corridors. Although solar power is costly, rates can be reasonable once the project is amortized, and small scale solar is quiet and unobtrusive.

However large scale solar on good farmland is not suited to Ontario. OFA believes solar development will cause erosion, bake the soil, disrupt carbon and nitrogen fixing, create habitat for weeds, and destroy habitat for many native creatures that share farmland. Large scale solar on good farmland will not produce any more power than if it were located on rooftops or rocks and it will reduce farm production needlessly. OFA policy is to protect good farmland rather than using it for solar.

Small Projects

Ontario’s microFIT solar projects are less than 10 kW in capacity and can supplement farm income by about $12,500 a year. Costs are in the same range as other farm investments, so it is relatively easy and very useful to compare an investment in small solar with other potential farm investments.

For microFIT solar, Ontario pays 80.2 cents a kWh for rooftop solar and 64.2 cents for ground mounted solar. The units require approximately 25 meters by eight meters on the ground and slightly less on a roof. Panels can be fixed or mounted to track the sun. If fixed the panels should face within 25 degrees of south. A bias to the east will produce more power in the morning and more power overall as the panels work better in the cool of morning than in heat later in the day.

Installation

Ontario has many solar suppliers. Some have been in business 30 years, others a few months. Choose a vendor who has been in business 10 or more years and has experience as an electrical contractor. Be sure to also buy components with at least a 10-year guarantee.

Durable panels are essential. They may take slightly more space, but the panels have to last, or they will not be producing 10 years out when the owner hopes to be earning profits. The owner can pay cash or borrow. Either approach works well:

  • Ground mounted installations cost approximately $65,000 to $85,000.
  • Roof mounted units cost $75,000 to $95,000.

A land owner could also lease the site to a solar developer. If you lease out a roof area you will be obligated to maintain the roof for the full 20-year period. Many leases also obligate the land owner to provide site security. Annual rents are typically $200 to $500 per year.

Place the panels so they add to or at least do not detract from the appearance of your property. If the appearance is a problem, they may add $12,500 a year to your income, but subtract $75,000 from your property value.

Taxes and Insurance

Property tax will vary by county but is unlikely to be more than $400 a year. For income tax, solar panel income is not farm income and cannot be used to offset farm losses. The panels enjoy a beneficial capital cost treatment and the income can be shared, put into RRSPs, RESPs or Tax-Free Savings Accounts.

Insurance is very useful to cover hail, wind, lightening, vehicle contact accidents, fire and vandalism. Ground mounted systems should have posts in place to stop trucks or tractors from hitting the panels. The panels also produce potentially lethal amounts of power whenever the sun shines. Emergency personnel should be advised of this with a warning notice.

A microFIT solar project can be an excellent supplement to farm or retirement income. It may or may not pay as well as other investments in your farm, so the alternatives should be compared. If you do opt to go ahead with a solar project, the key decision is the choice or vendor/installer. Choose a reliable firm that has been in business ten plus years and has strong capabilities as an electrical contracting group.

In February 2011, Ontario Hydro notified 1,500 microFIT solar project applicants that connection would not be possible. To avoid disappointment, do not spend any money on the project until the conditional offer has been upgraded to a final offer.

For more information on small scale solar options, contact your local Member Service Representative or OFA’s Guelph office.

Small-scale solar installations have been an important innovation to bring electricity to remote areas. Despite their rather low capacity, small solar plants offer several use cases and benefits: powering lights, charging smartphones or powering appliances such as water pumps which can help farmers irrigate their fields more easily. While these systems represent a large investment for most users, financing is increasingly possible using a pay-as-you-go (PAYGo) model, which involves making regular payments to a PAYGo company that rents or sells small solar installations. Customers either lease a solar panel and make payments until they own it or they regularly pay an installment based on their usage , thus making electricity more accessible to more low-income consumers.

However, small solar installations face many risks which jeopardize their ability to provide a continuous energy supply. Unexpected expenses or loss of income can harm a farmer’s ability to keep up with the PAYGo installments and keep the lights on. A powerful storm can damage a solar-powered water pump. A destroyed pump is not only a lost investment but may also lead to a reduced harvest income. So what insurance solutions are available as financial protection mechanisms against these risks?

Direct and indirect insurance solutions

While insurers offer coverage for larger plants, there are few solutions for smaller plants and their associated risks. Those that do exist can be divided into direct and indirect insurance solutions (see figure). Direct insurance solutions cover the solar installation itself. Indirect insurance solutions cover another step in the solar power supply chain.

How to set up a small solar

Direct insurance coverage is pretty straightforward. Solar panels and solar-powered equipment such as water pumps can be damaged by vandalism, theft or weather, such as a heavy storm or hail, and should thus be insured against those risks. South African insurer, Santam, offers a solution for insuring solar installations against the risk of weather-related damages. Their regular agricultural insurance cover was expanded to include solar panels, under the rationale that solar panels are as much an agricultural input as seeds or crops.

Indirect coverage to insure against customer defaults

But damage to installations is not the only reason small-scale solar panel owners lose access to electricity. Those customers who are signed up with a PAYGo model must keep making regular payments in order to keep the lights on. Unfortunately, payment defaults or late payments are a common challenge for PAYGo companies. Standard procedure in the event of payment default is for the PAYGo company to remove the solar panel from the customer’s premises. However, in remote locations, this procedure is often too costly. In addition, PAYGo companies are often critical intermediaries for providing energy access to off-grid communities and taking that access away should be a very last resort.

Thus, there is a need for other indirect insurance solutions which can help PAYGo companies avoid taking that last resort of removing their customers’ energy access. Understanding the factors behind customer default is necessary to determine the best solutions. PAYGo companies as well as insurers have identified two main reasons leading to defaults: an unexpected illness with high hospitalization costs or crop losses and low yields .

Innovative solutions help with unexpected medical costs and crop losses

Free or affordable health insurance offered as an add-on for PAYGo customers who pay their installments on time is one solution which helps customers with unexpected medical expenses. For example, PEG Africa, a PAYGo solar provider in West Africa, partnered with insurance provider BIMA to set up an insurance product combined with a PAYGo model. The PAYGo company has found that the health insurance functions as an incentive for paying installments on time, thus improving the repayment rate.

Another solution involves using agricultural crop insurance to cover a PAYGo company’s loan portfolio, given that PAYGo companies are affected by extreme weather conditions in a similar way to farmers since most of their customers are farmers. Agricultural insuretech company Pula has recently piloted this concept in Zambia. In the event of an adverse weather event, the insurance would pay out a benefit to the PAYGo company, providing support to offset loan defaults. This type of solution could also enable investors to offer lower interest rates to PAYGo companies.

Improving access to electricity in remote areas

The COVID-19 pandemic has shown how quickly unexpected medical costs can add up and devastate people’s financial situations, especially in low-income communities. Climate change and the increasing frequency of associated extreme weather events make damage to crops and solar facilities more likely in the future. The insurance solutions described here, be they direct or indirect, can help counteract these challenges. By de-risking solar panel financing, innovative insurance products can improve access to renewable energy and help keep the lights on for remote communities.

Feb. 1 2021, Published 4:49 p.m. ET

If you live in an apartment, your household energy consumption is probably a lot lower than that of someone who lives in a house. But still, we don’t blame any apartment dwellers who occasionally feel jealous of people whose houses are outfitted with shiny solar panels, sending a message to all the neighbors that they live in the most eco-friendly house on the block.

Installing solar panels in an apartment may not be as straightforward as doing so for a house — but is it possible? Are there solar panels for apartments?

How to set up a small solar

Yes, you can install solar panels in your apartment.

There are several companies that sell solar panels for apartments; however, powering your entire apartment on solar energy may be a lofty task.

Keep reading for a few awesome, apartment-friendly solar panel solutions, as well as a few other ideas for getting your apartment building or office building to run on renewable energy.

Grouphug’s Window Solar Charger

NYC-based company, Grouphug, sells a bamboo-framed Window Solar Charger, which you can simply hang in your window using an included suction hook. The small solar panels will absorb the sun’s energy, and you can directly plug any USB charger into it, whether it’s for your cell phone, smart watch, AirPods, or bluetooth speakers; the company also sells a tiny USB-C adapter for $3, which would allow you to charge a MacBook.

Grouphug’s Window Solar Charger goes for $149, but is on sale for $134 at time of publication. Plus, the product was featured on Shark Tank.

SolarGaps

SolarGaps makes smart solar blinds outfitted with solar panels, which are installed on the outside of your windows. The panels absorb energy from the sun, and work to generate electricity, offset energy consumption, block heat energy from entering the building through the windows, keep the building cool, and therefore reduce air conditioning use (and costs). SolarGaps says installing these smart blinds can help you save up to 30 percent on your electricity bills.

You can get SolarGaps blinds installed in either your apartment or office — prices vary due to the custom nature of the blinds, so fill out this form to get a quote.

Yolk’s Solar Paper or Solarade

Yolk’s Solar Paper is a paper-thin, lightweight, portable solar power charger that’s small enough to store inside a notebook. Just place it flat in the sun (or hang it in your window) and plug your phone into the USB slot, and a dead phone will become fully charged in 2.5 hours — but it can charge even faster if you purchase and attach additional Solar Paper panels. Prices start at $148.

Yolk also makes Solarade, the world’s smallest solar charger, which can charge your devices as quickly as a wall charger. The Solarade goes for $96.

Build your own windowsill solar panel with Amazon parts.

For $211, you can buy all the component parts needed to build a 100-watt windowsill solar panel off of Amazon. A detailed blog post by Hacker Noon explains how you can do this yourself, though the blogger notes that it will take about 8.5 years to get financial payback.

Talk to your building manager about switching to solar energy.

How to set up a small solar

If you live or work in an apartment or office building, you might consider speaking with your building manager or landlord about switching your building to solar power. If they can afford the initial investment, there are so many benefits to installing solar panels for your entire building. According to solar power company Intermountain Wind & Solar, doing so can: help your entire building save on energy costs; result in the generation of surplus energy, which your building manager can then sell to the local energy company; and increase property value and therefore draw in new potential residents.

So you’d like to start enjoying greater energy independence and lower utility bills, and you’re ready to start reaching out to solar providers to get answers to your questions. You may be wondering “How long does it take to install solar panels?” or “How fast can I get solar installed on my roof?”

Homeowners throughout Massachusetts often ask us these types of questions, and we’re pleased to share the details of what they can expect with the installation of their residential solar PV system, from start to finish.

How the Solar Installation Process Works

The solar installation process involves a few key steps to ensure your solar PV system is perfectly suited for your home and properly filed with your town. The period between our initial meeting and installation is typically between 90 and 120 days; however, that time frame could be as short as 30 – 45 days depending on your town’s permit process.

With Boston Solar, we don’t use any subcontractors and our whole solar team is vertically integrated, meaning from the first call to turning on your system, you’ll be with the team here at Boston Solar. This also helps streamline the process for you!

1. Meeting with Boston Solar and Signing a Contract

Our process starts when we schedule a time for one of our in-house solar experts to meet with you at your home. During our initial meeting, we’ll discuss the benefits of renewable solar energy as well as your goals for going solar. Then, during a follow-up visit, we’ll talk about the optimal system options for your home, pricing, and financing options before you sign a contract.

2. Design & Engineering (30-45 days)

Once you sign your contract, one of our experienced solar technicians will visit your home to fine-tune the details of your solar energy system design. We’ll make sure your system is perfectly suited for your home and order the materials needed for installation. This process typically takes 30 to 45 days.

3. Permits & Materials (30-40 days)

Once your system design is confirmed, your dedicated Customer Experience Coordinator will pull all necessary permits for your solar installation. This typically takes 30 to 40 days or less, depending on your town. We’ll keep you updated throughout this process.

4. Solar Panel Installation (1-5 days)

When your town approves the permits for your system, your coordinator will call to schedule your installation. The installation process itself usually takes only one to three days and is completed by a highly skilled team of in-house installers.

5. Inspections & Commissioning (15 to 30 days)

After your solar panels have been installed, our team will conduct a quality control review and attend all inspections by your local building department. After inspections, your local utility will swap out your electrical meter and give permission to operate (PTO). Then, your coordinator will schedule a time for our Solar Commissioner to test and turn on your system. The inspections and commissioning process typically takes 15 to 30 days.

How to set up a small solar

Install Solar in 2019 for Greater Financial Benefits

Because the solar installation timeline can cover a period of a few months, it’s important to plan ahead if you’re looking to go solar soon. This year is an especially advantageous time to start the solar installation process, as there are still a number of financial incentives in place.

. but not for long! While the 30% Federal Solar Tax Credit is still in place in 2019, it will drop to 26% after this year — and then disappear by 2022. Meanwhile, there is still time this year to qualify for statewide SMART incentives; but with those incentives being offered on a first come, first served basis, time is running out to claim them as well.

Learn More About Installing Solar with Boston Solar

The sooner you start the solar installation process, the sooner you can start enjoying benefits like reduced electricity bills, increased energy independence, and protection from rising energy costs. If you’re considering solar and want to learn more about what to expect, get in touch with Boston Solar. We’re proud to help homeowners from Central Mass to the greater Boston area, from the North Shore down to the South Shore, harness the benefits of clean solar power. With over 3,800 installations and counting, we’re prepared to answer your questions and help you navigate a seamless solar installation process.

Considering solar for your home in Massachusetts? Call 617-858-1645 or contact us today to get a free quote!

How to set up a small solar

How TIIC Improves Your Business?

TIIC fosters industrial development in Tamilnadu by providing financial assistance to industries for purchase of land, machinery and construction of buildings.

Quick Links

Application

Pay Online

Schemes

Speak with Guide

Locations

Enquiry

Solar Power Project Scheme

To establish solar photovoltaic power plants both grid connected and off‑grid solar power plant, either on roof top or over land for captive consumption of entire power generated by the solar power plant by existing units. To establish 1 MW and above capacity solar photovoltaic power plants over land, for full or part sale of power to TANGEDCO after consumption of power for own requirement, by existing/new units.

Financial assistance can be considered for

  • Site development cost like leveling, approach road formation etc.
  • Civil works like fencing, construction of stores/warehouse, substation, control room etc.
  • Purchase & installation of Plant & machinery like solar PV modules, trackers, power conditioning system including inverters, switch yard equipments, transformers, internal cabling and earthing, control and instrumentation panels etc. on turnkey basis or otherwise.
  • Land cost is not eligible for loan purpose.

i.For setting up solar photovoltaic power plants set up by existing units for captive consumption:

  • Existing Assisted and Non-assisted units.
  • The existing unit should be in operation for the past 3 financial years.
  • The existing unit should have earned at least cash profit for the last 3 financial years.
  • The net worth of the existing unit should be positive.
  • The units assisted by the corporation shall be in standard assets category for the last 3 financial years.
  • Existing Units which are having loan with other Banks/FIs should be in standard category with respective institutions for the last 3 financial years.
  • Existing units set up with own funds are also eligible to avail assistance. Such units should have earned net profit for the last 3 years and their net worth should be positive.
  • The existing unit should not come under the purview of sick unit definition.
  • The units should have sufficient cash generation including income from proposed power plant to meet our repayment commitment for the proposed loan and DSCR should not be less than 1.5:1.00.

ii. For units which are going to sell entire/part of power generated to TNEB:

Existing assisted/non-assisted units which are in >

standard category for the last 3 years > : 25% (minimum)

New Units/Existing units not coming under above category > : 35% (minimum)

Good, easily marketable immovable property in the form of land/ land and building only at not less than 35% of term loan in case of existing assisted and non-assisted units which are in standard category for not less than 3 years, and 50% of term loan for all other cases shall be obtained. For Board cases collateral to be decided on case to case basis. The proposed solar power project site shall not be taken as collateral. Agricultural land cannot be taken as collateral.

Personal guarantee of the borrower and also owner of collateral property shall be obtained.

BSC has no power even if the proposed loan is within its sanctioning limit and these proposals shall be placed before RLSC.

For other cases, loans will be sanctioned by the respective sanctioning authority.

Experimenting with small solar panels is helpful in learning how solar energy works. Small scale solar panels are capable of producing only a few watts of power, but they can teach us much more about how larger solar panels are used to help power homes. Small solar panels work the same way that their larger counterparts do, by taking energy from the sun through photovoltaic cells and directly powering a DC electrical device or by storing the energy for later use in a rechargeable battery. Small solar panels are available from a number of sources including Radio Shack and Amazon. The solar panel pictured in the example was purchased from Harbor Freight Tools. Amazon has the Elenco Solar Educational Kit which also includes a 5 VDC motor to match the 5 volt solar panel. The solar panel pictured has a selectable output voltage selector and a built-in blocking diode to allow rechargeable battery changing. Blocking diodes in short will allow voltage to pass only in one direction. This is useful in the case of a solar panel being used to charge batteries because it it were not present the batteries would be discharged back to the photovoltaic cells at night when there is no sunlight to provide power. There is some loss of energy by passing the voltage through a blocking diode, but it is useful for experimentation. Many full-scale solar panel arrays use low-loss Schottky diodes and a fuse between the batteries and each solar panel.

Let’s try a simple experiment with the solar panel by testing the output DC voltage and output current from the panel.

Materials Needed

  • small solar panel
  • A voltmeter or multimeter with probes
  • Sunlight or an incandescent light source

Step 1: Set up the solar panel under a good light source. Generally, direct sunlight will provide the full amount of voltage from the panel. Incandescent light will only provide approximately 50 percent to 75 percent of the stated voltage output of the panels from a distance of about 5 feet from the light source (60 watts). For higher wattage bulbs or closer distances, the output voltage will be higher.

Step 2: Connect the output black (-), negative lead from the solar panel to the negative probe wire of the voltmeter. Connect the output red (+), positive lead from the solar panel to the positive probe wire of the voltmeter. Alligator clips make the connection very easy.

Step 3: Set the voltmeter to test for DC voltage. It may be necessary to set it to a factored dial setting on the voltmeter. Set the meter to DC test, 10 if there are different test settings. Turn on the voltmeter.

Step 4: Observe the voltmeter voltage reading.

Step 5: Set the voltmeter to test for DC current. It may be necessary to set it to a factored dial setting on the voltmeter.

Step 6: Observe the voltmeter current reading.

Step 7: The example solar panel model has a selectable output switch. Changing the switch setting varies both the output voltage and output current. The higher the voltage output the lower the current and vice versa. If your solar panel has selectable settings, try repeating Steps 3-6 with different output settings. If not, try moving the solar panel closer and further away from the light source while output readings are observed.

Solar panels are capable of producing electricity from not only sunlight, but also from artificial light sources. The amount of voltage produced from a small solar panel is surprisingly good, however, the amount of current produced from this same solar panel is minimal. To produce enough electricity to be useful, much larger solar panels are required. We also found that directing the panels towards the light source helps to maximize the energy output. In practice, the position of solar panels is optimized to receive the most amount of sunlight possible. Many times, solar fields also include servo motors to help change the position of the solar panel to track the sun’s position using a photoresistor sensor.

Please select the social network you want to share this page with:

How to make a right turn at a red light

  • Driving Coach
  • February 26, 2018

Most intersections in the United States allow drivers to turn right while the light is red. This is one way that traffic flows keep going and lines of cars from getting too long. Before you turn right on red, there are three critical steps to make sure you are doing it right and staying safe.

1. Always stop behind the white line

At every intersection, there is a white line. This is a point for drivers to know where they should stop at a red light. Ideally, this keeps the intersection clear for other drivers to move around and see better. The white line is also placed with enough space for pedestrians to have ample room to walk in the crosswalk and be seen by all drivers.

Stopping at the white line is required for all drivers, including those who want to turn right. When approaching the intersection, stop at the white line before proceeding to make sure that you are ready to complete the next two steps.

2. Take time to observe

The biggest reason that drivers need to stop behind the white line is to give them time to observe. If you are stopping properly, you will take time to look around. There are three main things to look for while stopped:

  • Signs– not every intersection allows you to turn right when the light is red. It is important that you look around at the posted signs to make sure you aren’t breaking the law. Others require a special signal specifically for drivers turning right. Don’t turn if this light is red since it means there are others with a green turn signal.
  • Pedestrians– Whether they are in the crosswalk already or getting ready to cross, pedestrians have the right of way. Do not drive into the crosswalk area if you see people there. It is illegal and creates a potentially dangerous situation for them.
  • Oncoming traffic- Stopping allows you to wait until there is an opening for you to pull in without slowing down traffic.

It doesn’t take long to look for these things while stopped, especially once you become experienced. Each one is very important and rushing through the intersection puts a lot of people in danger, including yourself.

3. Proceed with caution

Once you have taken time to observe, make sure you approach the turn with caution. Bicyclists are difficult to see and can quickly come up behind you. Pedestrians might try to run in front of you to cross before the light changes. Vehicles further up the road from you might be turning right or left into the lane you’re trying to enter. These situations are all common scenarios that happen fast if you are not paying close enough attention.

Once you turn into the lane, speed up to match the flow of traffic to prevent any other problematic situations.

Making the right-handed turn with these three steps will help you complete a successful move while avoiding any incident, injury, or lawbreaking.

How to make a right turn at a red light

Red lights – we all dread them. Waiting around, especially when you’re in a hurry, is never ideal. But, as you approach a red light to take a right hand turn with no sign stating “No Turn On Red”, you’re lucky enough not to have to participate in the waiting game. Before you make your turn around the corner, there are a few precautions you should take into consideration.

  1. Before you do anything you must obey the red light and come to a complete stop in the rightmost lane with your turn signal on. Make sure you stop behind the limit line (or crosswalk or intersection if there is no line). There’s no need to roll the stop and end up with a ticket or cause a collision.
  2. Yield to oncoming traffic, motorcyclists, and bikers. Most importantly, yield to pedestrians, as they have the right of away. Even if they are waiting for the walk sign, for their safety, wait to turn. If there is a heavy flow of traffic, you may be better off waiting until you have a green light. It’s important to be patient.
  3. Hug the corner but be mindful of bike lanes and bikers. As you look over your right shoulder with your signal on, get ready to turn and make sure there are no bikers sneaking up behind you. As you begin the turn, hug the right curb to avoid the next lane of traffic.

As you advance towards a red light, ready to make a right turn, remember these three key safety tips to properly approach a red light. Turning right on a red light sounds simple, but using these tips will ensure the safety of you and those around you.

Most drivers will make a right turn on a red traffic light when they have an opportunity to do so. But, where it is legal, how many know how to do it correctly?

How to make a right turn at a red light

Funny how speed cameras make motorists see red, yet they give the green light to intersection cameras.

Article content

Most drivers will make a right turn on a red traffic light when they have an opportunity to do so.

Advertisement 2

Article content

Drivers who wish to turn right on a solid red traffic light must first come to a complete stop before making such a turn. They must be aware of any vehicular, cycle, or pedestrian traffic approaching from the left or right side of the street. All such traffic has the right of way to proceed prior to any driver being able to make a right turn on the red light.

Are you able to turn right on a red? Back to video

When considering a right turn on a red light, drivers must also be aware of any cyclists or other vehicles that may creep into their blind spot.

Whenever there is a crash involving a driver who executes a right turn on a red light, the driver turning right will very likely be assessed total blame or at least partial blame. The law states that such a turn may only be made if it is safe to do so.

Advertisement 3

Article content

Every time a driver makes a right turn on a red light, the driver is susceptible to increased liability exposure. It is best to avoid the right on red move unless the visibility is clear, pedestrians are few and far between and the red light is in its initial phase. A red traffic light, which is well into the cycle, is bound to change at a most inopportune time, often leaving the driver red-faced and stranded, as pedestrians gain the right of way.

Drivers who make a right turn on red must always be conscious of the approaching drivers who have a left turn advance arrow. Many of these oncoming drivers making a left turn on the green advance arrow will turn wide into the lane, which a driver making a right turn must use to do a proper and legal turn. The hazards are numerous when any driver considers doing a legal right turn on a solid red traffic light.

Advertisement 4

Article content

In a recent survey of a relatively busy signalized intersection, not a single driver, when unobstructed by traffic, made the complete stop required by law, before proceeding to make the right turn on a solid red traffic light.

This behaviour is common in all jurisdictions that permit the right turn on a solid red. Sadly, pedestrians are the ones who are most at risk when drivers do not stop for a proper look for hazards before making the right turn.

The legal stop is one in which the driver stops completely.

The complete stop must be made before the natural path of the pedestrians across the driver’s path, if no road markings are present.

Where road markings exist, whether painted crosswalks or otherwise indicated, the driver must completely stop before the crosswalk when turning right on a solid red traffic light. Where no road crosswalk markings are in evidence, the imaginary extension of a sidewalk across the road is a legal crosswalk.

Advertisement 5

Article content

Most drivers think they must stop even with the stop sign.

This is a popular misconception. The stop sign tells a driver what to do, not necessarily where to do it.

It is advisable to make two stops before making a right turn on a red traffic light.

The first stop will satisfy the legal responsibility and the second will allow the driver to get a better look at all traffic, before proceeding safely around the turn.

Red is a colour often associated with emergency situations. We should all try our best to observe the meaning and intent of the red traffic lights, for our own good and that of others.

Steve Wallace is a member of the College of Teachers and the owner of Wallace Driving School on Vancouver Island and the Interior of B.C.

Share this article in your social network

Share this Story: Are you able to turn right on a red?

Copy Link

  • Email
  • Facebook
  • Twitter
  • Reddit
  • Pinterest
  • LinkedIn
  • Tumblr
  • Take a look at the distinction between right and left turns.

    • Traffic Control Devices
    • Uniform Traffic Control Devices
    • Understanding Signs
    • Traffic Signals and Intersections
    • Road Markings
    • The Driving Privilege
    • Keeping your License
    • Sharing the Road with Others
    • Car Information

    Drivers Ed Done Right

    Sign Up for Online Drivers Education Today!

    Check Out Our Visuals to Help You Understand

    The graphic below shows that some states (e.g., Alabama, Alaska, Arizona, Arkansas, Colorado, Connecticut, Delaware, Florida, Nevada, and North Carolina) prohibit entering the right lane when making the left turn.

    How to make a right turn at a red light

    Some states are less strict and allow drivers to complete a left turn into either lane of the cross street as shown below, e.g., California, Missouri, Texas. Consult your state’s Drivers handbook for details.

    How to make a right turn at a red light

    The next graphic shows which lanes are used by cars turning from a two-way street onto a one-way street and from a one-way street to a two-way street. After coming to a complete stop, you may make a turn onto a one-way street from another two-way street (unless otherwise indicated).

    How to make a right turn at a red light

    Here is an example of making turns in California and Texas. Notice that the driver may complete the turn in any lane open to traffic if it is safe to do so as shown by arrows below.

    How to make a right turn at a red light

    Quick Re-Cap

    Right Turn against a Red Light: Signal and stop for a red traffic light before the stop line (or limit line), if there is one, or before entering the intersection. If there is no sign that prohibits a right turn on the red light, you may turn right. Be careful that you do not interfere with pedestrians, bicyclists, or vehicles moving on their green light. Note: that a right turn on a red light is prohibited by law in New York City.

    Right Turn:

    • As you prepare to turn, reduce speed and stay as far to the right as possible. Begin the turn in the lane nearest to the right-hand curb and end the turn in the lane nearest the right-hand curb.
    • Give turn signal.
    • Yield to pedestrians who may be crossing your path. Scan for any bicyclist in your path.
    • Avoid making wide, sweeping turns in the other lane.

    Left Turn:

    • Turn on the left turn signal before you make the turn and slow down.
    • Look both ways and make sure that the oncoming lanes are clear.
    • Make the turn from the designated lane (use left lane).
    • Do not enter into the right lane. In some states, it is illegal to enter the right lane after the turn is completed.

    Just remember to turn with care.

    How to make a right turn at a red light

    Stoplights are a common sight especially in the city where they are used to control the flow of traffic. This begs the question, why are there roads where cars can turn right against a red light and there are places that don’t allow this to happen? We understand that in certain cities they have different rules, but this then makes it harder for a motorist to judge when it’s legal to do so or when it’s not. With that said, we want to end the confusion once and for all and discuss a few things to look out for if you want to safely and legally turn right on red.

    You may turn right on a red light if it’s a solid red

    We are sure by now that you know what the three lights of a stoplight mean. You must, at all costs, obey the lights – especially taking caution during a yellow light. When it comes to turning right on a red light, the first and most important step is to completely stop behind the limit line, a pedestrian lane, or the intersection line. Just because you can, doesn’t mean pedestrians and oncoming traffic on green lights should give way for you. Turn with extreme caution as you don’t have the right of way.

    Turning right? Make sure you’re in the correct lane

    How to make a right turn at a red light

    Another important thing you need to be aware of is that you need to be in the proper lane before you turn right. Vehicles on the inner lane are not allowed to turn right. If you wish to turn right and you’re in the inner lane, you must slowly and carefully make your way to the outer lane before approaching the intersection. In preparation to turn right, flick on your turn indicator ideally a hundred feet to where you’re making the turn.

    You may not turn against a red arrow light

    If you see that a stoplight has a dedicated red arrow light this means that you can’t simply turn on red. The light is there to tell you when it’s safe to turn right so it is best to follow what the light says for you to avoid getting a beating-the-red-light violation. Remember to check carefully for red arrow lights or signs telling you not to turn right on red at intersections as they are your best guide in that situation. You can only turn right on a red arrow light if a traffic enforcer tells you to do so, if no order is given just stick to what the light says.

    No turning when there’s a sign saying not to

    How to make a right turn at a red light

    The idea is simple, if there are no signboards that prohibit turning right during a red light and it’s a solid red light, you may turn right cautiously. If you see a sign with a right arrow, a red circle around it, and says “on the red” below it, you have to wait for the stoplight to turn green. In the Philippines, signs are often made up entirely of words saying “No right turn on a red signal.”

    Sometimes, signs are obstructed from sight so coming to a full stop may help you inspect the surroundings. These signs are usually posted a few meters before the right turn and are commonly attached to poles.

    Things to keep in mind

    Now that you have established whether or not you can legally make a right turn on a red light, here are some things you still need to be aware of. Before turning, always check your side mirrors and rearview mirror. Look out for motorcycles, electric bicycles, cyclists, or electric scooters on your right before you step on the gas. Again, remember you don’t have the right of way if you’re turning right against a red light so don’t cut perpendicular traffic or honk at pedestrians crossing the road. We see a lot of drivers do this on the road and they aren’t just irritating, they also put everyone around them at risk.

    You must yield to traffic. Wait for a few moments to make the turn after the vehicle in front of you, as cars approaching from your left are not obliged to stop for you. Don’t make the turn if the view to your left is obstructed by a large vehicle like a truck. It’s always safe to observe defensive driving then be sorry in the end. As we keep on saying, drive safe, everyone.

    You may not make a U-turn at any intersection where there are traffic lights unless there is a sign to indicate U-turns are permitted.

    How to make a right turn at a red light

    A green light at an intersection means you may turn left, right or drive straight though the intersection, unless a sign prohibits any of these movements, once the intersection is clear and it’s safe to do so.

    If you want to turn left you can enter the intersection on a green light, but you must yield to oncoming traffic and pedestrians. If traffic is heavy, you may be forced to complete your turn on an amber (yellow) or red light.

    How to make a right turn at a red light

    You can often predict the appearance of an amber (yellow) light by taking note of how long the light has been green and by watching for the “don’t walk” light, especially if it is flashing.

    When approaching an amber (yellow) light at an intersection, you must stop before entering the crosswalk. If you have already entered, or cannot stop safely, proceed with caution.

    How to make a right turn at a red light

    When approaching a red light, you must stop and remain stopped until the light changes. If you are making a right turn at an intersection, you may make the turn, but only after stopping and yielding the right of way to pedestrians and to any vehicles travelling through the intersection.

    This also applies to making a left turn at the intersection of two one-way streets. Some intersections may have a sign prohibiting turns on red lights.

    When approaching a red light and a light with a solid green arrow, you may proceed in the direction of the arrow only after yielding the right of way to any other vehicles and pedestrians.

    How to make a right turn at a red light

    When approaching a red or green light and a flashing green (left turn) arrow, you may proceed in the direction of the green arrow.

    After the left turn arrow, an amber (yellow) arrow may appear. This means the green light is about to appear for traffic in both directions.

    How to make a right turn at a red light

    When approaching a flashing amber (yellow) light, you must proceed with caution.

    How to make a right turn at a red light

    Alternating flashing amber (yellow) lights may warn you that traffic lights ahead are red or about to turn red.

    When approaching an amber (yellow) light, you must yield the right of way to any pedestrians in the crosswalk or pedestrian corridor.

    How to make a right turn at a red light

    When approaching a flashing red light you must stop, but you may then proceed when it’s safe.

    How to make a right turn at a red light

    Pedestrians may not cross an intersection when they are facing a red light, an amber (yellow) light or a “don’t walk” light or symbol. A flashing “don’t walk” means pedestrians should finish crossing the street if they have already started. Some signals have a countdown showing how many seconds remain before it is unsafe.

    Chapter 4: Signs and Signals

    In this chapter

    Red — Stop in front of the marked crosswalk or, if there’s no marked crosswalk, before the sidewalk out of the way of pedestrians and vehicles. Unless a sign shows otherwise or vehicle/pedestrian traffic does not permit, you may, after stopping completely, turn right. You may also turn right or left from a one-way street to another one-way street.

    Amber — An amber light is a warning that the light is going to turn red. Slow down and stop — never accelerate to “make the light.” If you’re already in the intersection when the light turns amber, continue through.

    Green — You may proceed, but you must yield the right-of-way to pedestrians in the crosswalk and to other vehicles already in the intersection. To turn left, you may enter the intersection on a green light, but you must yield to pedestrians and oncoming traffic. You may have to complete the turn during an amber or red light.

    How to make a right turn at a red lightHorizontal How to make a right turn at a red lightVertical

    How to make a right turn at a red light

    Flashing Red — Come to a complete stop, proceeding only when safe.

    Flashing Amber — Slow down and be prepared to stop. You must yield the right-of-way to pedestrians.

    Amber Arrow — A steady amber arrow may be shown after a green arrow. The amber arrow is a warning that oncoming traffic may next receive a green signal. Slow down and stop. If you’re already in the intersection when the amber signal appears, continue and complete your turn.

    Green Arrow — You may proceed only in the direction of the arrow, either steady or flashing, providing you’re in the proper lane.

    Flashing Green Left-Arrow — You may proceed only to make a left turn, unless facing another signal that indicates other movements are allowed. (Flashing leftarrows may be shown together with steady red, amber or green lights.)

    How to make a right turn at a red light

    Green U-Turn Arrow — You may proceed to make a U-turn after yielding to pedestrians and other vehicles already in the intersection.

    Green Left-Arrow with Red Light — When a green left-arrow is shown with a red light together you may proceed and make a left turn only. It’s illegal to make a right turn at an intersection when a green left-arrow is shown with a red light, even if there’s no sign indicating a right turn is prohibited on a red light. Under no circumstances are you allowed to turn right or drive straight through when a green left-arrow is illuminated with a red light. If a green left-arrow is illuminated alone (the red light is not on) you may turn right if it’s safe to do so and no sign prohibits it.

    28-645 . Traffic control signal legend

    A. If traffic is controlled by traffic control signals exhibiting different colored lights or colored lighted arrows successively one at a time or in combination, only the colors green, red and yellow shall be used, except for special pedestrian signals carrying a word legend. The lights shall indicate and apply to drivers of vehicles and pedestrians as follows:

    1. Green indication:

    (a) Vehicular traffic facing a green signal may proceed straight through or turn right or left unless a sign at that place prohibits either turn. Vehicular traffic, including vehicles turning right or left, shall yield the right-of-way to other vehicles and to pedestrians lawfully within the intersection or an adjacent crosswalk at the time the signal is exhibited.

    (b) Vehicular traffic facing a green arrow signal, shown alone or in combination with another indication, may cautiously enter the intersection only to make the movement indicated by such arrow or such other movement as is permitted by other indications shown at the same time. Vehicular traffic shall yield the right-of-way to pedestrians lawfully within an adjacent crosswalk and to other traffic lawfully using the intersection.

    (c) Unless otherwise directed by a pedestrian control signal as provided in section 28-646, pedestrians facing any green signal, except if the sole green signal is a turn arrow, may proceed across the roadway within any marked or unmarked crosswalk.

    2. Steady yellow indication:

    (a) Vehicular traffic facing a steady yellow signal is warned by the signal that the related green movement is being terminated or that a red indication will be exhibited immediately thereafter when vehicular traffic shall not enter the intersection.

    (b) Unless otherwise directed by a pedestrian control signal as provided in section 28-646, pedestrians facing a steady yellow signal are advised by the signal that there is insufficient time to cross the roadway before a red indication is shown and a pedestrian shall not then start to cross the roadway.

    3. Red indication:

    (a) Except as provided in subdivisions (b) and (c) of this paragraph, vehicular traffic facing a steady red signal alone shall stop before entering the intersection and shall remain standing until an indication to proceed is shown. On receipt of a record of judgment for a violation of this subdivision or an act in another jurisdiction that if committed in this state would be a violation of this section, the department shall order the person to attend and successfully complete traffic survival school educational sessions within sixty days after the department issues the order. Notwithstanding section 28-3315, if the person fails to attend or successfully complete traffic survival school educational sessions, the department shall suspend the person’s driving privilege pursuant to section 28-3306 until the person attends and successfully completes traffic survival school educational sessions. A person whose driving privilege is suspended pursuant to this subdivision may request a hearing.В If the person requests a hearing, the department shall conduct the hearing as prescribed in section 28-3306. A law enforcement officer or a jurisdiction issuing a citation to a person who violates this subdivision shall provide written notice to the person that if eligible, the person may attend defensive driving school or, if not eligible or if the person chooses not to attend defensive driving school and is found responsible or enters a plea of responsible for a violation of this subsection, the person must attend and successfully complete traffic survival school educational sessions. The notice shall include a reference to red light violations and state that if the person is required to attend traffic survival school the person will receive notice from the motor vehicle division.

    (b) The driver of a vehicle that is stopped in obedience to a red signal and as close as practicable at the entrance to the crosswalk on the near side of the intersection, or if there is no crosswalk, then at the entrance to the intersection, may make a right turn but shall yield the right-of-way to pedestrians and other traffic proceeding as directed by the signal. A right turn may be prohibited against a red signal at any intersection if a sign prohibiting the turn is erected at the intersection.

    (c) The driver of a vehicle on a one-way street that intersects another one-way street on which traffic moves to the left shall stop in obedience to a red signal but may then make a left turn into the one-way street.В The driver shall yield the right-of-way to pedestrians and other traffic proceeding as directed by the signal at the intersection, except that such left turn may be prohibited if a sign prohibiting the turn is erected at the intersection.

    (d) Unless otherwise directed by a pedestrian control signal as provided in section 28-646, a pedestrian facing a steady red signal alone shall not enter the roadway.

    B. If an official traffic control signal is erected and maintained at a place other than an intersection, this section applies except as to those provisions of this section that by their nature can have no application. Any stop required shall be made at a sign or marking on the pavement indicating where the stop shall be made, but in the absence of a sign or marking the stop shall be made at the signal.

    C. The driver of a vehicle approaching an intersection that has an official traffic control signal that is inoperative shall bring the vehicle to a complete stop before entering the intersection and may proceed with caution only when it is safe to do so. If two or more vehicles approach an intersection from different streets or highways at approximately the same time and the official traffic control signal for the intersection is inoperative, the driver of each vehicle shall bring the vehicle to a complete stop before entering the intersection and the driver of the vehicle on the left shall yield the right-of-way to the driver of the vehicle on the right.

    Cassandra from Thornton writes, “What’s driving you crazy? Do you have to turn right on red? I am constantly getting honked at by drivers for not turning right on the red light when it is seeming clear to go. Depending on the intersection, you can’t always see who is coming through the green light or a larger vehicle is obstructing your line of sight. It was my impression that turning right on red is legal unless otherwise posted, but not necessarily required.”

    The short answer Cassandra is no, you don’t have to turn right on red.

    You are completely within your legal right to wait until the light turns green. Even though there is no law that says you must turn right on red, there will be drivers who will argue there is no reason not to turn on red unless it is unsafe.

    According to the Colorado Driver Handbook, “After stopping and yielding to pedestrians and other traffic, and if not prohibited by a traffic sign, you may turn right while the light is red.” The key word in there is “may.” It does not say must, it says may. That makes the right turn on red optional.

    No one can tell another driver when they feel it is safe to make any kind of maneuver, including to turn right on red. That said, other drivers who disagree with your decision will let you know the easiest way they know how — lay on the horn. I’m sure that is an uncomfortable feeling as the blaring horns could make you feel even more unsafe. In our fast-paced world, it is hard for other drivers to think someone wouldn’t want to turn right on red and keep going when they have the opportunity to do so.

    I was talking to several people about this story, including a woman named Susanne.

    “I was involved in a pretty bad accident several years ago because a 16-year-old girl turned right on a red light just as I was going through the intersection,” she said. “My body and car took the brunt of the accident.”

    Another woman told me even though you legally don’t have to go on red, it’s inconsiderate to other drivers and blocks the flow of traffic by waiting there and not turning especially when it is safe.

    Conversely, a man named Sage I spoke with said, “I’ll just put my hands on the horn until I’m satisfied. When people honk at me, they can go around me.”

    For the drivers who want to turn on red, the 911 Driving School says just because it is legal, that doesn’t mean this is a free pass to turn unless the conditions are right. Since you have a red light, that means someone else has a green light and they have the right of way and are probably not watching for people to pull out. It is also imperative when wanting to make a right turn on red to watch for pedestrians and bike riders. Some of the people on a bike will be in the crosswalk, but other riders choose to be on the road, riding with traffic.

    On a separate note, in Colorado, drivers are allowed to make a left turn on red from a one-way street onto another one-way street. The move is legal after stopping at a red light, provided there’s no sign prohibiting such a turn. As with making a right on red, the driver must yield the right-of-way to pedestrians and other traffic lawfully in the intersection before turn left at a red light.

    Denver7 traffic anchor Jayson Luber says he has been covering Denver-metro traffic since Ben-Hur was driving a chariot. (We believe the actual number is over 25 years.) He’s obsessed with letting viewers know what’s happening on their drive and the best way to avoid the problems that spring up. Follow him on Facebook, Twitter or Instagram or listen to his Driving You Crazy podcast on iTunes , Stitcher , Google Play or Podbean.

    How to make a right turn at a red lightPut yourself in the following situation: You are stopped at an intersection in Pennsylvania. The traffic light is red, and you want to make a right turn. Beside the traffic light is a sign that reads ‘Right Turn Signal.’ You check for pedestrians and cross traffic; all is clear. The traffic light is still red.

    Let me ask you…Can you legally turn right on red at this intersection?

    Did you say NO? If so, you are not alone. The majority of drivers do not understand the meaning of this sign. In fact, it is viewed by many, as one of the most confusing, least intuitive road signs in PennDOT’s showroom.

    A ‘Right Turn Signal’ sign is posted close to a traffic signal to indicate that the signal controls right-turn movements. They appear only at intersections with dedicated turn lanes and green-arrow signals, and are intended to avoid confusion about which signals apply to which lane.

    How to make a right turn at a red lightOk, so what exactly does that mean? In simple terms…This sign is telling you that the traffic signal on the far right of the traffic arm, applies to vehicles turning right. When it’s a green arrow, you can turn right. Yellow means prepare to stop. And of course, red means stop. If a ‘No Turn On Red’ sign is NOT present, you may turn right on red, when it’s safe. You don’t need to wait until for the green arrow. You need to be mindful, however, that there may be left-turning vehicles coming from the opposite direction.

    So let’s ask that question again. Can you legally turn right on red at an intersection posted with a ‘Right Turn Signal’ sign? YES! In Pennsylvania, unless there’s a sign that reads ‘No Turn On Red’, it’s legal to turn right on a red, after coming to a complete stop – but only when it’s safe to do so.

    Ask around, see how many people think ‘Right Turn Signal’ means ‘No Turn On Red.’ The results may surprise you.

    Becoming comfortable and complacent behind the wheel is easy to do after years of driving experience. However, safe and defensive drivers seek to broaden their knowledge base to better understand the road, and keep up-to-date with traffic rules and regulations.

    In this post, we are going to expand on red-light procedures and 6 instances where we may proceed on a red light.

    1. Turning Right at a Red Light

    Without a regulatory sign prohibiting the action.

    Due to the potentially dangerous nature of right turn on red lights, this maneuver is a “permissive action” not a “required action”. Meaning drivers may turn right, after coming to a complete stop at the stop line, if it is safe to do so however they are not required to. While right turns at red lights are a common driving practice in Canada many European and Asian countries prohibit the maneuver altogether.

    There may be certain intersections where a right turn at a red light is prohibited. It could be due to a number of different factors such as the number of accidents that have taken place at the intersection; the angle or height of the intersection might not allow for enough observation to make the turn in safety; there might be more than three other intersecting roadways; the rate of speed posted for the road being turned onto is posted 70 km/h or higher or other factors may also be taken into consideration. It is safe and reasonable to assume right turns are permitted in BC unless you see a sign prohibiting the maneuver.

    2. Turning Left When You’re Committed

    Making a left turn at an intersection when already legally committed to the intersection on the green light.

    Chances are you’ve been in an intersection waiting to turn left only to get stuck in the middle while other drivers run the yellow light. In this situation, as long as you have passed the last line of the crosswalk and are legally committed to the intersection you must promptly and safely complete your left turn even if the light has changed to red. Motorists should allow other vehicles to clear the intersection prior to entering.

    3. Flashing Red Light

    A single flashing red light may be indicating a 4 way stop ahead. Flashing red lights may also occur if the intersection is having a malfunction or when service to the light is being performed. Drivers must stop at the marked stop line or crosswalk, and may proceed only when it is safe to do so. Drivers are to treat this situation as a four-way stop and proceed when safe to do so.

    4. When Directed to do so by a POLICE OR Peace Officer

    There may be situations where police, peace officers or traffic controllers take control of an intersection. This could be due to an accident, power failure or possibly construction. In these scenarios police and peace officers OVERRIDE the traffic lights. Drivers are required to follow the directives of these individuals and proceed only when directed and it is safe to do so.

    5. Turning Left at a Red Light from a Two-Way onto a One-Way

    Drivers are permitted to turn left from a two-way street onto a one-way street while at a red light intersection, provided the intersection is clear of all existing traffic, cyclists, or pedestrians. Drivers must come to a complete stop before entering the intersection or entering a marked crosswalk. This maneuver may feel unnatural, as left turns typically require drivers to cross over traffic travelling in the opposite direction. However, on a one-way roadway, only one direction of travel is permitted so approaching traffic from the opposing direction is not a factor.

    6. Pedestrian Crosswalks at Locations Other than Intersections

    Section 129(5) of the Motor Vehicle Act (MVA) outlines the procedure for a red light displayed at a place other than an intersection. An example of this would be a pedestrian controlled lighted crosswalk. In this case, the driver must come to a complete stop and give right of way to the pedestrian (and to any other approaching pedestrians or cyclists). Once the pedestrian or cyclist has safely crossed the driver’s path of travel, the driver may proceed.

    The more you know, the better prepared you can be for our fast-paced and sometimes complicated roadways. It’s important to keep yourself informed about the lesser-known rules and regulations that are in place, like when you can proceed on a red light.

    Traffic lights control the flow of vehicles and pedestrians to improve safety and access to roads. You should drive at a speed that gives you time to react if the traffic lights change.

    If you go through a yellow or red traffic light, you may receive an infringement notice. The notice could either be from a police officer or arrive in the mail for a camera-detected offence.

    You may drive through a flashing yellow light or arrow with caution. You need to apply the give way rules to avoid colliding with other vehicles.

    Obeying traffic lights

    You must not drive past the stop line on the road at a red traffic light or, if there is no stop line, the traffic light.

    Example of red traffic light—with the top light lit up

    You must not drive in the direction of the red traffic arrow past the stop line at the traffic light or, if there is no stop line, the traffic light.

    Example of red arrows on traffic lights—with arrows lit up in the top light to the right

    Stop if it is safe to do so

    You must stop on a yellow light, unless it is unsafe to do so. The yellow light is not the end of the green light phase—it is the beginning of the red light phase.

    If it’s safe to stop, you must not drive past the stop line at the yellow traffic light or, if there is no stop line, the traffic light.

    Example of yellow traffic light—with the middle light lit up

    If it’s unsafe to stop—such as being close to the light when it changes from green to yellow—you may proceed through the yellow light.

    Example of yellow arrows on traffic lights—with arrows lit up in the middle lights on the right

    Drive with caution

    Drive past the light

    You can drive past the green traffic light or arrow, as long as the intersection is clear. You must not enter the intersection if you cannot drive through it because the road ahead is blocked.

    Example of green traffic light or arrow—the green light is lit up in the bottom left, with the green arrow lit up in the bottom right.

    Traffic lights showing a white B light

    If you’re in a bus lane driving a bus, taxi, limousine, or riding a bicycle, you may drive/ride past the white B light.

    Example of white B light—with the white B lit up in the bottom right

    Turning right at traffic lights

    If the light is green and there are vehicles approaching from the opposite direction, you can move forward into the intersection past the stop line if you can do so safely.

    If there is a safe gap in oncoming traffic, you may complete the right turn. If you’re in the intersection and the oncoming traffic continues until the lights turn yellow or red, you must complete the turn on the yellow or red light.

    Video of yellow traffic lights

    Watch the video to better understand yellow traffic lights.

    Some people think it’s legal to drive through a yellow light if your front tyres are over the stop line before the light changes to red.

    But, that’s not the rule.

    It’s only legal to drive through a yellow light if you are unable to stop safely when the light changes.

    You see, the yellow light is not an extension of the green light, it’s actually the beginning of the red.

    So when you approach traffic lights, you should always be prepared to stop in case the light suddenly changes. And you should check your rear view mirror for vehicles travelling close behind. If the light turns yellow, you must stop if it’s safe to do so.

    However, if you’re so close to the intersection when the light changes that you are unable to stop safely, you are legally allowed to drive through the yellow light.

    Now, if the light changes to yellow after you’ve moved into an intersection waiting to turn right, you are also legally allowed to drive through the yellow light to clear the intersection.

    Knowing the rules makes travelling through intersections much safer for everyone.

    U-turns

    You can only make a U-turn at the following locations when there is a U-turn permitted sign.

    • traffic lights
    • children’s crossings
    • level crossings
    • marked foot crossings
    • pedestrian crossings.

    Trooper Steve answers viewer questions

    Daniel Dahm , Digital Content Manager

    ORLANDO, Fla. – News 6 traffic safety expert Trooper Steve Montiero answers viewer questions and shares tips about the rules of the road, helping Central Florida residents become better drivers by being better educated.

    The most recent question Trooper Steve addressed was from Rick, who asked, “I see a lot of people making right turns on red from the left of two right turning lanes. Is this allowed in Florida?”

    “With road expansions happening across our area, it is becoming very common that you see more than one right turning lane,” Trooper Steve said. “Remember, you are never required to make a right on red. If there is a red light and you do not feel comfortable making the right after you’ve stopped, then you are allowed to wait until that light turns green.”

    That may irk drivers behind you, but Trooper Steve said that’s their problem, and you should do what you feel is proper and safe.

    But what about those multi-lane right turns?

    “In Florida, you are allowed to make a right turn on red from any of the multiple right turning lanes if there is no signage limiting that movement,” Trooper Steve said. “Occasionally, there will be a sign that says, ‘Right on red only from right lane,’ meaning no right turns would be permitted other than the far right turning lane.”

    If no sign exists, then you are allowed to make a right on red from any of the multiple right turning lanes.

    What Is Red Light Running?

    If a car enters an intersection right after a traffic light has changed to red, the driver has committed a violation of the rules of the road. Drivers are — for some reason — in an intersection when the signal changes, such as those who are waiting to take a left-hand turn, are not considered red-light runners. In locations where drivers are allowed to make a right turn on red, motorists who do not come to a full stop before turning could be considered as red-light runners. Violations also include drivers who are turning right on red at an intersection when they are not allowed to do so.
    Some studies that were conducted for many months at busy intersections across the United States before the implementation of red light cameras, found that the normal driver would run a red light every 20 minutes at a traffic signal. Red-light running was even more common during peak travel times. When analyzing data from 19 separate intersections that did not have red-light cameras, the violation rate was found to be 3.2 per hour at each intersection.

    Who Primarily Runs a Red Light?

    The AAA Foundation for Traffic Safety administered a survey by phone back in 2017 that found 93 percent of motorists said it was unacceptable to run a red light if they were able to stop safely. However, 43 percent reported that they had run a red light in the last 30 days. When looking at drivers who were involved in deadly red-light crashes in 2017, the drivers who ran the lights were usually male, young, and involved in previous crashes or alcohol-related accidents. The red light runners were also more likely to have been speeding of intoxicated at the time of the collision and less likely to carry a valid driver’s license.

    Laws For Red Lights & Stop Signs in Utah

    How to make a right turn at a red light

    If you get a red light or stop sign ticket in the state of Utah, you will probably have to pay a fine and demerit points assess regarding your driving record. Now, we are going to take a closer look at what is prohibited under and the law as well as the possible consequences of a stop sign or red light violation in the state.

    • Making the Stop. Drivers who are approaching a stop sign or a red light signal are required to come to a full stop before the nearest crosswalk, reaching a marked stop-line, or entering the intersection entirely.
    • Right-On-Red Rule. As long no sign is posted that directly restricts it, Utah law allows for drivers to make a right turn after coming to a stop at a red light, but drivers should use caution and follow the standard right-of-way rules when making a turn.
    • Left-on-Red Rule. In some states, drivers cannot turn left on red, no matter what the circumstances are, but drivers in Utah are allowed to turn left after stopping at a red light of a one-way street. Basically, a driver can make a left turn on red from a one-way street onto another.
    • The Meaning of a Yellow Light. In certain states, the law prohibits drivers from entering an intersection once the signal has changed to yellow. However, in Utah, a solid yellow light is just a warning that signals the light is about to turn to red. Essentially, you are allowed to enter an intersection when the light is yellow, just not after it turns to red.

    Special Rules for Motorcycles, Mopeds, and Bikes

    Certain traffic signals are triggered by a switch after a sensor detects the presence of a car that is waiting at a red light, but these sensors do not always detect motorcycles, mopeds, and bicycles due to their size. When a person driving one of these vehicles is ticketed, they can possibly establish a defense by showing that:

    • They came to a full stop at the intersection or stop line;
    • They waited a reasonable amount of time — at least 90 seconds — without being detected by the sensors;
    • No other car had right-of-way;
    • No pedestrians were crossing or near the intersection; and
    • They continued through the intersection cautiously.

    Fines and Points for Violations

    Stop sign and red light violations are infractions in the state of Utah. Usually, the fine for a conviction is around $120. IN most cases, a stop sign or light conviction will add 50 demerit points to a driver’s record. When a driver has 200 or more points within a three-year timeframe, they will face a suspension of their license. However, eligible drivers can possibly remove 50 points from their record through the completion of a defensive driving course. Depending on the case, a red light or stop sign violation could result in a reckless driving conviction, and a motorist who runs a red light or stop sign and causes death could face automobile homicide charges under certain circumstances — such as illegal use of a cellphone or impairment on drugs or alcohol.

    Dave Bartkowiak Jr. , Digital Managing Editor

    We received this traffic question a couple of times through our 4YI form, where you can ask us anything about Michigan and/or Metro Detroit and we will do our best to get back with an answer(s).

    “I remember when you could turn left on a one-way (during a red light) when you were making a Michigan left — is it still legal?”

    Yes, it is legal for a vehicle to make a left turn onto a one-way street during a red light. This scenario is encountered when you are executing a “Michigan Left” — see here:

    The Michigan Vehicle Code — Section 257.612 — reads as follows:

    “(ii) Vehicular traffic facing a steady red signal, after stopping before entering the crosswalk on the near side of the intersection or at a limit line when marked or, if there is no crosswalk or limit line, before entering the intersection, may make a right turn from a 1-way or 2-way street into a 2-way street or into a 1-way street carrying traffic in the direction of the right turn or may make a left turn from a 1-way or 2-way street into a 1-way roadway carrying traffic in the direction of the left turn, unless prohibited by sign, signal, marking, light, or other traffic control device. The vehicular traffic shall yield the right of way to pedestrians and bicyclists lawfully within an adjacent crosswalk and to other traffic lawfully using the intersection.”

    Thanks for the question! You can make that left turn onto a one-way street despite the red light, but make sure traffic is clear and there are no pedestrians in the way.

    4YI — Ask us a question about Metro Detroit or Michigan

    What do you have questions about in Metro Detroit or Michigan that you’d like us to investigate?

    Welcome to 4YI, the place where you can ask us those questions. We will work to track down the answer(s).

    Just fill out this quick form to send us a note:

    Traffic lights regulate traffic flow and make intersections safer for drivers, pedestrians and other road users. You must always obey traffic lights on NSW roads.

    Stopping at traffic lights

    Red light

    A red light means you must stop. You must stop as close as possible behind the ‘Stop’ line.

    Yellow (amber) light

    A yellow (amber) light means you must stop. You can only go through a yellow light if you cannot stop safely before the ‘Stop’ line.

    You should not stop suddenly, and you should not speed up to get through a yellow light.

    Green light

    A green light means you can go through the intersection if it’s safe to do so.

    You must also follow these rules for temporary traffic lights at roadworks.

    Turn signals

    Some traffic lights have arrows to control traffic turning right or left.

    Red arrow

    A red arrow means you must not turn. You must stop behind the ‘Stop’ line until the arrow turns green or disappears.

    Green arrow

    A green arrow means you can turn in that direction.

    Yellow (amber) arrow

    A yellow (amber) arrow means you must stop. You can only go through a yellow light if you cannot stop safely before the ‘Stop’ line.

    When a yellow (amber) arrow is flashing, this means you can turn in that direction. You must give way to pedestrians crossing the road you’re turning into.

    See Turning left and right for rules for turning when there are no signals.

    Turning left on a red light

    When you see this sign at traffic lights, you must stop at the red light, and then turn left when it’s clear. When turning, you must give way to traffic approaching from the right.

    Turning right at traffic lights

    When there’s a green traffic light but no right arrow signal, wait until oncoming traffic clears or breaks, and then turn.

    If the lights change to yellow or red while you’re in the intersection, you must turn right as soon as it’s safe to do so.

    You must not make a U-turn at traffic lights, unless there’s a ‘U-turn permitted’ sign.

    Signals for other vehicles

    Buses

    Some traffic lights have a ‘B’ signal for buses driving in a bus lane or bus-only lane. The ‘B’ signal is usually white on a black background (some traffic lights also have red and yellow ‘B’ signals).

    When the ‘B’ signal lights up, only buses can go through the intersection. This signal lights up shortly before the usual traffic lights change.

    When the ‘B’ signal turns red or yellow, buses must stop at the intersection.

    How to make a right turn at a red light

    Red traffic light and white ‘B’ bus signal showing only buses can go through intersection

    Trams (light rail)

    Some traffic lights have a ‘T’ signal for trams. The ‘T’ signal is usually white on a black background.

    When the ‘T’ signal lights up, only trams can go through the intersection.

    When the ‘T’ signal turns red or yellow, the tram must stop or prepare to stop.

    Bicycle riders

    Some traffic lights have bicycle signals for bicycle riders. These signals are used where bicycles are allowed to ride across a pedestrian crossing and also at some intersections.

    When the ‘Bicycle’ symbol turns green, bicycle riders can go through the crossing or intersection. They must stop when the ‘Bicycle’ symbol turns red.

    Vehicles must not stop in the area reserved for bicycles at traffic lights (bicycle storage area).

    Pedestrian signals

    Most traffic lights have areas where pedestrians can cross. Red and green pedestrian symbols or lights show them when to cross. Pedestrians must follow these signals.

    Some signals have pedestrian countdown timers which show how many seconds a pedestrian has left to cross the road.

    When you’re turning at an intersection, you must give way to pedestrians crossing the road that you’re turning into. Even if the pedestrian symbols or lights are flashing red, you must give way to any pedestrians still crossing.

    You must also stop for pedestrians crossing at a pelican crossing.

    Red-light speed cameras

    Red-light speed cameras detect both red light and speeding offences at high-risk intersections.

    The camera detects your vehicle if you cross over the ‘Stop’ line or enter the intersection after the traffic light has turned red.

    The camera also detects your vehicle if you go over the speed limit at any time, whether the traffic light is red, amber or green.

    See Speed limits to find out more about the rules and penalties for speeding.

    TAMPA, Fla. — From time to time, on the Driving Tampa Bay Forward tip line, we get questioned about whether or not you can turn right on a red light.

    You may have had this question yourself. You’ve been at an intersection and wondered “why isn’t this person turning?”

    Well, turning right on red isn’t legal in every state. It also depends on the intersection.

    The Florida Department of Transportation says:

    “A red RIGHT arrow means that you must come to a complete stop at the marked stop line or before moving into the crosswalk or intersection. After stopping, you may turn RIGHT on the red arrow at most intersections if the way is clear. Some intersections display a “NO TURN ON RED” sign, which you must obey.”

    How to make a right turn at a red light

    Here’s the exact law from the Florida Highway Patrol:

    FSS 316.075

    (c) Steady red indication.—
    1. Vehicular traffic facing a steady red signal shall stop before entering the crosswalk on the near side of the intersection or, if none, then before entering the intersection and shall remain standing until a green indication is shown; however:

    a. The driver of a vehicle which is stopped at a clearly marked stop line, but if none, before entering the crosswalk on the near side of the intersection, or, if none then at the point nearest the intersecting roadway where the driver has a view of approaching traffic on the intersecting roadway before entering the intersection in obedience to a steady red signal may make a right turn, but shall yield the right-of-way to pedestrians and other traffic proceeding as directed by the signal at the intersection, except that municipal and county authorities may prohibit any such right turn against a steady red signal at any intersection, which prohibition shall be effective when a sign giving notice thereof is erected in a location visible to traffic approaching the intersection.

    b. The driver of a vehicle on a one-way street that intersects another one-way street on which traffic moves to the left shall stop in obedience to a steady red signal, but may then make a left turn into the one-way street, but shall yield the right-of-way to pedestrians and other traffic proceeding as directed by the signal at the intersection, except that municipal and county authorities may prohibit any such left turn as described, which prohibition shall be effective when a sign giving notice thereof is attached to the traffic control signal device at the intersection.

    How to make a right turn at a red lightIf you receive a traffic ticket for running a red light or stop sign in Charlotte, you may be tempted to handle it on your own and just pay the fine. However, a traffic ticket’s consequences can affect many aspects of your life and may cost you more in the long run if you take this approach rather than retaining an experienced traffic law attorney to help you.

    North Carolina’s Traffic Laws on Red Lights and Stop Signs

    Like all states, North Carolina has enacted laws regarding how drivers must drive when approaching a stop sign or stop light. Here are some of the rules that people must follow:

    • Stopping. When coming to a stop sign or stop light, drivers are required to come to a complete stop at the nearest of the following: entering the crosswalk, reaching a marked stop line, or entering the intersection.
    • Right-on-Red Rule. Under North Carolina’s Right-on-Red law, drivers are allowed to make a right turn at a red light after stopping if it is permitted. They must first yield the right of way when making the turn.
    • Left-on-Red Rule. It is illegal to make a left turn at a red light in our state.
    • Yellow lights. People can get a ticket for running a yellow light in some states. However, in North Carolina, a yellow light is simply a warning that the light will turn red soon. It is legal to be in the intersection when the light is yellow—but not if it has turned red.

    Penalties for Running a Red Light or Stop Sign

    Running a red light or stop sign is an infraction in North Carolina. Here are possible penalties you face:

    • Fine of up to $100
    • 3 points on your driving record
    • 3 points on your insurance record

    If you receive 12 or more points in a three-year period, you could have your driver’s license suspended. In addition, points on your insurance may result in your insurance rates increasing for years after you resolve your ticket.

    Have you Received a Traffic Citation in Charlotte, NC?

    If you received a traffic citation, you need to speak with an experienced traffic ticket attorney as soon as possible. Please contact us online or call our Charlotte office directly at 980.207.3355 to schedule your free consultation.

    Proper obedience to traffic signals is an important part of being a responsible driver on Ohio roads. When the light turns red, it is common knowledge to put on the brakes and stop at the intersection to wait for the green light to switch on. Some drivers may wonder if it is legal to make a right turn at a red light if there are no vehicles approaching that could cross into your turn path. Ohio law provides a solid answer to that question.

    Section 4511.13 of Ohio’s traffic laws lay out the conditions for a right turn on red. When a motorist reaches an intersection where the traffic light has turned red, the driver is to stop. After coming to a halt, the driver is permitted to make a right turn under the same conditions as if the driver had stopped at a stop sign. If no other vehicle is approaching that has the right of way, the motorist may make the right turn.

    However, there are exceptions that do not permit a right turn on red. There may be a traffic control device at the intersection that warns against making a right turn. Also, not all red lights will allow for right turns. Ohio law permits you to turn right if the red light is a solid circle. However, if the red light is a red arrow, you cannot make a turn.

    Be aware that turning right on red carries special risks for smaller vehicles like motorcycles if they approach your path. The Dairyland Insurance website points out that drivers stopped at an intersection may see a motorcycle coming but misjudge how far away the motorcycle is. As a result, a motorist could pull out right into the path of the motorcycle, and if the motorcyclist cannot stop in time, a collision could result.

    Even though state law allows for motorists to make right turns on red given certain conditions, it is wise to be extra vigilant while you stop and look for approaching vehicles. A wrong move can cause one or more motorists or vehicle passengers to become gravely injured or even killed on the road.

    How to make a right turn at a red light

    (December 3, 2019) – Another Tuesday, another traffic tip! This week we are going to focus on turning right on a red light, but more specifically on a red ARROW light.

    How to make a right turn at a red light

    An ordinary (non-arrow) red light with accompanying “No Turn On Red” sign nearby.

    Most drivers (should be all drivers, but to err is human) know that a right on an ordinary red light is permitted after coming to a complete stop and looking to make sure traffic is clear. Vehicles may then proceed to make their right turn. The only time this is NOT permitted is when the intersection is marked with a “No Turn On Red” sign, which should be affixed to the traffic light post near the light itself. When it comes to a dedicated right turn lane that then displays a solid red arrow, drivers often get confused. Is a right on red still permitted when an arrow, or does one need to wait until the arrow turns green?

    The answer is yes, you may turn right on a red arrow after once again coming to a complete stop and checking that traffic is clear. Florida State Statute 316.075 covers traffic signals, and states:

    a. The driver of a vehicle which is stopped at a clearly marked stop line, but if none, before entering the crosswalk on the near side of the intersection, or, if none then at the point nearest the intersecting roadway where the driver has a view of approaching traffic on the intersecting roadway before entering the intersection in obedience to a steady red signal may make a right turn, but shall yield the right-of-way to pedestrians and other traffic proceeding as directed by the signal at the intersection, except that municipal and county authorities may prohibit any such right turn against a steady red signal at any intersection, which prohibition shall be effective when a sign giving notice thereof is erected in a location visible to traffic approaching the intersection.

    How to make a right turn at a red light

    Only if the sign is there saying you can’t!

    In short, in defining a “steady red indication” the statute does not differentiate between a circular red light and a red arrow light. A right on red may be made in both instances provided there is no sign prohibiting the right turn. The good news is there’s no need to sit at that red arrow and wait forever for green; just make sure to stop, look, and proceed when safe to do so.

    CAPE CORAL POLICE DEPARTMENT | Public Affairs Office | 1100 Cultural Park Boulevard | Cape Coral, FL 33990 | (239) 242-3341

    Some Lincoln drivers are comfortable turning right after stopping at a red light. Others are not so sure that it is legal. What is the answer? Would a driver end up in legal hot water if that driver turned right on red? According to Nebraska law, there is no problem with making right turns at a red light, provided the driver follows through on certain actions.

    Nebraska law spells out what a driver is to do before turning on red. First, the driver should stop at a marked stop line, or before entering a crosswalk, or prior to crossing an intersection if there is no marking available. From there, the driver must yield to pedestrians and oncoming traffic that have the right of way before crossing into the intersection to make a right turn.

    However, there may be instances where a driver is barred from turning right even if no one else has the right of way. According to state law, law enforcement can place traffic control devices at the intersection that forbid motorists from turning right. These control devices can take the form of signs that prohibit right turns. Sometimes police may be on hand to direct traffic.

    Drivers in the city of Lincoln should be aware that the rules on turning right change when the red light is an arrow. According to the Lincoln Journal Star, the city has recently instituted an ordinance clarifying that drivers cannot make right turns on red arrows. The city has since removed signs that remind motorists not to turn right on a red arrow so that drivers do not assume that such signs are needed in conjunction with a red arrow.

    Understanding the laws on turning right on red can help keep you out of legal trouble, plus they decrease the chances of getting into a motor vehicle accident. By recognizing when drivers and pedestrians have the right of way before turning on red, you can safely cross into an intersection with minimal risk to yourself or anyone else.

    Q: In New York state, is it legal to turn “right on red” on a solid right red arrow? I have been taught that it is not OK to turn, but many drivers blow horns for the car ahead to go “right on red”. I have asked police and cannot get a definitive answer on this. Thank you, Tom.

    A: Tom, Thanks for your question. Let them honk away while you patiently wait for the red arrow to turn green! It is not legal to turn right on a red arrow. But, in cities where the population is smaller than 1 million you can turn right on red if there is no signage prohibiting it.

    Title VII of the V&T law is entitled “Rules of the Road”, and it goes into more detail. For a right turn on a solid red light it says: at many intersections in New York State, governed by traffic lights, you may make a right turn when the light is red. You must come to a complete stop, check the intersection for vehicles and pedestrians, and proceed to make a right turn when it is safe to do so.

    The law goes on to confirm that turning right on red is prohibited in cities with a population of more than 1 million unless a sign permits it. It also says that turning right on red is prohibited if a sign at the intersection prohibits it.

    Pack your patience and stay safe Tom!

    Spectrum News’s Real-Time Traffic Expert, Lacey Leonardi, helps you get around accidents and congestion in Central New York. Every week, Lacey answers a viewer question on Spectrum News’s Traffic Inbox. Have a question about traffic or the rules of the road? Ask Lacey!

    Question: When there is an intersection with two right turn lanes, are both lanes allowed to turn right on red after stopping? And can drivers change lanes during the turn when both lanes are going the same direction? In my experience, the drivers changing lanes toward the left as they turn are completely oblivious to the other right-turning lane.

    Answer: There’s nothing stopping anyone from getting the Taco Bell logo permanently tattooed on their body, but that doesn’t mean it’s a good idea. To the 17 people with Taco Bell tattoos, no judgment here; I respect your commitment. My point here is that there are plenty of things we are allowed to do that, for good reason, we choose not to do, and this includes how we drive.

    As drivers, we’re familiar with the right turn on red (RTOR), but to make sure we’re all on the same page I’ll summarize. At a red light, a driver intending to take a right turn (or a left turn onto a one-way street) may, after stopping for the red light and yielding to other cars and pedestrians in the intersection, make their turn. (Exception: When a sign is posted prohibiting a RTOR.) When an intersection has two right turn lanes, the law doesn’t limit the option for a RTOR to just the rightmost lane.

    Legally, yes, you can make a right turn on red from either right turn lane. But even though it’s allowed in both lanes, the fact that you asked this question is a good indicator that plenty of drivers aren’t clear about the rules in this situation. And that’s when problems can arise.

    You may find yourself at a red light behind another driver in the left of two right turn lanes, see that there’s no cross-traffic, and wonder why they don’t just take their right turn already. Maybe they see something you don’t see. Or maybe they don’t know they’re allowed to make that turn. Or maybe they know the law, but they also know that right turns on red lights account for a disproportionately high number of crashes with pedestrians so they’ve chosen not to take them. That’s a lot of maybes.

    A right turn on red is an option, not a requirement, and it should only be done if it can be done safely.

    To quote a phrase that was often said in our household, “Just because you can doesn’t mean you should.” If you have the option of making that turn, or you’re behind someone who does, it’s a good time to exercise clear judgment and patience.

    As to changing lanes during the turn, the Washington Driver Guide states, “If there are signs or lane markings that allow for two or more turning lanes, stay in your lane during the turn.” Pretty clear, right? Our state law leaves things more ambiguous, but does state that a driver shall not leave their lane until they’ve determined that it can be done safely. Is changing lanes in an intersection inherently unsafe?

    Since driving instructors are training our future drivers to be safe, I asked a few of them if they’d penalize a student for changing lanes in an intersection during a driving exam. The consensus was essentially, “Yes, after changing my shorts, there would likely be a penalty.”

    What does driving through an intersection and getting a Taco Bell tattoo have in common? Done poorly, they both can have long-lasting consequences. But I think I’d pick a bad tattoo over a serious traffic crash. The tattoo might be embarrassing, but a crash in an intersection could be life-altering.

    Many drivers know that it is legal to turn right while the traffic light is red, unless there is a sign expressly prohibiting it. The “turning right on red” rule is commonly practiced in Virginia, but what about turning left on red?

    How to make a right turn at a red light

    It turns out that you can turn left on red in Virginia, but only if: (1) the red traffic signal is a circular red; (2) you are currently stopped on a one-way street; and (3) you are about to turn left onto another one-way street. Under these circumstances, Virginia Code § 46.2-836 expressly permits a left turn on steady red after you have brought your vehicle to a complete stop. The code specifically permits a left on red if the traffic light is a circular red, as opposed to a red, turn-only arrow. In the latter case, you would need to obey the red and only turn once the light changes to a green arrow.

    In Virginia, the legal left turn on red can be distilled down to the image below.

    How to make a right turn at a red light

    Figure 1. Depicting a legal left turn on red from a one-way street onto another one-way street.

    Figure 1 above shows a white car that is currently stopped at the intersection of two one-way streets. There is no sign forbidding vehicles at that traffic light to turn left on red. Note that the traffic signal is an ordinary circular red, and not a red arrow signal. This is the only situation in which Virginia law permits the white-colored car to make the left turn while the stop light ahead of it is red. Contrast this with the figures below:

    Figure 2. Depicting a left turn from a two-way street onto a one-way street.

    Figure 2 above shows a white car that is currently stopped on a two-lane street and about to turn left onto a one-way street. This is not allowed in Virginia because the white car would be pulling in front of oncoming traffic from the opposing lane.

    How to make a right turn at a red light

    Figure 3. Depicting the intersection of two, two-lane streets.

    In Figure 3, shown above, a white car is stopped at a red light governing the intersection of two two-lane streets. It is illegal for the white car to make a left turn while the light is red, because it risks pulling out in front of oncoming traffic and across adjacent traffic. This situation is the highest-risk of the three, and Virginia law is explicit about forbidding left turns on red at these types of intersections.

    Keep in mind that no driver is ever required to make a left on red, nor a right on red. Adhering to traffic signs that either state in plain language “No Turn on Red” or forbid it via a symbol is important when you are at an intersection. Even if turning on red is permitted, remember that it is perfectly legal, and oftentimes safest, to wait until the light turns green and you can proceed safely. While following the law is key, safety is paramount.

    If you have been injured due to the negligence of another driver failing to yield to a traffic signal, you may be eligible for compensation. Call the experienced attorneys at Allen & Allen today, at 866-388-1307.

    How to make a right turn at a red light

    You can turn left on a red light in Michigan if you are turning left from a 1-way or 2-way street onto a 1-way street if the traffic is traveling in the direction of your left turn. While you can turn left on a red light, bicyclists, pedestrians, and all traffic using the street have the right of way and you must yield before turning left.

    Most people raised in Michigan have done this. We’re reasonably sure that somebody somewhere (maybe it was your high school biology teacher who doubled as your driver’s ed instructor way back when) told us it was legal to make a left on a red. Contrast that with what happens when you have a visitor from another state in your car where this is not allowed. Your visitor tells you this is definitely illegal and you have to wait for the light to turn green.

    So who is right? In today’s blog post, we will answer this question in full detail.

    When can you turn left on a red light in Michigan?

    Michigan law allows you to turn left on a red light so long as you stop before entering the intersection and so long as you are turning onto a 1-way street that is “carrying traffic in the direction of the left turn.” This applies whether you are turning from a 1-way or 2-way street. (MCL 257.612(1)(c)(ii))

    Can you turn left on a red light in Michigan onto a 2-way street?

    No, you can’t onto a 2-way street. You can only turn left on a red light in Michigan if you are turning onto a 1-way street and the traffic on the street must be going in the same direction as your left turn.

    What if there are bicyclists or pedestrians lawfully in the crosswalk or if there is oncoming traffic?

    If there are bicyclists or pedestrians lawfully in the crosswalk on the street that you are turning onto, then you must yield the right of way to them. You must also yield the right of way to vehicle traffic traveling on the street that you are turning onto.

    What if there is a sign saying you can’t?

    You cannot if it is “prohibited by sign, signal, marking, light, or other traffic control device.” (MCL 257.612(1)(c)(ii))

    Michigan law requires that a sign prohibiting a left turn on a red light “shall be located above or adjacent to the traffic control signal or as close as possible to the point where the turn is made, or at both locations, so that 1 or more of the signs are visible to a vehicle operator intending to turn, at the point where the turn is made. An additional sign may be used at the far side of the intersection in the direct line of vision of the turning vehicle operator.” (MCL 257.612(5))

    Injured in a car accident? Call the auto accident attorneys at Michigan Auto Law

    If you were injured in a car accident in Michigan and have questions about your legal rights to pain and suffering compensation, economic damages and auto No-Fault insurance benefits, you can speak to an experienced auto accident lawyer at (800) 777-0028 for a free consultation. You can also get help from an experienced No-Fault insurance attorney by visiting our contact page or you can use the chat feature on our website.

    How to make a right turn at a red light

    How to make a right turn at a red light

    Steven Gursten has been selected a Michigan Lawyer of the Year and has been voted consistently among the top 50 attorneys in Michigan (out of over 65,000 lawyers) by Super Lawyers. He is the current President of the AAJ Distracted Driving Litigation Group, Past-President of the Belli Society, a Past-President of the AAJ Truck Litigation Group and TBI Group, as well as Past-President of the Motor Vehicle Trial Lawyers Association.

    Steve has been named a JD Supra Reader’s Choice Award winner – Top Author in the Insurance category annually since 2018. Steve has recovered the largest ever auto and truck accident settlement of any Michigan lawyer or law firm.

    “Maximum stars for this law company and particularly for Mr. Steven Gursten – Attorney at Law. Very professional and prompt! I also found very useful information about the new auto law. I recommended him to all my friends and neighbors.” – Mira

    September 23, 2014

    Question: What are the rules for making a right turn on red?

    Answer: There are several rules and things that you must watch for when making a right turn on red.

    The first and most important rule – and this is the law in all 50 states – you must come to a complete stop at the red light before making a right turn on red. Failing to obey this law gets a lot of drivers in trouble either through involvement in a crash, or by receiving a ticket for running a red light. Many drivers, at intersections where red light cameras are installed, receive a ticket for running a red light because they seem to have forgotten this law and make a “rolling right on red.” Red means stop!

    Making a right turn on red isn’t allowed at every intersection. If a “No Right Turn On Red” sign is posted, it’s illegal to turn. Sometimes, when the oncoming lane has a left turn light, an electric “No Right On Red” sign will light up. It’s your duty as a driver to be aware of all signs.

    Other intersections may have a red right turn arrow. Just like a red light, a red right turn arrow means you must stop. However, in some states, Florida included, it’s legal to turn right on a red arrow after you’ve come to a complete stop unless there’s another sign posted that says “No Right On Red.” If you’re unsure of what the law is in your state, check your driving manual or, to be safe, remain stopped until you get a green arrow.

    There are a lot of good reasons why you must come to a complete stop before making a right turn. Intersections can be a dangerous place and most crashes in the US happen at intersections. When you stop at a red light, before turning right, check for;

    • Pedestrians that may be in the crosswalk – they have the right-of-way.
    • Vehicles coming from the left on a green light (including bicycles and motorcycles) – they have the right-of-way.
    • Vehicles in the oncoming lane turning left on a green left turn arrow – they have the right-of-way.
    • Vehicles from the right that are making a U-turn at the intersection – they have the right-of-way.
    • Pedestrians and bicyclists entering the intersection from the right- they have the right-of-way.

    Another issue with right turns on red involves driver courtesy and good common sense. Sometimes, in heavy traffic, when traffic is backed up to the intersection, drivers must stop at the white line before entering the intersection to avoid blocking the intersection, if the light should change. Along with obeying the law, they are actually doing you a favor by keeping the intersection clear for you if your light should turn green. When you see a driver stop on a green light before entering the intersection, don’t take advantage of them by seeing that as an opportunity to make a right turn on red. It’s illegal, rude, and could lead to a road rage situation.

    You’re only allowed to turn right on red if the way is completely clear of all pedestrians and other traffic. Don’t allow yourself to get in the habit of a rolling right turn on red.

    While all course changes require knowledge and skill, making a right turn is easier, safer and more straight-forward than making a left turn. When turning right you do not need to worry about traffic traveling in the opposite direction from the road you are entering, which makes things a whole lot simpler. In some areas you can even turn right against a red traffic signal (check your state’s driving manual for information).

    1. How to make a right turn
    2. Right Turn on a Red Traffic Signal

    Easy though it may be, making right turns is a skill you must master before taking on the driving test. Here, we break down the process of making a right turn and discuss how it applies in different traffic situations.

    How to make a right turn

    Plan and prepare.
    Anticipate your right turn and make sure you are in the correct lane soon enough to maneuver. Avoid making last-minute lane changes as your vehicle will become a hazard for other drivers. Assume lane position three in preparation for your right turn, aligning your vehicle a few inches away from the right-hand lane divide markings.

    Signal your intention to turn right.
    This should be done well in advance of the turn so that other drivers are not forced to react at the last moment. Most state handbooks specify that turns should be indicated at least 100 feet in advance and that signal lights should remain active until the maneuver is complete. Use the right turn hand signal (left arm extended out the left window, arm bent at the elbow and forearm pointing upward) if your turn signals are broken or obscured.

    Reduce speed and check for cyclists and motorcyclists.
    Turn to check your vehicle’s blind spots in addition to using your mirrors, as bicycles and motorcycles can easily be hidden in these areas. Like any other vehicle, cyclists and motorcyclists have the right-of-way in this situation.

    Check for “STOP” or “YIELD” signs at the intersection and abide by their instructions.
    If a “YIELD” sign is present, you must slow down and allow cross-traffic and pedestrians the right-of-way. A “STOP” sign means that you must come to a complete stop to yield the right-of-way.

    Look for traffic lights controlling the intersection.
    You may turn right if the signal light is green or if the turn is protected, with a green arrow signal. You may usually make a right turn against a red signal light but only after coming to a complete stop. If a “NO TURN ON RED” traffic sign or a red arrow pointing in the direction of the turn are present, you cannot make the right turn.

    Check for pedestrians crossing the street.
    You MUST yield to pedestrians, at all times.

    Check for traffic in both directions before turning right.
    Only turn when you are certain it is safe and do not swing your vehicle wide during or prior to the turn.

    Finish your turn in the same lane.
    Changing lanes at an intersection is usually dangerous and sometimes illegal. Check your state’s driving manual to find out if intersection lane-changes are prohibited in your state.

    The number of directions in which traffic is moving may affect how you should execute a right turn. Different procedures should be followed on one-way and two-way streets, as detailed below:

    From a one-way street into a one-way street:

    If turning right from a one-way street into another one-way street, you should move into the furthest right lane as early as possible and remain there during the turn. In some cases, you may notice a lane marked “LANE USE CONTROL” accompanied by directional pavement markings. This indicates that more than one lane may be used to turn right into that street.

    From a one-way street into a two-way street:

    Follow the same steps outlined above when turning right from a one-way street into a two-way street. Assume a position in the right-hand lane unless signs and pavement markings indicate that other lanes may be used. Choose a lane marked “RIGHT TURN ONLY” over one marked “STRAIGHT OR RIGHT TURN” whenever possible, to avoid holding up traffic moving straight over the intersection.

    From a two-way street into a two-way street:

    You must always turn from the right-hand lane and remain there, when turning right from a two-way street to a two-way street. Motorists traveling from the opposite direction may intend to turn into the same street at the same time, in which case changing lanes during the turn could cause an accident.

    Right Turn on a Red Traffic Signal

    Drivers are permitted to make right turns through a red traffic signal in most states; this information can be found in your state’s driving manual. However, when turning right on a red traffic signal, you must treat the red light like a “STOP” sign. In this situation, drivers must come to a complete stop before the signal or stop line, yielding to cross-traffic and pedestrians using the crosswalk. Make sure there are no motorcyclists or cyclists close to your vehicle – particularly on the right side – before executing the turn.

    It will be quite clear when making a right turn is not permitted. This may be indicated with a red arrow signal light pointing to the right.

    In other situations, a “NO TURN ON RED” sign will be displayed. When one of these signs or a red right-facing arrow is present, you must not turn right until the signal light has turned green.

    Illinois law (625 ILCS 5/11-305 and 5/11-306) requires drivers facing a steady red signal to stop at a clearly marked stop line or, if no line exists, before entering the crosswalk. If a clearly marked line or crosswalk does not exist, the driver must stop before entering the intersection. The vehicle must remain stopped until an indication to proceed is displayed.

    Unless it is otherwise prohibited by a posted sign, motorists are permitted to make a right turn at a red light. The driver must yield to any oncoming vehicles as well as pedestrians within the crosswalk or intersection. If a right turn on red is prohibited, the vehicle must remain stopped until an indication to proceed is displayed.

    A steady yellow light warns that a red light will be displayed immediately thereafter, but it is not illegal for a driver to enter the intersection while a yellow light is displayed. If a driver enters the intersection after a yellow light is displayed and the light turns red while driving through the intersection, he/she could still be charged with running a red light.

    Disobeying a Stop Sign

    Illinois law 625 ILCS 5/11-1204(b), requires drivers to obey all stop signs. Drivers must stop at any intersection with a stop sign before entering the crosswalk or, if there is no crosswalk, at a clearly marked stop line. If neither a crosswalk nor clearly marked stop line exists, the driver must stop at the point nearest the intersection roadway where the driver is able to view approaching traffic. These rules must be followed unless the driver is directed to proceed by a police officer or a traffic control signal.

    Failure to Obey a Yield Sign

    Illinois law 625 ILCS 5/11-1204(c), requires drivers to obey all yield signs. Drivers must stop at a yield sign before entering the crosswalk or intersection if required to do so for safety. If there is no crosswalk, the driver must stop at a clearly marked stop line. If there is no crosswalk or clearly marked stop line, the driver must stop at the point nearest the intersecting roadway allowing the driver to view any approaching traffic on the intersecting roadway.

    Disobeying or Avoiding a Traffic Control Device

    Also, under 625 ILCS 5/11-305, drivers must obey all officially erected traffic control devices such as traffic signals and ‘no turn’ signs. Also, under this particular statute, it is illegal to leave a roadway and travel across private property for the purpose of avoiding a traffic control device. An example of avoiding a traffic control device is when a driver is approaching a red light and decides to cut through the parking lot of a gas station at the corner to circumvent the light.

    Under Illinois law, the above mentioned traffic tickets are are petty offenses, which are punishable by a maximum fine of $1,000.00 in addition to any mandatory court costs and assessments. Disobeying a stop sign, yield sign, traffic control device (e.g. red light) are all treated as moving violations under Illinois law. Paying your ticket will result in a conviction, which will be entered on your driving record by the Illinois Secretary of State. Convictions count against a suspension of your driver’s license. Convictions will likely cause increased insurance rates as well. If an accident results from running a traffic light or stop sign, or if an officer determines that a motorist was driving recklessly, additional charges may be filed. Furthermore, if a motorist is fleeing or eluding an officer and runs a red light or stop sign, more serious penalties may be imposed.

    Contact Our Traffic Ticket Attorneys

    An experienced traffic attorney may be able to assist in keeping these offenses off of your public record. A sentence of court supervision may be negotiated or a traffic attorney may be able to secure a finding of not guilty at trial. This will prevent the offense from counting against your driving privileges or affecting your insurance rates or employment.

    Once you are at the intersection, you will be dealing with different traffic scenarios:

    How to make a right turn at a red light

    One Right Turn Lane
    At most intersections, you can only make a right turn from the very right lane. These type of intersections do not have a sign showing multiple right turn arrows, do not provide lanes with white dash marking to allow multiple right lanes, and allow you to make the right turn to any of the open lanes with the correct flow of traffic.

    Multiple Right Turn Lanes
    At some intersections, there are options for making right turns from multiple right turn lanes. There may be a sign showing multiple right turn arrows. When you make a right turn from any of the multiple right turn lanes, you will need to stay in your lane using white dash lines as your guide of staying in your lane.

    Red Arrow Signal Light
    You must STOP until the light turns green.

    Green Arrow Signal Light
    You can GO, but you must still YIELD to vehicles, pedestrians or bicycles that are in your path.

    Standard Red Light
    You must STOP, make sure that there is no sign that says NO TURN ON RED, YIELD to all traffic that has a green light, YIELD to pedestrians who are still at the crosswalk, YIELD to any traffic that may still be at the intersection, look at all your surroundings (left, right, ahead, and left again) before turning and turn when it is safe. (Exception: You are not allowed to make the right turn at a red light in New York City.)

    Standard Green Light
    You can GO, but you must first YIELD to pedestrians that are on the crosswalk and/or approaching the crosswalk; you must also YIELD to any traffic that may still be at the intersection.

    Yellow Light
    You are more likely to need to stop and here is why:

    • Since you are making the right turn, you are driving at the slower speed, and more likely will not be able to make it through the yellow light before it turns red.
    • You have a very short time to evaluate the situation and to make sure that there are no pedestrians or bicyclists and everything is safe before making the turn.

    Stop Sign
    You must STOP, YIELD to the traffic that has arrived at the intersection first, YIELD to pedestrians that are on the crosswalk and/or approaching the crosswalk, look at all your surroundings (left, right, ahead, and left again) before turning, and turn when it is safe.

    Traffic control signal legend–right turn on red light, when.

    300.155. Whenever traffic is controlled by traffic control signals exhibiting different colored lights, or colored lighted arrows, successively one at a time or in combination, only the colors green, red and yellow shall be used, except for special pedestrian signals carrying a word legend, and said lights shall indicate and apply to drivers of vehicles and pedestrians as follows:

    (1) Green indication

    (a) Vehicular traffic facing a circular green signal may proceed straight through or turn right or left unless a sign at such place prohibits either such turn. But vehicular traffic, including vehicles turning right or left, shall yield the right-of-way to other vehicles and to pedestrians lawfully within the intersection or an adjacent crosswalk at the time such signal is exhibited;

    (b) Vehicular traffic facing a green arrow signal, shown alone or in combination with another indication, may cautiously enter the intersection only to make the movement indicated by such arrow, or such other movement as is permitted by other indications shown at the same time. Such vehicular traffic shall yield the right-of-way to pedestrians lawfully within an adjacent crosswalk and to other traffic lawfully using the intersection;

    (c) Unless otherwise directed by a pedestrian control signal as provided in section 300.160, pedestrians facing any green signal, except when the sole green signal is a turn arrow, may proceed across the roadway within any marked or unmarked crosswalk.

    (2) Steady yellow indication

    (a) Vehicular traffic facing a steady yellow signal is thereby warned that the related green movement is being terminated or that a red indication will be exhibited immediately thereafter when vehicular traffic shall not enter the intersection;

    (b) Pedestrians facing a steady yellow signal, unless otherwise directed by a pedestrian control signal as provided in section 300.160, are thereby advised that there is insufficient time to cross the roadway before a red indication is shown and no pedestrian shall then start to cross the roadway.

    (3) Steady red indication

    (a) Vehicular traffic facing a steady red signal alone shall stop before entering the crosswalk on the near side of the intersection or, if none, then before entering the intersection and shall remain standing until a green indication is shown except as provided in paragraph (b) of this subdivision;

    (b) The driver of a vehicle which is stopped as close as practicable at the entrance to the crosswalk on the near side of the intersection or, if none, then at the entrance to the intersection in obedience to a red signal, may cautiously enter the intersection to make a right turn but shall yield the right-of-way to pedestrians and other traffic proceeding as directed by the signal at the intersection, except that the state highways and transportation commission with reference to an intersection involving a state highway, and local authorities with reference to an intersection involving other highways under their jurisdiction, may prohibit any such right turn against a red signal at any intersection where safety conditions so require, said prohibition shall be effective when a sign is erected at such intersection giving notice thereof;

    (c) Unless otherwise directed by a pedestrian control signal as provided in section 300.160, pedestrians facing a steady red signal alone shall not enter the roadway.

    (4) In the event an official traffic control signal is erected and maintained at a place other than an intersection, the provisions of this section shall be applicable except as to those provisions which by their nature can have no application. Any stop required shall be made at a sign or marking on the pavement indicating where the stop shall be made, but in the absence of any such sign or marking the stop shall be made at the signal.

    (L. 1965 p. 445 § 31, A.L. 1973 1st Ex. Sess. H.B. 26)

    Disclaimer: These codes may not be the most recent version. Missouri may have more current or accurate information. We make no warranties or guarantees about the accuracy, completeness, or adequacy of the information contained on this site or the information linked to on the state site. Please check official sources.

    I continue to notice a problem in St. Petersburg that concerns me. At fully controlled intersections, that is to say, that all directions of traffic are controlled by traffic signals, I see many near misses between a driver executing a legal u-turn on the green light and a driver attempting to turn right on red.

    In this situation, who has the right of way?

    U-turn on Green and Right Turn on Red, Who Has the Right of Way?

    My driving experience in St. Petersburg says that most people believe that the person turning right on red has the right of way. Nothing could be further from the truth.

    According to Florida Statute 316.075 vehicles may execute a u-turn on a green signal as long as there is no signage prohibiting a u-turn at the intersection. The driver executing the u-turn must yield the right of way to pedestrians and other vehicles which are lawfully in the intersection.

    Likewise, Florida Statute 316.075 permits a driver to make a right turn on red if it can be safely accomplished. Essentially, a driver attempting to execute a right turn on red must yield to everyone else lawfully within the intersection.

    Therefore, screaming, honking, and obscene gestures aside, the driver executing a lawful u-turn has the right of way.

    The Driver Making a Right on Red Has a Duty to Make Sure the Intersection is Clear

    There are numerous derivations of the same situation. If there is no signal or sign for the driver making the u-turn, but a stop sign facing the driver attempting to make a right turn, the driver making a legal u-turn still has the right of way.

    As a general rule, the driver attempting to execute a right turn on red will be at fault for accidents that occur at the intersection involving the right-on-red driver. The driver attempting to execute a right on red has a duty to make sure that the intersection is free of pedestrians, bicyclists, motorcycles, and other cars lawfully in the intersection.

    I know people will complain because it is impossible to discern whether cars in the left turn lane will execute a u-turn or simply make a left turn. It is a good practice when turning right on red to check the traffic approaching from the left, both crosswalks, and the left-hand turn lane so that you are certain it is safe to proceed with the right turn.

    Right on Red Can Causes Serious Accidents and Injuries

    The results of an inattentive driver turning right on red can be devastating. The only logical excuse for accidents caused in this manner is driver impatience. The best result of such an accident is usually a collision with a car making a u-turn.

    Car accidents with other cars or motorcycles approaching the intersection at full speed can have fatal consequences when the driver executing a right on red failed to do so properly.

    Collisions with bicycle riders or pedestrians lawfully in the crosswalk will also cause significant and serious injuries to the riders and pedestrians.

    Unfortunately, the results of this type of car accident can be devastating and include:

    1. Death;
    2. Traumatic brain injury and/or concussions;
    3. Spinal cord damage and/or paralysis;
    4. Disfigurement;
    5. Fractured or broken bones; and
    6. Neck and back injuries.

    Contact an Experienced St Petersburg Accident and Injury Lawyer

    Have you been involved in an accident caused by a driver attempting to turn right on red failed to properly yield the right of way? Contact an experienced St. Petersburg personal injury attorney at Jones Law Group today. The decision to hire an experienced personal injury attorney is an extremely important one. It should be a personal decision based upon research and a comfort level with your attorney that is only reached after a face-to-face meeting with the attorney that will be handling your case. Experience the personalized service that you will receive at Jones Law Group.

    Whether you were operating a car or motorcycle, or you were a pedestrian or bicyclist, and have been injured in an accident, you should immediately call Jones Law Group at (727) 571-1333 during regular business hours or (727) 753-8657 on weekends or after regular business hours. We will evaluate your case for free and you will never pay us a dime unless we recover compensation for your injuries.

    Jones Law Group
    5622 Central Avenue
    St. Pete, FL 33707

    Current as of January 01, 2019 | Updated by FindLaw Staff

    Search Colorado Revised Statutes

    Search by Keyword or Citation

    (1) If traffic is controlled by traffic control signals exhibiting different colored lights, or colored lighted arrows, successively one at a time or in combination as declared in the traffic control manual adopted by the department of transportation, only the colors green, yellow, and red shall be used, except for special pedestrian-control signals carrying a word or symbol legend as provided in section 42-4-802 , and said lights, arrows, and combinations thereof shall indicate and apply to drivers of vehicles and pedestrians as follows:

    (a) Green indication:

    (I) Vehicular traffic facing a circular green signal may proceed straight through or turn right or left unless a sign at such place prohibits such turn; but vehicular traffic, including vehicles turning right or left, shall yield the right-of-way to other vehicles and to pedestrians lawfully within the intersection and to pedestrians lawfully within an adjacent crosswalk at the time such signal is exhibited.

    (II) Vehicular traffic facing a green arrow signal, shown alone or in combination with another indication, may cautiously enter the intersection only to make the movement indicated by such arrow or such other movement as is permitted by other indications shown at the same time. Such vehicular traffic shall yield the right-of-way to pedestrians lawfully within an adjacent crosswalk and to other traffic lawfully using the intersection.

    (III) Unless otherwise directed by a pedestrian-control signal as provided in section 42-4-802 , pedestrians facing any green signal, except when the sole green signal is a turn arrow, may proceed across the roadway within any marked or unmarked crosswalk.

    (b) Steady yellow indication:

    (I) Vehicular traffic facing a steady circular yellow or yellow arrow signal is thereby warned that the related green movement is being terminated or that a red indication will be exhibited immediately thereafter.

    (II) Pedestrians facing a steady circular yellow or yellow arrow signal, unless otherwise directed by a pedestrian-control signal as provided in section 42-4-802 , are thereby advised that there is insufficient time to cross the roadway before a red indication is shown, and no pedestrian shall then start to cross the roadway.

    (c) Steady red indication:

    (I) Vehicular traffic facing a steady circular red signal alone shall stop at a clearly marked stop line but, if none, before entering the crosswalk on the near side of the intersection or, if none, then before entering the intersection and shall remain standing until an indication to proceed is shown; except that:

    (A) Such vehicular traffic, after coming to a stop and yielding the right-of-way to pedestrians lawfully within an adjacent crosswalk and to other traffic lawfully using the intersection, may make a right turn, unless state or local road authorities within their respective jurisdictions have by ordinance or resolution prohibited any such right turn and have erected an official sign at each intersection where such right turn is prohibited.

    (B) Such vehicular traffic, when proceeding on a one-way street and after coming to a stop, may make a left turn onto a one-way street upon which traffic is moving to the left of the driver. Such turn shall be made only after yielding the right-of-way to pedestrians and other traffic proceeding as directed. No turn shall be made pursuant to this sub-subparagraph (B) if local authorities have by ordinance prohibited any such left turn and erected a sign giving notice of any such prohibition at each intersection where such left turn is prohibited.

    (C) To promote uniformity in traffic regulation throughout the state and to protect the public peace, health, and safety, the general assembly declares that no local authority shall have any discretion other than is expressly provided in this subparagraph (I).

    (II) Pedestrians facing a steady circular red signal alone shall not enter the roadway, unless otherwise directed by a pedestrian-control signal as provided in section 42-4-802 .

    (III) Vehicular traffic facing a steady red arrow signal may not enter the intersection to make the movement indicated by such arrow and, unless entering the intersection to make such other movement as is permitted by other indications shown at the same time, shall stop at a clearly marked stop line but, if none, before entering the crosswalk on the near side of the intersection or, if none, then before entering the intersection and shall remain standing until an indication to make the movement indicated by such arrow is shown.

    (IV) Pedestrians facing a steady red arrow signal shall not enter the roadway, unless otherwise directed by a pedestrian-control signal as provided in section 42-4-802 .

    (d) Nonintersection signal: In the event an official traffic control signal is erected and maintained at a place other than an intersection, the provisions of this section shall be applicable except as to those provisions which by their nature can have no application. Any stop required shall be made at a sign or pavement marking indicating where the stop shall be made, but in the absence of any such sign or marking the stop shall be made at the signal.

    (e) Lane-use-control signals: Whenever lane-use-control signals are placed over the individual lanes of a street or highway, as declared in the traffic control manual adopted by the department of transportation, such signals shall indicate and apply to drivers of vehicles as follows:

    (I) Downward-pointing green arrow (steady): A driver facing such signal may drive in any lane over which said green arrow signal is located.

    (II) Yellow “X” (steady): A driver facing such signal is warned that the related green arrow movement is being terminated and shall vacate in a safe manner the lane over which said steady yellow signal is located to avoid if possible occupying that lane when the steady red “X” signal is exhibited.

    (III) Yellow “X” (flashing): A driver facing such signal may use the lane over which said flashing yellow signal is located for the purpose of making a left turn or a passing maneuver, using proper caution, but for no other purpose.

    (IV) Red “X” (steady): A driver facing such signal shall not drive in any lane over which said red signal is exhibited.

    (2) Any person who violates any provision of this section commits a class A traffic infraction.

    While we know that turning right on a red light in Michigan depends on the intersection and signage, you may be wondering if there is ever a time when it’s legal to turn left on a red light? Yes, under certain circumstances.

    Under What Circumstances Are You Allowed to Turn Left on a Red Light in MI?

    You are allowed to turn left on a red light in Michigan under certain circumstances:

    You can turn left on a red light in Michigan if you are turning from a one-way or two-way street onto a one-way street and the traffic that you would be turning onto is going the same direction as your left turn. You are prohibited from turning left on a red light when the street that you would be turning onto goes two ways.

    You must also stop before entering the intersection.

    Remember You Never Have the Right of Way

    However, it’s extremely important to remember that when turning left on a red light you never have the right of way. That belongs to pedestrians, bicyclists, and other drivers who are using the street at the time.

    If there are any pedestrians or bicyclists who are legally in the crosswalk on the street that you would be making a left onto, you must yield to the, as well as other vehicles that are driving on the street you are turning onto.

    If you are at an intersection that has a sign, signal, light, marking, or any other device that says making a left on red is prohibited, you may not do so. This sign must be located above or adjacent to the traffic control signal or as close as possible to the point where the turn is made (or in both directions). Put simply, it’s important that at least one of these signs is visible to the driver who would be turning.

    The Attorneys at Miller & Tischler, P.C. Can Help

    If you or a loved one has been injured in a car accident as a driver, bicyclist, or pedestrian, you should not have to be bear the burden alone. When you are already dealing with so much, the last thing that you want to do is to have to worry about tackling the legalities of your situation.

    When there’s a green traffic light but no right arrow signal, wait until oncoming traffic clears or breaks, and then turn.

    If the lights change to yellow or red while you’re in the intersection, you must turn right as soon as it’s safe to do so.
    You must not make a U-turn at traffic lights, unless there’s a ‘U-turn permitted’ sign.

    The main points are:-

    • Enter the intersection as shown in the diagram, unless a sign indicates otherwise or there is a red right turn arrow
    • Wait until oncoming traffic clears or breaks and then turn safely.
    • If the lights change to yellow or red while you are in the middle of the intersection, you are allowed to turn right.
    • You must turn as soon as it is safe to do so.
    • Be sure your front wheels and car are straight and not blocking the oncoming traffic.

    A green arrow means you can turn in that direction. When there’s a green right arrow and a red light, you can turn right. You must not go straight ahead or turn left.

    A yellow (amber) arrow means you must stop. You can only go through a yellow light if you cannot stop safely before the ‘Stop’ line. When a yellow (amber) arrow is flashing, this means you can turn in that direction. You must give way to pedestrians crossing the road you’re turning into.

    A red arrow means you must not turn. You must stop behind the ‘Stop’ line until the arrow turns green or disappears. When there’s a red right arrow and a green light, you must not turn right. You can go straight ahead or turn left.

    How to find a sex therapist

    How to find a sex therapist

    What Makes A Sex Therapist Different?

    Finding a good sex therapist isn’t easy. If you’re suffering from a sexual problem, it’s crucially important that you see someone who understands the difference between a sex therapist and a “regular therapist.”

    Often a “regular therapist” will advertise themselves as a sex therapist, when they’re really not — which can lead to a lot of wasted time and money.

    If you have a sex problem, don’t assume just any therapist will be able to help you. As a sex therapist, I see many individuals and couples who’ve spent years in conventional psychotherapy and not gotten any help at all with sex.

    Here’s how to tell the difference:

    1. A Sex Therapist Wants to Know All the Details

    It’s not enough to just hear someone describe their sexual problem. If you’re a woman who has pain during intercourse, it’s crucially important to know whether the pain is on initial penetration, or on deep thrusting. And whether it’s all the time, or only some of the time. If you’re a man with difficulty ejaculating, a sex therapist will want to know the details of how you masturbate.

    A sex therapist wants to know everything that goes on in bed – and in your head. Who does what to whom? And how does that feel? Then what happens next, and why?

    As a great architect once said, “God is in the details.” The tiniest details can sometimes contain the solutions to a couple’s sexual problem.

    2. A Sex Therapist Is Interested in NOW

    Your sexuality is clearly influenced by your experience in life – not just your sexual experience, but also your experience of being loved, appreciated, and listened to, going all the way back to childhood. Those experiences carry a lot of weight.

    Unfortunately, most therapists, on hearing that you were abandoned as a child, will want to spend weeks talking with you about it. Sometimes that can be helpful, but often it’s not. And it can be particularly un-helpful if in the meantime you’re struggling with a sexual problem that’s not getting any better as the weeks go by.

    A sex therapist appreciates full well the importance of the fact that you were, say, emotionally abandoned as a child. But a sex therapist also knows that if you don’t get help for your sex problem, you’ll soon feel emotionally abandoned in therapy as well.

    The solution, as every sex therapist knows, is to deal first with the immediate causes of the sexual problem – then deal with other more “remote” causes later on.

    Your sexual mind is very simple. It just wants to feel good. You can’t resolve a sexual problem if you keep having discouraging experiences in bed. The only way to heal a sexual problem is by having good experiences in bed. For most people, that has to come first.

    Much of regular therapy, typically, is about pain. The therapy itself is often very hard work. But a couple can stay in pain for years in therapy, and still not resolve their sex problem.

    As every sex therapist knows, sex therapy is not about pain. It’s about feeling good. Unless the therapy helps you feel good, nothing productive is going to happen.

    Which brings me to the final way a sex therapist differs from a regular therapist . . .

    3. A Sex Therapist Wants You to Take Action

    Talking with someone in therapy, or with your partner in therapy, can be very important. But talking will only get you so far. If you’re not taking action in the bedroom, then chances are nothing much is going to happen.

    After a first consultation session, a sex therapist will typically recommend that an individual or couple do something specific at home – both to get experience doing it a better way, and to gather more data.

    After seeing a sex therapist for the first time, you’ll want to come away with a specific action plan – of things you can do right away, to get you on the road to feeling good again.

    Sex problems — like loss of desire or sexless marriage — tend to make people feel terrible about themselves. As a sex therapist, I feel it’s crucially important that someone feel better when they leave my office, than when they walked in.

    If you’re struggling with a sex problem, there’s never been a better time to get help. Just make sure you see someone who has lots of experience helping people with sex problems.

    Make sure you see someone who can give you a sense of hope – and an actionable plan for turning that hope into reality.

    OK . . So How Do I Find Someone Like That?

    Simple: Both the Society for Sex Therapy and Research (SSTAR) and the American Assocation of Sex Educators, Counselors, and Therapists (AASECT) have search directories where you can search for someone in your area. They hyper-links above will take you there directly.

    One you have some names, call each one up and talk with them about the 3 issues I mentioned above. Some therapists will have this information on their websites already, as I do on my Frequently Asked Questions page. And with some, you’ll need to specifically ask.

    Don’t be afraid to ask a potential therapist whether they have particular experience with the specific sex problem you have — including how many patients they’ve seen with this issue.

    And if you want to be a really informed consumer, check out my book, Love Worth Making. It’s not a substitute for seeing a sex therapist, but it will give you a fair idea of what goes on behind the office door.

    Love Worth Making launched February 13, 2018, from St Martin’s Press, and was immediately hailed by New York Times bestelling author Dr Christiane Northrup as “Hands down, the most practical, fun, and empowering book I’ve ever read on how to have a fabulous sex life in a committed relationship.”

    The best way to find professional help for your own sex life.

    If the thrill has completely deserted yoursex life, your performance flags repeatedly, or your appreciation for porno movies exceeds your interest in being intimate with your partner, it might be time to consider some sessions with a sex therapist.

    While lack of desire — which can take many forms — is one of the most common reasons to seek sexual counseling, it is far from the only one. If you think you have a sexual problem or are seriously dissatisfied with your intimate experiences, a therapist who specializes in sexuality can serve as a shortcut to the heart of the matter.

    There are a number of ways to find a good sex therapist.

    First ask those in the counseling business whose professional ethics usually guarantee confidentiality: a pastor, for instance, or a current or former general therapist, or a physician.

    A physician may be the best place to start, because a sexual problem could stem from a physical condition or a drug side effect. Having a medical evaluation first to rule out physical causes for your sexual problems can save you time and minimize angst.

    Other sources for sex-therapist recommendations include medical and psychological organizations, such as county medical associations. Or, if you really want privacy, go on the Internet and type in “sex therapist” to find one via a search engine. There are private, legitimate counselors who conduct online sexual therapy.

    It’s important to ascertain whether a sex therapist has appropriate credentials. One way to do this is to get a referral from an established sex-therapy organization, such as the American Association of Sex Educators, Counselors, and Therapists (AASECT) or the American Academy of Sexologists.

    In most states anyone can call themselves a sex therapist, but chances are if a practitioner is referred by a professional organization they have already met the certification requirements of that group.

    For example, the AASECT’s requirements for certification as a sex therapist include a master’s degree plus three years (1,000 hours a year) of clinical experience as a psychotherapist or a doctorate plus two years of clinical experience as a psychotherapist. The AASECT also requires a state regulator license or certificate in psychology, medicine, nursing, social work, or marriage and family therapy; an alternative requirement exists for states that don’t have regulations. Therapists thus certified must also complete at least 90 hours of training in gender-related issues, marital dynamics, psychosexual disorders, and medical factors influencing sexuality. (The remaining requirements are posted on the AASECT web site, listed below.)

    Once you find a therapist, make only one appointment for a consultation. Don’t sign up for a series of treatments before meeting at least once.

    During the consultation, don’t be shy about asking questions, advises AASECT Executive Director Howard Rupple, Ph.D., Ed.D. He suggests the following questions:

    • What is your educational background?
    • Are you involved in professional education work or training?
    • What is your approach to therapy? What will happen during the session? What kind of time commitment is necessary?
    • What are your fees?
    • Have you had experience treating the problem I have?
    • What do you require of me? (For example, some therapists will only see a person who is in a committed relationship.)

    If a therapist doesn’t fully answer your questions, if you don’t agree with a therapist’s approach or demands, or if you simply don’t feel comfortable, go to the next professional on your list, Rupple suggests.

    For sex therapy to work, you must have a degree of trust and comfort with the therapist, agrees Roseline Meadow, PhD, a psychologist, a sex therapist, and the author of Women’s Conflicts About Eating and Sex. She advises asking how long the person has been a therapist. “It takes years to develop skill in sex therapy,” she says. “You learn by doing in this profession.”

    What about academic titles and publications? “Kindness and empathy are more important,” Meadow says.

    Keep evaluating once you begin therapy. According to Meadow, ongoing self-evaluation of therapy is important: “If after eight or 10 sessions you’re not making progress, then get a second opinion.”

    How to find a sex therapist

    Elizabeth Boskey, PhD, MPH, CHES, is a social worker, adjunct lecturer, and expert writer in the field of sexually transmitted diseases.

    How to find a sex therapist

    Carly Snyder, MD is a reproductive and perinatal psychiatrist who combines traditional psychiatry with integrative medicine-based treatments.

    How to find a sex therapist

    Dale is an experienced fact-checker and researcher with a Master of Science in Journalism from Columbia University Graduate School of Journalism.

    When you are experiencing problems in the bedroom, sex therapy can help. Sex therapy is a form of talk therapy that relies on a number of techniques, including homework, to improve your sex life. Sex therapy does not involve touch.

    Sex therapists are trained to help individuals and couples improve their sexual satisfaction and sexual interactions. Not every therapist is helpful at addressing sexual issues, as sex therapy is not part of most standard social work or psychology training programs.

    Although a number of online therapy sites list sex therapy as one of their offerings, very few of them allow individuals to search specifically for sex therapists. Therefore, if you are specifically seeking a sex therapist, it will be important to ask any person you are matched with about their relevant training. Sex therapy does not necessarily require additional certification or licensure, but any reputable sex therapist should be licensed in a relevant field (e.g. social work, marriage, and family therapy, psychology) and working within their scope of practice. Although most states do not have specific requirements for sex therapists, Florida does license and regulate the practice of sex therapy.

    There are also professional organizations that certify therapists as having sufficient training to do this specialized form of work. The two most prominent such organizations are the American Association of Sexuality Educators, Counselors, and Therapists (AASECT) and the American College of Sexologists. Both of these organizations offer lists of certified sex therapists, some of whom practice online.

    Note: Depending on the nature of your sexual concerns, therapists may also recommend that you see a medical doctor to rule out underlying health problems. This is particularly true if you are seeking help for specific types of sexual dysfunction, including erectile dysfunction or pain during sex. These problems may be medical in nature and require medical treatment in addition to, or instead of, sex therapy.

    A sex therapist helps people with sexual problems.

    Sex therapists are qualified counsellors, doctors or healthcare professionals who have done extra training in helping people with problems relating to sex.

    Why do people have sex therapy?

    Lots of people have a problem with sex at some point in their life. Some people can help themselves. For others, sexual problems can cause a lot of distress and unhappiness.

    A sex therapist can help people with various sexual problems, including:

    • lack of desire
    • difficulty having an orgasm
    • pain during sex or inability to have penetrative sex
    • difficulty getting or keeping an erection (erectile dysfunction)
    • premature ejaculation or other ejaculation problems

    For more information, read about male sexual problems and female sexual problems.

    What happens in a sex therapy session?

    A sex therapist will listen to you describe your problems and assess whether the cause is likely to be psychological, physical or a combination of the two.

    Each therapy session is confidential. You can see a sex therapist by yourself, but if your problem affects your partner as well, it may be better for you both to attend.

    Talking about and exploring your experiences will help you get a better understanding of what is happening and the reasons. The therapist may also give you exercises and tasks to do with your partner in your own time.

    Sessions usually last for 30 to 50 minutes. The therapist may advise you to have weekly sessions or to see them less frequently, such as once a month.

    How can I find a sex therapist?

    If you have a sexual problem, it’s a good idea to see a GP first as they can check for any physical causes. The GP can refer you to a sex therapist if they think it will help you. However, sex therapy is not available on the NHS in all areas, and an NHS clinic may only offer a limited number of therapy sessions.

    You can also find a sex therapist privately, which you’ll need to pay for. It’s important to see a qualified registered therapist. Look for one who is a member of the College of Sexual and Relationship Therapists (COSRT) or the Institute of Psychosexual Medicine.

    Organisations such as Relate also offer sex therapy for a fee.

    Further information

    • What can cause orgasm problems in women?
    • Information about ejaculation problems
    • Can premature ejaculation be controlled?

    Page last reviewed: 9 December 2019
    Next review due: 9 December 2022

    Looking for a qualified therapist to help you with your sexual issues, but baffled about where to start? Here’s what you need to know.

    How to find a sex therapist

    There are many reasons why a person or couple might seek out help from a sex therapist. Research shows that an estimated 43 percent of women and 30 percent of men report grappling with some form of sexual dysfunction. But sex therapists can also help with so much more, addressing everything from arousal and attraction-related issues to boredom — and beyond.

    Finding the right fit for you and your partner isn’t always easy. The field is largely unregulated, and the topic is incredibly intimate. Here are five tips to keep in mind when you’re looking for the right sex therapist for you.

    5 Tips For Choosing The Best Sex Therapist For You And Your Partner

    1. Ask Yourself: Why Do I Need a Sex Therapist?

    Sex therapy is a big field that encompasses everything from desire issues to physical concerns, and while a qualified sex therapist should have a grounding in all of it, it can help to start off by asking any therapist you’re considering if they have significant clinical experience addressing your particular concern (or concerns).

    In order to even ask that question, it is important to try and get clear about why you’re seeking help.

    “People should be asking themselves things like, ‘Why therapy? Why now? What is it that we want to work on?’” recommends Megan Fleming, PhD , a New York City–based sex therapist. “And more importantly, ‘What are we prepared to do to achieve those goals?’”

    Are you willing to take time out of your schedule or schedules to regularly meet with a sex therapist? Are you open to “homework” — which might include communication exercises, reading or watching educational materials, or sexual experimentation activities — in between sessions? Are you willing to discuss such an intimate topic with someone else — and possibly your partner? These are the types of questions to consider ahead of time.

    2. Consider the Therapist’s Credentials and Qualifications

    It’s important to research whether a therapist you’re considering has real experience and credentials.

    Certification through a professional organization for sex therapists requires an advanced degree, like a PhD, an MD, or a master’s degree with some element of psychotherapy training, then 90 hours of human sexuality training, 60 hours of sex therapy training, and extensive supervision by a qualified sex therapist. These therapists are trained to consider the many factors that can affect sexual health.

    “[Certified] sex therapists are generally trained to look at problems from multiple dimensions — a physiological dimension, a psychological dimension, a potentially cultural dimension, and certainly a relational dimension,” says Ian Kerner, PhD, a sex therapist in New York City.

    One note: While couples’ therapists may be able to help with some of that, they generally do not have deep clinical experience in sexual issues specifically, Dr. Kerner says.

    3. Meet With Multiple Options When Choosing a Therapist

    People find sex therapists many ways, whether through a professional organization like the American Association of Sexuality Educators, Counselors, and Therapists (AASECT), a referral from a generalized therapist or physician, from friends, or via an online resource like Psychology Today. Vetting the credentials of any potential candidate is a good first step, but it can also be helpful to meet with multiple therapists.

    “I personally think you should try to see two to three therapists for an initial consultation if possible,” says Dr. Fleming, who explains that sex therapists can have very different styles and that it is important that both partners feel comfortable, if you plan on attending with your partner.

    According to Fleming, sex therapy can be for individuals or couples. Sometimes it is possible to start as an individual and then bring in your partner, though not every therapist will be open to that scenario.

    If you do not live in an area with multiple — or any — sex therapists, teletherapy, or virtual therapy, is an option.

    4. Ask About the Therapist’s Treatment Plan and Insurance

    Although therapy is a dynamic process that can change as you go along, it is totally appropriate to ask any potential sex therapist about what they think your treatment plan might entail and what kind of time commitment they think it will require. It is also fair game to ask about the cost.

    “The reality, when it comes to sex therapy, is that many of us — I would dare say most of us — are not on managed care,” says Fleming.

    That does not mean that you won’t qualify for out-of-network benefits and reimbursement, she adds, but it is something you should discuss with a potential therapist, and your insurer, up front. It has implications not just for your wallet, but for your treatment.

    “If you’re stressed about finances, that in itself is going to affect your ability to make the commitment and do the work,” says Fleming.

    5. Regularly Check In With Yourself as Therapy Progresses

    Sex, sexual health, and sexual problems are complex and intimate. You might not feel comfortable discussing them with a therapist, particularly at the beginning. But you should start to feel more comfortable as your treatment progresses. If you don’t, that’s a possible red flag that you and the therapist are not the best fit.

    “Most sexual problems are really kind of universal, so you should feel kind of held and normalized — and feel in the end that you’re not so alone, that other people are dealing with this,” says Kerner. “You should feel like you’re with someone who can both explain what is going on and also hopefully relieve some of the mystery, the stress, and the anxiety associated with a sexual problem.”

    Ultimately, the goal is to get to a place where you can live what Kerner calls an “authentic sex life.”

    “It’s really about helping someone to have the kind of sex that will be gratifying to them,” he says, “and for sex to be integrated into their life in the way that they want it to be.”

    1. Home
    2. Sexual Health Q&A

    What are sex therapists? What do they do? How does one choose a sex therapist?

    How to find a sex therapist

    Sex therapists are healthcare professionals who provide counseling and therapy to individuals or/and couples who need help with the emotional and psychological aspects of sex. They are trained clinicians with advanced degrees who specialize in sexuality and relationships.

    People see sex therapists – by themselves or with a partner – for a variety of reasons, such as the following:

    • Desire issues
    • Desire discrepancies
    • Erectile dysfunction
    • Premature ejaculation
    • Performance anxiety
    • Painful penetration
    • Vaginismus
    • Delayed ejaculation
    • Past sexual abuse
    • Gender identity
    • Orgasm difficulties
    • Relationship problems
    • Compulsive sexual behaviors
    • Sexual education and counseling
    • Distress about sexual orientation or gender identity
    • Distress about sexual preferences

    How to find a sex therapist

    Here are some examples of sex therapy scenarios:

    • A couple that has been together for a long time might still be uncomfortable discussing sexual issues. A therapist can help them learn to communicate with each other and express their wants, needs, and fantasies. Couples might also work on relationship problems that lead to sexual difficulties, such as infidelity or lack of trust.
    • A sexually inexperienced person may see a therapist to work through fears and apprehensions. They might learn more about their anatomy (and their partner’s) and the sexual response cycle. They might also learn relaxation techniques.
    • A person questioning their sexual orientation or gender identity might see a therapist to work through their feelings and their path forward.

    How to find a sex therapist

    One of the best ways to find a sex therapist is through a doctor’s referral, but it’s helpful to have a complete physical checkup first. Some sexual problems are associated with underlying medical conditions. For example, many men with diabetes or heart disease have erectile dysfunction. Women can experience poor lubrication after menopause. Treatment for these conditions may alleviate the problem. However, if the doctor suspects psychological causes, a referral to sex therapy can be made.

    How to find a sex therapist

    Sex therapists can also be found through professional organizations, which usually provide the names of licensed professionals with proper credentials. The ISSM’s Find a Provider tool is another helpful resource.

    It’s important to feel a rapport with your sex therapist. You might need to talk to a few therapists before you find one that is a good fit. Be patient. In the long term, it is well worth the time.

    Sex therapy is a form of counseling intended to help individuals and couples resolve sexual difficulties, such as performance anxiety or relationship problems.

    Clients generally meet in the therapist’s office. Some choose to attend sessions alone; others bring their partner with them. Session frequency and length usually depend on the client and the type of problem being addressed.

    It’s normal for clients to feel anxious when seeing a sex therapist, especially for the first time. Many people have trouble talking about sex at all, so discussing it with a stranger may feel awkward. However, most sex therapists recognize this and try to make their clients feel comfortable. Often, they start with questions about the client’s health and sexual background, sex education, beliefs about sex, and the client’s specific sexual concerns.

    It’s important to know that sex therapy sessions do not involve any physical contact or sexual activity among clients and therapists. Clients who feel uncomfortable with any aspect of therapy should speak up or stop seeing that particular therapist.

    Sex therapists usually assign “homework”—practical activities that clients are expected to complete in the privacy of their own home.

    Such homework might include the following:

    Experimentation. Couples who feel they’re in a sexual rut may try different activities, such as role playing or using sex toys, to increase their desire. Other couples may need to adjust their sexual routine or positions, especially if one partner has a health condition that requires such changes.

    Sensate focus. This technique for couples is designed to build trust and intimacy while reducing anxiety. Couples progress through three stages, starting with nonsexual touching, progressing to genital touching, and, usually, ending with penetration.

    Education. Sometimes, clients do not receive adequate sex education while they are growing up. As a result, they may not be aware of anatomy and how the body functions during sexual activity. Therapists might assign books or web content to read or videos to watch. They might also suggest that clients use a mirror to learn more about their body.

    Communication strategies. Clients may practice asking for what they want or need sexually or emotionally in a relationship.

    Success with sex therapy often depends on how committed clients are to the process. If clients are willing to put in the effort, either alone or with a partner, they may reach their sexual goals.

    Katherine Nicholls

    Content Creator and Strategist

    The aim of sex therapy is to help you improve the physical intimacy between you and your partner and overcome or manage any sexual difficulties you’re having. Whatever your gender, sexual orientation or relationship status, sex therapy can support you to feel more comfortable about getting intimate.

    What is sex therapy?

    Natasha Anderson-Foster explains what psychosexual therapy is in this short video.

    Having sexual difficulties can feel very isolating. You may feel self-conscious and unable to speak up about them, whether that’s having an honest conversation with your partner or reaching out to a professional. The truth is, sexual problems are very common and the best way to tackle them is to talk about them.

    If the problem is affecting your relationship, being honest and open with your partner about what’s happening is a great first step. For some, this alone is enough to help work through the problem. For others, more support is needed.

    This is where psychosexual therapy comes in. Sex therapists are qualified counsellors, doctors or healthcare professionals who have completed extra training to help those having sex-related difficulties.

    What causes sexual difficulties?

    There can be various causes for sexual difficulties and their origins may be:

    • physical (illness, disability/chronic illness, accident, surgery or medications)
    • psychological (depression, anxiety or other mental health conditions)
    • emotional (unhappiness in the relationship, unresolved grief)
    • situational (certain situations or environments)

    Visiting your doctor is a good first step if you think the cause may be physical. Sometimes there will be ways your doctor can help (for example, trying different medications), but if not, they may recommend psychosexual therapy. While you can see a sex therapist on your own, if the problem is affecting your partner it helps if they can attend sessions too.

    Sex is loaded with emotion and often, talking it through together with an impartial therapist can help ease tension and bring you closer together.

    What can sex therapy help with?

    Sex therapy looks to help with any problem or difficulty relating to sexual relationships.

    In men this may include:

    • a lack of sexual desire
    • difficulty getting or maintaining an erection
    • premature ejaculation, or other ejaculation problems

    For women, this may include:

    • a lack of sexual desire
    • difficulty climaxing
    • pain during sex or being unable to have penetrative sex

    Talking to a stranger about your sex life may feel uncomfortable, but sex therapists are not here to judge. By being honest and talking about what you’re experiencing in this confidential setting, they will be able to help you explore the root of the problem and offer ways of helping you overcome or manage symptoms.

    After various tests, scans and hospital appointments, I was diagnosed with vestibulodynia, a condition that causes pain when the inner vulva/vagina is touched. While the relationship wasn’t salvageable in the end, I was relieved to have a diagnosis. It gave me something to work with.

    What to expect from sex therapy

    Most therapists will arrange an initial consultation with you in the first instance. This is a chance to talk to your therapist about what you’re looking for help with and for them to explain more about how they can help. Here you should also get the chance to arrange logistics – how often your sessions will be, who will attend and how long the sessions will last. What will happen in the sessions will depend on what it is you’re seeking help for. Sex can often be tied up in other emotions and relationship dynamics, so you may find some sessions to explore topics outside of sex.

    Your sessions will give you and your partner (if they join you) the chance to talk through what’s going on and understand what could be causing the problem. Your therapist will likely advise you to try various exercises outside of your sessions. You can then reflect on how well these exercises went in future sessions.

    Talking about sex and understanding how we relate to sex in a non-judgemental space can be an illuminating and liberating experience. Counselling provides the opportunity to explore and understand more fully the relationship you have with sex.

    Once you get through the initial nervousness of talking about sex, you’ll be able to explore how sex affects your relationship and what it is you need to feel fulfilled. If sex is important in your relationship and is causing problems, sex therapy is an option to help you overcome these problems and enjoy physical intimacy again.

    What qualifications should a sex therapist have?

    In the UK, practising psychosexual therapists should be trained with a minimum of two years in a post-graduate diploma in psychosexual therapy, plus a minimum of 200 supervised clinical hours. Although it’s not a legal obligation, some psychosexual therapists will be registered with the College of Sexual and Relationship Therapists (COSRT), the UK’s leading membership organisation for therapists specialising in sexual and relationship issues.

    These days, many couples find it hard to fit sex into their busy schedules. And it is perfectly normal for people to go through periods when they are just not in the mood for love making. However, if you lack desire for sex for emotional or physical reasons, you may want to consider sex therapy. Seeking treatment for sex problems has become more socially acceptable today, but it is still not easy for many people to talk to a professional about such an intimate concern.

    Before you decide to see a sex therapist, take the time to explore whether it is really what you need. Consider the following recommendations:

    • See a doctor initially, particularly if you think your problem is physical in nature—A gynecologist or urologist can detect difficulties due to illness, aging, metabolic or hormonal imbalances. Keep in mind that prescription drugs, over-the-counter medications, alcohol, and smoking may also negatively affect sexual functioning.
    • Learn more about sexuality—In spite of the greater openness about sexuality today, many people have little understanding of their own bodies and sexual functioning. Informational and self-help books and educational sex videos, which are widely available, can be very helpful. Becoming better informed will help you decide whether you really need therapy. Some people, in fact, are able to solve their own problems through self-help guides.

    Many people come to sex therapy after individual psychotherapy fails to help them with their sexual problems.

    Sex therapy generally addresses the emotional issues underlying sexual problems and employs behavioral techniques to deal with the physical symptoms. You may also need other treatment to care for the physical problems that may be affecting you.

    These behavioral techniques involve physical exercises that clients do on their own outside of the therapy setting. Nothing happens in the therapist’s office of a sexual or physical nature. (Sex therapists should not be confused with sexual surrogates, who may have physical contact with their clients as part of therapy.)

    One popular technique used in treating many sexual problems is called sensate focus, in which couples caress or massage each other without sexual contact. The goal is to help both partners learn to give and receive pleasure and feel safe together. As the partners become more comfortable, they can progress to genital stimulation.

    As a result of performing this exercise, many couples discover new ways to experience pleasure other than sexual intercourse.

    Other exercises treat specific problems such as women’s inability to have orgasms and men’s erectile problems. Performing these exercises often evokes strong feelings that are then explored through psychotherapy. People who have experienced sexual trauma or are confused about their sexual identity may need to spend more time working through their feelings. For couples, who make up the majority of clients, the focus is on improving communication and developing greater intimacy.

    When looking for a sex therapist, it is critical to find a practitioner with the proper credentials to deal with this sensitive subject area. A sex therapist should be an experienced therapist with training in sex therapy from a reputable program. Start with a search for a licensed social worker, psychologist, psychiatrist, or psychiatric nurse. For example, the American Association of Sex Counselors, Educators, and Therapists (AASECT) offers a certification program for professionals interested in becoming sex therapists. These types of programs include instruction in sexual and reproductive anatomy and treatment methods. Other topics covered include sexual abuse, gender-related issues, and sociocultural factors in sexual values and behavior.

    You can obtain referrals for sex therapists from AASECT and other professional organizations, like the American Psychological Association. You can also ask get a referral from your doctor or therapist.

    In looking for a sex therapist, it is particularly important to find someone who you trust and respect. Do not be afraid to ask questions about the therapist’s background, philosophical orientation, and experience with your problem.

    Take the time to find someone who is flexible and who will listen to you. If you and your therapist are having difficulties, do not be discouraged. It may take some time to find the right therapist. Ultimately, a therapist should not impose their point of view on you or your habits.

    If you see a therapist who says or does anything suggestive, or that involves nudity, end the relationship right away. Sex therapy is strictly talk therapy. Contact is not part of the process.

    Most sex therapists look at the whole person and try to help men and women redefine what it means to be intimate. The effects of aging or physical problems do not mean that a couple cannot experience the pleasure and joy of being physical with each other.

    Resources:

    American Association of Sex Educators, Counselors, and Therapists

    Article share options

    Share this on

    Send this by

    If you’ve never had sex therapy, you might rely on how it’s portrayed in film and TV for some insight.

    “A lot of people I’ve worked with recently said they didn’t even realise sex therapy was a thing until they saw Sex Education on Netflix,” says Melbourne sexologist Kassandra Mourikis.

    The Australian Society of Sex Educators, Researchers and Therapists NSW (ASSERT NSW) defines sex therapy as a “specialised form of professional counselling that focuses on addressing the sexual concerns, sexual functioning and sexual expression of human beings”.

    Removing the mystery around the process is important, because it can help with all kinds of concerns including desire, erectile dysfunction and sexual pain.

    I spoke with a few sex therapists to find out what it’s really like.

    How do you pick the right sex therapist?

    Sex therapy is a self-regulated industry. That means untrained and inexperienced people can call themselves sex therapists.

    For example, a qualified counsellor might decide to work in sexology based on books they’ve read.

    Or someone with no qualifications might attend a six-week course and call themselves a sexologist.

    Or, they might take an academic approach by completing a Bachelor of Psychology and a Masters of Sexology, for example.

    Regulatory bodies like ASSERT NSW and the Society of Australian Sexologists Ltd (SAS) hold sex therapists to a certain standard.

    SAS, for example, has developed guidelines for the accreditation of sexologists who work as psychosexual therapists, sex therapists, sexuality educators and sexologists.

    SAS national chairperson Lisa Torney says you can check its list of accredited sex therapists, but there are also many capable and experienced sex therapists who aren’t accredited.

    “I would be asking non-accredited people what training have they done, what supervision have they had?” she says.

    She recommends having a phone chat with a prospective therapist to find out if they are a good fit.

    Ms Mourikis suggests asking about their specialty and for an overview of how they might be able to help you before committing to a session.

    What is sexual confidence?

    Body positivity plays a key role in increasing your confidence, experts say.

    Historically speaking, sex can be a taboo topic–so much so that it might be taboo even in your own relationship. This can make communicating about sex difficult, which can, in turn, cause problems in relationships. This is where sex therapy comes in.

    Through sex therapy, you can take on a number of different issues in your sex life.

    Issues can range from individual sexual function to problems within a relationship. Often these inform one another, e.g. an individual’s concern can influence his/her sexual relationships.

    How to find a sex therapist

    You might be wondering what kinds of concerns, whether individual or relational, you can bring up in sex therapy.

    Any topic that has you concerned about your sexual history or your current sex life is a topic for sex therapy.

    In therapy, sex is not taboo. You will not be judged in therapy, and issues you face in your sex life will be treated with dignity, respect, and privacy.

    Sex Therapy Counseling

    Many people wonder just what, exactly, sex therapy is. Sex therapy is simply a form of psychotherapy called “ talk therapy ” that addresses sexual issues.

    Practitioners are licensed psychologists, social workers, physicians, and licensed therapists who have specialized training in sexual and relationship health ( Mayo Clinic ).

    Sex therapists will help you work through your sex-related concerns in a safe space where privacy is of the utmost importance.

    Sex therapists are trained professionals who are non-judgmental and can help you begin the process of working through any concerns you might have about your sexual history or current sex life.

    You may decide to see a sex therapist on your own or go as a couple. Either is an option for you as you explore your own sexual concerns or those you have with your partner.

    Why Go to Sex Therapy?

    People seek sex therapy for help with both physical and emotional sexual problems. Physical concerns stem from the body. They include issues such as erectile dysfunction or painful sex.

    Emotional concerns include issues with intimacy or past sexual history. For example, if you have experienced sexual assault, sex therapy can provide support for victims of sexual abuse to help you move forward towards a more fulfilling sexual life.

    Just like other forms of therapy, it’s important to seek help when a concern is impacting your life in a negative way.

    If you are struggling with any aspect of your sexuality, sexual history, sexual desires, or sexual relationship to the point that it is negatively impacting your ability to have a healthy sex life, then sex therapy is for you.

    Sex therapy can help with a number of different concerns ranging from mild annoyances to deep-rooted problematic behavior. In consultation with your therapist, you can decide how much therapy you might need and what, exactly, it will entail.

    How to find a sex therapist

    It may feel awkward to admit you need a sex therapist, but the process is similar to consulting with any other professional: a dentist, plumber or accountant.

    Start by asking around. If you feel comfortable asking friends and family for recommendations, check out the counselors they recommend online. See if you like their approach, credentials, reviews and ratings.

    If can also be useful to visit the website of AASECT, The American Association of Sex Educators, Counselors and Therapists. The site has information about different types of accreditation and lists of sex therapists by area.

    Finally, check out one or two sex therapists in person (if they are close by) or request a phone call or video conference.

    Questions To Ask A Potential Sex Therapist

    During your consultation, here are some questions to ask:

    • What population do you focus on? You want a counselor who spends most of their time on sexual issues. If they have mostly clients in your age group, or work with LGBTQ couples and you define yourself as such, or have extensive experience in the issue you are facing, even better.
    • How do you define ‘normal’ sexuality? Look for a therapist without preconceived notions of what is healthy. How often you have sexual encounters and your range of solo and partnered sexual activities are only problematic if you and/or your partner think so.
    • Do you deal with both the emotional and medical components of sexual dysfunction? Run if they say “no.” All good sex therapists collaborate with medical professionals to address physical roots of sexual problems.
    • What are your methods? You want someone who offers a number of approaches, such as:
      • Cognitive behavioral therapy (CBT)
      • Mindfulness practices
      • Interpersonal psychotherapy
      • Somatic therapy for victims of trauma
      • Sexual health education
    • Are you accredited? There are good therapists who do not have AASECT accreditation, but if a person who has been recommended to you does, you know you are consulting a qualified professional.

    You Can Change Your Mind any Time

    If you have a bad feeling about someone’s office, staff or personality, look elsewhere. This is going to be a person you tell some of your most closely-held secrets, so you want to feel comfortable with them and confident they can meet your needs.

    If you have a feeling, after the first session or two, that this therapist is not right for you, move on. Not every therapist is the right fit for every couple.

    Denver Sex Therapy/Sex Therapist Can Help You Get More Emotional Intimacy and Sexual Connections in Your Relationship.

    Things have not been working. You may not be having as much sex, or when you do have sex, it is predictable and lacks the passion and fire that you used to have. Sex between the two of you feels like a routine, a chore instead of a moment of deep connection. You are tired of the boredom in the bedroom and in your relationship.

    How to find a sex therapist

    You might resonate with some of the following experiences:

    Is your relationship lacking the emotional and sexual intimacy you have been longing for?

    Do you need and want skills to have more desire and pleasure in your sex life?

    Do you want more freedom and more connection with yourself?

    Do you want more sex and sexual play?

    Does your relationship need a boost?

    Are aging or other medical conditions blocking you from have a more satisfying sex life with emotional intimacy?

    LISTEN: Denver Sex Therapist, Founder – YY Wei, talks about what to expect from sex therapy in this episode of The Therapy Spot:

    Sex therapy is not much different from other forms of psychotherapy. There is nothing strange, deviant, or kinky happening in sessions. Every interaction between therapists and clients is professional and ethical. Clothes always stay on. Sex therapists go through formal and professional training and receive hours of supervision. We have to become informed and competent in the areas of sex and sexuality. It is common for sex therapists to work in collaboration with medical professionals to rule out any medical etiology of the problems.

    Sex therapy is different in the sense that the training help sex therapists to be more open and accepting when it comes to different forms of sexual orientations, gender identity, and sexual practices. Sex therapists encourage clients to participate in self–exploration, as we believe in the healing power of positive sexuality and one’s quality of life.

    In sex therapy treatment, therapists builds therapeutic relationship with clients to collect a detailed case history from a psychosocial model with client’s permission. Clients are active participants in treatment in sharing their concerns, identifying their goal, and completing relevant therapy homework outside of the therapy office. There is no physical touch and clothes are always on.

    Denver Sex therapy offers solutions and ways to better relationships so people can have a more active, satisfying sex life. We help clients to have a more accepting attitude of one’s sexual preferences and sexuality. Your sex therapist will always give you the support and guidance in an open, non – judgmental way.

    Kink and BDSM/Fetishes

    Women and Men Sexuality

    Sexual Pleasure/Sexual Intimacy/Sexual Difficulty

    Sex Addiction/Out of Control Sexual Behaviors (OCSB)

    Mismatched or Loss of sexual desire/libido

    Issues related to desire, arousal, and ability due to aging and medical issues

    Women’s issues – Painful intercourse, Vulvadynia, pelvic pain

    Erectile Dysfunction, premature ejaculation, delayed ejaculation

    Sex therapy with a trained, experienced sex therapist can help clients who have questions about their gender identify, sexual orientation, and sexual preferences. As a trained sex therapists, we work together in an open, supportive, non – judgmental way. Clients learn skills and strategies around their sexual concerns to have a better quality of life. Clients are empowered to explore their own unique needs and wants, so they can become more congruent selves inside out.

    Life is scary and overwhelming. Rigid social rules and expectations can make our sexual experience more stressful. It is normal for any of us not wanting to face pain and just want to fit in. But that can only last so long!

    You will get the strategies and support to heal your past and become your true self. We do not have to face obstacles and deal with unknown, confusing emotions by ourselves. It is important to find a sex therapist that you feel comfortable with starting your journey of healing and empowering.

    Regardless of your reasons for seeking out sex therapy, we’re glad you’re here!

    As sex–positive therapists, and LGBTQIA & kink-friendly therapists, we are here to coach you and give you the tools you need. You can change your sex life to be more connected and more satisfying. Plus, more often than not, the core issue is more than just sex. We are here to help you go deeper and address the core issues so you don’t have to fall back to the old pattern after a while.

    Sexual issues can impact one’s self – esteem and emotional intimacy in a relationship. The good thing is you don’t have to do it alone. And you don’t have to struggle that much because there are practical skills and tools you can use to address your needs. As trained Denver Sex Therapists, we want to share and give you all these tools.

    We are LGBTQIA friendly and Kink Friendly Therapists.

    Because we understand the unique challenges that LGBTQ community and people who involve in alternative life styles face, we offer LGBTQ Individual & Couples Counseling & Alternative Relationship Counseling to more specifically address your individual and relational needs and concerns.

    Not every woman will experience sexual wellbeing problems after breast cancer, however, many women do find that their sexual wellbeing is changed by breast cancer and its treatments.

    If you have sexual wellbeing concerns, it might be helpful to talk to a health professional. As difficult as these conversations can be, there are people who can help you.

    To begin, you might like to talk to your GP or breast care nurse. He or she may be able to provide advice and recommend strategies that have worked for other women. He or she may also be able to recommend a counsellor, sex therapist or psychologist who can provide further support if you need it.

    If you decide that you would like professional advice, you may like to talk to a social worker, counsellor or psychologist. The treatment costs charged by these professionals can be subsidised by Medicare if you have a GP Mental Health Treatment plan drawn up by your GP. This plan entitles you up to 10 Medicare subsidised appointments with a specialist mental health worker. For more information about this scheme, talk to your GP.

    It’s likely that the Medicare rebate will not fully cover the cost of the appointment. Therefore, you may like to ask if there will be an extra cost for you before you make the appointment.

    The following information lists organisations which may be able to help you to find a sexual wellbeing expert in your area. Our online Local Services Directory also lists organisations and individuals who may be helpful.

    Free services

    Each of the public women’s hospitals in Australia’s capital cities operates a free sexual wellbeing clinic. You may want to talk to your GP about obtaining a referral to the clinic that’s located near you.

    Counselling services

    Relationships Australia

    Relationships Australia offers relationship counselling as well as a range of specialist counselling services. Most of the counselling services are conducted face-to-face, however they also have some online and telephone counselling options for people in remote areas.

    Fees for counselling services are negotiable. To find out more about counselling services or to make an appointment, contact Relationships Australia in your state or territory on 1300 364 277.

    Australian Counselling Association

    The Australian Counselling Association (ACA) is the national professional peak association of counsellors and psychotherapists. You can search for a counsellor near you with expertise in ‘Sex Therapy’ on the ACA’s website. Alternatively, you may like to phone the ACA on 1300 784 333.

    Psychologists

    Australian Psychological Society

    The Australian Psychological Society (APS) is the largest professional association for psychologists in Australia.

    The APS website features a ‘Find a Psychologist’ search function to help you locate a psychologist in your area with expertise in ‘sexual difficulties’. You are also able to use the Find a Psychologist search function to locate a Medicare Psychologist or Medicare Clinical Psychologist. Alternatively you may like to contact the APS on 1800 333 497.

    Sex therapists

    Society of Australian Sexologists

    The Society of Australian Sexologists Ltd is the National organisation, representing health and allied health professionals working in the area of sex therapy, sexual health/sexology.

    For more information or to find a counsellor in your state or territory, visit the society’s website.

    Other services

    The following organisations may also be of assistance:

    • Cancer Council Helpline – The Cancer Council 13 11 20 is a free, confidential information and support service provided by Cancer Councils in each state and territory. Trained staff can provide support and are available to speak about personal matters such as emotions and cancer, body image, sexual wellbeing and relationships throughout the cancer experience.
    • Cancer Council Connect – Cancer Council Connect is a one-to-one telephone support program that puts you in touch with a specially trained volunteer who has had a similar cancer and treatment. The volunteer can listen to your concerns and through a shared understanding, provide emotional support to assist you through your cancer experience. To find out more, phone the Cancer Council 13 11 20.
    • BCNA’s Breast cancer and sexual wellbeing booklet has a extensive list of supports available, as well as resources that may be of help.

    Stop the Pain and Conflict so you can feel Connected, Safe, and Appreciated in your Relationship

    This content shows Simple View

    • Home
    • Specialties
      • Marriage Counseling
      • Couples Counseling
      • Individual Counseling
      • Trauma Counseling
      • Sex Therapy
      • Addiction Counseling
      • Blended Family Counseling
      • Affair Counseling
      • Pre-Marital Counseling
      • Divorce Counseling
    • Online Therapy
    • Our Team
      • Keith A. Cross, Ph.D., LMFT
      • Sherrina Johnson, M.S., LMFT
      • Lee Geldmacher, M. A., L M F T, L I S A C
      • Marguerite Gundacker, M. A., L A C
      • Phil Merrell, M.Ed., LAC
      • Linda Schwartz, M.Ed., LPC
      • Jennifer Gray, MSW, LCSW
      • Mackenzie Bentley, MA, LMFT
      • Camille Corio, M.S., LAC
      • Hollie White, M.S., LAMFT
    • About
      • Our Services
      • Our Therapy Model
      • Relationship Counseling FAQs
      • General FAQ’s
    • Relationship Workshop
    • Blog
    • Careers
    • Contact

    Sex Therapy

    Do you feel emotionally disconnected during sex? Do you desire more or less sex than your partner, causing problems in the relationship? Have past experiences or current beliefs impacted your ability to be intimate?

    Sexual problems or dysfunctions often feel shameful and embarrassing. Many couples are unsure what to do or where to turn when the most intimate part of their relationship develops problems.

    Many Couples Face Sexual Problems

    People who experience sexual problems often feel like they are alone in their experience. This is far from the truth. Many couples face a number of sexual problems or dysfunctions at some point in their relationship, such as the ones listed below.

    • Sexual desire discrepancy in which one partner desires more sex than the other.
    • Sexual dysfunction or pain due to a medical condition.
    • Lack of emotional connection during sex.
    • Inability to orgasm.
    • Past trauma or sexual abuse that makes sex difficult for one or both partners.
    • Life circumstances such as infertility, small children, stress, or exhaustion that impact sex.

    A Marriage and Family Therapist Can Help

    Reaching out about sexual problems is hard, but it’s also worth it. A marriage and family therapist can provide the support and direction you need to resolve your struggles and regain a satisfying sex life.

    A couples counselor can help you identify the reason behind your sexual problems. Many couples who experience difficulty related to sex also deal with underlying relationship issues. Arguments, conflicts, communication issues, and trouble relating on an emotional level often spill over into a couple’s sexual relationship. Many times, couples find that when their relational issues are resolved, this improves their sexual issues as well.

    Other times, past trauma needs to be resolved or untrue beliefs need to be reconsidered for couples to regain a healthy sex life. On other occasions, medical issues impact sex, and a counselor can help you determine how to improve relationship intimacy, as you also pursue medical solutions to the problem.

    We Offer Evidence-Based Couples Counseling Practices

    Our counseling methods can provide the help you and your partner need. At the Prescott Relationships Center, we are dedicated to using evidence-based counseling practices. This means that the type of counseling we provide has been proven by decades of research studies to effectively help struggling couples.

    In particular, our counseling practice uses Emotionally Focused Therapy (EFT) in our couples counseling sessions. Emotionally Focused Therapy is a model of therapy that anticipates fast results. Couples who are focused and motivated often experience significant improvements in their relationship after 8-10 sessions.

    The goal of EFT is to find the root of what is troubling your relationship and discover ways to emotionally bond with your partner. Emotionally Focused Therapy is highly effective in treating sexual dysfunction, as sexual difficulties are often related to emotional disconnection or an inability to bond.

    Research has shown that EFT enhances sexual satisfaction in sexually dissatisfied couples, and increases emotional and physical sexual satisfaction in couples facing infertility. Because of the way in which EFT enhances emotional intimacy and sexual desire, EFT is also considered an effective therapy for sexual desire discrepancy. On a more general level, EFT leads to increased intimacy and higher levels of satisfaction within the overall marriage relationship. We know that EFT works. And we believe it can help your marriage.

    Renewed Intimacy in Your Relationship Is Possible

    Many couples avoid seeking help for sexual problems because discussing this topic feels shameful and embarrassing. Most people feel uncomfortable sharing the most private and intimate details of this part of life. Because of this, many couples deal with sexual problems for years without getting needed help.

    Couples who wait this long often don’t realize that most sexual problems can be overcome with the right type of treatment. Our expert marriage and family therapists are professional, compassionate, and maintain strict confidentiality. You can be assured that we provide a safe and respectful environment to help people find solutions to the difficult issues that arise in their sexual relationships.

    Contact Us Today

    We are dedicated to helping couples transform and strengthen their relationships. If you think we would be a good fit for your needs, please do not hesitate to call us today at 928-420-8300. We are happy to answer any questions you might have about our approach to relationship counseling and how we might help you and your spouse.

    Depending on your situation, we also offer EFT for unmarried couples, couples facing infidelity and divorce, and couples in need of premarital counseling.

    If you have any fears or concerns about marriage or couples counseling, we encourage you to read our Frequently Asked Questions page. If you have additional concerns, please don’t hesitate to contact us.

    How to find a sex therapist

    You’ve lost that loving feeling. Or you want to try something new in the bedroom (like one of these sex positions) but just don’t know how to bring it up. Or you wish you and your partner had more sex, less sex, or better sex. Most people face one or more of these issues at some point, but figuring out how to cope isn’t always easy.

    Most of these common problems boil down to one thing: poor communication. “There’s a lot of research showing that couples who have better communication have better sex lives,” says Rachel Sussman, a psychotherapist who specializes in sex and relationships. “They’re not afraid to talk about sex, and they’re not afraid to ask for what they want.”

    Of course, not everyone is equally comfortable chatting about intimate matters, whether or not a therapist is in the mix. So we asked Sussman and two other sexperts to spill their best advice. Read on for insider tricks and tips and start amping up your sex life tonight. (Want to balance out your hormones and lose weight? Then check out The Hormone Reset Diet to start feeling and looking better today!)

    Give it the old college try.
    Not in the mood, but your partner is? Don’t be so quick to shut down any advances. Most women don’t experience spontaneous desire; they need a little help getting there, says Michael Aaron, PhD, a licensed psychotherapist, sexologist, and sex therapist. He explains that many women need to be touched, kissed, and caressed before sexual desire kicks in. So consider saying yes to sex—or at least foreplay—even if you’re not currently raring to go.

    That said, you should never feel obligated to finish what you started. “You don’t know in the moment how it’s going to feel,” says sex and relationship therapist Megan Fleming, PhD, a clinical instructor of psychology in psychiatry at Weill Cornell Medical College. It’s never too late to say, “Sorry, not tonight.”

    Do your homework.

    How to find a sex therapist

    Sex doesn’t just “happen,” especially if you and your partner are in the midst of an especially long dry spell. About 15% of all relationships are considered sexless, meaning the partners haven’t had sex in 6 months, according to Aaron. His advice? Make intimacy a priority and sex will follow.

    If you’re not currently having sex but are still being romantic—going on dates, holding hands, kissing—then it might be as simple as carving out some special time to be alone together. But if you and your partner have essentially become roommates, you’re going to have to work a little harder to bring back sensuality, says Aaron. Plan date nights, start holding hands again, and give each other a kiss good-bye every morning and the romantic (and sexy) feelings might return. (Here are 10 ways to feel like having sex again.)

    Put sex on the menu.
    We don’t just mean scheduling a regular romp, although multiple sex therapists say that’s a good way to keep your sex life alive. But if your goal isn’t just to have sex but to make it more interesting, Aaron suggests making up a list (menu) of everything you want to try and everything that’s completely off-limits, then asking your partner to do the same. You might learn that you’ve both been fantasizing about adding sex toys to the mix or trying anal sex. (Here is everything you need to know about anal sex.)

    Get a sexy brain.
    Your libido is like an engine, says Fleming. You need to find ways to turn yourself on, warm up, and get ready to go. But Fleming says she often sees clients who have no idea what gets them going or what turns them off. How to sort it out? She suggests reading erotic fiction, listening to erotic podcasts, or simply allowing yourself time to fantasize. “Think about the last really enjoyable, hot, fun, connected, juicy experience you had with your partner,” she says. “Use all five senses, take it in, and let it be something you can come back to time and time again.”

    Bring in a friend.

    How to find a sex therapist

    No, not into the bedroom (unless that’s what everyone really wants, in which case, go for it!). But talking about sex with your friends—or just one trusted friend—can help demystify it. Discussing how much sex you’re having, how much you wish you were having, or how satisfied you are with your sex life could be a little like therapy. A good friend might even be able to help you work out whatever issue is getting in the way of the sex life you crave, Sussman says. Not sure how to get the conversation going? Fleming suggests mentioning an article you’ve read in a magazine or on a website (maybe the story you’re reading right now?). Try: “I read in Prevention. ” and see where it takes you.

    Take care of yourself first.

    How to find a sex therapist

    We’re not talking about masturbation—although getting a little frisky with yourself certainly isn’t a bad thing. It’s just as important (maybe more so) to get ample sleep, regular exercise, and generally keep stress in check (spa day?). “So many women feel depleted, and then sex starts to feel like work,” says Fleming. Try pampering yourself and you might find you’re feeling more sexy, fun, and playful. (What better way to pamer yourself than with this luxurious coconut body oilfrom Rodale’s? Ahh.)

    Ask for compliments.
    If you and your partner have been together for eons, chances are things have slowed down. Forget staying up all night to get down and dirty; you’re more apt to watch a little bit of Netflix and drift off by 10 p.m. But it’s not just sex that has gotten lost over the years. Chances are the unexpected gifts and compliments have dropped off, too. Getting back to a place where you feel loved and sexy is absolutely essential, Sussman says. “If you can say to your husband or partner, ‘Flirt with me, make me feel attractive,’ well, that’s probably just as good as taking any medication.” (Here’s how to have better sex at every decade.)

    Love yourself.
    What’s the No. 1 turn-on for men? If you said “boobs” or “butts,” you’d be wrong. The thing that gets most guys going isn’t a body part, says Sussman. It’s confidence. “If you feel good about how you look, if you like to make love with the lights on, that’s an aphrodisiac for everyone,” she says. Meanwhile, being uncomfortable with your body—whether you think you need to lose a few pounds or that your boobs are too droopy—can easily douse the fires in the bedroom. (We’re not going to pretend it’s easy to build up body confidence overnight, so here’s a go-to guide on how to get started.)

    Be a detective.
    What’s really at the root of your sex issues? Figure that out and you just might solve your problem, says Sussman. Some patients have trouble initiating sex, talking about fantasies, or admitting they’d like to have sex more often because they grew up believing women aren’t supposed to be interested in sex or because a past partner put them down. (If dryness is holding you back, give this all-natural lube from Rodale’s a go.) Other times sex problems aren’t really about sex at all, says Sussman. If you don’t trust each other or aren’t getting along outside the bedroom, you’ll need to work through that before you can expect the sensual side of your relationship to blossom.

    What is Psychosexual Psychotherapy?

    Because of the importance of sexual intimacy to developing and maintaining relationships, sexual dysfunction can cause a great deal of distress and anxiety, especially since it is a sensitive topic to discuss. Sex therapy helps with this distress and also with the sexual problem in a direct way.

    Sex Therapy at Mind and Body Works can either be through face to face or online sessions for individuals or couples.

    How to find a sex therapist

    How does it work?

    Sex therapy seeks to help sexual problems by specifically addressing them, usually beginning with a thorough assessment, leading on to detailed feedback and then to an individually designed treatment programme. Exploring the emotional and psychological aspects of the particular sexual problem with the therapist is an integral part of therapy sessions, but it will also entail home practise exercises.

    What kind of problems does it help?

    Sex therapy can help a range of sexual problems including erectile dysfunction, premature ejaculation, vaginismus, dyspareunia, and inability to achieve orgasm. It also helps couples where there is a loss of sexual desire or sex has ceased to be part of the relationship. Sexual difficulty can be difficult to describe and discuss, especially at the start. However, sex therapists are highly trained in this area and can help you to comfortably explore your sexual problem.

    How to find a sex therapist

    How to find a sex therapist

    Do I need to attend my GP first?

    A visit to the GP to be referred is not necessary. If there is a possibility that your sexual problem is medically related then you may be asked to see your GP.

    What if I’m not in a relationship?

    You do not need to be in a current sexual relationship to avail of sex therapy. If you are in a relationship, attending with your partner can maximise the benefits of therapy for your sexual problem. Sex therapy is also suitable for gay and lesbian individuals and couples.

    How long does it take?

    The length of sex therapy depends on a number of factors which include the duration, nature and history of the problem. Commitment to therapy sessions and crucially, to home practice, are very important factors. In general, sex therapy is not a long-term treatment.

    The fee per session will depend on which sex therapist you attend. Fees are indicated on the individual therapists’ profile page and on our Fees page.

    Sex Therapy Accreditation.

    Each of the sex therapists at Mind and Body Works are graduates of The College of Sex and Relationship Therapy (COSRT).
    This qualification is very important because it means that in addition to a core, or several core trainings, your sex therapist has completed specific post-graduate training in sex and relationship therapy. Our sex therapists continue to enhance and update their skills through continual professional training and development.
    Accreditation by COSRT shows that the therapist has met rigorous professional standards in practice hours, training, continuing professional development and supervision and works to the ethical and best practice guidelines of The College of Sex and Relationship Therapy.

    Online Sex Therapy

    Our psychosexual services are also provided by COSRT accredited sex therapists who are available online. These online sex therapists are fully qualified and experienced. An online appointment will suit many clients as it can feel confidential and secure, as well as allowing access to sex therapy no matter where you are in Ireland. You can select an online sex therapist by scrolling through the profiles below where the therapist location is shown as Online Therapies.

    How do I Arrange An Appointment?

    You can contact your chosen Mind and Body Works therapist directly from the list below to arrange this service.

    • How to find a sex therapist

    Anna Williams

    Location:
    Online Therapies

    Learn More
    How to find a sex therapist

    Olga Salodini

    Location:
    Online Therapies

    Learn More
    How to find a sex therapist

    Amanda Watson

    Location:
    Online Therapies

    Learn More
    How to find a sex therapist

    Bola Ogundeji

    Location:
    Online Therapies

    Learn More
    How to find a sex therapist

    Farah Saeed

    Location:
    Online Therapies

    Learn More
    How to find a sex therapist

    Steven Hayward

    Location:
    Online Therapies

    Learn More
    How to find a sex therapist

    Pauline Joyce

    Location:
    Online Therapies

    Learn More
    How to find a sex therapist

    Ruth Culhane

    Location:
    Online Therapies

    Learn More
    How to find a sex therapist

    Natalya Price

    Location:
    Dublin 4

    Learn More
    How to find a sex therapist

    Providing a sex-positive, pleasure-focused, and trauma-informed space to heal so you can have the sex life you’ve always wanted

    How to find a sex therapist

    Asking for help isn’t easy, especially in a society where speaking openly about sexuality is rare and taboo.

    On the inside, you’re overwhelmed, feeling guilt and shame at what’s going on. You may be sitting here, looking through the internet trying to find answers to figure out: is this normal? Will I ever recover? Will this get better?

    Sex is a natural part of many individuals’ lives and a part of most relationships. Yet, somehow, you feel that you have uncertainties, questions, issues, concerns, and … no one to turn to. Some days, it may feel like your partner is more like a roommate than a lover. Perhaps, someone has hurt you and now you’re struggling to feel safe in your body. You may be searching for places to find answers about your sexual or relationship concerns, but it’s been difficult to do so—where do you go? Who can you trust? Will there be judgement? On the outside, you are portrayed as the perfect couple, as if your sex life is wonderful, or like you’re in control of your body and your emotions.

    Whether you’re here because your relationship is in trouble, you need to figure out some sexual concerns, or you are wanting to deal with and heal from sexual abuse or assault, you’ve come to the right place.

    Allura Sex Therapy Centre, founded by BC’s only AASECT Certified Sex Therapist, is Vancouver’s leading trauma-informed therapy practice that exclusively focuses on sex, sexuality, and relationships. Our counsellors provide a safe, judgement-free and sex-positive space for our clients to heal on their own terms and provide help through sex therapy, couples counselling, and trauma counselling. Regardless of your goal, our counsellors are here to help you grow into your relationship or sexuality and feel confident that you know how to find your way through.

    Ultimately, you are the expert in your own life; we are here to guide you along your journey to sexual satisfaction and confidence.

    How to find a sex therapist

    Most of us will have a problem with sex at some point in our lives. Some people deal with this themselves but, for others, sexual problems can cause a lot of distress and unhappiness and require professional help.

    What is sex therapy?

    Sex therapists are health professionals who have specialised training in helping people with difficulties relating to sex. A well-qualified sex therapist has done intensive research on sexual problems and sexual dysfunction, and truly understands how to help individuals faced with these.

    Over the last 25 years sex therapy has come of age. If it was regarded with suspicion in the 1960s and early 1970s, sex therapy is now considered a discipline with full-fledged professional credibility. The field has become respectable. It’s associated with journals, conferences, training programmes, professional organisations, accreditation standards and certifications rather than voyeuristic, exploitative charlatans.

    Find a practitioner that’s right for you

    Sex therapy can be a somewhat daunting experience and an individual or couple can be quite wary initially. You may be wondering: what kind of person specialises in sex therapy? Is the therapist weird? Do they have all sorts of strange ideas about sex and sexuality?

    However, if you consult with a qualified, experienced practitioner who specialises in sex therapy, you will realise that they’re professional doctors with an interest in relationships and mental health care, and have expert skills to help you with your problem.

    Look for a sex therapist with whom you feel comfortable. Be very specific regarding who you want to see. A male or a female therapist? How old should they be? What should they specialise in? Do you want a warm, friendly doctor, or one who is more clinical?

    The closer a therapist meets your criteria, the more comfortable you’ll feel and the more able you’ll be to share your sexual story. If you’re going for sex therapy as a couple, make sure both you and your partner are happy with the doctor you’ve selected.

    What will the sex therapy session be like?

    Sex therapy is structured as a normal therapy session, where various questions are asked to get a holistic idea about your and your partner’s life. It’s thus not as daunting as you may think.

    The best attitude to have is to be open about your problems and aware that this person is there to help you, not to judge you. They’re professionals who will be empathetic and helpful and will listen to all your concerns and problems.

    It’s important to remember that all therapy sessions are confidential and you should feel no hesitation to tell your therapist in detail about the issues troubling you, to enable him/her to help you effectively.

    Sex therapists can help you deal with:

    Lack of arousal (inability to get or maintain an erection, or female frigidity)

    Lack of orgasm (inability to climax or control ejaculation)

    Sexual relationships that become stagnant

    Differences in what sexually arouses each of you

    Communication breakdowns when it comes to discussing sex

    Enhancing your sexual relationship

    Difficulty in establishing sexual boundaries

    Dealing with sexually transmitted infections within your relationship

    Couples struggling with sexual communication

    Many people may think that you must have severe sexual problems before seeking help from a sex therapist, but this isn’t so. Many sex therapists deal with couples with general sexual problems, such as lack of effective communication about sexual dynamics in their relationships. It’s therefore not necessary to wait for a massive sexual issue to develop before seeking professional help.

    Consider seeking help as soon as problems arise, even with small sexual issues, to prevent these growing into big dilemmas. Sex therapy can be very helpful and a rather pleasant experience. It doesn’t have to be scary and stressful.

    Find a Therapist


    Jill Denton, MFT, CSAT, CCS
    : Definitely not. Many couples therapists are decidedly uncomfortable talking about sex. It might be as difficult for them as it is for many couples; therefore, the subject just doesn’t come up. Furthermore, some sex therapists don’t work with couples! For example, they might put their focus primarily on helping individual men with erectile problems, or individual women who are unable to orgasm.

    In my own therapy practice, I encourage people struggling with sexual challenges to include their partners in conjoint therapy if they are part of a couple. But, I certainly don’t require that both people participate if this isn’t comfortable for the person who contacts me first.

    When a married or partnered person contacts me individually, I’ll explain about my “three-legged stool approach” where I meet with one person by themselves, and maintain complete privacy with what they share. Then I meet with their partner alone, with the same strict confidentiality. The third leg consists of couple or conjoint counseling, with both people present (or on the phone). If one leg of a stool is knocked off, the stool topples. When all three legs are present, it makes for a safe and stable place to sit.

    That’s what I do, but know that not all couples therapists are sex therapists, and not all sex therapists work with couples!

    How to find a sex therapistDenise Onofrey, MA, LMFTC: Sex therapy is a specialized branch of therapy. Sex therapists have additional training and expertise. A way to consider this is: a heart surgeon is a medical doctor who went to medical school, but he or she has additional and specific training to be a heart surgeon.

    Though some sex therapists provide various types of therapeutic services, as does a general therapist, a general therapist should not conduct or consider themselves sex therapists unless they have had additional and specific training. Within the field of sex therapy, some therapists specialize even more beyond being a general sex therapist. For example, a sex therapist may specialize in only working with men, women, or relationships. Another sex therapist may only work with low desire issues, trauma recovery and sexuality, or enriching intimacy.

    There are specific and well-respected governing bodies to ensure that sex therapists are highly qualified and well versed in the specialized field of sex therapy. One of the most renowned governing bodies which oversee the quality of education and professional development of sex therapists is the American Association of Sexuality Educators, Counselors, and Therapists (AASECT). AASECT professionals are engaged in advancing and maintaining standards for clinical and educational services in the field of human sexuality.

    How to find a sex therapistJohn Sovec, LMFT: Although some couples therapists are also trained as sex therapists, these are actually two distinctly different types of treatment. A couples therapist often focuses on assisting couples in building better communication and helping the partners build a strong relationship. A couples therapist works with issues of betrayal, infidelity, and pre-marital counseling.

    What makes a sex therapist unique is that they are often a therapist who addresses the issues mentioned above, but also have training in working with sexual issues that often arise in relationships.

    For some couples, there can be a mismatch in sexual needs and desires. A trained sex therapist will assist couples in building a strong, clear sexual language as well as assign exercises to support the growth of their sexual connection.

    Some sex therapists also work with people dealing with issues of sexual addiction, porn addiction, sexual trauma, and sexual disorders.

    If you’re looking for a therapist who can assist in sexual issues, make sure that they are licensed in your state and that they have additional certification which is often recognized as a CSAT (Certified Sex Addiction Therapist).

    How to find a sex therapist

    Having a professional help you better understand or improve certain areas of your life can be monumental.

    You might think of therapists as someone who helps people with things like depression, anxiety, and grief. But did you know they can help with more specific areas of your life – like sex?

    A sex therapist is a mental health professional that specializes in helping people navigate issues regarding their sexuality and sexual functioning.

    Seeking out mental health care can be daunting enough, and even more so with a subject as sensitive as your sex life. We’re here to help demystify what sex therapy is, who might benefit from it, and why people seek it out.

    Why Do People Go to Sex Therapy?

    Simply put, people go to sex therapy to help them handle issues regarding their sexuality, sex lives, and pleasure.

    For most people, sex is an integral part of being human, but unfortunately, there are numerous life events, societal influences, and disorders that can keep us from having a healthy and fulfiling sex life. Sometimes people need extra support and guidance in order to do this, that’s where sex therapists come in.

    Sex therapists can help you get to the root of where your sexual issues are coming from, and help you enjoy sex more overall.

    What are some things a sex therapist can help with?

    Difficulty Reaching Orgasm

    Although orgasms don’t necessarily have to be the goal of sex, it can be incredibly frustrating and disheartening when you have difficulty having one.

    A sex therapist can help whether you have difficulty having an orgasm with a partner, or by

    yourself as well.

    Pain During Sex

    While pain during sex could be because of a physical issue like ovarian cysts or endometriosis, some of it may be psychological as well.

    If sex is painful for you, or you have difficulty with penetration and would like to do it, a sex therapist can help you understand why and give you practical tools to help decrease discomfort and increase pleasure.

    Low Libido

    People experience low libido due to any number of reasons like hormonal changes, stress, depression, and certain life events. It can also put a huge strain on your relationship.

    If low libido is negatively impacting your life and relationships, a sex therapist can help with that.

    Sex After Trauma

    Traumatic incidents, whether they were sexual in nature or not can impact your sex life.

    A sex therapist can help you understand how this trauma has impacted your sex life, and how to heal and move past it.

    Questioning Your Sexuality

    Sex therapists that specialize in LGBTQ+ areas can help you figure out how you relate to your sexuality. Sexuality can change over time, and sometimes these changes catch us off guard or can be difficult to deal with.

    What Happens During Sex Therapy?

    There is no one size fits for sex therapy. Different providers will have different approaches that tailor to the needs of their individual patients.

    Depending on the reason for your visit, you may go by yourself or with your partner.

    Your sex therapist will most likely want a detailed history of your sex life, and what has brought you into their office.

    While modalities like sexological bodywork use hands-on methods, sex therapy is strictly talking therapy. This talk therapy will help them better understand the root of what has brought them there and how to move forward.

    You can expect to be given “homework” or take-home exercises to help you build your sexual practice and increase communication.

    If your therapist determines that your sexual issues may stem from a physical problem, they will help refer you to another provider who can help you with that.

    Depending on your needs, you can expect to have sessions weekly, every other week, or even monthly. It can be helpful to go weekly at first if you’re able to, to help build your relationship with your therapist and build momentum in your healing.

    How To Find a Sex Therapist

    Like with any relationship, it can take time to find the right sex therapist for you. If someone doesn’t feel like the right fit, trust your gut, and try to find a new provider.

    There isn’t strict regulation on who can call themselves a sex therapist, so you’ll want to pay attention to their credentials, training, and experience.

    Psychology Today is a great website that allows you to search for therapists that specialize in the niche you’re looking for (like sex therapy), as well as filter through insurance providers and other helpful criteria.

    The College of Sexual and Relationship Therapists has an online directory to help you find registered sex therapists in your area or virtually. Another online directory is AASECT, The American Association of Sexuality Educators, Counselors, and Therapists. Both of these organizations have strict criteria that providers have to follow in order to be considered sex therapists.

    If you’re thinking about going to a sex therapist, know that there is nothing to be ashamed of. If anything, you should be proud of yourself for taking steps to heal or improve what can be one of the most sensitive parts of your life.

    Come at the experience ready to be vulnerable, honest, and to do some deep digging.

    How to find a sex therapist

    Natasha (she/they) is a full spectrum doula, reproductive health content creator, and sexual wellness consultant. Her work focuses on deconstructing the shame, stigma, and barriers people carry around birth, sex, and beyond, to help people navigate through their lives with more pleasure, softness, and sensuality. You can connect with Natasha on IG @spectrumoflovedoula.

    A couple’s sexual relationship is something they work out for themselves. How often you have sex, when and what you do is personal to your relationship. As long as you both enjoy it and it’s not harming anyone else, then it’s your choice.

    However, if your sexual relationship isn’t giving you the pleasure or satisfaction it once did, or if it never has, then you may find talking to a sex therapist helpful. Talking about your sexual relationship may seem a little strange at first, but you will be talking to someone who is trained and skilled in working with sexual difficulties.

    The Relationships Scotland services which provide a sex therapy service are:

    How can sex therapy help me?

    Sex therapists are usually experienced relationship counsellors who have gained a further qualification in sex therapy. They all have an awareness of how relationship difficulties are linked to sexual problems. Sex therapists help you look at your sexual relationship. They work with individuals and couples to explore what is not working and what needs to be different.

    What sort of problems do sex therapists work with?

    Our sex therapists are trained to deal with different kinds of sexual problems. Those might be associated with wanting or having sex; by things happening to you, such as ageing, accidents, illness or children, which may affect your sexual relationship; or those things that are to do with each of you as individuals that may affect how you are or see yourself as a sexual being.

    Some of the main issues we deal with are:

    Erectile problems – Erectile problems are not being able to get or maintain an erection or feeling that your erection is not as hard as it used to be.

    Orgasm difficulties – Orgasm difficulties are not being able to reach orgasm or climaxing/ejaculating too soon, not being able to ejaculate.

    Painful sex – This is usually pain when penetration is tried, although sometimes it can also happen after sex.

    Desire problems – Desire problems might be loss of desire for sex or when there are different levels of desire in a couple, one wanting sex more than the other.

    Illness or disability – This refers to anyone or any couple where disability, illness or accident is impinging on their sexual relationships; it could include physical disabilities, diabetes or surgery.

    Cross-dressing – When a person feels drawn to dressing as and being the opposite sex.

    Sexual orientation – When people think they may be attracted to someone of the same sex.

    Sexual addictions – When people might be addicted to the internet, chat rooms, pornography or masturbation.

    What happens at sex therapy?

    Sex therapists will meet you for an initial session to see what the difficulty is and whether it’s something they work with. If you both agree to go ahead, they will arrange to meet each person individually to take a full history. This can take more than one session. When the therapist has taken each person’s history and looked at what the problem is, they will meet you as a couple to discuss a treatment programme that is designed to help with your particular difficulty.

    Sometimes therapists recommend that people have relationship counselling before starting on a sex therapy programme. This is because sex therapy requires couples to work closely together on their sexual relationship, but if there are any underlying relationship problems, they will quickly surface.

    If the difficulty is to do with wanting or having sex, the therapist is likely to recommend a treatment plan. However, if the problem is more to do with how you see yourself sexually, they may suggest counselling to help you explore the issues.

    A treatment plan explains what you will need to do to try and sort out the problem. You won’t have to do anything in front of the therapist or anyone else. The therapist will give you homework at each session for you and your partner do at home.

    How much will it cost?

    The service will ask you for a contribution towards the cost of the session as they would for relationship counselling.

    How long will sex therapy take?

    It depends on your situation and the problems you’re experiencing. Your therapist will discuss that with you.

    How to find a sex therapist

    Sex Therapy

    Sex therapy is a confidential service designed to help you work through any issues you are facing so you can begin to enjoy sex again, whatever this looks like for you.

    Share

    Sex therapy is a confidential service designed to help you work through any issues you are facing so you can begin to enjoy sex again, whatever this looks like for you.

    Most of us will have an issue with sex at some point, whether that’s about our connection to our own bodies or having sex with other people.

    We live in a world where you might think everyone but you is having great sex, and a lot of it. This simply isn’t true! Talking about problems with sex can be tough. and dealing with these worries and issues without any help can be frustrating.

    Everybody’s sexual experiences, preferences and needs are unique and these are likely to change over time.

    How can sex therapy help?

    Some people find talking about sex a bit awkward at first, which is completely normal – you will be supported to be as comfortable as possible.

    Sex therapy, also known as psychosexual therapy, can help with:

    • Having a different sex drive to your partner
    • Problems with erections or ejaculation
    • Issues with penetrative sex
    • Difficulties having an orgasm
    • A lack of enjoyment from sex
    • Feeling like you’re stuck in a routine and want to try something new
    • Health issues affecting sex
    • Life changes such as menopause and pregnancy affecting sex

    You can attend sessions on your own, or with a partner and our service is inclusive of all genders and sexualities.

    By professional referral only

    What is sex therapy?

    Sex therapy helps individuals or couples identify and consider possible psychological, emotional, social or relational, and physiological factors that could be maintaining their sexual problems or concerns. Sex therapy for sexual dysfunctions provided by mental health professionals includes cognitive-behavioural techniques and physical exercises or homework that clients do on their own between therapy sessions. Sex therapists also provide accurate and specific terms and educational materials about sex in therapy sessions that help clients better understand and address concerns in their sexual lives. Individuals or couples can seek sex therapy.

    When should I seek help?

    If you are distressed by a lack of desire for sex or experience problems when engaging in sexual activity (such as difficulties with arousal, erections, orgasms, or pain with intercourse), for emotional or physical reasons, you may want to consider sex therapy.

    If you feel your sexual problem is causing distress for your sexual partner(s) and in your sexual relationship(s), you may want to consider sex therapy.

    If you experience very distressing or interfering negative thoughts and feelings about your sexuality or your sexual problems, you may want to consider sex therapy.

    If you lack accurate information or have received conflicting information about your sexual concerns, you may want to consult a sex therapist.

    If medical interventions alone have not significantly enhanced your own or your partner’s sexual satisfaction, or not reduced your distress, you may want to consider sex therapy.

    What kind of sex therapist should I look for?

    As with any therapist, it is important to find the sex therapist that you trust. They should be licensed in the practice of therapy and report to a professional regulatory body. Don’t be afraid to ask questions about the sex therapist’s background, education and certification, and approach. You may also want to know the extent of their experience working with clients who have similar sexual concerns. Your sex therapist will have specialized training in assessing, diagnosing, and helping people with sexual problems and often hold specialty certifications in the area. Recognizing that a combination of physiological and psychological interventions can be helpful in addressing many sexual concerns, a psychologist trained in sex therapy will also collaborate with your medical care professionals or refer to medical specialists, as appropriate.

    Here are some helpful educational websites and evidence-based books:

    Sexual Awareness (McCarthy & McCarthy)

    Come As You Are (Nagoski)

    Love Worth Making ( Snyder)

    Sex Made Easy (Herbenick)

    The Joy of Sex (Comfort)

    Becoming Orgasmic (Heiman & LoPiccolo) (Zilbergeld)

    Sex Therapy

    How to find a sex therapistSex can be difficult for couples to talk about, especially when there are intimacy issues that need to be resolved. Issues can range from sexual function, desire, drive, anxiety, and emotional concerns like past sexual trauma.

    During sex therapy, couples can address concerns with licensed therapists who have extensive sexual and relationship health training.

    At North Brooklyn Therapy , located in Brooklyn’s Greenpoint neighborhood, we have a staff of experienced and licensed therapists. We offer individual and couples therapy to people all over the New York City metro area.

    Call the office to set up an appointment or schedule a counseling session online today.

    How Do I Know If I Need Sex Therapy?

    If your relationship lacks intimacy, there are struggles with sexual dysfunction or any other issues that you and your partner are having difficulty communicating about, it might be time to speak to a therapist.

    If you are still unsure if sex therapy is right for you, please feel free to email or call us .

    How Can Sex Therapy Help?

    Sex therapy can help you resolve a variety of sexual issues in your relationship.

    Some common reasons couples seek sex therapy:

    • A Partnership With Different Desires
    • Processing Past Sexual Trauma
    • Exploring An Open Relationship
    • Sexual Function/Dysfunction
    • Inability To Control Sexual Behaviour
    • Sexual Orientation Concerns

    Sex therapy can provide you with the tools you need to heal and handle anything.

    How Does It Work?

    How to find a sex therapistTogether with a therapist, couples will begin by talking through their general challenges and sexual history and any background information relevant to the main issue at hand.

    Initial sex therapy sessions involve discussion of concerns and creating a specific treatment plan. You will be given the tools you need to create a healthy sex life.

    Your therapist may determine that sessions will work best either individually or with partners together.

    As sessions move forward, you and your partner will find better ways to manage your sexual relationship in a supportive and nurturing environment.

    New patients should be aware that sex therapy does not involve any type of physical contact or examination. If you need physical medical attention, you should contact your health physician.

    How Long Does Sex Therapy Treatment Last?

    How long your sex therapy treatment continues varies on each individual and couple. Sex therapy is often short term as most issues, and concerns are addressed quickly. Most couples typically need several sessions.

    As your sessions progress and you are able to take and use your new healthy skills in your relationship, you will be able to identify and refine the concerns you’d like to continue to work on with your therapist.

    What Will I Gain In Sessions?

    Couples will learn ways to manage emotional issues around sex and find better ways to communicate with each other. Addressing your concerns around performance anxiety, pleasure, and sex education can help improve the sex life of couples.

    Couples will often be assigned homework which could include:

    • Practicing different ways of communicating
    • Slowing down and practicing mindfulness during intimate encounters
    • Changing the way you interact (both sexually and nonsexually)

    Therapists will also check for any underlying mental health issues that might be preventing a healthy sex life between couples.

    Why Choose North Brooklyn For Sex Therapy?

    The therapists and counselors at North Brooklyn include New York City’s best minds. We create a safe, non-judgemental environment for patients to discuss sexual issues that can be difficult to talk about.

    Education and Diverse Experience

    We value education and diverse experiences when it comes to building a team of professionals to serve you.

    Most all of our therapists hold a minimum of a masters degree and are licensed in the state of New York. We promise you that we will connect you with the right professional skilled at handling your personal situation.

    Convenient Location

    Our office is located in the Greenpoint neighborhood of Brooklyn. We are centrally located near both subways and a bus access point. Our location is conveniently located, allowing couples from all over the five boroughs easy access to our offices.

    How to find a sex therapist

    Affordable

    At North Brooklyn Therapy, we do our best to make our rates affordable to everyone. Since most traditional insurance plans won’t cover couples counseling, we set our rate range from $75 to $175 per session based on your therapist’s experience.

    We do ask that patients abide by a 48-hour cancellation policy.

    Remote Therapy

    Patients who are unable to attend sessions in person should know that we also offer remote sessions. Remote sessions are available through the Zoom telecommuting platform and offer safety during these unprecedented times.

    Remote therapy can also be a way for patients to feel more comfortable speaking to a therapist in their own space.

    I think you are doing a great job in answering people’s concerns and questions about sex. I am wondering if sex therapy will be covered by an insurance policy. (This might be insurance related questions.) I just want you to throw some light on this. I want to seek some medical help for my quick ejaculation.

    Sick of Quickies

    Dear Sick of Quickies,

    Sex therapy is a counseling technique that helps clients change their behaviors and attitudes in and outside of the bedroom. It has been found to be effective in clients who come to therapy alone, but it’s even more effective (50 to 70%!) with the involvement of the client’s partner(s). Because sex therapy is evidence-based form of psychological therapy and proven to be effective for many clients, some insurance companies provide coverage. However, if your insurance doesn’t cover sex therapy, don’t fret — you still have several other options.

    Sex therapy usually lasts between five to 20 hourly sessions, often scheduled twice per month. Many sex therapists use the Cognitive Behavioral Therapy (CBT) treatment modality, which promotes behavioral changes by evaluating connections between the client’s thoughts, feelings, and behaviors. Sex therapists that practice CBT often assign “homework,” which encourages clients to practice new behaviors between sessions. As the therapy progresses, clients discuss their at-home experiences to hone in on the specific issues they’d like to work on.

    Depending on your specific concerns and health status, you may need to see a sex therapist that works with a team of healthcare providers, including your primary provider, psychiatrist, psychologist, or counselor, and/or physical therapist. Sex therapists often request complete medical evaluations before or shortly after the treatment begins in order to properly diagnose the problem and identify the appropriate treatment plan. This evaluation can help determine between the physiological and psychological concerns. Additionally, when a sex therapist recommends medication, she or he must collaborate with licensed prescriber (physician, nurse practitioner, psychiatrist, etc.)

    If you wish to find a sex therapist or counselor near you, use the provider locator on the American Association of Sexuality Educators, Counselors, and Therapists (AASECT) website. Always look for a certified or licensed sex therapist with a graduate degree and credentials from AASECT. Certified sex therapists do not have sexual contact with clients and conduct their work in accordance with regulated standards. Once you select a therapist, call her or his office to determine whether services are reimbursable by your insurer. Or, if you’d like, you can ask your primary care provider or call your insurance company directly and request a referral to a provider in your area. If your insurance doesn’t cover therapy, many therapists are willing to adjust their fees or work out a payment plan. You can also look for a sex therapy clinic (which are usually less expensive than private therapists) near you by calling your local hospital or university medical center.

    Whether you choose to tackle your concerns alone or work with the support of a sex therapist, there are several techniques you can try on your own. For example, you can try delaying orgasm and prolonging arousal. These exercises help men learn to change undesired behaviors (including premature ejaculation) on the road to climax. Bernie Zilbergeld’s book, The New Male Sexuality, offers insight, perspective, information, and other useful suggestions in this area as well. Remember that practice makes perfect — for these strategies to be effective, they must be used often, as you’re teaching your body a new skill. Good luck!

    How to find a sex therapist

    Sexual Wellness

    Meet Our Team

    We are sex-positive clinicians providing comprehensive, specialized care in sex therapy and sexuality-related concerns.

    How to find a sex therapist

    Emily Gordon, MSw, MEd, LCSW, CST (SHE/HER)

    I’m Emily Gordon, and I am a Licensed Clinical Social Worker (LCSW) and AASECT Certified Sex Therapist (CST). I help individuals and people in relationships connect to and embrace their sexual and gender identities, explore new levels of intimacy, and improve their overall sexual satisfaction.

    I became a relationship and sex therapist because I believe sexuality is a foundational aspect of our identity. My hope is to help address sexual concerns so we can live more authentically and holistically.

    How to find a sex therapist

    LIBBY EBERT (SHE/HER)

    I’m Libby Ebert and I’m a clinical intern working under the supervision of Dr. Jennifer Litner. I am currently pursuing my master’s degree in marriage and family therapy and sex therapy certificate at Adler University.

    I am passionate about helping individuals and partners navigate conflict, deepen their emotional and sexual intimacy and enhance their confidence. I believe everyone deserves affirmative care that is thoughtfully challenging and supportive of their mental, emotional and sexual wellbeing.

    How to find a sex therapist

    Marnie spiegel, LCSW (she/Her)

    I’m Marnie Spiegel, and I’m a licensed clinical social worker and a human sexuality educator with advanced training in treating relational and sexuality-related concerns.

    I am passionate about helping individuals and couples enhance their sex lives and improve their communication, connection, and relationships. I view sex as a natural, healthy expression that should lead to all parties involved feeling satisfied. I fundamentally believe that sexual wellness is essential to our overall mental health and that we need to take the taboo out of sex!

    How to find a sex therapist

    Jennifer Litner, Phd, LMFT, CST (she/her)

    I’m Jennifer Litner, and I’m a certified sex therapist and a human sexuality educator. I help people who want a more vibrant sex life to speak openly, deepen their connection and love energetically — because you deserve to be sexually satisfied! I believe the sex life you desire is worth striving for.

    As an AASECT Certified Sex Therapist, I have completed the clinical training and supervision necessary to specialize in the clinical treatment of sexual dysfunction and sexuality-related concerns.

    How to prepare for a video interview at home

    December 3, 2021

    Copy to Clipboard

    Hanne was a senior content manager at Indeed.

    This article has been approved by an Indeed Career Coach.

    While COVID-19 made virtual interviewing a necessary practice, its popularity amongst employers is likely to stick post-pandemic. Virtual interviewing is convenient for employers as it allows for a more efficient interview process, eases scheduling conflicts, saves money and broadens the candidate pool. In this article, we review the best ways to be successful during your next virtual interview.

    What is a virtual interview?

    A virtual interview is an interview that takes place remotely, sometimes over the phone, but often using technology like video conferencing and other online communication platforms. During a time when the Centers for Disease Control and Prevention and the federal government recommends people practice social distancing, it’s become essential for both human resources employees and candidates to learn how to perfect the virtual interview process. Virtual interviews are often conducted much the same way as face-to-face interviews. That said, virtual communication requires special considerations and adjustments due to the limited ability to read body language and facial expressions.

    Perfecting your virtual interview to decrease the impact of COVID-19

    If you’re in the middle of your job search, it’s likely that you’ll be asked to do your interviews virtually. Here are a few considerations to set yourself up for success:

    1. Test your technology beforehand

    A virtual interview requires tools like a camera and microphone on your computer, a software program (such as Google Hangouts or Zoom) and a reliable internet connection. At least a day before your virtual interview, check all of your technology to ensure it works effectively and can be used to communicate effectively. That means having a functional computer that meets technical specifications, downloading any necessary software and ensuring the connection is strong enough to sustain streaming video.

    In the 15 to 30 minutes before your interview, check your internet connection and sign in to the video or phone meeting provided by the HR representative or hiring manager. Turn on the sound and video to ensure everything is in working order in time for your conversation.

    If you need a cost-effective option for connecting to the internet at home, consider Comcast’s Internet Essentials package for $9.95 per month plus tax.

    2. Wear professional attire

    In a virtual interview, you should dress the same as you would in a face-to-face interview. Doing so not only makes you appear professional and excited about the opportunity, but it will also make you feel more prepared and confident. When an interview takes place from a remote location like your home, you should expect it to be just as formal as one that takes place in an office—if you’re unsure, business casual is a good standard to follow.

    3. Prepare in advance

    As with any interview, you’ll get the best results if you take the time to prepare in advance. Just because you are in front of your computer doesn’t mean you should rely on the ability to quickly look up answers or rely on pre-written answers you can refer to. You should prepare so you are able to have a natural conversation without clicking around or reading directly from a script, which can seem rehearsed and unnatural.

    Employers may give you a list of questions in advance that they want you to answer, which can help you navigate your research. More often, you will be asked to give answers without prior knowledge of the questions. If this is the case, prepare the same way you would for an in-person interview:

    Carefully the job description noting your relevant qualifications

    Prepare relevant examples of your achievements and experiences

    4. Limit distractions

    The best place to take an interview in your home is a quiet location with few distractions. Choose a room that is clean and professional-looking so the interviewer can focus their attention on you and not what is around you. If you don’t have a dedicated office space, you can also use a bedroom or guest bedroom, your kitchen table or even cleared-out closet space. Try to place your computer on a table or desk instead of your lap or couch.

    Tell people you are sharing space with about the area you’ll be using for your interview, the time of your interview, and that you and your quiet space will be off-limits during that time. Respectfully explain that during this time, it is best that the house stays quiet with limited distractions. If possible, you might also place pets in a designated room during critical working hours.

    5. Use professional body language

    Because interviewing via video or phone limits the ability to communicate with body language, it is important to utilize body language in a clear, professional way. For example, if you get a question that is unexpected, make sure to stay poised and take a moment to collect your thoughts.

    Sit up straight and ensure your camera is placed so your face is in the middle of your screen (not too much blank space above or below your head). In most interviews, you shake hands with your potential employer at the beginning and the end of the discussion. It’s an important body language cue that helps you establish the relationship. Instead, find other ways to greet and exude enthusiasm, like smiling and giving a confident wave with eye contact.

    6. Build rapport

    Establishing rapport is important in any business relationship because it allows you to separate yourself from other candidates by building a personal connection with the interviewer. When you interview in person, your enthusiasm, body language, handshake and early small talk all help you build that connection with your potential employer.

    When communicating virtually, it’s still necessary to find ways to establish rapport. You can do this by being prepared to talk about a common interest, asking how your interviewer’s experience has been with virtual interviews or by finding some other neutral topic with which to learn more about your interviewer.

    7. Be authentic

    When interviewing virtually, you have the rare opportunity to speak in a relaxing, familiar environment and show the interviewer who you are and why you’re the best person for the job. Recruiters will look for how you express yourself to understand whether you are a good fit for the company. Use tools like your body language, facial expressions and interview preparations to convey your confidence and personality as it relates to the position.

    8. Follow up

    After your interview, plan to send a well-timed follow-up. It’s good practice to send a follow-up email within 24 hours of an interview, thanking the interviewer for their time and letting them know you’re available if they have any additional questions. Reach out to the HR representative or hiring manager you’ve been speaking with to get a list of your interviewers’ emails.

    Video interview tips

    Coronavirus (COVID-19) and job interviews

    COVID-19 is affecting the way businesses recruit new candidates. While a small number of business are still holding face-to-face interviews, the majority of organisations are unlikely to do so until the current social distancing restrictions come to an end. Because of this, it’s now more important than ever to make sure that your telephone and video interview skills are up to scratch.

    Read on to discover how to ace a video interview.

    While video interviews have always been a part of recruitment the COVID-19 pandemic has made them crucial to the application process

    Traditionally used in the early stages of the interview process to filter out large numbers of candidates they can vary in style and length. However as COVID restrictions were put in place the majority of things moved online and interviews were no exception.

    The obvious benefits are the money and time savings for both you and the company. It also means that the recruiter and their colleagues can watch the interview again rather than just relying on notes.

    The format isn’t without its challenges though – the main ones being connectivity problems and time delays. Not everyone is comfortable on camera and this may put some candidates at a disadvantage. However, with some preparation these issues can be overcome and help you move on to the next stage of the process.

    Research the format

    It’s vital that you know in advance what format the video interview will take, as the two main types are very different experiences.

    • Live – this is similar to a regular face-to-face interview. You’ll speak to the interviewer (or panel of interviewers) in real-time over a video connection using a service such as Skype or Zoom. Live videos enable employers to recreate the traditional interview format without requiring the candidate to travel to their office, meaning they can recruit from anywhere in world. Try to treat the conversation as you would an interview at the employer’s offices and build a rapport with the interviewer.
    • Pre-recorded – this is a much less personal experience as you won’t be speaking to a real person. You’ll be presented with pre-recorded or even written questions on screen, and then you’ll have to record your answer on video, often to a time limit. This helps employers who have lots of candidates, as they can simply watch your answers later at a time that suits them – but it can be awkward if you aren’t used to recording yourself. This makes practice even more important. On the plus side, you will be able to do the interview at a time of your choosing up to a set deadline.

    Choose your location

    Plan well in advance where you’re going to do the video interview. Use a quiet location, where noises and people won’t disturb you. Make sure the room you choose is tidy and use a clean and simple background so that the recruiter focuses on you.

    You need to think about the lighting, as it won’t be a great interview if you can’t be properly seen. To ensure you don’t get a shadow either use natural light from a window or put a lamp in front of the camera and adjust the distance to get the best result.

    Close any software on your computer that might play notification sounds, and switch your phone to silent to guarantee you won’t be distracted. Also, let everyone in the house know you’re about to start the interview so they don’t interrupt

    Dress appropriately

    You may be at home but it’s still a job interview and this is your opportunity to give a professional first impression – this means dressing appropriately. You should wear the same outfit you would have chosen for a face-to-face meeting with the employer. Think about how your clothes will look on screen and avoid busy patterns and stripes.

    Use positive body language

    It’s best to avoid slouching, moving too much or touching your face. Instead employers will be looking for you to make good eye contact, smile, listen and take an interest in what they’re saying. To help you do this your camera should be at eye level and you should look into it rather than at the screen.

    For pre-recorded interviews, try to imagine you’re speaking to a real person, maintaining your enthusiasm and positive body language. This can be harder to do when you’re simply recording your answers.

    If you’re nervous it can be easy to rush what you’re saying but remember that the employer wants to hear your answers. Speak clearly, and be careful not to interrupt as this is more easily done with the slight delay over the internet than during a face-to-face meeting.

    Advertisement

    Get technical

    A few days before the interview you should test the computer, camera and any software that you’ve been asked to use. Make sure the picture is clear and the sound quality is good. It’s also worth checking your internet connection.

    On the day of the video interview ensure everything is fully charged or plugged in, as you don’t want the battery to run down. You don’t want to be still sorting things out as the interview starts, so switch everything on at least half an hour before the interview and sign in to any software that you’ll need.

    If there are any technical hitches, for example if you can’t hear the questions very well, don’t struggle through, as you won’t put in your best performance. If it’s a live video interview, mention the problem. It may easily be fixed, or the interviewer may be happy to end the call and redial.

    For pre-recorded video interviews, check beforehand whether you’re allowed to stop and restart in case of technical issues.

    How to prepare for a video interview at home

    How to prepare for a video interview at home

    Theresa Chiechi / The Balance

    Do you have a video interview on your schedule? As hiring becomes global and more employees work remotely, video interviews have become commonplace.

    For hiring managers and recruiters, they’re a way to quickly conduct first-round interviews, save on transportation costs, and get the interview process started much faster than scheduling in-person interviews.

    For some positions, the entire process may be handled virtually, while others may have a combination of video and in-person interviews.

    Types of Video Interviews

    Your interview may be a live video chat with a hiring manager or recruiter, or you may be invited to participate in an on-demand interview. With an on-demand interview, you will record your responses to a series of interview questions for the hiring manager to review at a later time.

    Tips for a Successful Video Job Interview

    The key to a successful video interview is to practice beforehand, so that you avoid technical problems and feel confident with the process.

    Keep in mind; a video interview carries as much weight as an interview conducted in-person, so you will want to make sure that you’re well prepared to interview remotely.

    Review the following tips to make sure you ace this type of interview.

    What to Expect

    What should you expect during a virtual interview? The video platform will vary depending on the company, but a ResumeGo survey reports that employers typically use:

    • Zoom: 43%
    • Skype: 12%
    • Google Meet/Hangouts: 19%
    • Microsoft Teams: 7%
    • Cisco WebEx: 5%
    • Other: 14%

    Zoom ranks even higher as the most-used platform in another report. The Zenefits report notes that Zoom is the most commonly used interviewing platform (72%), followed by Skype (43%).

    Surveyed companies reported that most interviews lasted under an hour:

    • Under 30 minutes: 36%
    • Between 30 minutes and 1 hour: 48%
    • Over 1 hour: 16%

    If you’ve got multiple interviews in a single day, be sure to give yourself a time buffer in between so you have time to get set for the next interview.

    Advance Planning

    Take the time to prepare for your interview in advance. In most cases, everything will go smoothly, but it will be less stressful if you practice in advance.

    • Do a trial run a day or two before the interview.
    • Check your webcam and any headset or microphone as if you were going to do the actual interview. If possible, use the same video technology that you’ll be using during the actual interview. That way, you won’t have any last-minute installation issues or password problems right before your interview.
    • Your camera should be at eye level (not above or below). A poorly placed camera can result in unflattering double chins or weird shadows. Check to make sure your sound equipment works properly.
    • Regardless of location, make sure that you send any materials (resume, portfolio, etc.) that the recruiter needs in advance.

    Check Your Background

    During your test run, take a look at the background that shows up in the video. Does it look cluttered or distracting?

    Plan to have your background be tidy. A plain wall is ideal, or an office-like setting. You may be able to choose an online background to use, depending on the video platform you’re using.

    Pay attention to the lighting, too. You do not want to have light sources behind you since that will leave your face in the shadows.

    What to Wear

    The ResumeGo survey reports that most employers prefer that job candidates wear business casual, but many don’t have a preference.

    • Doesn’t matter: 44%
    • Business casual: 52%
    • Business formal/professional: 4%

    The camera angle should show you from the waist up because your face is the real focal point. But if there is any possibility you will need to stand up, make sure your pants or skirt is professional. You don’t want to be the person whose inappropriate interview attire gets noticed.

    These tips for what to wear for a remote job interview will help you make the best impression.

    During the Video Interview

    Make sure the table and your surroundings are clean and neat. You don’t want to distract the interviewer. If you’re interviewing in your home, make sure that you are in a quiet space with no barking dogs, children, music, or other sounds.

    As well, turn off your phone and any alerts on your computer to avoid getting thrown off by emails or instant messages during the interview. The microphone will pick up any noise in the room, so don’t tap your pen or shuffle papers.

    Make eye contact, and remember, that means looking at the camera (and not the picture-in-picture image of yourself).

    Use the same good posture you would use during an in-person interview. Avoid making a lot of hand gestures—even with a great Internet connection, there can be lag time, and hand gestures can stutter on the screen.

    The Video Interview Process

    • The company selects candidates for video interviews.
    • Arrangements for an interview are scheduled.
    • The company will provide instructions on how the interview will work.
    • There will typically be 10 – 15 questions related to the job the company is hiring for.

    Other than you’re not meeting the interviewer in-person, the interview process will be the same as an in-person interview. The interviewer’s objective (to screen candidates for employment) is the same. You will be asked the same type of interview questions. Also, be prepared to ask questions, as well.

    What’s most important is to consider this type of interview is just as important as if you were meeting the interviewer in their office. The value, for yourself as well as for the hiring manager, is equivalent, and interviewing successfully, however it takes place, is the key to getting hired.

    What Employers Look For

    What do employers want to see when they review videos from candidates for employment?

    How to prepare for a video interview at home

    Many of the tips and tricks that you can Google about how to prepare for your video interview are common sense. Of course, you will find a quiet room rather than interviewing from a laptop in the middle of a crowded Starbucks; of course, you will try out the video application that is being used on the interview invite prior to the big moment rather than turn it on for the first time at the time for your interview.

    Video interviews have been around for awhile, but they surged during the pandemic. By October 2020, 89% of companies were using virtual interviews . According to Indeed , 93% of employers plan to continue using video interviews in the future. Virtual interviews are easier and faster than traditional interviews, even for in-person jobs, so they’re here to stay.

    You can think of the following tips from ECP as reminders for preparing for your video interview.

    1. Make sure you know the important dates!

    You may not be working and managing an hour-by-hour schedule for your job search, just not your bag baby. But, just in case there is an unexpected change to the event time, location, etc. don’t rely upon the old pad and paper to be with you when that information lands either by phone or email. We recommend that you log the date of your interview (and who it’s with: company, title, position you’re interviewing) on your digital calendar that you can access from anywhere.

    For some of us, we’ve found it helpful to also record the date and info in writing (like a large desk calendar where you can doodle notes.) Then, the day prior to your interview it is a must and nice touch to confirm with the interviewer the date, time, and person for the interview.

    2. Find a quiet spot and neutral background.

    If you’re interviewing from home, find a quiet location without a busy background. Barter with the other people in your dwelling for peace and quiet for an hour. If you can choose a neutral background or office backdrop for the video interview, do that! There are many professional Zoom backgrounds available to download.

    Whatever you choose, keep it neutral. Even if you know the political leanings or favorite team of the prospective interviewer, keep your background neutral. Who knows who else might be on the call and still sore about last year’s election or Super Bowl outcome.

    3. Do the recon prior to your interview.

    How much do you want this job? Much about how we approach business has changed during the pandemic timeframe of working solely at home. The need to set yourself apart from the rest of the pack has never been greater. Take the time to investigate the company, it’s culture and the person (or people) who you are interviewing.

    Be sure to order an interview prep bundle (ask your ECP Career Strategist for details) to learn about up-to-date news, technology stack changes and organizational hierarchy info pertaining to the company. If you have time before the interview, reach out to people who are currently working for this organization and invite them to have a brief conversation about the company, their role, and the company culture. Not only might you make a friend in the process, but you may earn an advocate behind the scenes!

    Also finding the company’s LinkedIn Profile and looking at the people that work at the company, especially the profile of who will be interviewing you, can give you a sense of what to wear. Are they “business casual” which to them means a button-down shirt or a shirt with a collar or more formal wearing neutral colors and jackets? This may seem like common sense but let it be said that a clean and neat appearance (light makeup if you wear it) is important!

    4. Prepare for the interview as the CEO of YOU!

    Most managers today are overworked and understaffed. Their bandwidth is stretched to the limit. Gone is the time of convincing someone why you’re qualified for the job. You wouldn’t be scheduled for an interview if they didn’t believe you were qualified. You can think of the interview as a way for you to give the interviewer an experience of what it is like to work with you.

    Everyone appreciates it when people listen to them and most really notice when they know they’ve been “heard.” Overcome any nervous tension or anxiety by thinking of the person in front of you and how you can help them. Remember that you can listen both for what is being said as well as what is not said.

    5. As the interview begins, notice the expression and/or body language of the person or people in front of you.

    Pay attention to your own body language too! Are your shoulders up around your ears? Is your chest constricted? Take a breath and roll your shoulders back and down. See if the interviewer does the same thing. You’ve already begun to establish rapport without saying a word and given the interviewer an experience of YOU helping them to relax. From your interview prep info was there a scoop in the news that you could open the conversation with to establish verbal rapport?

    Remember that most interviewers are not professional interviewers. They may be just as uncomfortable as you are so helping them to relax and feel comfortable with you will not only encourage the interview to go smoothly but you’ve just given them an experience of helping them to relax.

    6. If your interview is a panel of people be sure to look each of them in the eye.

    There is a tendency while on video calls to watch yourself speak, but as the interviewee, it is imperative that you are watching for physical feedback from the interviewer/s. Take a deep breath to not only regulate your breathing but also the pace that you speak. Don’t assume you kind of understand what is being asked if you don’t, ask for clarification. Restate the question, answer it in 90 seconds or less (think of a SOAR response that you can use that states a similar situation/opportunity, action steps you took and the results of your efforts) and then ask if your answer was what they were looking for.

    Silence is golden. You don’t need to fill in the gaps with random words. Breathe. Prior to the interview, meet with your ECP Career Strategist to prepare for questions that may be asked especially if there are any objections that you need to address. Prior to the interview, also make a list of questions about the company and position that you would like to ask as well.

    7. Make yourself a sandwich of support.

    Before your interview, call someone like your ECP Career Strategist who can give you the support and strength you need to have a successful interview. After your interview, call them (or someone equally as supportive) to let them know how the interview went and process your experience. Create a sandwich of support for yourself so that you feel confident and prepared for a successful interview.

    Some of us may never feel completely comfortable interviewing in person or on screen, but if we prepare ourselves well, we can not only do a good job presenting ourselves and our skills but may even enjoy ourselves in the process!

    If you are looking for a new job, chances are that it’s only a matter of time before you’ll be asked to participate in a video interview. After all, in today’s working climate, video chat services are normal parts of the interview process. A Skype interview, or a Zoom or Teams interview, allows employers to interview candidates regardless of where they are located.

    While video interviewing has become a common recruitment tool, not everyone is comfortable on camera. To ensure your suitability as a candidate shines through in your next video interview, you need to prepare appropriately – and this requires you to move beyond in-person interview best practice and plan for a whole new set of variables.

    To help, we share the following 11 video interview tips for a successful video job interview.

    1. Prepare everything in good time

    First and foremost, think about where you are going to have your video interview. A home office is ideal, but if you do not have a separate home office, your bedroom, dining room or kitchen could make appropriate settings, provided the frame behind you is uncluttered and distraction-free. After all, the interviewer’s attention needs to be firmly on you, not on the view behind you. Ideally the location you select will have a door you can close so that children, housemates or pets do not walk in during your interview. Let other people in your house know ahead of time that you have a video interview, and then close the door to minimise any external noise.

    If you plan to use a tablet or phone for your video interview, invest in a stand or use a sturdy piece of furniture to rest your device on. Even if you have control of your nerves, your hands will likely shake at some point during a lengthy interview, which can be very distracting for your interviewer.

    Consider the lighting in the room too, which must be bright enough for the interviewer to see you. If there is a bright light source directly behind you, move it as you will otherwise appear as a shadowy silhouette. If there is a light source in front of your face, make sure it isn’t shining directly in your eyes.

    2. Create a professional profile

    There are many different potential platforms that your interviewer could use for the job interview. You may, for instance, be invited to a Skype interview. Or, perhaps, you are asked to attend a Zoom or Teams interview. Either way, once you know what platform will be used, download the necessary app and, if required, make sure you create a professional profile. In most cases, the first thing that your interviewer will see is your profile photo and username, so ensure both are suitable and depict you in a professional light.

    3. Consider a virtual background

    If you are not satisfied with the background behind you, consider blurring or customising it. Most video call platforms allow you to select a background effect, while there are also various free virtual background apps. These allow you to present a more professional image to your virtual interview so that the interviewer is focusing all their attention on you, not your background.

    4. Do a trial run

    Check your internet connection, sound and picture quality by making practice calls to a friend or family member the day before your interview. Your interviewer will likely have a busy schedule and you won’t make a good impression if you need to adjust your equipment during the interview.

    This is also a good opportunity to run through possible interview questions and answers and receive feedback from a trusted friend or family member.

    If you can’t enlist the help of someone to run through this with you, record yourself on video answering potential interview questions. While this may feel strange initially, it’s a helpful way to see how your body language and intonation translate over camera, while allowing you to test the quality of your sound, lighting and video.

    5. Look into the webcam

    It’s important to take the time to become comfortable looking directly into the webcam. Avoid the temptation of looking at your own image on the screen and instead look into the camera so that you maintain eye contact with your interviewer. Don’t forget to smile at the same time as this will help you build rapport.

    6. Keep notes off screen

    It is perfectly acceptable to refer briefly to notes but keep them out of shot during your video interview. They should also be brief and used only as springboards or prompts. Do not be tempted to read from them word for word, but instead hold eye contact with your interviewer and speak freely.

    7. Join the interview early

    Just as you would turn up early to a physical interview, have everything in place at least 10 minutes before your video interview is due to commence. It’s just as unprofessional to leave an interviewer waiting online as it is in the interview room. So, join the video interview a minute or two before it is due to start.

    8. Dress for the job you want

    While you may be sitting in the comfort of your own home, you should still dress for as you would for an in-person interview. Not only will this make you look the part, it will help you get in the right mindset for a formal conversation.

    9. Project confidence down the lens

    While always important, communicating confidently is even more of a decisive factor in video interviews than it is during regular in-person interviews. Without being able to use your body language to show the interviewer you are listening, interested and enthusiastic, they might have difficulty reading you. Leave them in no doubt of your interest in the role by asking questions and communicating confidently throughout the interview.

    10. Keep calm throughout

    Do not panic if your signal breaks up or you lose internet connection. The most important thing is to stay calm in your video interview. How you react when things don’t go as planned can reveal a lot about how you cope under pressure, and a potential employer will be looking out for this.

    If your technology fails, restart the call. Quickly contact your interviewer to update them – they’ll understand it is out of your control, so try not to worry and keep your composure.

    To be safe, it is a wise precaution to have alternative contact details in case you need to switch over to a different channel.

    11. Follow up

    After the video interview, send a quick email via your recruiter to tell the interviewer that you enjoyed talking to them and learning about the role and their organisation. Reinforce your interest in the job and mention that you look forward to hearing from them soon. This sets you up nicely for the next conversation.

    As video interviews become a regular part of the recruitment process, it’s important to know how to perform well. With these video interview tips, you’ll be able to appropriately prepare to ensure your next video interview is a success.

    For further insights from our recruiting experts, see our careers advice or contact your local Hays office.

    How would you like to do a job interview from the comfort of your own home?

    Just think about it: No more hoping your clothes don’t wrinkle too badly on your way to the office. No more sitting nervously in a hallway with a handful of other candidates, waiting to be called in. And the ability to literally kick back and relax as soon as the interview is over.

    Sounds good, doesn’t it? And the best news is that the number of companies conducting video interviews is on the rise — especially due to global fears around the coronavirus. For example, both Google and LinkedIn recently announced to job seekers that they’d be conducting job interviews virtually.

    So, if you’re looking for a job and a potential employer asks you to do a video interview, how can you best prepare? Keep these six tips in mind:

      Make sure your hardware works. Whether you’re conducting the interview on your phone, tablet, laptop or desktop computer, you can’t afford to have any equipment glitches during the conversation. If you’re using Wi-Fi, find the location in your home where reception is the strongest. Keep in mind that a hardwired connection is preferable because it’s faster and less prone to interruptions. In addition, check that the microphone and speakers on your device or headset work properly.

    Familiarize yourself with the tech.Medium advises getting comfortable with the specific tool or program — Zoom, Skype or another app — you’ll be using ahead of time. Review how to turn your audio and video on and off, and if relevant, find out how to share your screen.

    Minimize distractions. Choose a quiet setting where you won’t be interrupted. It’s also advisable to stop all message and email alerts for the duration of the interview, since they can be distracting.

    Prepare the setting. After choosing where you’ll conduct the interview, make sure the area is well-lit, without backlighting. Clear away any clutter so your environment appears calm and professional. Place your résumé, job application and any other supporting materials you’ll need in a spot where you can easily access them without leaving the screen.

    Choose appropriate attire. According to The Balance Careers , it’s best to dress professionally — just like you would for an onsite interview. Don’t make the mistake of dressing down from the waist down. You never know when you might have to stand up during the virtual interview.

  • Look into the camera. This will give the interviewer the impression that you’re looking him or her in the eyes — as opposed to when you look at their image on the screen. Looking into the camera can also help you project an air of confidence — plus, it shows you’re accustomed to using tech tools.
  • If you’re nervous about conducting a job interview virtually, Lifewire recommends doing a test run with a friend a couple of days in advance. You’ll be able to practice looking at the camera instead of at the screen and your friend can provide you with constructive feedback about your appearance and setting. Most importantly, make sure the technology doesn’t get in your way, but instead enables you to properly showcase your abilities and qualifications to the interviewer.

    As more businesses are utilising remote processes for their interviews, there is a good chance that you will need to do at least one of your job interviews via video.

    While this may feel different from what you are used to, there are a few advantages to this type of interview. Here are some video interview tips to make sure you present yourself in the best light during the interview.

    1. Power, connection, and your device

    It may seem obvious, but if you are using a laptop make sure that it is properly charged or plugged in throughout the interview. You do not want to get cut off in the middle of your conversation. Make sure you choose a location with a good internet connection too.

    If available, use a desktop or laptop computer instead of a tablet or phone. This way you will not have to hold the device and risk a shaking screen that will frustrate your interviewers. It will also free up your hands, enabling you to be more animated when you are explaining your experience or talking about your experiences at work.

    2. Light, background, and what to wear

    Try to arrange your space so that there is a good source of natural lighting. Otherwise, ensure you have strong lights overhead and slightly behind. Shadows can make you look strange and your interviewers will want to see you clearly. A plain, light-coloured background is best. Avoid setting up in front of your feature wallpaper, bookcases, or posters.

    Treat the video interview in the same way as you would a normal interview. Do not dress down in a t-shirt and jeans just because you are not in an office. You need to look as professional and put together as you would if you were meeting for a face-to-face interview.

    3. Distractions

    You need to be away from all distractions when you sit down for your interview. Choose a quiet room somewhere and make sure that any people who are around are aware that you should not be disturbed.

    4. Practice

    A practice run before the interview is essential. You want to ensure that you look good, can be seen clearly and all the equipment is working properly.

    A huge advantage of video interviews is that you can have prompts. Set them just above the line of the camera and no one will even know you are using them.

    5. Camera

    Make sure your camera is set in line with your eyes. If it is too high, the interviewers will see the top of your head and if it is too low your face will be distorted. You want them to be able to see your head and shoulders clearly, so do not sit too close or too far from the camera.

    During the interview, do not make the mistake of looking at the person on the screen. Yes, when they are speaking to you, you should be picking up on body language signals, but when you are giving your answers, try to look into the camera.

    6. Pause before speaking

    Often on camera there is a delay. Like on news broadcasts, it is a good idea to wait a few seconds before responding to a question in case there is a delay. You do not want a situation where you accidentally end up rudely cutting your interviewer off mid-sentence.

    If you are preparing for a video job interview, it is important to remember that this type of meeting can be less stressful than face-to-face interviews, which puts you at a significant advantage. As long as you prepare your set up properly and do your research prior to the interview, you should be well placed to make a strong impression on your interviews. Be sure to view our top tips on preparing for your interview.

    Check out our full library of career advice here. Alternatively, create a MyPage account today and begin the search for your dream job.

    Succeeding in a video interview will sound and feel a lot like succeeding in an in-person interview: in both cases, success looks like being offered the position. But how do you ensure video interview success? To put your best virtual foot forward during your next video interview, follow these 5 key tips.

    1. Come prepared

    Your upcoming video interview will be just as rigorous as your past in-person interviews, so your preparation should reflect that. Before your interview, take the time to thoroughly research:

    • The company you are interviewing for a position at
    • The position you are interviewing for
    • The company’s industry and top competitors
    • The products and services the company provides
    • The company’s top and most recent achievements (hint: check out their social media accounts)
    • Your interviewers so you can identify them each visually, a quick Google or LinkedIn search will help shed light on who will be attending your Zoom meeting

    Additionally, remember to prepare your own questions to ask the interviewer when they turn to you.

    2. Check your tech

    The biggest roadblock facing your Zoom interview is a technical difficulty. It would be a major disruption if your microphone or webcam glitched in the middle of your virtual meeting. So, in the days leading up to your video interview be sure to familiarize yourself with the software you will use for the interview—many of the top video conferencing platforms offer free trial runs or tutorials—and test the audio settings on your microphone, the camera settings on your computer, and your internet connection so that you have a technologically seamless video interview.

    Pro tip: If your Internet connection is unstable, download the Zoom app on your smartphone and use your data connection to attend the interview. Test out your framing and position your phone with your head and shoulders in the frame.

    3. Watch your tone

    When utilizing video conferencing technology, sometimes there are audio delays between meeting attendees. To prevent an audio delay from derailing your interview, speak slowly and with clear enunciation when it is your turn to answer questions or address your interviewer. This is an easy way to ensure you are understood clearly by your interviewer. Similarly, apply this same courtesy to the other meeting attendees by maintaining focus on your interviewer and listening to them carefully. When they pause, wait a few seconds before responding so as to not unintentionally cut them off or interrupt them due to an audio delay.

    4. Pay attention to your body language

    How you present yourself on camera during your video interview will automatically convey a lot about you to your interviewer. To present yourself as attentive and professional, maintain good posture by placing both of your feet on the ground and sitting up straight. Try to avoid slouching or gesticulating too much while you speak, big movements can be distracting during video interviews.

    Additionally, remember that if you are looking at your interviewer’s face on your computer monitor then to them it will appear as though you are looking down. Instead, be sure to look into your webcam as often as possible—especially when you are speaking—to look directly at your interviewer.

    5. Follow up

    Just like at the end of an in-person interview, it’s essential to follow up after your interview. Don’t be shy, typical hiring processes take several rounds of interviewing before a candidate is offered the position. To remind your interviewer of your ongoing interest in obtaining the position at their company, follow up no later than 24 hours after your interview is completed.

    Follow up by writing a personalized thank you note to each member of the interviewing committee. If a handwritten note isn’t your style, following up via email is far better than not following up at all. It’s also good practice to add the team on LinkedIn with a thoughtful thank you note in your request.

    Tips on How to Nail a Zoom Interview

    For extra video interview preparation, here are some additional tips and tricks on how to nail a Zoom interview:

    • Practice for your interview by recording yourself on video and playing it back to check your audio and video quality and speaking pace.
    • Treat your Zoom interview like an in-person interview in terms of preparation and state of mind.
    • Be yourself! Don’t let technology get in the way of showing your interviewer what makes you a unique asset to their team.
    • Wear pants. While pajama pants on the bottom, business attire on top might work for remote meetings at your current company, if you have to stand up for any reason during your interview you want to be appropriately dressed all the way to your feet.
    • Zoom interviews may be recorded and shown to other members of the hiring committee, don’t say anything during your video meeting that you wouldn’t want other members of the organization to hear.
    • Familiarize yourself with the mute button in case a loud noise like your dog barking or a garbage truck beeping occurs when your interviewer is speaking.
    • Set your Zoom name to your formal name and add your pronouns.
    • Set your camera at eye level so you don’t need to slouch to make eye contact with your interviewer.
    • Wear earbuds during your interview to ensure your voice can be heard clearly by the interviewer and likewise, you don’t miss a word they say.

    Good luck with your next virtual interview! And if you are new to this video conferencing platform, here is everything you need to know about using Zoom.

    How to prepare for a video interview at home

    In the post-COVID labour market, more and more job interviews are taking place online. While this is convenient and easier than in-person interviews in many ways, it also presents a new set of challenges for job seekers. Here are our top tips for making sure you’re ready for your next virtual interview.

    How do you make a good first impression when you can’t shake hands? What if you have a patchy internet connection? Will the interviewer notice if you use notes? These are just a few of the questions that you might be asking before your next virtual job interview.

    In this article, we’ll help answer some of your questions and help you pass your virtual interview with flying colours. Read on for all the insider tips on how to prepare for a video interview!

    Look at the camera during your video interview

    One of the most obvious differences between virtual job interviews and in-person ones is the fact that your interviewer will be looking at you through a screen. This means that showing confidence and establishing a strong connection with your interviewer might be more difficult.

    It’s natural to want to look directly at the interviewer’s face during an interview. However, when your interview is on Zoom, MS Teams or some other digital platform, looking at the interviewer’s face means looking down at the middle or bottom of your computer screen. From the interviewer’s perspective, you’d be looking away from them! This could make you come across as underconfident or even uninterested.

    The best way to make “eye contact” virtually is to look directly into the camera on the top of your laptop. For you, it will feel a little strange, but for the interviewer, it’s the best way to impress. Don’t worry, it’s okay to look away once in a while so that you can properly see what’s happening on your screen.

    Remember to pair this with positive body language. If you’re slouching or leaning over a table, this could create a negative impression on your interviewer. Always aim to sit upright in a chair with your image centred on the screen, just as if you were in a regular job interview!

    Dress professionally for your virtual job interview

    Another part of making a good impression on your interviewer is how you dress. You might think it’s ok to wear an old t-shirt and a baseball cap because it’s not an in-person interview, but this would come across as very unprofessional.

    Dress exactly as you would if this was a regular job interview. We recommend wearing a shirt, blouse, suit jacket, or professional dress. This shows your potential employer that you will take the job seriously, even if you’re working from home with little supervision.

    Use sticky notes in your remote job interview

    One big advantage to interviewing remotely is that you can use visual aids without your interviewer noticing! Use sticky notes to remind yourself of key points to talk about or prepared answers that you want to give for common questions.

    You can post these on the edge of your laptop screen so that you’re not noticeably looking down at notes throughout your interview. These notes should be used to quickly jog your memory, so don’t write whole paragraphs of text down because your interviewer will know that you’re giving them canned responses. Short bullet points will work best!

    Prepare all tech before your virtual interview

    When your interview relies heavily on your computer and other gadgets working properly, you’ll want to make sure that your tech works and is ready to go. Don’t start up your computer five minutes before your interview starts – you might get caught with a mandatory system update at the wrong moment.

    Whether it’s Zoom, Teams or Google Meet, test your account the night before. Make sure your computer is updated and fully charged. Ensure you have a headset if you expect there to be background noise. Check your internet connection and modem are running smoothly. Test your webcam or laptop camera to make sure it’s fully functional.

    By doing this the night before, you prepare yourself to deal with any unexpected issues that might pop up. If any problems arise during the interview itself, do your best to deal with them in the moment and if necessary, explain to the interviewer that you’re having some technical issues. Recruiters and interviewers spend several hours a day in online meetings, so they’ll be understanding!

    Consider sharing screens during your video interview

    Virtual interviews are a great opportunity to show off your digital skills. If appropriate, consider prepping something that you can show your interviewers visually.

    Are you a graphic designer? Share screens and show them your latest project or some samples from your portfolio. Are you an executive administrative assistant? Share screens and show them how you organize your Outlook calendar.

    A visual demonstration of what you can do will stand out in a job interview. Sharing your screen also shows a high level of confidence, transparency and digital competence – qualities that interviewers value and are actively on the lookout for.

    Set up your background and lighting before your virtual job interview

    What the interviewer sees on the screen is a reflection of you as a potential employee. If they can see a pile of laundry behind you or if the room is too dark to see your face, it will likely have a negative effect on their opinion of you as a candidate.

    Think about how you’ll be seen on the screen and set up your background and lighting so that you present yourself as professionally as possible. A light-coloured wall and regular room lighting usually work best.

    If you think lighting or an appropriate background might be a problem, consider using a digital background during your virtual job interview. Download a free background that’s compatible with your video platform and the space behind you will appear blurry, as a landscape or a virtual room, depending on what you choose. This is a common practice in professional video calls, so your interviewer won’t mind!

    The bottom line on remote job interviews

    Virtual job interviews are a relatively new phenomenon, but if you follow the tips we’ve given you in this blog post, you’ll have a greater chance of success. The key points to remember are: check your technology, behave and look professional and be confident. Good luck with your interview, the whole Adecco Canada team is rooting for you!

    In this current climate, technology is leading the way in not only how we work, but in landing that next job!

    For a number of years the Public Appointments Service have been examining and using a range of new and leading edge technologies to support different parts of our recruitment process. Some of these have included different types of ‘video based’ interviews, which can be conducted using your phone, a tablet or your laptop / PC.

    Below is an outline of the two main types of ‘video based’ interviews we are using with some practical tips on how to get set up and do your best during your interview.

    Automated Video Interview:

    In this case, rather than seeing the interviewers on screen, you will see questions presented on screen and will be asked to record yourself responding to the particular questions. At the beginning, you will be given sample questions to practice on to help you familiarise yourself with the process and see what it’s like to ‘speak to the screen’. When you are ready, you will be able to start the interview. It’s worth noting that once you ‘start for real’, you need to complete all the questions and you won’t be able to go back and ‘re-do’ an answer. Once completed, your responses are later reviewed by our interview board members. We have used this format of video interview on a number of campaigns over the last 2 – 3 years and the overall experience has been welcomed by candidates as they found the system easy to use.

    Live Video Interview

    This is a video call/meeting, with an interview panel, as if you were sitting in front of your interviewer at a face to face interview. For this type of interview, you will be able to log-in a few minutes before the interview; you will receive a message to say you are in a ‘waiting room’. The interview board will be notified when you’re in the waiting room and will call or ‘admit’ you when they are ready to see you.

    The process is very similar to a real life interview and once you are in on the call, you will be able to see the interview board members and they will be able to see you. They will ask you questions and get to know you as they would in a regular face-to-face interview. At the end of the interview, you will be asked to ‘Leave’ and the interview panel will wait until you have left before proceeding. If you have difficulty leaving, our Representative on the interview board will assist you.

    How to prepare for a video interview at home

    Interviews can be daunting at the best of times and the key to success is preparation. We already have some very useful tips on preparing for Interviews on our Interview Advice Page and you may also find the information below helpful in preparing for a Video Interview.

    How to prepare for a video interview at home

    Technology

    • Internet Speed: 1 Megabits per second is required for a clear HD connection. You can test your internet speed on Google
    • Laptop/Mobile/Tablet: Make sure your device is fully charged before your interview and has a webcam/front facing camera.
    • Audio & Camera: Check that your microphone and camera are working correctly and the sound and picture are clear (Maybe give your camera lens a quick clean). On our video interview platforms, you can run a test on both so that everything is in working order ahead of your interview.
    • Avoid Disruption: If using your mobile phone for the video interview, ensure to place it on ‘do not disturb’, to avoid any incoming messages or calls. If using a PC/laptop for the video interview, ensure to have no other tabs open, and turn off or place your mobile phone on silent so you are not distracted.
    • Technical Difficulties: If you have problems with the technology before, during or after your interview, please let us know as soon as possible. It is OK to let the interviewers know there is a problem or if you are not hearing them clearly.

    Environment

    • Location: choose a quiet area, where you won’t be disturbed. It may be helpful to place a sign on the door to remind others not to interrupt.
    • Lighting: Choose a well-lit area, with a plain bright coloured background
    • Camera: Raise the camera to eye-level if possible (you may wish to place a stack of books or a box underneath your device to help with this). If using a mobile device, try to make sure this is steady for the duration of the interview – if possible use a stand to keep the device upright. The camera on your device should be positioned to show your head and shoulders on the screen.
    • You may find it useful to have a glass of water to hand.

    How to prepare for a video interview at home

    Dress Code:

    Even though you will be in the comfort of your home, many people find it really helpful to dress as you would for a face to face interview. It helps to ‘get you in the zone’.

    Giving your full attention

    Things like eye contact and posture are just as important for a video interview as it is in person.

    • Remember to look directly at the webcam, instead of your own screen, when you are talking. This will help you to align your eyes with the interviewers. You can look back at the screen when you’re listening. Some people find it helpful to put a little sticker beside where the camera is as it helps to give you a focus – but please make sure you don’t put it over the camera.
    • Remember to sit upright with your back against a chair and shoulders open. This can help in conveying a positive, upbeat mood.
    • During the interview, it is good to nod and smile where appropriate to show that you are giving the interviewer your full attention.

    Practice

    How to prepare for a video interview at home

    As with any interview, it is important to be as prepared as possible. Although it is becoming more widely used, video interviewing may feel a little strange at first. It is advised, particularly for Automated Video Interviews, that you practice by recording yourself speaking into a camera.

    This should help you feel a bit more comfortable when it comes to recording the real interview. We understand that these new methods can be daunting, so please rest assured that during your interview, the interview panel are only interested in the content of what you have to say and your suitability for the job. They are not assessing how comfortable you are on camera.

    Reasonable Accomodations

    The Public Appointments Service is committed to positively supporting candidates with disabilities throughout the selection process. If you have a disability and would like to share information that you feel would assist you to do your best during your video interview, please contact the relevant recruitment unit managing the campaign or our Disability Champion to discuss your needs.

    Please Note: More information on your interview process will be provided by the Public Appointments Service, prior to the interview

    Global Sports

    Posts by tag

    • Industry Insight (97)
    • Career Intelligence (69)
    • Education (45)
    • Interviews (41)
    • Training (14)
    • Industry Intelligence (6)

    See all

    Popular articles

    SUBSCRIBE TO THE LATEST INTELLIGENCE

    How to prepare for a video interview at homeVideo interviews are becoming an increasingly popular recruitment tool, growing 57% from pre-pandemic times , and are a convenient way for employers to streamline the hiring process and attract the best talent, regardless of location. The same principles of preparation apply to both face to face and video interviews, with learning about the role and company, defining your skills, strengths and weaknesses, and asking relevant questions being the key to success. However, interviewing in a digital environment can bring an added layer of complication. Whether it’s practicing using the technology beforehand or dressing appropriately, here we share our top tips to help you navigate the video interview process and land your next job in sport.

    Dress professionally

    Despite the fact the interview is not taking place in an office environment, it’s important to still dress appropriately to ensure you convey a great first impression to your potential employer. Make sure to choose an outfit that won’t be distracting on camera, so its recommended to avoid bright colours or patterns. Although only your ‘top half’ will be shown on camera, dressing professionally from head to toe will help to put you in the right frame of mind, increase your confidence and set you up for success.

    Chose an appropriate location

    Where you chose to locate yourself for the interview is crucial. Choose a quiet location that has a neutral and tidy background and avoid using the themed or blurred background features that video applications such as Zoom or Microsoft Teams offer. This will help to convey a more professional approach and reduce any on screen distractions. Most importantly, if you’re at home and live with others, make sure to warn them of the time and date the interview will take place, so they won’t interrupt you. Remember to check that your location and has a reliable and secure internet connection, turn off your phone and mute any notifications that may pop up on the screen during the interview.

    Be aware of your body language

    Although a video interview offers a more informal setting, it’s still a formal interview and your body language is a critical part of making a good impression. Keep a formal posture by sitting up straight, with both feet on the floor and your arms resting either on the desk or your lap. Make sure to maintain eye contact with the interviewer by looking directly into the camera and not around the screen or at yourself. You may find it helpful to remove your own video entirely to ensure you are solely focused on the person(s) conducting the interview. Finally, remember to smile, show enthusiasm and pay attention to your non-verbal communications, such as hand movements or expressions.

    “Make sure to maintain eye contact with the interviewer by looking directly into the camera and not around the screen or at yourself.”

    If you’re looking to improve how you build rapport in an interview, check out our advice here.

    Preparation

    An advantage of a video interview over one that takes place face to face is the ability to use keywords or prompts to help you construct your answers more successfully. Whilst this can be useful and may reduce your stress levels, keep them short and brief, and only refer to them subtly as a checklist if you need to. Avoid being reliant on them or reading directly from them, as this will be obvious to the interviewer and will make you sound unnatural.

    Test, rehearse, repeat

    Before the interview occurs, do a practice run using the employer’s chosen video platform, to familiarise yourself with the digital environment and perfect how you conduct yourself on camera. It may feel like an unnatural setting at first, so practicing may help you feel more relaxed before the actual event. Make sure you know how to navigate your way around the video platform, such as how to start or end the interview, or how to share your screen if you’re expected to carry out a practical task. If possible, do a test with a friend or a family member, to make sure the microphone, camera and connection are all working correctly and gather any feedback from them that may help you improve. This will also give you the opportunity to choose the best lighting and camera angles, helping you to feel confident and give you the greatest chance of succeeding.

    “It may feel like an unnatural setting at first, so practicing may help you feel more relaxed before the actual event.”

    On the day the interview is scheduled to take place, ensure your laptop is fully charged and plugged in. It’s also a good idea to log in early to the interview to demonstrate you’re professional and organised, and it also allows you to do a final sound and quality check. If for any reason there are any technical problems during the interview, make sure to let the interviewer know as they may be easily solved, helping the overall interview run smoother.

    End on a positive note

    Whilst it’s important to maintain a professional approach, the end of an interview is the best opportunity to adopt a slightly more relaxed attitude. For example, you may ask more informal questions, such as where the offices are located or any social events the company runs, allowing more personal interactions with the interviewer. Make sure you also use this opportunity to reinstate your excitement and passion for the role and company, and ask relevant questions, ensuring you leave a good lasting impression which can help you stand out from other candidates. Finally, always thank the interviewer for their time and follow up with a post-interview thank you. How to prepare for a video interview at home

    Follow this guide to prep and perfect your video interview skills.

    There’s no question that for many job-seekers, interviewing is the most intimidating part of the process. But what if you could do it from the comfort of home? For many employers, virtual interviewing is the future—whether you live far away or need to interview remotely for another reason, video conferencing is an easy fix that many companies utilize when meeting candidates “face to face.”

    While video interviewing doesn’t allow for some tried-and-true methods for making a good impression, like giving a firm handshake, there are many ways to wow your potential boss from behind a screen. Simply follow this guide to prep and perfect your video interview skills.

    Prepare in advance

    Be sure to do your research on the employer ahead of time! Log into Handshake and check out their profile, read reviews from peers who’ve worked or interned there, and scope out recent news coverage of the organization for developments. The better equipped you are to ask thoughtful questions, the smoother your conversation will go throughout the interview.

    Also use this time to review your resume and the job description, and consider how your past experience might help you exceed in the role. Having this information fresh in your mind will help you feel more confident during the video call.

    Show up on time

    This is one of the easiest ways to start things off on the right foot: show up on time! While you don’t need to log on 15-minutes early like you would when arriving for an in-office interview, definitely enter the video chat promptly at the set start time. To ensure that everything goes smoothly, make sure that you’ve got the correct software loaded (if necessary), and consider a test call with a trusted friend to work out any kinks in your connection.

    Dress for success, even remotely

    Make sure that you look polished and professional — at least up top. (The beauty of video calls is that nobody will know if you wear sweatpants with your Oxford shirt and tie!) Consider a button-up shirt or blouse, and be sure to groom just as thoughtfully as you would for an in-person meeting. Not only will this help you make a great impression with your interviewer, but wearing clothes that make you feel confident will also help you get your head in the game!

    Think about your background

    You probably wouldn’t invite your future boss over to your house if it were strewn with socks, right? So don’t let them see that on video! Find a clean, quiet area of your living space where you can take the call. Be sure to speak with any housemates in advance to ensure that nobody will walk behind you or make loud noises while you’re in the middle of discussing your professional strengths and weaknesses.

    Make “eye contact” with the camera

    If it helps, consider putting some googly eyes next to your webcam to remind you to look directly at it throughout the call. This gives the appearance of making eye contact, not distractedly staring at your screen! Making eye contact, even if through a laptop, helps foster a sense of genuine connection and attentiveness; it can make all the difference when trying to hit it off with your interviewer.

    Stay focused and visibly engaged

    One way to show your interviewer that you’re motivated and engaged is by practicing active listening. Consider nodding your head to give affirmations of understanding while they talk, and asking clarifying questions when necessary. Also, take hand-written notes! Keep a notebook nearby so that you can jot down questions or key takeaways from the interview without having to disrupt the flow of the conversation with loud typing.

    Don’t rely on a cheat sheet, but be prepared

    If relevant, be prepared to share your portfolio or examples of work to your interviewer; keep some tabs at the ready and offer to share your screen if the topic comes up. Also, come to the interview with questions that you’d like to ask your interviewer. This shows initiative and genuine interest. (You can find some good examples for interview questions here.)

    Remember to stay responsive after you wave goodbye

    After you end your call, be sure not to “ghost” your interviewer. Download the Handshake app to ensure that you respond to recruiter messages promptly, and check your email at least twice per day to stay abreast of any outreach or next steps that might land in your inbox!

    With these tips in your back pocket, you’ll have all the keys to succeed in your video interview. Now all you have to do is find the right opportunity! Check out this helpful advice for finding a job or internship online, and discover ways to make the most of a remote internship once you’ve got an offer.

    How to prepare for a video interview at home

    Share This Post

    Zoom Interview Tips

    As a staffing agency, we have completely switched from in-person interviews to virtual. There are many benefits to doing this, especially safety. However, we have had many interesting Zoom interviews. Minor mistakes we have seen are candidates accidentally putting themselves on mute or not having a working camera. We also have seen more significant mistakes, such as dressing in sweatpants and lying in bed under the covers. We wanted to let you know what not to do on a Zoom Call.

    Because we have done hundreds of virtual interviews since COVID-19, we will go over all the “do not’s” we have seen for Zoom interviews! If you are going on a Zoom interview, here are the best tips for you to prepare for a Zoom Interview! If you haven’t seen our YouTube video yet, check out our page! These Zoom interview tips are important to follow.

    Make Sure to Test Your Video Platform Before Going on for an Interview.

    Going on a virtual interview with a recruiter or employer without having any issues with your camera or audio is the easiest way to impress your interviewer. When you prepare for an virtual interview beforehand, you show that you qualified and organized!

    We do not see it as a negative when you can’t get the video or audio to work when you first join the zoom call. We understand that these new video platforms can be tricky at first if you don’t have previous experience. With our world-changing and technology updating daily, there is no need to stress if you are having issues. However, if you join the Zoom call unmuted and your video is working, it does make an excellent first impression!

    We advise candidates to practice joining a video conference 10-20 min before your virtual interview with an employer.

    Quick Zoom Interview Tip: Make sure you have headphones, so the employer doesn’t hear any background noise. The last thing you want is the employer being interrupted by any sound in your house.

    Make Sure Your Camera Works Before a Zoom Interview.

    Don’t be the one that doesn’t have a working camera. You don’t want the Zoom interview to be you staring at the employer the whole time while they are looking at a black screen. Employers would just call you over the phone if they just wanted to talk. The purpose of Zoom and WebEx is to see the individual rather than just hear them.

    Often, we have seen candidates not have a working camera or not being prepared to be seen on video. Be equipped with a phone or a laptop that has access to video and always dress to impress!

    Make Sure You Are in a Quiet Room!

    Have you ever been to an interview in an office and there have been dogs barking in the background or babies crying? More than likely, no. This is why you should be in a quiet room to do your virtual interview. We understand that maybe you have a baby at home or a house full of dogs, but make sure that they are not heard when you go on a 30 min virtual interview.

    Companies hiring would much rather have you Zoom interview in your car with no noise than in your home office with dogs barking in the background. Not only is it distracting, but it can be considered unprofessional.

    Make Sure You Are Dress Professionally in a Professional Environment.

    At first, this may seem like a simple tip, but we have seen individuals show up unprofessionally to virtual interviews. Whether it is dressing in comfortable clothing, wearing hats, or lying in bed, we have seen it all. Make sure you dress up professionally like you are heading to an actual interview. If you are a male, make sure to wear at least a button-down and tie. Make sure you know that your tie color has a meaning !

    If you have to be in bed, don’t lay down. Sit up in a professional posture and just think of it as an actual interview rather than a virtual one. The last thing you want is for a company to be impressed with your work ethic and resume, but choose not to hire you based on your professionalism on video.

    You would never show up to an interview with wet hair and sweatpants, would you?

    Do Not Eat or Drink on Zoom.

    Eating and drinking on a Zoom interview is unprofessional and distracting for an employer. An employer is taking 30 minutes out of their busy schedule to meet with you. They hope you can do the same. In those 30 minutes, there should be no reason to eat or drink coffee. Take a break and finish eating or drinking after the call is over!

    We have rarely seen anyone eat on Zoom, but we have seen people take sips of coffee or chugging water. When you drink coffee when the interviewer speaks, it shows that you aren’t as attentive as you should be. Unless the interview is over an hour, there should be no need to drink during an interview.

    Do Not Use Your Phone While on an Interview.

    We discussed this in one of our other blog posts on preparing for a recruiter meeting. With virtual interviews being more relevant than in-person interviews, texting during interviews became more prevalent.

    The time you take to answer the text, you may be missing out on valuable information. If an employer sees you texting or looking at your phone, they may immediately take you out of consideration for the position. If you can’t take 30 minutes during an interview to not use your phone, you probably won’t be able to work 8-hour shifts without it. This is what the employer will take into consideration.

    Quick Zoom Interview tip: If you are interviewing on your phone or Mac, make sure to put it on “Do Not Disturb” to remove the temptation to read the text that pops up.

    Make Sure You Are on Time.

    As you know, showing up late to anything is wrong. When your scheduled Zoom call is 2:00 pm, make sure you are ready to go at least 5 minutes before. Showing up at 2:05 pm to a virtual interview will look bad on your work ethic. If you have computer issues or it decides to update right before you are about to hop on the virtual meeting, give the employer a call or email them saying you maybe a couple of minutes late to the meeting due to a technical issue.

    Quick Zoom Interview tip: If your computer does decide to update minutes before the virtual interview, try loading it on your phone to make sure you are still on-time for the meeting!

    How to prepare for a video interview at home

    Video job interviews are really commonplace now, especially with the increase in remote jobs, as well as the need to keep recruitment ticking over as usual.

    If you’re searching and applying for your new customer service role, chances are you’ll be invited to attend your interview for the role online. We’re going to show you how to feel prepared for a synchronous video interview:

    1. Treat it as a face-to-face interview
    2. Think about your setup
    3. What platform is the interviewer using?
    4. No distractions
    5. What if something goes wrong?
    6. What you should wear
    7. What kind of questions you will be asked
    8. Can you read from notes?
    9. Don’t look at yourself on the screen

    Firstly, there are two types of video interviews: recorded (one way) and two way.

    The first is the recorded interview, a.k.a the asynchronous video . This is where, typically, you’ll be sent a link to record your answers to a specified set of questions. This is the type of video interview where you don’t engage with another.

    Then, there’s the two way video interview, a.k.a the interview that happens when you talk to another using a video tool. It’s like a conversation, just online!

    1. Treat as a face-to-face interview

    This means you need to still dress the part, prepare and rehearse your answers, and conduct yourself exactly as you would in an interview that happens in an office.

    I get it. It’s different, it’s another thing to contend with balancing your nerves. I’ll let you in on a little secret – it’s new for a lot of hiring managers too.

    2. Think about your setup

    Okay, the basics. You’ll need a computer with a webcam and microphone, and good wi-fi. The room needs to be super quiet. If you live with housemates, give them a heads up beforehand, and leave a note on the door asking for no distractions. You’ll also need to ensure your online presence is professional, and by this I mean you need to ensure you have the right username on screen. (Learn more about this and how to ace a video interview from the BBC).

    3. What platform is the interviewer using

    Your interviewer should send an invite to the platform they are using to conduct the interview beforehand. This could be something like Zoom or MS Teams, or it could be their recruitment interviewing tool.

    As preparation for the interview, have a play around with what you and your setup looks like on camera. Make sure any light is in front of you, not behind – otherwise you’ll get a glare. Try using your headphones (with a mic) to see if that makes your voice clear.

    4. No distractions

    Let’s start with the most obvious! Put your phone on silent. If you’re using your laptop, make sure your apps/programs are off. The last thing you want, especially if you’re providing a great answer to a question, is for a Whatsapp message from your Mum popping up on screen. (Sorry, Mum!)

    5. What if something goes wrong?

    There’s always a chance of a hiccup. The most common in a video job interview situation is that your internet connection may drop. But remember, hiring managers will be more than aware that this may happen. But it’s all about how you act.

    Think about it, how you act to a sudden drop in connection or the cat jumping on your lap will give your interviewer an insight into how you act under pressure.

    Just make sure you’ve got a back up plan – switch to your internet on your phone. Drop your interviewer a message to say you’re reconnecting. Keep calm, you’ve got this!

    6. What you should wear

    Dress exactly like you would for a face to face interview. I can’t stress this enough. This is important for two reasons.

    The first: dressing appropriately will give you an extra level of confidence, it helps to put you in the right mindset.

    And secondly, first impressions are EVERYTHING! There’s nothing worse than being caught out.

    I’ve heard stories of the interviewee having to get up from their desk to switch their charger on at the mains, only to show that they’ve got jogging bottoms on. They’re wearing a smart top, but they’ve not thought about dressing entirely appropriately. What does that say about them taking things seriously?

    7. What kind of questions will you be asked

    Just because it’s a video job interview, doesn’t mean the questions you are expected to answer will be different. If your interview requires you to present something, make sure beforehand you know what format you’re okay to create it in (PDF, PowerPoint etc), be well-prepared!

    8. Can you read from notes?

    Again, think about how you’d act in a face to face interview. Chances are, you wouldn’t rely on notes usually, as they can be a little off-putting. Use them if you need to do so, but limit them. Perhaps have one or two post-it notes with a few details. As soon as you start including lots of notes, you may be tempted to start reading from them and it’s a bit of a distraction.

    9. Don’t look at yourself on the screen

    I know that it can feel a bit weird, but seriously, make sure you look at the interviewer to show you’re engaged, and this means keeping eye-contact with the camera. Your real emotions/reactions may not be as obvious in a video interview, which means you’ll need to be aware of body language.

    Make sure you nod when you agree with something, ensure you smile a lot. Being slightly more energised and aware of how you come across is important. It may feel a bit uncomfortable at first, but trust me, it’ll be worth it.

    These are just a few tips to help you feel more prepared for a video interview and are rid of those interview nerves and get one step closer to your next role.

    If you’d like to chat through any of these tips or want to speak about your next role, we’re Wales’ leading contact centre recruitment agency . Get in contact, we love to chat.

    How to prepare for a video interview at home

    Virtual hiring is the standard now, with 86% of companies now using technology like on demand video interviews, also known as one-way video interviews, to recruit and meet candidates. As an alternative to phone screens, an on demand interview is a quick way for recruiters and hiring managers to determine if candidates meet the role requirements and fit the company culture.

    As the candidate, a one-way video interview is generally the first step in your interview process . You can expect to receive an email with a link inviting you to answer pre-chosen questions from the recruiter or hiring manager. Then, using the camera on your computer, smartphone, or tablet, you will record your answers to the on demand video interview questions and submit them for review.

    While some people may find video interviews intimidating, especially since recruiters can make a decision whether to hire you within the first 90 seconds , the key is preparation. With these 6 on demand video interview tips, you will easily wow your prospective employer and stand out amongst all of their top candidates:

    1. Check your tech

    With video streaming, online gaming, etc., there can be a lot of demands on your Wi-Fi. Ensuring you have a strong, uninterrupted internet connection is important to completing your on demand interview. If your Wi-Fi is slow or spotty, consider using your mobile hotspot.

    Also, make sure to test that your microphone and camera are working. If you are in a large room or one with high ceilings, you may want to use headphones to record your audio to avoid an echo.

    2. Set the mood

    Having a quiet, clear, and well-lit space will show your best self in your on demand interview. Eliminate all possible distractions and interruptions by turning your cell phone on silent, and if you’re at home, make sure people in the house know you are completing an interview.

    If you can, record in a space where you can close the door. Also, remember to give yourself ample time to answer each question – an hour should be sufficient.

    For your backdrop, choose a neutral color wall with limited clutter, as these will be distracting to the recruiter or hiring manager. Placing a plant in the background could add some feng shui but having an unmade bed could portray disorganization.

    Proper lighting is essential for good video quality. Sunlight works well if the window is in front of you, but not behind you. Turn on any available lights in the room and check to make sure there is no glare on your screen. You can add a simple desk lamp behind your camera to make you look a little more radiant.

    3. Dress for success

    The way you dress will give the recruiter or hiring manager a sense of who you are, and in any interview, you want to communicate professionalism with your attire.

    Aim to look put together while allowing your clothes to compliment your personality and not distract from your answers and experience (i.e. stay away from bright colors and loud patterns).

    A good rule of thumb is to dress one level nicer than what employees normally wear to the office. Check out the company’s website, Glassdoor or LinkedIn for pictures of employees. As an example, if you see employees in T-shirts and jeans you could aim for a business casual look with a polo or collared shirt.

    4. Research the company and practice your answers

    A prospective employer wants to know that you have done your research about the company and are excited to work for them.

    Make sure you research their company website, Glassdoor and LinkedIn pages and understand what they do, who their customers are, and the markets they serve . Go further by looking at press releases on their website, listen to earnings calls (if they are a public company), and set up Google Alerts to be notified about recent company events.

    Practicing common interview questions is always a good idea to prepare so you can answer any question confidently. Like in an in-person interview, it is important not to ramble, so keep the recruiter or hiring manager engaged by making your answers clear and concise.

    Make sure to weave company information into your answers and incorporate concrete examples of projects you have worked on and their outcomes. This information will demonstrate to the recruiter and hiring manager that you did your due diligence and that you can be successful in the role.

    Not only is it important to stress the hard skills you have, like knowing how to use a particular software, but also the soft skills many employers look for to confirm that you are a team player and will be a great fit for the company.

    5. Look at the camera

    Look directly into the camera when recording your on demand interview because it portrays to the recruiter or hiring manager that you are talking directly to them. Position your webcam so when you sit down, it is at eye-level. Then, when you are recording your answer, look into the camera as if you are having a conversation with someone sitting in front of you.

    While looking at the camera instead of the screen can be unnatural at first, practicing when you test that your camera is working can help make it more comfortable. You can also try putting a sticker, post-it note, or taping a picture of someone next to the camera to continually draw your eye to that point.

    How to prepare for a video interview at home

    6. Be present and be authentic

    Interviewing can be nerve-racking, even for the most experienced. Take a few minutes before you start recording to do some quick deep breathing exercises to reduce anxiety or to do a power pose to increase confidence.

    One of the most important things to remember when video interviewing is to be your authentic self. Smile when you give your answers and give them a glimpse to the human side of you as a candidate. At the end of the day, recruiters and hiring managers are human beings too and they want to be able to connect with you.

    Wrap up

    Completing an on demand video can cause uncertainty, but if you prepare, practice, and demonstrate enthusiasm and confidence, you can show recruiters and hiring managers that you are the person they want for the job.

    While video interviewing software can look and feel different, your experience as a candidate will be similar no matter which video interview platform you use. For additional on demand video interview tips and best practices we share with our interview on demand users, check out this candidate training course or these video interview tips to rock your next interview.

    About The Author

    Monique Mahler is the VP, Marketing & Partnerships at interviewstream. She is an avid researcher of facts, a self proclaimed marketing geek, and an equestrian in her spare time.

    About

    interviewstream is dedicated to the success of more than 900 clients from emerging businesses, midsize companies, large enterprises, colleges, and universities.

    The use of video calls for interviews has over the years started to become more popular, and since the Coronavirus pandemic hit the UK in March 2020, face to face interviews were almost impossible, and video interviewing become the overnight new way to recruit. Employers have started to see how video interviewing can help to reduce recruitment timescales and also modernise the interview process.

    Previously some companies would use video interviewing for their first screening interviews, but now, more and more employers have used video calls for the full interviewing process.

    Video interviews differ to face to face as they:

    • Can reduce the timeframe of hiring someone in some companies by up to 50%.
    • Help reduce the risk of bias or unconscious hiring bias
    • There is the option to record and save the video interview which can be reviewed again or reviewed by other managers, or be kept for audit purposes
    • Reduce the cost of hiring

    Tips for preparing for a video interview – Candidates

    • Test the technology that will be used; ensure the WIFI signal is sufficient (if not – look at connecting your computer directly to the modem.)
    • Ensure the laptop/computer you intend to use is fully charged, have a charger close to hand just in case
    • Ensure no distractions nearby, so you don’t lose concentration
    • Ensure you keep eye contact (know where your camera is!)
    • Think about body language and how to sit facing the video
    • Keep a copy of your CV, the job advert and job description (if have one) close by to refer too.

    Tips for preparing for a video interview – Employers

    • Be transparent with the candidates, some candidates may not be used to using technology or being interviewed remotely
    • Put your candidate first and explain how the video will be used, ask them to provide information on themselves or examples of what they have done, to help put them at ease
    • Structure the video interview to ensure consistency, have a standard list of questions to ask all candidates
    • Use a decent video software

    Top 8 Video interview questions and how to answer them

    Below are 8 interview questions you can expect when on a video call and suggestions of how to provide good answers to these.

    1. What do you know about the company?

    Ensure that you have done your research into the company and can provide information that you know about them. Being able to provide information such as, the products or service they offer, the main customers, how long the business has been operating for, number of employers or sites and company culture, shows that you have taken an interest, before the interview to find out as much as you can about the company.

    1. Tell me about yourself

    This question is popular with interviewers as it is an open-ended question for the candidate to discuss themselves.

    The best way to tackle this question is to stay focused and talk about career history and why you are looking for a new role, fresh challenge, new career path, do not go too far back (unless specifically asked to). You can provide basic information about your personal life if you wish to, such as where you live and who with, but try to focus mainly on work and career aspects, the interviewer isn’t interested about where you went to primary school and who your best friend was!

    1. Why do you want the job?

    Explain how the role will suit you and your skills, refer back to the person specification and job advert. Talk about previous experiences and skills you have that are relevant to the job you are being interviewed for, provide examples that relate to the job.

    1. What is your greatest strength?

    Ensure that the strength you choose to answer with is a skill required for the job you are interviewing for, give examples of how you have excelled at this skill within previous roles and that you are looking forward to being able to bring these skills into a new role.

    1. What would you say is your main weakness?

    When looking to answer these types of questions, it is best to look for something that relates to your skill base and is real to yourself. Once you have explained what your weakness is then provide information on how you are planning to overcome this weakness. By providing information on improvement it will show that you are open minded and ready to overcome problems.

    1. Why did you leave your last job?

    There may be very easy explanations for moving jobs roles, these can include the end of a fixed-term contract, redundancy or relocation, or more complex issues such as conflict with your boss, bullying or harassment issues, no career development opportunities. During an interview always try to be as positive about leaving any position as you can be. Do not get into a discussion where you are being negative about a previous company or manager.

    Focus on the positive and say that you left for career progression and you are looking to advance your career in the way that the role you are being interviewed for will offer.

    1. How do you cope with or manage Conflict?

    Try with this question to have an example already prepared, explain how you have managed conflict in a previous role and provide information on who the conflict was with; it could have been with a colleague or manager but it is important to provide as much information on the issue and how you dealt with it, so the interviewer can get an idea as to the type of person you are.

    1. Where do you see yourself in five years?

    Candidates responses to this question will vary a lot. By asking this question the interviewer wishes to see how you see yourself and your future career plan, to see if you will fit in with the company culture and goals. When answering this question be honest, but avoid coming across as too ambitious, wanting to be top boss in a few years, or lacking any goals by not having targets.

    With the current social distancing measures and travel bans across the world, video interviewing has become even more critical for employers and job seekers alike.

    So here are our 7 top tips to help you own your video interview.

    1 Find the best environment and video background

    • Find a private, quiet location where you won’t be interrupted. Switch your phone off, close windows to block out any outdoor noise, and lock the door if needs be – we all know distracting our kids can be! Children interrupt BBC News interview
    • Find a simple, neutral background and ensure that your shot is well-lit. It’s best to have the light source coming from in front of you. Adjust the lighting if required once the shot is set up.

    2 Technology & MS Teams

    • You will need a laptop with a webcam, a monitor (not essential but can help with positioning) and some headphones – these can cut out any echo.
    • Ensure you have a strong internet connection.
    • Make sure you have Microsoft Teams downloaded onto your computer, and familiarise yourself with the system.

    3 What to wear for your video interview

    • Dress as you normally would for a face-to-face interview. Research the company and decide what is appropriate to wear.
    • Avoid patterns or distracting jewellery and ties. Opt for simple, softer colours and dress fully – not just from the waist up! This will help you to psychologically feel ready for the interview.

    4 Organise your desk for a stress-free video interview

    • Clear your desk space, and simply lay out your prepared notes, your CV and the job description, so that you have prompts to refer to.
    • Have a pen and paper to hand for any questions that spring to mind or any key details you want to note down.
    • Also make sure you have a glass of water to hand – interviews can be thirsty work!

    5 Find the best shot for success

    • Set up the shot so that you’re positioned in the centre of screen with some clear space above your head, and don’t sit too close to the screen.
    • Raise your camera to head level to avoid looking down on the interviewer and to make it more natural – use a laptop stand, or a pile of books.
    • Within Microsoft Teams, turn off the box that shows you, this avoids distraction and too much self-consciousness and allows you to focus more fully on the interviewer and the questions.
    • Once set up, check again for lighting – coming from in front of you. If you wear glasses, try to position the lighting to remove any unwanted glare.

    You’re almost ready to go!

    6 Test!

    This is a really important step.

    • Test your setup. Do a dummy interview using MS Teams with a friend. You can record it and watch it back to identify any adjustments you need to make.
    • Test the audio, the video and internet speed. Does the background look ok? How is your positioning?
    • What about your body language? Try not to fidget or move your hands too much, this can be distracting, and can interfere with the microphone.

    It’s crucial to test your set up before the interview. Don’t miss this step!

    7 Back-up plan

    • Inevitably, technology can let us down. Be prepared in advance. Ask the interviewer for a number to call, should you run into difficulty. Apologise, but make sure you proactively offer a solution – to call them and continue by telephone, or to reschedule.

    Prepare, prepare, prepare!
    Video interviews are no less formal than regular face-to-face interviews. So, it goes without saying that preparation is your key to success. Do your research, make sure you understand the role, and find ways to evidence how your experience aligns with the role.

    Once you’ve done this, the above tips will help you present yourself, and your expertise in a confident, adaptable and professional way.

    Please wait while we verify that you’re a real person. Your content will appear shortly. If you continue to see this message, please email to let us know you’re having trouble.

    Veuillez patienter pendant que nous vérifions que vous êtes une personne réelle. Votre contenu s’affichera bientôt. Si vous continuez à voir ce message, contactez-nous à l’adresse pour nous faire part du problème.

    Bitte warten Sie, während wir überprüfen, dass Sie wirklich ein Mensch sind. Ihr Inhalt wird in Kürze angezeigt. Wenn Sie weiterhin diese Meldung erhalten, informieren Sie uns darüber bitte per E-Mail an .

    Even geduld a.u.b. terwijl we verifiëren of u een persoon bent. Uw content wordt binnenkort weergegeven. Als u dit bericht blijft zien, stuur dan een e-mail naar om ons te informeren over uw problemen.

    Espera mientras verificamos que eres una persona real. Tu contenido se mostrará en breve. Si continúas recibiendo este mensaje, infórmanos del problema enviando un correo electrónico a .

    Espera mientras verificamos que eres una persona real. Tu contenido aparecerá en breve. Si continúas viendo este mensaje, envía un correo electrónico a para informarnos que tienes problemas.

    Aguarde enquanto confirmamos que você é uma pessoa de verdade. Seu conteúdo será exibido em breve. Caso continue recebendo esta mensagem, envie um e-mail para para nos informar sobre o problema.

    Attendi mentre verifichiamo che sei una persona reale. Il tuo contenuto verrà visualizzato a breve. Se continui a visualizzare questo messaggio, invia un’email all’indirizzo per informarci del problema.

    The pandemic has forced many organisations to recruit remotely meaning that more interviews are taking place virtually. It’s therefore important that job seekers prepare for this type of interview.

    So how can you prepare for a video interview?

    Check the Details

    • Check the date and time of the interview and which video conferencing technology will be used.
    • Make a note of the interviewer(s) name(s).
    • You should also ask what the format of the interview is likely to be, so you know how best to prepare and what to expect on the day e.g. will it be live or pre-recorded?
    • Choose a room which is quiet and well lit.
    • If you’re at home, inform others in your household that you’re taking part in a video interview. This should reduce the risk of any interruptions!

    Get Your Equipment Ready

    • Set your equipment up and test the video conferencing technology well in advance of the interview. This will give you plenty of time to get ready, check the sound/picture quality and address any technical issues which might arise.
    • Check that you have a good internet connection and your chosen device is fully charged. Make sure to have a power cable or charger handy just in case!
    • You may also wish to have a pen and paper to hand so you can take notes.

    Preparation, Research and Resources

    • Ensure you fully understand the role you are interviewing for. Read through the job specification prior to interview. You could prepare some examples of past experiences which closely relate to the job in question.
    • Carry out some research on the organisation e.g. look at the company website. Demonstrating you’ve done some independent research on the company during interview shows that you really want the role.
    • Keep your CV, of your key skills and achievements, plus any headline information about the company in front of you just in case you get stuck.
    • Many people based at home are dressing for comfort, but this is a job interview so don’t forget to dress appropriately.

    During the Video Interview

    • It’s important to maintain eye contact and positive body language throughout the interview. To achieve this, you should position the camera at eye level, look directly into the camera, sit up straight and smile!
    • Be careful not to interrupt the interviewer. This can be easily done if there is a delay caused by a slow internet connection. To avoid this, listen carefully, pause before answering, speak clearly and resist the temptation to rush your answers.
    • If you experience any technical difficulties speak up. Let the interviewer know straight away so that it does not affect your performance and allows time for the issue to be fixed.
    • Don’t be afraid to ask questions during the interview. Asking questions will confirm your interest and enthusiasm for the role and the organisation. Prepare some questions to ask in advance.
    • If you’ve enjoyed the interview and are keen to secure the position, leave the interviewer in no doubt that you want the job. You could thank the interviewer and tell them that you are looking forward to hearing from them.

    For further support with your job search contact us today on 📞 01977 269069 or 📧 [email protected]

    Testimonials

    The Prince of Wales Hospice were delighted to work with JS Recruitment on six vacancies in our retail business. The quality of applications we received was strong and we have been able to appoint some exceptional individuals who will help our shops raise more than ever for Hospice care!

    – Head of Income Generation, The Prince of Wales Hospice

    Contact Us

    If you’re looking to expand your team or searching for a change in job or career, JS Recruitment is here to help. We’d love to chat, so please fill in the form below and we’ll be in touch.

    How to prepare for a video interview at home

    • College
    • Early Career
    • Everything
    • Internship

    Tips For the Best Lighting for a Video Interview

    Do you have an upcoming interview? Chances are that some, or all, of the interview process will happen via video chat. In fact, 47% of companies report utilizing video interviewing to speed up the hiring process.

    While convenience and comfort are two advantages to this digital interview format, some challenges arise. Engaging the interviewer and building rapport can be more difficult through a screen. Since you’re not sitting in front of the person, you’ll need to do your part to make the interview set up as engaging as possible.

    How can you do so? Make a positive first impression and place yourself in a positive light (literally) by setting up the correct lighting for your video interview. Read on to discover tips for the best lighting for video interviews.

    How to Light a Video Interview

    In a video interview, your face matters the most. It should be the focal point and, therefore, it must be well lit and easy to see. You can either use natural lighting or artificial lights to create a professional set up.

    How to prepare for a video interview at home

    How to Light an Interview with Natural Light

    When using natural light, ensure you sit opposite a big bright, soft light source, like a window. Do not sit with your back against the window or with the light source next to you; otherwise, your face or a part of it will appear darkened.

    Since you are at the mercy of the sun, you should have an alternative lighting source in place in case it gets cloudy. In such cases, you should have a back-up lamp in place, also positioned in front of you or a ring light around your camera that you can turn on easily.

    How to Light an Interview with Artificial Light

    Sometimes, natural light is not readily available. Not to worry; you can use artificial lighting like lamps or ring lights to create a well-lit interview set up. A lamp placed behind your device can make the difference when the sun is not at its brightest.

    You must strike a balance between your distance from the light source and its brightness. If you sit too far from the source, you will appear dark. If you’re too close, the light could appear harsh and reveal too much detail on your face, some of which you do not want to be seen. So experiment with the lighting beforehand to find the ideal balance.

    What Quality of Light is Most Flattering for Video Interviews?

    While there are different light sources, natural lighting is the most flattering for video interviews. However, artificial lighting for a video interview can also produce flattering results.

    Natural lighting is free and abundant. With your device ready, you are all set for the interview. The quality is perfect such that if you position yourself well, you will not have to bother about too much brightness or shadows. Since most interviews will last for under an hour, you may not have to worry about drastic light changes, depending on the time of day.

    You can use artificial lighting like fluorescent or LED lights at any time of the day. This is possible because these extra light sources have a strong reflective quality. With artificial lighting, you can create a professional-looking setup that leaves you looking polished and clean. Keep in mind that artificial lighting does come with a cost because you have so many moving parts (power cables, light stands, ring lights, etc.).

    Video Interview Lighting Mistakes

    The lighting you use in your video will determine how good you look, so it’s important to get it right. Here are some lighting mistakes you should avoid:

    • Sitting beside a window with only half of your face well lit.
    • Using tungsten (yellow) bulbs that create a golden cast on your face. Always use balanced or white light sources.
    • Sitting under overhead lights that cast shadows all over your face.
    • Sitting too close to any light source so that your skin appears tinted and way too bright for comfort.

    Tips on Enhancing Job Interview Video Lighting

    Be Confident On Camera

    Beyond your face appearing clearly in video interviews, you need to be confident to prove to recruiters that you are the right candidate.

    Whether it is your first job interview or one of many, there’s always room for improvement. InterviewFocus is just the tool to help. With InterviewFoucs, you can work on things that help you appear confident such as your body language, eye contact, word usage and more.

    Use Helpful Lighting Tools

    While you do not need to spend a lot on lighting gears, purchasing a few tools can be beneficial. For instance, investing in a ring light will enhance your set up for brighter and better-looking video calls.

    You can also invest in a laptop stand to bring the camera to your eye level. This does wonders for ensuring eye contact and reducing unflattering angles. With the tools in place, spend time practicing for interview questions that are coming your way.

    Have an Intentional Background

    When lighting for a video interview, be sure to pay attention to the background. You do not want recruiters drawn away from what you are saying by a messy backdrop. If you can, avoid going up against a wall as this can make you appear flat. Instead, add some depth to the room for natural shooting space. Then, expertly navigate the conversation with some standout interview questions.

    Keep Your Recruiter Engaged From Beginning to End

    Before you hop onto that interview video call, join a practice interview session through InterviewFocus. The platform offers innovative solutions to your interview struggles so that you can succeed in both virtual and in-person interviews.

    Get feedback on your performance and recommendations on how you can improve your interview skills today!

    How to stay motivated to lose weight

    If you’re trying to lose weight , you may experience common challenges, like slow progression or a weight loss plateau. But staying committed will pay off in the long run.

    The best way to stay motivated will vary depending on the reasons you want to lose weight. You should always consult a doctor before beginning any weight loss plan to determine if losing weight is right for you and your own health needs.

    Here are seven ways to stay motivated when trying to lose weight:

    1. Set SMART goals

    Setting goals is crucial for weight loss, says Sydney Spiewak, a registered dietitian and nutritionist at St. Francis Hospital and Medical Center in Hartford, Connecticut.

    Research shows having small targets to aim for leads to greater long-term weight loss than trying to lose weight without setting goals.

    Using the SMART method can help you set goals that are attainable and allow you to track your progress. SMART stands for:

    • Specific. Avoid setting goals that are too vague. For example, try “I will increase my physical activity by 20 minutes each day” instead of “I will exercise more.”
    • Measurable. Set goals that you can easily track, like increasing the number of minutes you exercise or how many steps you take.
    • Attainable. Focus on setting achievable goals and expand from there. For example, if you’d like to work up to an hour a day of exercise, but are currently unable to do so, start with a more realistic goal like 20 minutes a day. Then, gradually increase your workout length as you build endurance.
    • Relevant. Make sure each goal ties directly to your overall desire to lose weight. For example, increasing exercise is relevant to weight loss, but setting screen time limits is less so.
    • Time-bound. Give yourself a deadline for each goal. This holds you accountable and helps measure progress. For example, you could plan to re-evaluate your physical activity each month, look at your progress, and set a new goal of increasing your exercise the next month.

    2. Find a friend

    Losing weight is easier when you have support from others, Spiewak says, especially if you can find a community of people with similar goals. Teaming up with friends or family members who also want to lose weight can help you stay motivated when you’re struggling and allow you to hold each other accountable.

    For example, a small 2014 study found social support and weekly accountability meetings were critical for study participants in meeting their weight loss goals and keeping the weight off.

    3. Practice mindfulness

    Mindfulness means tuning into your thoughts, feelings, and bodily sensations, and paying attention to how they affect your actions.

    Mindfulness can be a powerful tool for establishing healthy habits and making nutritious food choices, Spiewak says. This is because mindfulness encourages us to slow down, acknowledge how we’re feeling, and tune out distractions.

    “Think about how your food tastes, how it feels on your tongue, and your favorite part of the food,” Spiewak says. “This will stop you from eating too quickly which will help you not overeat, and this will help you be more present in the moment.”

    4. Adjust your environment

    Spiewak says it’s crucial that your surroundings help you make healthy choices for weight loss. You can do this by:

    • Stocking your fridge with fresh fruits, vegetables, and lean proteins.
    • Laying out your workout clothes before going to bed so you are more motivated to work out in the morning.
    • Choosing restaurants with lots of healthy dishes.
    • Preparing a list before grocery shopping. This will help you know exactly what to get and help cut down on impulse buys.

    5. Make your workouts fun

    Exercise can be challenging. But if you don’t like running, you don’t need to force yourself to do it, Spiewak says.

    The best way to exercise is to find a type of workout you like doing and can stick with:

    • If you enjoy dancing, you can find many dance workouts online, like Zumba.
    • If you prefer exercising outdoors, take walks and increase your pace and distance.
    • Don’t be afraid to try out different types of workouts, like yoga or kickboxing, until you find one you enjoy.

    6. Consider keeping a food diary

    Writing down what you eat helps hold you accountable and makes it clear where you can improve. Keeping a food diary can also help you spot trends or certain triggers that may cause you to veer off course.

    In fact, a large 2008 study found keeping a food journal can double a person’s weight loss. In another 2012 study, participants who kept food journals experienced a greater percentage of weight loss than those who did not.

    7. Forgive yourself

    Losing weight is hard and it’s often not a linear process, Spiewak says. It’s common to experience plateaus or even occasional weight gains.

    “Life is not perfect, your weight loss journey will contain setbacks, but it will also contain great triumphs,” Spiewak says. “Reminding yourself that you are human is extremely important.”

    It’s crucial to forgive yourself when you experience a setback. An illness or a stressful day at work may cause you to falter — but staying committed to your long-term goals is more important than striving for everyday perfection.

    “An all or nothing mindset is detrimental to achieving your goals,” Spiewak says. “There will be times where your nutrition is not perfect. Maybe you didn’t have time to meal prep or maybe it’s your birthday and you want to have a slice of cake. Give yourself the freedom to do so and then get back on the wagon for either the next meal or the next day.”

    When to seek professional help

    If you’ve been trying to lose weight for a few months and aren’t making much progress, you should reach out to your doctor or a dietitian for help, Spiewak says.

    You may have an undiagnosed medical condition that is inhibiting your ability to lose weight or may just need some professional help in setting realistic goals. A doctor or dietitian can also help you determine if losing weight is the right decision for you and your health.

    Insider’s takeaway

    Losing weight is a journey that presents challenges for nearly everyone. Setting attainable goals, finding a community of support, and forgiving yourself when you experience setbacks can help you stay motivated to reach your weight loss goals.

    How to stay motivated to lose weight

    Malia Frey is a weight loss expert, certified health coach, weight management specialist, personal trainer​, and fitness nutrition specialist.

    How to stay motivated to lose weight

    Rachel Goldman, PhD, FTOS, is a licensed psychologist, clinical assistant professor, speaker, wellness expert specializing in weight management and eating behaviors.

    How to stay motivated to lose weight

    Many people believe that motivation is a magical quality that some people have and some people don’t. But there are easy techniques that anyone can learn how to find the motivation to lose weight, get fit or get healthy. By understanding how motivation works, you can assemble the building blocks you need to achieve weight loss success.

    How to Find Motivation

    The best way to find the motivation to lose weight is to learn where to look. It’s simple: look inside yourself and outside of yourself.

    Simply put, there are two kinds of motivation: extrinsic and intrinsic. Extrinsic motivation is the inspiration that comes from an external source, outside of you. For example, if your physician tells you that you need to lose weight, you may be externally motivated to go on a diet out of fear of poor health. Many rewards are extrinsic sources. If you go on a diet in order to fit into a smaller dress size, your motivation is extrinsic.

    Intrinsic motivation, on the other hand, comes from within. If you exercise because of the sense of accomplishment you achieve at the end of the workout your source of motivation is intrinsic. If you choose a healthy snack because it makes you feel better about yourself, you are internally or intrinsically motivated.

    So why do different types of motivation matter? Extrinsic and intrinsic inspiration will come into play at different times during your weight loss experience. By understanding how to use both extrinsic and intrinsic forms, you equip yourself with the tools you need for weight loss success.

    Extrinsic Motivation to Lose Weight

    People often begin an exercise or weight loss program for external reasons: their clothes don’t fit, their doctor has told them that they need to lose weight, family and friends have put pressure on them to slim down. These extrinsic factors are great for getting the ball rolling.

    When you feel outside pressure to lose weight, let it motivate you to gather information. You may not be ready to go on a diet, but you can learn more about weight loss plans and exercise programs. Find out if there are small steps you can take to improve your health before you take the plunge and commit to a full-scale weight-loss program. Ask your physician about how making small changes to your diet or lifestyle will affect your health.

    Extrinsic motivation can also be helpful when you need a gentle nudge to achieve short-term goals. For example, you might know that exercise is good for you, you may even know that you’ll feel better after you complete a workout, but on some days you might still struggle to get to the gym. On those days, promise yourself a healthy reward. Set the DVR to record your favorite show or pick up some bubble bath and reward yourself with time in the tub after the workout is complete.

    Intrinsic Motivation to Lose Weight

    While extrinsic motivation may help you overcome short-term challenges, people who are successful at weight loss are usually motivated by intrinsic factors. Eating well and exercising makes them feel good so they continue to practice healthy habits for the long term.

    So how do you create internal motivation? The good news is that most people already have it. All you have to do is find it, identify it and acknowledge it.

    3 Steps to Foster Internal Motivation

    1. Set short-term goals. Set yourself up for success by setting very short-term achievable goals. Your long-term goal might be to lose 30 pounds, but a good short-term goal might be to eat a lean healthy breakfast each day during the week. If a weekly goal seems too broad, set a goal for just one day or even an hour. Swap the high-calorie soda for water during one meal or commit to cut your lunch in half and save half for another day.
    2. Keep a journal. Write out each goal in a journal. At the end of the day, comment on the day’s success. Keep in mind that just taking the time to write in your journal is healthy and an accomplishment in itself. Use positive words that describe how you feel about your actions.
    3. Acknowledge your success. Take time to review your successes and give yourself credit. Review your journal on a regular basis and take pride in every step you’ve taken to improve your health.

    As you move through the process of fostering internal motivation, you’ll find that your confidence in your own abilities will increase. When you acknowledge the success of small accomplishments, it becomes easier to believe that larger goals are attainable. You begin to believe in yourself and in your ability to change your health by changing your weight.

    “I focus on feeling confident and capable.”

    How to stay motivated to lose weight

    How to stay motivated to lose weight

    No one ever said losing weight was easy (and tbh, if they did, they were lying). But no matter how prepared you think you are for an entire lifestyle overhaul, there are some things that can catch you totally by surprise (like, uh, plateaus) that can make you second guess your weight-loss motivation in the first place.

    First things first: Most people have their fair share of ups and downs while losing weight. But I get it, it’s discouraging AF.

    Here’s how these 15 women stayed motivated when things got tough on their weight-loss journeys.

    How to stay motivated to lose weight

    “Whenever I feel like giving up—trust me, I still do sometimes—I just remind myself of the girl in those pictures and how unhappy she was. I just never want to look in the mirror and see her again. That keeps me motivated. I’ve come too far to let a plateau hold me back.” —Cortland West, 24, lost 80 pounds

    How to stay motivated to lose weight

    “It sounds cheesy, but you really have to find your ‘why.’ Last summer I realized that this year I would turn 45, celebrate my 20th wedding anniversary, and go on a mission trip to Peru. I knew I had a year to get my act together for myself for the first time since I had kids.

    “I didn’t want to be overweight for those milestones and I didn’t want to struggle with dragging my overweight body around the mountains of Peru when I wanted to be there to make a difference in the lives of others. So, along the way, when my weight loss stalled, I’ve focused on that ‘why’ and it has helped me push through.” —Vivian Wolf, 44, lost 40 pounds

    How to stay motivated to lose weight

    “The process of weight loss takes time, and to pass the time waiting for a break in a plateau, I shift my focus to getting stronger.

    “For example, a better, stronger squat means healthier glutes. I believe it’s much more difficult to care about a plateau when you understand that mentally prioritizing performance is still contributing to your health.” —Jessica Hudson, 29, lost 38 pounds

    How to stay motivated to lose weight

    “I reignite the flame by repeatedly telling myself how amazing I feel when I do work out, or how much healthier I feel when I eat things that bring me fuel and energy.

    “Positive self-talk is something that has helped me through this whole journey, and sometimes you just have to say these things out loud to yourself in the mirror.” —Kenzie Pittman, 26, lost 45 pounds

    How to stay motivated to lose weight

    “After about four months of tracking calories and losing weight, my weight loss stalled. I needed to up my physical activity, but I dreaded the idea of setting foot into a gym. Then I discovered hula-hoop fitness and it became my passion. In the months that followed, I fought through the plateau period by reigniting my original desire to lose weight, but this time, I focused on fun.

    “Finding the ‘fun’ helped me stick with my diet and exercise routine, even when the weight loss stalled. It reminded me that physical activity really can feel more like childhood recess and less like a chore. It’s impossible to not smile while hula hooping!

    “I also put ‘fun’ back into my diet and focused on trying new things instead of limiting myself to eating the same foods every day. The weight started coming off again and I have maintained my weight loss for three months now.” —Cori Magnotta, 34, lost 85 pounds

    How to stay motivated to lose weight

    Ever gone into a weight loss diet fully motivated and ready to transform your life, only to feel completely out of willpower and ready to give up after three weeks? You are definitely not alone in this. One of the hardest parts about weight loss is finding and keeping the motivation to stay on track when things get tough.

    No matter how good your weight loss plan is, or how motivated you feel from the start, maintaining your weight loss motivation is one of the toughest things about successfully losing weight and keeping it off. But what exactly is motivation and where does it come from? And even more importantly, how do you get it, keep it and use it to lose weight.

    What is Weight Loss Motivation?

    Motivation is the desire to perform voluntary movements to achieve the desired outcome. In other words, it is the drive that makes you want to make a change and stick to it.

    Motivation is a very broad term that a lot of people throw around at the beginning of a big change, hoping if they have a lot of it, they can be successful. The thing is, it does not stand alone ; it’s the initial spark that sets the fire, and keeping it can be just as much of a challenge as finding it in the first place.

    It is an internal drive. A choice you make for yourself to pursue something new. Recognizing this will help you cycle motivation and create the discipline necessary to achieve results.

    Weight loss motivation is simply the aforementioned definition applied specifically to losing weight.

    Where Does Weight Loss Motivation Come From?

    Mostly it comes from you.

    Motivation is sparked through our neurotransmitters, which are designed to release chemical messages that keep us alert and on task. Oftentimes, it is a product of dopamine—the well-known, feel-good chemical in your brain.

    Dopamine is produced in two different parts of the brain. It is made in the substantia nigra, a tiny strip on either side of the brain. Dopamine from this area of the brain helps produce movement and speech.

    The other area of the brain that produces dopamine is the ventral tegmental area, in the center of your brain. When dopamine is released from this area of the brain it signals to us that something good or bad is about to happen. This helps us produce motivation to take action (1).

    It is actually a common misconception that dopamine is the “pleasure” chemical—it does much more than that. While it is fairly well understood that it influences our desire to chase rewards, it is not only released in times of pleasure. It is also used in times of stress or loss and is strongly linked to our motivation (2).

    Intrinsic vs Extrinsic Motivation

    When it comes to weight loss or any positive change you are trying to make, the type of motivation can often be more important than anything else .

    Oftentimes when someone is looking to lose weight, they focus on the outcome they are desiring, such as looking a certain way, hitting a specific number on the scale, or fitting into an old pair of pants.

    This is called external or extrinsic motivation . While this type of motivator can be great from the start, it is still fairly surface level and will quickly lose its steam. It can also be incredibly demotivating when the weight loss results don’t quite look as you pictured them.

    On the other hand, intrinsic or internal motivation involves doing something out of pleasure or for the joy of doing it. Some people will start off with physical goals and then discover they love that eating healthy and working out gives them more energy, improves their mood or their sex life, or they find a healthy habit they just really enjoy. These types of motivators are stickier and can help you build healthy habits for the long haul, so identifying them upfront can be a real game-changer.

    How to stay motivated to lose weight

    One of the easiest ways to keep your weight loss motivation strong is to learn to love the process, and this can be achieved by identifying intrinsic motivators.

    How to Get Motivated and Stay Motivated to Lose Weight

    Because motivation comes from within, it is pretty personal. This means the best way to achieve it can be different for everyone. Some are motivated by family, health scares, or other people’s weight loss transformation stories. Others may get their weight loss motivation from a desire to look and feel better. There are endless triggers you can use, the trick is finding the right one for you that sticks.

    But if you’re having trouble finding it, don’t worry, there are a few different things you can try to inspire some incentive or help you grasp what it is that is really driving you to make a change.

    Motivation also isn’t always there . It comes and goes and it’s completely normal to lose it more than once when trying to achieve a bigger goal.

    The key is understanding this is part of the process and finding ways to pick yourself back up if you lose inspiration or just fall off track.

    Struggling with how to get started on your weight loss journey? Start with this weight-loss calculator and learn exactly how many calories you need to eat each day to lose weight.

    Staying focused on a plan is always the hardest part about losing weight. While positive feedback does provide encouragement when you first start dropping sizes, it inevitably wanes. And with our tendency to use food as emotional support, slipping back into old eating patterns when we’re stressed, makes it doubly difficult to stay on course.

    How then do you stay on target? Here are four tips to lose weight:

    Think slim

    When overweight people see food, they think of how it’s going to taste. Slim people, on the other hand, focus on the consequences – how fattening is that going to be? Practice imagining how you’ll feel after consuming weight-increasing food. Keep it up until this becomes a natural habit for you. It may seem simple, but this change in mindset is truly effective.

    Eat when you are hungry

    Eating junk food when you are hungry can cause a crash in energy, and create a craving for more food. But if you eat protein with every meal along with complex carbs like whole grains, vegetables, fruits, and beans, you’ll be able to regulate your food intake better.

    Surround yourself with fit friends

    According to research, the average body type of the people with whom you hang out affects your weight and size. At HealthifyMe, we use WhatsApp groups to stay connected and set healthy benchmarks. And this doesn’t mean you isolate your overweight friends. Just make sure you’re also in touch with people who understand your struggle and can help you push forward.

    Don’t be too strict

    There will be slip-ups. But that doesn’t mean you quit the plan. You could lose 5 kg, have a weak moment and gain back 2. At this point, don’t throw caution to the wind and just binge. Instead, be prepared for this fluctuation by having a ‘sliding scale’ in your mind that allows 1-2 kg around your target weight.

    Our experts can guide you with the best diet and fitness plan, designed specifically for you. Get in touch today.

    Can milk help you lose weight?

    5 small steps to lose weight

    Roshini Gilbert

    After a diligent workout plan helped her lose 30kg of post-pregnancy weight, chartered accountant Roshini Gilbert was inspired enough to go from tallying numbers to training others. Currently serving as VP, Fitness & Services, at HealthifyMe, Roshini has been certified by the American Council on Exercises (ACE) for functional fitness and specialises in postnatal weight loss, exercises for lower back pain, arthritis and osteoporosis. As part of her Rehab Trainer certification in Australia, Roshini has trained with reputed sports physiotherapist, Ulrik Larsen in corrective exercises and injury management. In HealthifyMe, she has found a collaborator with a common cause – making people fit to live life to the fullest.

    Getting started with healthier lifestyle changes in order to lose weight is tricky, maintaining your new routine and continuing to build motivation to carry on can be harder.

    Motivation is what will help keep you on track to reaching your goals and many of us will have different motivations. Losing weight is no easy feat, but by adopting a positive attitude, you really can achieve anything you set your mind to.

    In this article, we’re going to share some simple ways to keep yourself motivated when losing weight, so that you always feel up to the challenge.

    How to stay motivated when losing weight

    1. Identify your goals

    If you haven’t already, set some goals so that you have something to work towards. These goals should be SMART, which means:

    • Specific – for example, don’t just say your goal is ‘to exercise more’, specify how many pounds you’d like to lose over the next 2 weeks or the number of calories you’d like to burn each week.
    • Measurable – make sure that there is a way to measure your goal. In the case of losing weight, you could weigh yourself at the end of each week and log this information.
    • Achievable – make sure that your goal is realistic and achievable. For example, saying that you want to lose 1 stone in a week is unreasonable and when you don’t hit your targets, you can feel less motivated. Setting yourself a goal like ‘I’m aiming to lose 2 pounds each week for the next month’ is going to be much easier and if you find yourself hitting or exceeding your expectations, you can always set yourself a new goal.
    • Relevant – your goal should matter to you to keep you interested in achieving it. Think about the health benefits ahead or how your confidence will grow with weight loss.
    • Time-based – setting yourself an ‘end date’ will give you something to work towards. For example, you could set a date where you will assess your progress and set new goals.

    2. Remember why you want to lose weight

    Write down all of the reasons why you decided to lose weight and place them somewhere to remind you of those reasons every day. For example, you could note reasons on post-it notes and stick them on your fridge or beside your bed so that you can always see them.

    If you found it difficult to pinpoint the reasons why you want to lose weight or you’re looking for some inspiration, here are some common motivators:

    • Wanting to reduce health risks – those who are overweight or obese are at a higher risk of developing health issues such as type 2 diabetes, artery disease, some types of cancer and strokes ( NHS ).
    • Wanting to be more active with the family – playing and running around with children can be exhausting and sometimes you may feel unable to join in and spend quality time together. This can leave you feeling deflated but by losing weight and exercising more, you’ll notice you gain more energy and are more able to keep up with all the action.
    • Wanting to gain more confidence – our weight can impact our self-esteem and confidence but taking control over your health can give you the boost you need to go about each day.
    • Wanting more independence – our body weight can sometimes be restrictive – whether that is down to not having the confidence to run errands alone or simply not having the energy. By adopting a healthier lifestyle, you’ll notice a positive difference within yourself (both mentally and physically) which can help you to regain independence.
    • Wanting to improve mental health – Being healthy and active can have a real positive impact on your mental health, helping you to think more clearly and decrease stress levels.

    3. Log your progress in a journal

    Keep a diary and monitor your progress daily to ensure you’re on track. Make note of what foods you are eating, any emotions and changes in your weight. Writing down how you’re feeling about your weight-loss experience is a great way to get in touch with your thoughts and research has shown this helps people lose more weight. That said, try not to fixate on the numbers staring back at you on the scales – weight loss can take time and whilst you may be shedding fat, you may also be gaining muscle which can skew the scale’s reliability; gaining muscle is perfectly normal and will help you to build up more strength.

    4. Celebrate each and every success

    As we’ve established, losing weight isn’t always easy and most of us will struggle or doubt our abilities from time to time – this is why we need to celebrate each success, no matter how big or small. Lost a couple pounds in a week? Great! Feeling less stressed each day? That’s also great! It’s important for you to praise yourself for both physical and mental changes as a result of your hard work and you could even consider treating yourself as a reward. That said, if you decide to reward yourself, try to avoid unhealthy treats and look into ways to further motivate yourself (i.e. you could get yourself a new pair of running shoes or take a cooking class).

    5. Get support from others

    Whether you’re struggling or not, don’t be afraid to reach out to loved ones or a weight loss support group and talk about your weight loss goal with others. Here at LiveWell Dorset, we’re always here to lend a supportive ear to guide you through your journey and can give you the help you need. Equally, it can be really beneficial to let family and friends know that you are trying to lose weight and you could even inspire them to join you in becoming healthier.

    6. If you slip up, don’t let it get you down

    We all make mistakes, learn to forgive yourself if you ever have a bad day and don’t let it take away from the positives you’ve achieved.

    If you’ve got any social events coming up and you’re worried about resisting temptation, you could always bring along healthy alternatives or let those around you know that you’re trying to stick to a diet plan.

    7. Spice up your workout plan

    If you keep doing the same old fitness routine, you risk becoming bored and therefore, demotivated.Tackle this by actively searching for new and exciting exercises to try or consider joining fitness classes where you’ll be introduced to new calorie-burning ideas.

    Why not take a look at some of our home exercises to lose weight to get started?

    8. Explore new healthy meals

    Just like exercise, if you’re eating the same meals each week you could grow tired of the usual dishes and become tempted by unhealthy foods. Why not try to learn a new healthy recipe or experiment with flavours to bring a little more life to your plate?

    You can find new meal ideas and plan ahead with the Easy Meals app , a free app developed by the NHS.

    Want help to keep motivated when losing weight?

    If you’re looking to lose weight to maintain a healthier lifestyle, we are here to help! Here at LiveWell Dorset, we have a friendly team of advisors and coaches to support you through your journey of losing weight, keeping you motivated and on track to reaching your goals. Why not register with us today or get in touch to learn more about our services?.

    I drank too much alcohol and had unhealthy eating habits. Pastry is such a bad thing, it’s all those pies, pasties and sausage rolls!

    How to stay motivated to lose weightWhile many people pursue weight loss out of aesthetic concerns for their waist line, a more important benefit is that it improves your health. While following your medical weight loss program you will need to find ways to stay motivated.

    Regularly exercising and eating a healthy diet is the best way to get rid of extra pounds, but it is easy to lose focus and become bored while working out and eating a regular, healthy diet. Fortunately, a number of tools can be used to keep yourself motivated and keep your workouts and eating routine more exciting.

    Here are four tips to help you stay motivated to lose weight:

    • Set realistic goals. Goals that are too easy will quickly cause you to become bored, while goals that are too far-fetched will cause you to become frustrated and possibly abandon your goals entirely. Instead, give yourself both realistic short-term and long term goals such as losing 5 pounds the first month or exercising four times a week initially. Starting out with smaller goals allows you to build momentum for success.
    • Use photos and a journal. Documenting your hard work — and results — has been shown to help keep people motivated and focused in their weight loss efforts. Keep a daily journal of the foods you eat and physical activity you do each day. Take a photo of yourself at the beginning of each month and post it in a place where you can see it every day. If you are trying to reduce specific pockets of fat in addition to your overall weight loss goals, take photos of your problem areas to have a record of your improvements.

    Add variety to your routines. Let’s face it. Eating the same foods or using the same exercises in your workout can lead to boredom. When this happens it is time to change up your routine. If it is nice out, take the opportunity to go outside for a walk, bike ride, or run instead of heading off to the gym. Remember, the more you enjoy the activity, the more likely you are to stick to it!

    Reward Your Successes. Sticking to an exercise plan, eating healthy and losing weight are not easy tasks for many people. It takes patience, hard work, focus, and dedication. Therefore, when you receive results reward yourself!

    How to stay motivated to lose weight

    If I could just get motivated I could finally lose some of this weight!!

    Ever wonder why you struggle to stay motivated to diet or exercise even when you want to lose weight really, really badly?

    The answer is because motivation doesn’t work.

    There is something that works a lot better, and I’m going to share what that is, why motivation will end up failing you every time, and how you can finally get success toward your weight loss goal.

    When you make the decision to start a diet or exercise routine, yes, you need a little motivation in the beginning to get going. But motivation will always end up failing you if it’s the only thing you’re relying on to keep yourself going.

    Why doesn’t motivation work? Because motivation comes and goes! It requires energy and stamina. There are going to be times when you just don’t have it and you don’t feel motivated and even when you have a great reason why you should be motivated, there will be days when that’s simply not enough.

    So what does work if motivation doesn’t?

    Habits.

    Habits are what keep you going. Once we create a pattern or routine, the human brain is hardwired to repeat that routine.

    If you’ve created a healthy eating or workout routine, even on the days that you don’t feel like it, you do it anyway because it’s what you do. So you don’t need motivation. If you have a habit, you’re just going to keep doing what you’re doing.

    Rather than trying to think of how to get yourself more motivated, think of how you can change your habits and create a better routine.

    Here are a couple of things you can do to change your habits:

    1. Try paring healthy habits with a habit you already have. You eat breakfast every morning, so start taking your vitamins with breakfast. You won’t ever forget to take your vitamins because you’re probably not going to skip breakfast (I hope).
    2. You can also break up with bad habits by un-pairing them. Just like putting something together that’s good you can also stop putting something bad with something else. If every time you get up at work to go to the bathroom you pass the candy dish and you have a little piece of candy, start to take a different route. Don’t go past the candy dish. Force yourself for at least a week to not have candy and then you’ll stop feeling like you have to do it every time.
    3. If you tend to snack while watching TV at night, read a book instead. You could also crochet, you could take a bath, anything that will occupy your mind when you are tempted to snack.
    4. Another good habit is to brush your teeth as soon as you’re done eating. This will help you not snack between meals. Usually when we brush our teeth that is the signal to our brain that we’re done eating and it also creates a minty taste that we don’t like to combine with other foods.
    5. You can form new habits by recruiting a buddy. Take your dog for a walk every morning, or meet a friend at lunch time for a walk, or meet your spouse at the gym after work. If you recruit someone else (human or pet) to do it with you, then you aren’t just keeping a commitment to yourself but also to someone else. I guarantee you the dog isn’t going to allow you to skip that morning walk when you’ve made it a routine.

    Instead of spending time trying to motivate yourself again and again when your motivation starts to fail, work on creating new habits instead.

    Ask yourself what is one habit you can commit to, starting today that is going to make progress towards your health and fitness or weight loss goals?

    Some suggestions:

    • Keep a bottle of water with you at work all day long, to make sure you get your water in.
    • Take the stairs every day at work instead of the elevator.
    • Reach out to one of your co-workers and suggest taking a 10 to 15 minute walk each day at lunch to chat.
    • Commit to start walking your dog every morning.

    Commit, right now to one new habit that is going to carry you through when motivation won’t.

    Little changes seem small at first but they add up big over time.

    Medically reviewed

    All of Healthily’s articles undergo medical safety checks to verify that the information is medically safe. View more details in our safety page, or read our editorial policy.

    More tips from real-life slimmers

    Keep a photo diary

    From Carrie Sorrell, 20, from Hertfordshire. Lost 28kg (four and a half stone).

    “I asked my partner to take photographs of me in my underwear and kept a photo diary. It meant I could see what I really looked like underneath my clothes. I also recorded my measurements, targets and feelings. It was a great way to keep motivated as I saw the pounds and inches disappearing.”

    Track weight loss monthly, not weekly

    From Wendy Jenks, 38, from Eastleigh, Hampshire. Lost 24kg (three stone 11lbs).

    “One thing I was told stuck in my mind: it’s a good idea to consider your weight loss over a month rather than getting disheartened after a disappointing week.”

    Find ways to walk

    From Karen Baird, 31, from Shepshed, Leicestershire. Lost 25kg (over four stone).

    “I used to hate the fact that I seemed to be constantly going up and down the stairs. Now I see it as a leg-toning exercise. I also walk a couple of miles a day with the children instead of always using the car. It’s good for me, them and the environment.”

    Visualise the new you

    From Karen Thompson, 28, from Bedford. Lost 32kg (five stone).

    “I used to meditate and visualise the new, slimmer me. I would imagine myself wearing a brand new dress or a tight pair of jeans and feeling great. Not only did it relax me, but it really helped me stay focused.”

    Set small, achievable targets

    From Sonia Nurse, 34, from Holmes Chapel, Cheshire. Lost 54kg (eight and a half stone).

    “I know how soul-destroying it can be to think how far you’ve got to go, so my advice is to set little targets along the way, such as the next half-stone or dress size. That’s what worked for me.”

    Get sponsored

    From Amanda Richards, 35, from Sussex. Lost 19kg (three stone).

    “I signed up to run a 5km race. I got loads of people to sponsor me and it was for a charity that meant a lot to me. I knew I had to get fit to run the race and I couldn’t let everyone down, so I had the perfect reason to stay motivated.”

    Can’t lose weight? Try these diet motivation tips for success.

    If you’ve dropped and regained so many pounds it would take a Harvard PhD to do the math, then here are some diet motivation tips that can help.

    Sure, you’ve tried to diet before. You’ve gotten rid of the cookies in the cupboard, and virtuously refused the cake at the office party. And then, a few weeks into it, your motivation begins to flag. Maybe you hit a plateau in your weight loss, or you’re bored with steamed vegetables for dinner night after night, or, tempted by a special dessert, you decide that just this once can’t hurt. A few slip-ups and you’re totally derailed, physically and emotionally.

    If this isn’t the first time that losing weight was one of your New Year’s resolutions, then maybe you just haven’t had the right diet motivation. It turns out that the key to losing and keeping weight off isn’t simply a matter of what you eat or how much you exercise – it’s your attitude. Lasting weight loss is a slow process and it’s all too easy to give up before you reach your goal. With the right psychological tools your chances of diet success can be greatly improved. WebMD consulted experts for diet motivation tips that will keep you, and your diet, on the winning track to losing.

    Diet Motivation Tip 1: Set Realistic Goals for Diet Success
    The first step to maintaining your mojo should take place before you cut a single calorie. In fact, one of the strongest predictors of long-term diet success lies in setting the right goal at the start. “If you set unattainable goals, such as losing 30 pounds in just a few months, you’re setting yourself up to fail,” says Ann Kulze, MD, author of Dr. Ann’s 10-Step Diet: A Simple Plan for Permanent Weight Loss and Lifelong Vitality. Instead, you’ll be more likely to stick with a diet if you “focus on your health and create sensible eating strategies,” says Kulze. Setting smaller, attainable benchmarks, like losing 5 pounds or a single dress size, will give you the confidence to continue.

    Diet Motivation Tip 2: Go Slow
    Diet success entails making real lifestyle changes, and that doesn’t happen overnight. “You have a better chance at keeping the weight off if you lose it slowly. People who are starving get irritable and have a higher failure rate,” Kulze tells WebMD. “If you cut back 200 calories a day, you won’t even realize it and the weight will come off and stay off.” If you keep in mind that optimal weight loss is 1 to 2 pounds a week, you’ll be less frustrated

    Diet Motivation Tip 3: Expect Setbacks
    Everyone is bound to give in to temptation (hello, hot fudge sundae) from time to time. The danger isn’t a single splurge but letting it become an excuse for an all-out binge. Call it the “I’ve already blown it so I might as well eat the entire bag of Oreos” syndrome.

    Diet Motivation Tip 4: Don’t Be a Perfectionist
    So what do you do if you’ve scarfed down a pint of ice cream before noon? “Perfectionist thinking gets in the way of success more than anything I know,” according to Vicki Saunders, RD, who oversees the inpatient weight loss and lifestyle program called Transformations at St. Helena Hospital in Napa, Calif. “A 100-calorie indulgence is just that. But if it’s perceived as a failure and a reason to give up, it can turn into a thousand-calorie indulgence.” Bottom line when you slip up: Forget about it. Tomorrow is a new (healthier) day.

    Diet Motivation Tip 5: Use the Buddy System
    “It’s hard to make major lifestyle changes when you’re swimming upstream by yourself,” says Saunders. Finding other people with similar goals can greatly improve yours odds of diet success. When your spirit – or willpower – flags, having people to call on can provide the support you need to continue. Saunders recommends looking for people at your local gym or Y, Overeaters Anonymous, or an online support group. “Having a support group to turn to, whether it’s your family or people in a weight-loss chat room, can make all the difference” for diet success.

    Diet Motivation Tip 6: Be Patient
    One of the biggest diet motivation-busters is the dreaded weight loss plateau. You’ve been doing everything right, exercising and eating well, and the numbers on the scale have been steadily dropping. Then suddenly: nada. The scale stays stuck for several days in a row. According to Ann Kulze, this is perfectly normal. “Turn it around and congratulate yourself on the diet success you’ve had so far,” she urges. “This is a natural part of the weight loss process.” When you hit the plateau, you may want to try something slightly different to jump-start your diet. “Commit yourself to expending an extra 100 calories a day with walking, for instance,” Kulze advises. “And look honestly to see if you’re backsliding in little ways with your eating.” A few minor adjustments and you’ll soon be back on course.

    Diet Motivation Tip 7: Reward Yourself
    Dieting is hard work — and it’s not always a whole lot of fun. Small rewards can provide an incentive to keep going. But make sure your rewards are not food-related. (Translation: Rewarding yourself for losing 5 pounds with a box of chocolates is not what we’re talking about.) Set mini-goals along the way and reward yourself when you reach them. Your reward could be a massage, a round of golf, a new pair of jeans, or a hot bubble bath. “Celebrating your diet success will fortify your resolve to continue,” says Kulze.

    Diet Motivation Tip 8: Have a Maintenance Plan
    For many people, losing weight is far easier than keeping it off. It’s important to remember that healthy eating is a lifelong goal, not a one-time project. If this has been a problem for you in the past, devise a maintenance strategy ahead of time. Vicki Saunders says you may want to consult an expert to help create a diet or exercise plan that works for you. “Plan an appointment with a professional, whether it’s a nutritionist, a counselor, or a trainer, for an added boost,” she says. An expert can help you get off on the right foot — and maintain your healthy habits even after you’ve reached your ideal weight.

    Published January 2007.

    Show Sources

    SOURCES: Ann Kulze, MD, author, Dr. Ann’s 10-Step Diet: A Simple Plan for Permanent Weight Loss and Lifelong Vitality. Vicki Saunders, RD, Transformations at St. Helena Hospital, Napa, Calif.

    Let’s be honest, whether it’s 10 lbs or 50 lbs, losing weight is hard. With obesity numbers rising rapidly each year, concern around weight loss to maintain a more optimal weight is also continuing to rise. After all, keeping a healthy weight is vital to our overall health. And we all know half the battle to achieving healthy weight loss is staying motivated.

    Stress, certain health conditions, boredom, and unrealistic expectations are just a few of the reasons people lose motivation.

    Are you struggling to stay motivated on your weight loss journey? We put together this guide to help you find ways to stay inspired to be a healthier you!

    Finding motivation to lose weight

    It’s normal to have days where you are pumped to do all the things to move that number on the scale, followed by days you want nothing to do with diet and exercise. Incorporating these seven things into your journey can help keep you on track to reach your weight loss goals.

    1. Identify your “why”

    Sometimes people lose sight of why they started on a weight loss journey, and it causes them to be unmotivated to continue.

    So ask yourself, why do I want to lose weight? A few reasons might be straightforward, but you may find most will be unique to you. Write your whys down and let them serve as a reminder to help you refocus on the tough days.

    2. Find a weight loss plan that works for your lifestyle

    Yes, your best friend’s sister’s husband’s boss may have dropped 50 pounds by giving up carbs. But the reality is, dieting isn’t one-size-fits-all. So before you swear off bread and pasta, ask yourself: is this diet something I can stick with long-term? If the answer is no, it’s safe to assume you may lose motivation quickly and risk going back to unhealthy eating habits.

    There are hundreds of different diets, from Keto to intermittent fasting. But the thing about “fad diets” is they can actually lead to weight gain once you stop dieting and fall back into unhealthy habits.

    Instead, avoid strict diets which call for eliminating certain foods. Instead, look for a diet with customizable options that will ultimately fit better into your lifestyle, like:

    Reducing calorie intake

    Decreasing portion sizes

    Reducing or eliminating snacks

    Reducing or removing fried food and desserts

    Increasing servings of fruits and vegetables

    3. Set non-weight related goals

    Yes, your overall goal may be to lose a certain amount of weight. But focusing just on numbers can set you up for failure.

    Instead, determine process goals, steps you will take to get to your desired outcome and celebrate each of them along the way. Process goals can help change unhealthy behaviors and habits standing in the way of losing weight while keeping you motivated.

    Some examples of process goals for weight loss are:

    Replacing your daily soda with water

    Exercising for 30 minutes every day

    Decreasing frequency of desserts after dinner

    Eliminating fast food

    4) Accept setbacks

    “To err is human.” Life happens, and there will be times you feel like you are failing. It’s ok to have not-so-good days. And having an extra helping of food at Thanksgiving doesn’t mean you need to abandon your weight loss goals. But preparing yourself ahead of time for ways to cope with these setbacks can help get you back on track.

    Studies have found that people with adequate coping strategies and stress management are likely to lose more weight and keep it off. So, if you find overindulging is your go-to, you may also want to look at other ways to deal with stress. This can include exercising, a hot bath, journaling, meditation, and talking to a friend.

    5) Give yourself a break

    Staying highly motivated at all times is nearly impossible and can lead to burnout. Don’t look at a drop in motivation as a sign of failure, but rather that your body is telling you to rest.

    Allow yourself a day or two off from your diet and exercise routine, and you may find it’s just what you need to get remotivated. A couple of days off might also be a good time to evaluate and adjust your weight loss regimen if needed.

    6) Don’t compare your journey to anyone else’s

    Social media can play a big part in helping people lose weight. From finding exercise inspiration to joking weight loss groups, it’s a great way to connect with others who share similar goals.

    On the flip side, social media can also make it easy to compare yourself to others. That can put you at risk of losing motivation and quitting. This isn’t to say someone’s weight loss can’t be inspirational to you. But remember, just like your why is unique to you, so is your journey.

    7) Talk to your doctor

    If you find that your motivation for weight loss is dwindling, it’s a good idea to consult with your physician. They are a great partner to help you identify roadblocks and keep you focused on your goals.

    Some questions to ask your doctor in regards to losing weight:

    Are there health conditions that can be affecting my weight?

    Do any of the medications I currently take cause weight gain?

    How much weight should I lose?

    What other resources do you suggest for weight loss?

    Your physician may also make recommendations for things like a dietitian or nutritionist, weight loss medication, or refer you to a specialist for your health issues.

    Final thoughts

    Motivation is critical for successful weight loss, but it can also be hard to maintain long-term. Finding what motivates you can set you on a path to shedding the pounds and keeping them off.

    At CareCard, we are passionate about helping make your prescription payments more affordable, saving members up to 85% on prescription drugs and medications. Learn how CareCard can help make your medication payments more manageable.

    People often cite lack of motivation as a major reason why they can’t get started on a weight loss journey or give up halfway blaming fizzling out of motivation. Just as you didn’t gain weight overnight, drop in weight would not happen in 2 or 3 days; visible results would show over a few weeks and would take even months, so remaining motivated and consistent with dieting and physical activity is important. Finding motivation to lose weight is easy, it could be your birthday next month or your best friend’s marriage in just a few weeks, or here’s the most common one – you want to fit into an old pair or jeans, but do you find giving up on yourself all too soon because the initial motivation seems to have vanished into thin air. Then, this post is for you because we have listed out 7 Ways To Keep Yourself Motivated To Lose Weight.

    How to stay motivated to lose weight

    How to stay motivated to lose weight

    1. List Down Reasons you Want To Lose Weight: First things first, list down the reasons why you want to lose weight and keep going back to it to remain motivated through your journey. You might want to get lean for a particular event or occasion, to fit into an old pair of jeans, to improve lab profile, or in some cases, to get a revenge body. Whatever the reasons, list them one by one, keep checking it often, and draw motivation from it to stay on track.
    2. Pick a Diet That’s Easy To Follow and Sustainable: A weight loss diet should encourage you to eat the right kind of food, in the right quantity to melt away those extra layers. Most people lose interest halfway through diet programs because they are probably on a fad diet that’s based on food deprivation, encouraging you to eat as much little food as possible. However, such kind of diets are neither healthy nor sustainable, and you would lose the motivation in just a few days. On the other hand, Rati Beauty diet, on the Rati Beauty app are totally sustainable and encourage you to eat all kinds of food – vegetables, fruits, whole grains, daily food, and even healthy fats. If you have been following Rati Beauty diet programs, you would have realized how amazing your diet food tastes and what’s more, you are losing weight following them! Amazing, right!? And you would never lose the motivation to get off of it.
    3. Set Realistic Goals: When you set short-term unrealistic goals, you would most probably resort to crash dieting (extremely unhealthy) and would gain back all weight lost once you come out of it. Don’t set yourself unrealistic goals, hoping to lose 15 kg in a month. If you plan to lose 15 kg and you lose just 3 kg, it will probably push you back and make it difficult for you to march ahead. Set small milestones since they are more achievable, and once you reach them, you will be motivated to lose more because once you see results, it becomes an obsession.
    3. Keep a Food Journal: People who keep a food journal often find that jotting down every meal into a notebook helps them eliminate high-calorie stuff and unhealthy food. A food journal also helps one set a food routine and the frequency of snacking, and makes it easier to stick to the weight loss diet.
    4. Find a Friend with a Similar Goal and Tag Them Along: Believe us, two is better than one if you find it hard to stick to the diet plan or follow the exercise routine on a daily basis on your own. With a friend along, you can motivate each other to cook healthy meals, stick to the diet plan, and also exercise together.

    5. Get Rid of Temptations: First from the kitchen, then from your life. The “out of sight, out of mind” theory works here. Clear your kitchen of unhealthy snacks and junk food because we tend to eat things that are easily accessible and available around the home (particularly in the refrigerator and kitchen), and give into temptation and cravings, and cite lack of motivation for doing so.
    6. Make Lifestyle Changes: Losing weight is not about eating low-calorie food and exercising like crazy, you got to make lifestyle changes – be active through the day, find ways to de-stress, and bring on positive thinking. Weight loss cannot be a short-term goal, it has to be incorporated as a lifestyle change.
    7. Do Not Deny yourself a Cheat Meal: To stay on track and remain motivated till you melt away the last pound of fat, do indulge in a cheat meal once a week. A good weight loss diet would encourage you to indulge in a cheat meal once a week, so does the Rati Beauty weight loss diet, because cravings can prevent you from following your diet religiously. A cheat meal also helps in resetting a sluggish metabolism and you would also remain motivated and stick to the diet better.

    How to stay motivated to lose weight

    Hope these tips would help you to lose weight successfully without the initial motivation actually fizzling out.

    How to stay motivated to lose weight

    It might be there in the back of your mind: you want to lose weight. It might even be at the forefront of your attention – but that doesn’t mean you’ve found the motivation to actually do anything about it yet.

    It’s easy enough to say the diet starts on Monday. It’s so simple to proclaim you’ll start going to the gym as of next week. But finding the motivation to go through with it, now that, that is the tough part.

    If you need some motivation to start eating better or exercising more, we can help. You know, losing weight doesn’t have to be miserable. It doesn’t have to be a battle. It’s perfectly possible to eat well, to not be hungry – and to lose weight. Here are a few simple tricks to get yourself motivated.

    Are you trying to lose weight? Read our comprehensive guide on weight loss to understand where to begin, what happens when you lose weight, and what doesn’t work when it comes to dieting.

    Discover your motivation

    It’s very difficult to focus on a goal if you don’t fully recognise the benefits of achieving that goal. So you want to lose weight. But why do you want to lose weight? Have a good, long think about the reasons why you want to shift those kilos – and write them down.

    Perhaps you want to lose weight to fit into last year’s summer clothes – or maybe you want to buy new summer clothes, but in a smaller size. Perhaps you want to be more comfortable on the beach in your bathers.

    Maybe it’s less about your looks and more about your health. Losing weight could mean trying a new activity this summer – one that you feel you couldn’t do before you lose the weight. That could be playing sports with your kids in the park, or it could be training for that half marathon.

    Writing down your motivation has two major benefits. Firstly, it helps you get a clear idea of why you want to lose weight. This can give you the inspiration to start your new healthy way of living. Secondly, it lets you revisit your motivation when times get tough, giving you the courage to stay on the right path.

    Keep track of weight loss

    When it comes to weight loss success stories, everyone loves the before and after shots. You can clearly see where that person started, and what they look like now they’ve reached their goal. But do you think it would be as satisfactory to see progress shots each and every day?

    When you’re losing weight, it can be tempting to step on the scales every day. You want some validation that what you’re doing is indeed, working. This can be the worst thing you can do, though. Instead of measuring the ups and downs of daily weigh-ins, give yourself time to see some actual progress. Weigh in weekly and see how far you’ve come.

    Forgive yourself

    Weight loss is a journey. Corny, but true. You can’t expect that journey to always be a smooth one. There will be bumps along the way, where sometimes you feel like you are going backwards instead of forwards.

    When it comes time for your weekly weigh-in and you don’t lose as much as you’d hoped for, don’t beat yourself up about it. Think about what you can do differently next week. Take it on as a challenge instead of a failure. Similarly, if you lapse in your diet or exercise regime, that doesn’t mean the whole week is a write-off. Don’t use it as an excuse to chuck in the towel. Forgive yourself – and move on.

    Reward weight loss milestones

    Just as you should forgive yourself for any failures, you should also reward yourself for your successes. When you reach your targets, give yourself a reward. This could be a little treat that you’re not normally allowed to eat. Or it could be a little pampering, like buying a new item of clothing or getting a mani-pedi.

    Focus on the end goal

    It’s easy to focus on all the things you will lose when you’re trying to lose weight. That could be doughnuts and burgers, or it could be lying on the couch watching TV all weekend. To spark that motivation, try instead to think about the things you will gain from losing weight.

    That could be the freedom to shop for clothes you love, or it could be the confidence to wear more flattering clothing in summer. It could be the energy you will gain from eating well and exercising, or it could be the ability to play with your kids without losing your breath.

    It could be even bigger than that. Perhaps you want to try something you’ve never done before. Losing weight could mean learning to surf, trying rock climbing and abseiling, or even, bucket list items, like diving the Great Barrier Reef. Imagine it, work for it, and those dreams are yours to gain.

    If you’re trying to lose weight, read our comprehensive guide on weight loss to understand where to begin, what happens when you lose weight, and what doesn’t work when it comes to dieting.

    Do you have the right mindset for weight loss? Take our 3-minute Start Strong Diet Quiz to discover how your mindset and motivation can boost your weight loss.

    TIMESOFINDIA.COM | Last updated on – Jul 25, 2021, 07:00 IST

    01 /6 Trying to lose weight? Read this!

    Losing weight can be an arduous task and requires a lot of hard work. While it can take a lot of time (and lifestyle swaps) to see actual results, it’s absolutely normal to have your focus waver. It can be incredibly daunting, and overwhelming, especially if you hit a plateau, or do not observe real differences in your weight.

    Remember, any weight loss journey needs good motivation and strong will. As weight watchers say, they are the only two things, apart from diet and workout which will make you see results and be focussed. By putting some strong skills and seeking help from the self, you can make any goal into an achievable one:

    We list down a few steps to ensure you stay on top of your goal and do not lose track of any progress made:

    02 /6 Set ‘SMART’ goals and track progress routinely

    SMART goals are often used in professional settings and when it comes to losing weight, they come in handy too since they can help one clearly define strategies. Typically, SMART is an abbreviation for ‘Specific, Measurable, Attainable, Realistic and Time-bound’ goals. So, if you are a beginner, go forth by setting small, attainable goals, instead of going all in. This would help you adapt and fulfill goals in time.

    03 /6 Reward yourself every once in a while

    Be it a small reward or your favorite cheat meal, treating yourself once in a while is a fine way of staying on track and not let your journey become boring. While weight loss requires absolute changes and a disciplined diet, rewards can help you stay on track- without feeling too guilty. Just make sure you follow the rule of moderation at all times.

    Remember rewards do not always have to be food. Discover what makes you happy, and reward yourself when you hit goals.

    04 /6 Address your food habits and emotional health

    Since weight loss and staying fit is a long-term, holistic change, it’s also crucial to address your emotional needs, and the connection you have with food. For example, start by addressing your emotional eating habits- do you reach out for food when you are bored/ angry/ stressed. Then, once you recognize the pattern, you’ll be able to deal with the triggers rather than reach out to food and be more in control of your weight.

    Developing such habits, and being mindful of food will help you develop a happier relationship and achieve fitness goals, without letting motivation damper.

    05 /6 Focus on holistic, long-term goals

    Short-term, quick weight loss strategies rarely work. If your focus is on becoming fitter, losing weight, and maintaining it in the long run, do remember to also carve out habits, and maintain that lifestyle in the long run. Adapting to a lifestyle that is healthy will help you feel less stressed, and cope with changes better. Have a mentally healthy relationship with food and exercise, and think of it as a routine habit, instead of a perilsome chore.

    06 /6 Surround yourself with positive people

    Positivity always wins over negativity and when it comes to weight loss tool, it’s quite beneficial if you surround yourself with peers, support groups who cheer you on, inspire you, and not let the focus waver. Be it your family, friends, or just training groups, external sources of motivation work greatly in keeping you energized and happy. Weight loss can feel less stressful, and more enjoyable along the way.

    How to stay motivated to lose weight

    It is inspiring to hear the stories of how weight loss has changed the lives of our patients. Witnessing someone go from being wheelchair bound to walking into the clinic is amazing. Seeing cholesterol, blood sugars and blood pressures normalize while decreasing or even stopping medications is so exciting. Having people come in to lose weight to qualify for a knee or hip replacement, and then not having the surgery because their pain is gone is incredible. Watching someone cry happy tears as they tell you about being able to fit into their clothes they thought they would never wear again is joyful.

    When Times Get Tough

    There are so many wonderful examples of weight loss transforming lives and I often get goosebumps witnessing them! While weight loss may drastically improve quality of life, the actual process of losing weight and then maintaining that weight loss will not always be easy. When times get tough, revisiting how weight loss has positively impacted you can be helpful motivation. As time goes by, it can be easy to forget how poorly you may have felt, how many medications you were on, or how difficult exercise or even day-to-day activities may have been prior to weight loss.

    Ways To Stay Motivated For Weight Loss

    As improvements occur, I encourage you to write down the positive changes you notice. Then when times get tough, go back and revisit what you have written and think about what led you to start this journey in the first place. For some, visual aids may be helpful and looking at before and after photos or putting on a piece of clothing from before losing weight may be motivating.

    The following is from someone who lost a significant amount of weight and has been successful at maintaining. I hope that you find her message as inspirational as I do! It really sums up focusing on the positive, especially during challenging times!

    “Today, I celebrated 2 years of maintaining. I am 66 and lost 190 pounds! I learned once you hit your goal you aren’t over the battle, it’s a lifetime commitment. It’s the mindset that we really have to work on, and asking ourselves, ‘how badly do we want to lose the weight?’ I still have hard days, but at least now I can tie my own shoes and no longer need a cane to get around. I am off of all of my antidepressants, arthritis and blood pressure medications. I have so much more energy and I sleep so much better. I feel better mentally and physically than I have in twenty years. Last week I was in the Smoky Mountains and I did a 5.5 mile hike to Abrams Falls in 3.5 hours and went to Mingo Falls, with 160 steps up. I would have never been able to do that before! It isn’t easy, but when I remember how I felt before, I know I want to stay on this course.”

    26 th June 2019 – by Indre Daukintyte TIME TO READ: 3 MIN –>

    Achieving our goals is seldom easy. It is why knowing how to stay motivated is so incredibly important when it comes to getting what we want in the long term.

    Follow these tips or any combination of them that works for you.

    1. Remind Yourself Why You Set The Goal

    When things feel overwhelming, just take a few moments to sit back and remind yourself why you chose your path in the first place.

    Why did you choose to lose weight?

    Was it because you knew your end goal would lead to long term happiness?

    This can always help you find clarity in the worst moments.

    2. Visualize The Results

    It is important to visualize the end result and what it will feel like when you’ve achieved your end goal.

    Make sure to imagine not only how you are going to look once all the weight has come off, but also how you are going to feel.

    Visualize how my clothes will feel looser on your body, and how much more fluidly and easily you will be able to move. Try to actually feel the additional energy and stamina that you will have as a result of losing the weight!

    3. Break The Goal Down Into Smaller Pieces

    Break your goals down into smaller, more task-oriented goals — and set target deadline for those tasks.

    For example. if your goal is: “to lose 50 kilos” start by saying, “first I’m going to lose 1 kilo, then 3 kilos and after a few months, it is going to be 15 kilos” etc.

    This method can make even the biggest task feel more manageable.

    4. Social support: A necessity for weight loss

    According to research, having a specialist who is supportive of your healthy eating is important for long-term weight-loss success.

    The specialist will stay in touch for example when we overeat, it is easy to feel ashamed and isolate ourselves.

    But support can be crucial in getting us back on track. So manage to reach your therapist even when you are feeling down.

    5. Take A Deep Breath And Reward Yourself

    Find a way to relax and pamper yourself. Don’t forget to reward yourself after reaching smaller goals. It could be a new dress, a new toy or a good massage in the spa!

    6. Share Your Progress With Others

    Sharing your successes publicly may sound a bit narcissistic, but there is a good reason to boast about your achievements. Studies have shown that publicly sharing your progress can actually help motivate you to accomplish your goals.

    You can share your progress on Instagram, Facebook or other social media!

    With summer just around the corner, this is the time that you will most likely be thinking about getting in shape and losing those extra kilos. But when the weather is still a bit cool it can be hard to find the motivation you need to lose weight.

    To help you get motivated and stay motivated we have compiled some weight loss motivation tips.

    How to stay motivated to lose weight

    Winter is almost over – Time to get ready for summer

    With the cooler weather ending and the days getting longer and warmer you might be thinking about getting yourself in shape and losing some weight before summer really starts.

    Summer is the time of year you may be wasting days laying on the beach in your swimwear or at least wearing some shorter sleeves and shorts, which means you may want to lose a few kilos to feel more confident. Or you might just want to get more energy to be able to get out, run around and play with your kids.

    You still have some days until summer is here

    Summer isn’t here just yet so you don’t need to put the pressure on yourself to lose the weight you are hoping to lose really fast. The best thing you can do to maintain your weight loss motivation is to be kind to yourself and know that it will take time to hit your goals but you can do it and will do it.

    Maintain a glass-half-full mentality

    We all know the old saying “is the glass half full or half empty?” with your choice indicating whether you look at life optimistically or pessimistically. If you want to maintain good motivation to lose weight it is best to look at things with a glass half full or optimistic mentality.

    Use the last few days to prepare

    One great way to make sure you are not going to lose any weight loss motivation is to make sure you prepare as much as you can before starting on your journey. We are big fans of meal prepping and meal planning here at The Healthy Mommy.

    Our 28 Day Weight Loss Challenge app has thousands of recipes and multiple meal plans to help you prepare.

    How to stay motivated to lose weight

    8 tips to prepare

    If you are not sure how to increase your weight loss motivation and kick those goals then check out these eight tips.

    1. Create a visual reminder

    One great way to get and stay motivated is to create a motivation board as a visual reminder of your goals and why you are doing what you are doing. Good weight loss motivation pictures include things like a piece of clothing you would love to treat yourself to if you hit your goals or someone who has a similar body type to what you aiming for.

    Once you have created the board make sure it is hanging somewhere that you will see it every day so that it reminds you and motivates you to keep going.

    2. Be active indoors

    When the weather is cooler, wet and miserable it can sometimes be hard to find the motivation to get out and get active. The good thing is you don’t need to get outside to get active there are so many exercise routines you can do in the comfort of your own home.

    All the exercises included in the 28 Day Weight Loss Challenge can be done at home with little to no extra equipment. If you think it’s too hard trying to exercise with your kids around check out this mum’s tips on exercising with kids in tow.

    3. Follow exercises on TV

    Another great way to keep up your weight loss motivation up is to just turn on the TV and follow along with the workouts on your local fitness TV show. If you can’t find a workout on TV jump on YouTube and check out all the free workouts available on The Healthy Mommy’s YouTube channel.

    4. Make delicious healthy food

    It can be hard to stay motivated to lose weight if the meals you are eating whilst on your journey aren’t exciting you or your family. The good news is that there are thousands of healthy, delicious and easy weight loss recipes out there that you can cook up and keep all your family happy.

    If you think the food you are ‘supposed’ to eat when you are trying to lose weight is boring you couldn’t be more wrong. In the recipe hub of the 28 Day Weight Loss Challenge, there are thousands of healthy, family-friendly and budget-friendly recipes to suit all your cooking needs.

    5. Exercise with a group or partner

    The best way to get your weight loss motivation at its best and stay on track is to get your family and especially your partner on board with your weight loss journey. What’s more, if you have a few people on board with you then you can all get together and exercise together and really everything is better with when you have company.

    6. Make and keep a plan

    If you find it hard to keep your weight loss motivation going, which if you are reading these tips you most likely do, then you should write out a plan to help you stay on track. Meal planning is a big part of The Healthy Mommy 28 Day Weight Loss Challenge but there are also exercise plans that support your weight loss journey.

    Not only does a plan help you stay motivated and on track but it also helps you keep track of the progress you have made. If you notice you have been doing well for a couple of weeks it might be nice to give yourself a little reward and doing this is also a good motivation to lose weight.

    7. Challenge yourself

    If you are still wondering how to get motivated to lose weight even after all the above tips why not make it a challenge. Set yourself small goals that once you reach them you get a reward, or team up with a friend or family member and compete with them to hit certain goals. Competition and adding rewards can help keep your weight loss motivation a bit higher.

    If you aren’t a competitive person or don’t think this would be the right motivation for you, just try challenging yourself. Try something new, if you haven’t tried yoga go to a class, if you have done weights give them a try, do some Zumba just try something different.

    8. Play your favorite workout music to get inspired

    One great way to help you get motivated to lose weight is to create a workout playlist that is full of songs that will keep you pumped and motivated. Include your favorite songs and songs that will keep you moving, motivated and push you to keep going.

    Are you still thinking ‘I have no motivation to lose weight’ or ‘how do I get motivated to lose weight’ then go back and reread all our tips and put them into action. If you want some extra motivation then join our private Facebook group where you will hear amazing weight loss motivation stories from other moms.

    Found your motivation and want some help to get started on your weight loss journey? Join the 28 Day Weight Loss Challenge.

    How to stay motivated to lose weight

    Our 28 Day Weight Loss Challengeincludes:

    • 28 days of at home exercise routines (no gym needed) – with video instruction
    • Customisable and breastfeeding friendly meal plans (including a 7 day cleanse)
    • Time-efficient exercises for busy moms – under 30 mins
    • Challenge combines Pilates exercises with interval and circuit training (HIIT)
    • Suitable for basic to advanced fitness levels
    • Home to thousands of EASY-TO-MAKE recipes!

    To learn more about our 28 DAY WEIGHT LOSS CHALLENGE CLICK HERE.

    These 10 tips will make your goal easier to achieve

    If you’re one of those people who sets their sights on losing weight, but then shortly after starting falls back to their old habits, I’m sure you’re interested in learning how to increase your motivation. In a society that promises instant results everywhere, it can be frustrating to get into healthy body habits that will allow you to reach your ideal weight. The good news is that motivation is something that can be worked on to improve it.

    Below, we offer you some tips, and you can use the ones you like the most to make the process easier and even fun. These include some basic tips like “think positive” and “love your body,” as well as other, more practical ones, such as joining an exercise group:

    Establish a balanced and realistic diet

    If you think that you’ll quickly reach your weight loss goal by following restrictive diets like those that have you eat only one kind of food or that get rid of a certain type of food overnight, you’re not being very reasonable. Losing weight requires time, and if you stay consistent, you’ll get there. However, if you want a magic bullet, you might not be able to follow a plan for the long haul.

    Your action plan should include schedules, menus and exercise routines, with easily achievable sub-goals.

    Let yourself have your favorite foods and little treats

    The secret is to not completely deprive yourself, but rather to moderate and reduce your intake of certain foods. Avoiding punishing yourself and extreme prohibitions will fend off negative thoughts and feelings of guilt.

    Get support from a nutritionist

    From the very beginning, you should know what a healthy and realistic weight is for you, based on your age and height, and use that to establish an achievable goal. Remember that every person is unique and that their needs are different.

    Join groups that have the same goal to lose weight

    You can use social media groups, where you can share questions, issues, memes, jokes, tips and tricks with other people, making your journey to your ideal weight more enjoyable.

    It’s also good to go to the gym

    Go jogging or exercise with a friend or group of friends. This way, you’re less likely to stop or postpone these activities, and they will support you and encourage you to continue.

    Follow a diet plan and keep a food diary

    This way, you’ll become more conscious about your food habits.

    Add a touch of humor to your plan

    Hang motivational quotes around your house, office or planner, or even make them your phone screen background. Something quotes like “get up and move your butt” can be fun and remind you of your goal. You can also hang up photos of how you looked before or of your progress.

    Celebrate and reward yourself for your progress

    Whether it be that spa massage you’ve always wanted or another pleasurable activity.

    Keep in mind that losing weight is not just about stopping eating junk food or eating only salads, it’s about completely changing your lifestyle, incorporating a balanced diet, drinking lots of water and getting regular exercise. That’s why, as you lose weight, your body will get used to your new habits and you should readjust them continuously, because your needs will change as you get closer to your ideal weight. Are you ready for this challenge?

    Comfort when talking to healthcare professionals was linked to weight loss motivation.

    Those motivated often regarded healthcare professionals as an information source.

    Weight loss motivation was associated with exercise, goal setting and peer support.

    Knowing how to lose weight and ease of weight loss increased the odds of motivation.

    Understanding weight loss motivations may improve support for people with obesity.

    Abstract

    Background

    People with obesity (PwO) often struggle to achieve and maintain weight loss. This can perpetuate and/or be influenced by feelings of low motivation. This analysis from ACTION-IO data identified factors associated with PwO motivation to lose weight.

    Methods

    PwO completed an online survey in 11 countries. Exploratory multinomial logistic regression analyses identified independent variables associated with self-report of feeling motivated versus not motivated to lose weight.

    Results

    Data from 10,854 PwO were included (5,369 motivated; 3,312 neutral; 2,173 not motivated). Variables associated with feeling motivated versus not motivated included (odds ratio [95% confidence interval]): acknowledgement of healthcare professional (HCP) responsibility to contribute to weight loss (2.32 [1.86–2.88]), comfort in talking to their HCP about weight (1.46 [1.24–1.72), agreement that it is easy to lose weight (1.73 [1.30–2.31]), and a goal of reducing risks from excess weight (1.45 [1.22–1.73]). Conversely, if PwO considered obesity less important than other diseases they were less likely to report feeling motivated (0.49 [0.41–0.58]). PwO who reported being motivated to lose weight were more likely to exercise ≥5 times a week versus How to stay motivated to lose weight

    1. Download : Download high-res image (229KB)
    2. Download : Download full-size image

    Previous article in issue
    Next article in issue

    How are you doing this week? I am on week 15 with Medifast and I lost another half of a pound, so that brings me to 17.5 pounds lost. I am still heading in the right direction, so I am stoked! I finally got my cast of my leg and I have an ankle support for another 2-3 weeks. I am crossing fingers my doctor gives the ok to get my exercise program started. I know this will help me jump start some weight loss that is in the whole numbers! This week I wanted to talk how you can stay motivated to lose weight. I think on of the biggest obstacles when you are losing weight is your mind and its stinking thinking! At least for me, I am quick to tell myself I can’t do this or I will never do that, so staying motivated gets tough. Here are some great ways to keep your mind positive and looking at the bigger picture:

    • Don’t Compare: One of the worst things you can do is compare yourself to someone else. You cannot look at the super skinny models in the magazines and kick yourself because you do not look like them. I have a skinny sister who I have always compared myself to because she is tall and thin and I am short and not so skinny. After all the years I spent coveting her figure, I found out she was an anorexic and bulimic. Ironically, she was jealous of me all that time!
    • Focus On The Finish Line: Are you getting caught up into what is getting you down today or that half of a pound you wish was 2? If you can shift your focus to the healthy person you will be at the end of your journey, you will be motivated to meet that person!
    • Variety: If you are eating the same thing every day, you are going to get bored and most likely stray from your food plan. If I let myself do that, it can be weeks or even months before I get myself back on track. Try out new foods like a blood orange or an artichoke if you have never had one! Remember that variety is the spice of life as well as your diet!
    • Celebrate The Little Things: Did you drink the amount of water you wanted to drink this week or tried 2 new fruits? Give your self a pat on the back for every thing you do that gets you that much closer to your goal.
    • Paint A Mental Picture: If you are feeling down or want to quit your diet, stop for a minute. Picture what you will look like when you reach your goal weight. What are you wearing then that you cannot wear now? What activities are you participating in that you are not able to do today? Keep thinking that way, so for every negative thought, you can twist it around and make it a good thought!

    See more

    I hope these simple suggestions will help you in your weight loss journey! If you are interested in joining Medifast, you can visit them on their website to do so.

    One of the most important points in successful weight loss and following a healthy eating plan is staying motivated – and knowing how to stay motivated day in day out.

    How to stay motivated to lose weight

    The motivation that you have is what keeps you going and is what keeps you focused on your healthy eating and healthy lifestyle – and is what we try and do on the 28 Day Weight Loss Challenge.

    How to stay motivated to lose weight

    10 Healthy Mummy Motivation Tips

    1. Have A Goal In Mind

    Whether it be a monthly goal or a long term goal, create a mental picture of how you want your body to look, or even find a picture and stick it on the fridge – that way if you get tempted to have a binge the picture will be staring back at you!

    2. Reward Yourself For Every Five Kilos You Lose

    Not with food, but will a new handbag or facial, something that will make you feel special.

    3. Don’t Allow Yourself To Feel Deprived

    If there is a certain food you cannot live without, schedule it into you diet mid morning once or twice a week, that way you can burn it off throughout the day, and not feel guilty.

    4. Have A ‘Cheat Meal’ ONCE A Week

    This gets some people through those first few weeks. Once your new healthy lifestyle becomes a habit – you will no longer need to call it a cheat meal, you will naturally allow yourself to give into your cravings occasionally.

    5. Exercise With A Buddy

    Working out with a friend is not only more fun, but that way if you’re feeling lazy, you have someone to help you get moving again.

    How to stay motivated to lose weight

    6. Walk Your Pet

    If you have a pet, take them out for walks daily and you will both benefit from the movement and fresh air. Plus, researchers have found that having a dog is more likely to lower your risk of heart disease!

    7. Sleep In Your Workout Clothes

    If you plan to train in the morning, you will feel more motivated to get up and go for that morning jog.

    8. Plan Weekly Meals In Advance

    Do all your shopping for the week on a Sunday or Monday including snacks, that way you will be less likely to opt for take away or fast food. The 28 Day Diet & Exercise Plan can be a big help with this

    9. Use The Free Weight Loss Tracking Tool

    It is a great tool to help you track your measurement, weight and exercise each day.

    10. Don’t Quit If It Takes Time To See Results

    It takes nine months to grow and nourish a baby, and it will likely take the same amount of time to lose that weight. Slow and steady is the key to long term weight loss, creating a real healthy mummy!

    And finally – remember that slow and steady wins the race! You can and will get there if you take it one day at a time.

    Become A Healthy Mummy Today!

    With more than 2,500 delicious (and healthy) recipes, 350 exercises & 24/7 support – the 28 Day Weight Loss Challenge is designed (and proven) to help busy mums like you lose weight!

    To learn more about our challenge OR to join – click here.

    How to stay motivated to lose weight
    To support your weight loss, The Healthy Mummy also has a range of delicious and good-for-you smoothies!

    Our smoothie range offers an excellent source of essential vitamins, minerals, nutrients & important antioxidants. It does not contain any weight loss accelerants, caffeine, gluten and is dairy free. It is also a non Genetically Modified product!

    To learn more about our smoothies – click here.

    To purchase one of our smoothies – click here.

    How to stay motivated to lose weight

    The Healthy Mummy

    We have an amazing team of 10 writers at the Healthy Mummy that are all dedicated to getting you the best stories, information and content.

    Join Us On Social

    Article Categories

    • 💪 Weight Loss
    • 🤰 Pregnancy
    • 🍛 Recipes
    • ❤️ Health
    • 👩‍👧‍👦 Lifestyle
    • 👭 Community
    • 🔥 Results
    • 🏃‍♀️ Exercise

    How to stay motivated to lose weight

    How to stay motivated to lose weight

    Are you part of the
    28 Day Challenge?

    Don’t miss out. Join millions of mums and take control of your body and life. You’ll see results in 28 days while saving money and eating delicious family-friendly food.

    You might also be interested in

    This mum no longer hides from the camera – how Samantha lost 28kg!

    5 mums lose almost 100kg between them following The Healthy Mummy

    How cutting down on sugar will help you lose weight

    WOWSERS! These 5 women have lost nearly 70kg combined in JUST 12 weeks!

    Meet the incredible WINNER of our latest 12 Week Challenge

    Newsletter

    Daily Healthy Recipe Newsletter

    Delicious recipe ideas plus fitness tips and support, delivered to your inbox.

    Subscribe now to get a Free Family Friendly Recipe Pack.

    Thanks for sharing your email with us.

    You’ll be hearing from us soon.

    Join our Online Community of over 1,000,000 Healthy Mummy’s!

    • The Healthy Mummy
      • About Us
      • Our Team
      • Reviews
      • Competitions
      • Affiliate Programme
      • Refer A Friend
      • FAQ
    • Information
      • Contact Us
      • Terms & Conditions
      • Privacy Policy
      • Find a Consultant
    • Community
      • Our Community
      • Facebook Group
      • 28 Day Challenge Group
      • New Mums Support Group
    • Shop Online
      • Shop
      • 28 Day Challenge
      • Recipe Books
      • Smoothies
      • Packs
    • My Account
      • Subscriptions
      • Orders
      • Challenge Login
      • Login
      • View My Points
      • Get $10 off your next order

    © 2022 The Healthy Mummy. All Rights Reserved.

    So, you’ve decided to lose some weight. Good for you! The effort you’re putting into your health is something to celebrate and be proud of.

    However, everyone knows that getting fit isn’t easy, and it’s hard to keep going when things get tough. Here are a few tips to staying on track, breaking through discouragement and keeping your motivation in motion.

    How to stay motivated to lose weight

    1. Whenever you start working out and eating right, generally you will notice results early. It’s very encouraging to see the number on the scale dropping and feeling your way into those jeans that didn’t fit before. However, eventually, you’ll hit a plateau. The old workout isn’t working and the scale won’t budge.

    It’s totally normal. It’s part of the process. Don’t be discouraged.

    2. Instead, know the plateau and build a game plan for it. Change up your diet for a few weeks and see what happens. Add new elements to your workout routine. You can push through that plateau without breaking your stride.

    3. It’s one thing to keep a journal of your weight loss journey, but you can take it to the next level by making it an online blog. Think of it like an accountability system. When you have other people checking in on your progress, you’ll be motivated to stay on track and update your readers about your struggles and your triumphs. Plus, you can link up with others on similar journeys and get encouragement. So, don’t go it alone. Be part of an online community.

    4. When I’m training for a race, I love to watch movies and read books about other people attempting great things. I watch Rocky or read up on triathletes doing the Ironman competition. You can stay motivated if you surround yourself with entertainment that inspires you to keep working hard.

    5. Every workout and nutrition regimen needs some slack. If you chain yourself to nothing but salads and treadmills, you will burn out fast. Leave some wiggle room in your weight loss plan. Have a cheat day. Eat a cookie. Take Sundays off from the gym. In other words, give yourself a break. If you want to make weight management a lifestyle, it needs to be something that you can realistically do every day.

    6. If I had a dime for every time I’ve heard a woman criticize herself, I’d solve the national debt crisis. We can be so cruel towards ourselves, but it doesn’t have to be that way.

    Negative talk will sink your ship and undermine your progress. Stay positive by speaking positive. Every day, find time to look at yourself in the mirror and say out loud how beautiful you are. When you have self-love, it builds you up and gives you the courage and the fortitude for the journey ahead.

    Author: Jennifer E. Jones is the Inspiration Editor, a marathon runner and firm believer that whole, healthy living includes the occasional cookie.

    How to stay motivated to lose weight

    How to stay motivated to lose weight

    Story for Starts at 60: Grow your bank balance, not your waistline: financial reward helps you lose more weight

    It’s the first week of your new diet and you’re doing everything right – cooking healthy meals, saying no to that second glass of wine, and taking the grandkids out for a walk instead of ice cream.

    Fast forward a few weeks and you feel yourself pressing the snooze button when it’s time to go for your morning walk, and treats are making their way back into the shopping trolley. You are generally just giving in to that urge to slink back to tempting old habits.

    Thanks to new research from Australia’s national science agency, CSIRO, we no longer have to succumb to this all too-familiar-fate.

    CSIRO has found what it takes to stay motivated, and in turn, lose more weight. The research revealed that personal accountability, coupled with incentives and rewards, is a key motivator for achieving weight loss.

    CSIRO Total Wellbeing Dietitian Pennie McCoy said “Finding motivation to lose weight can be tough at the best of times – so it’s not surprising that many Aussies have put their health on the backburner after a particularly rough few months!”

    Pennie suggests that people look for financial or incentive-based inspiration to motivate them to keep at it.

    Top tips for staying motivated when losing weight:

    Alongside following a program that is backed by evidence and offers a reward, having realistic expectations and tapping into support are among the many tips and tricks at your disposal to cope when motivation plummets, says Pennie:

    1. Don’t go it alone – enlisting the support of family, friends or co-workers, can be a source of inspiration – so, don’t be afraid to ask others for help. Making dietary and exercise changes and maintaining them is always easier in company. Another great motivating force is the internet. There’s a variety of forums that allow you to join in discussions, start your own chat groups, share recipes, and generally encourage each other.
    1. Set realistic expectations – weight loss takes time, but with the right tools and support, realistic goals can be achieved. Find out what a realistic target is for your weight loss journey and be flexible to adjust your expectations as you go.
    1. Personalise your motivation – tie your motivation to improving your diet, exercise, or weight to something that you love and makes you feel good. For example, reward yourself for losing 1kg with a new outfit.

    How to stay motivated to lose weight

    The right weight loss motivation is important if you want to be successful.

    Do you have a hard time staying motivated when it comes to losing weight? You’re not alone. Many people find it difficult to stick with a diet or exercise plan long-term. The key is to find ways to motivate and inspire you. In this blog post, we’ll share some tips on how to stay motivated when it comes to losing weight.

    1. Recognize your reasons why you want to lose weight

    There are many reasons why you want to lose weight. Maybe you feel that you’d be healthier at a lower weight, or you want to improve your appearance. Whatever your reasons, it’s important to figure out your weight loss motivation before you begin trying to lose weight.

    This will help you stay on track when things get tough and give you something to focus on. So take some time to think about why you want to lose weight and what motivates you to start this journey. If you’re clear about your motivation, you’re more likely to achieve your weight loss goal.

    2. Setting a realistic and achievable weight loss goal is important for your weight loss motivation

    How to stay motivated to lose weight

    Your motivation can be difficult to maintain. During the weight loss process, it’s important to set a realistic and achievable weight loss goal. This goal will help you maintain your motivation. A realistic and achievable weight loss goal can be something different for everyone. For example, if you want to lose 20 pounds, a weight loss goal of 2 pounds per week may be realistic and achievable for you.

    If you want to lose 100 pounds, a weight loss goal of 10 pounds per week may be right for you. It’s important to find a weight loss goal that fits you and your lifestyle. Setting a realistic and attainable weight loss goal will keep you motivated on your weight loss journey.

    Have you heard of SMART goals? Weight loss goals should be SMART – Specific, Measurable, Achievable, Relevant, and Time-bound.

    Weight loss motivation will be higher if the goal meets these criteria. For example, instead of setting a goal to “lose weight,” set a goal to “lose 5% of my body weight by May 1.” This goal is specific (lose 5% of body weight), measurable (with a scale), achievable (5% is a modest amount of weight to lose in 6 weeks), relevant (improve fitness and health), and time-bound (May 1).

    Setting SMART weight loss goals this way increases the likelihood that you’ll reach your goal, and that provides excellent motivation. Achieving small goals along the way will help you maintain your motivation to lose weight.

    3. Create an action plan with concrete steps to achieve your weight loss goal

    Losing weight can be a difficult and daunting task, but it’s important to remember that it’s possible to achieve your weight loss goal with the right motivation and an action plan.

    First, it’s important that you set realistic and achievable weight loss goals.

    Next, you need to create an action plan that includes specific steps you’ll take to reach your goal weight. This may include changing your diet, increasing your activity level, and/or tracking your progress with weight loss aids and tools.

    The key to success is to stay motivated. Find weight loss motivation in things that are important to you, like your health, your appearance, or your quality of life.

    With the right motivation and action plan, you can reach your weight loss goal and become healthier.

    4. Find the weight loss motivation from a support group or online community

    How to stay motivated to lose weight

    One of the hardest things about losing weight is staying motivated. It can be easy to lose sight of your goals and give up when the going gets tough. One of the best ways to stay on track is to find a support group or online community of people who also want to lose weight. These groups can encourage you and provide accountability.

    They can be a great resource to track your progress and share tips and advice. Whether you’re looking for a weight loss buddy or a larger support network, there are many options to help you reach your goals.

    5. Celebrating your successes, no matter how small, will keep you motivated to lose weight

    Anyone who’s ever tried to lose weight knows it’s not easy. Often there are plateaus where the weight just won’t budge no matter what you do. At times like that, it’s often hard to get motivated.

    When you feel stuck, it’s important to celebrate every success, no matter how small. Maybe you didn’t lose any weight this week, but you managed to stick to your diet and exercise plan. That’s a reason to celebrate! Or you may have lost a few pounds, but still haven’t reached your goal weight.

    Every step in the right direction is worth celebrating. Taking the time to celebrate your big and small successes will help you stay motivated to lose weight.

    6. Don’t give up when you have a setback – just get back on track and keep going.

    Staying motivated can be tricky. If you suffer a setback, it can be easy to feel like you’ve failed and want to give up. But losing weight is a journey, not a destination, and there will be ups and downs along the way. The most important thing is to get back on track after a setback and keep going.

    That may mean making some changes to your weight loss plan, but it doesn’t mean giving up altogether. So don’t beat yourself up if you make a mistake – just get back on track and keep pursuing your goals.

    Motivation is the key to success. Find something that inspires you to keep going, even when things get tough. This can be a role model, a friend who also wants to lose weight, or even a picture of you when you reached your goal weight. Whatever it is, find something that helps you stay motivated and on track. And remember, even if you have a bad day or week, don’t give up! Just pick up the pace again and keep moving toward your goal weight.

    How to stay motivated to lose weight

    In conclusion:

    Losing weight isn’t easy. Weight loss motivation takes dedication, hard work and perseverance. But with the right tools and resources, and the motivation to keep going, you can reach your goal weight. These tips will help you stay on track and keep you motivated to lose weight. Don’t give up if you have a setback – just pick up the pace again and keep going.

    MOTIVATION is the key factor that determines whether or not you’ll be successful on your fitness or weight loss journey. Here’s how to stay motivated and make sure you don’t quit.

    Arthur Chatto leads HIIT workout with Bound Fitness

    We use your sign-up to provide content in ways you’ve consented to and to improve our understanding of you. This may include adverts from us and 3rd parties based on our understanding. You can unsubscribe at any time. More info

    Working out, eating better and trying to lose weight are really difficult and require a lot of willpower. Your motivation to achieve your goal might feel stronger at some times than others… So, what do you do when you feel like throwing in the towel? Express.co.uk chatted to Ray Penamante, Head Trainer at F45 Camden to find out his top six tips on fitness motivation and how to ensure you don’t quit.

    Related articles

    Visual reminders

    Sometimes just wanting to lose weight or get fitter isn’t enough to actually see the process through.

    You must remember ‘why’ you want to do this and sometimes visual reminders can help.

    Ray said: “Uplifting reminders like positive quotes or photos of those good times in previous summers darted around the house is a great way to keep you on track and inspired.”

    Weight loss: Losing weight is hard and it’s easy to give up (Image: Getty)

    Weight loss: Don’t use the word ‘but’, it only allows you to make excuses! (Image: Getty)

    READ MORE

    Mindset

    Change the narrative going on in your mind and don’t allow excuses to take over.

    Ray explained: “Sentences starting or ending with the word ‘but’ tend to lead to excuses.

    “Replace ‘but’ with ‘get it done’ or ‘what’s the worst that can happen’.

    “These phrases provoke positive action and will stop you from making an unproductive decision.”

    Weight loss: Make it a habit (Image: Getty)

    Build the habits

    You have to make exercise a priority and make it a habit in your routine.

    Ray said: “Plan your week ahead with exercise in your top three in the to-do list daily, ticking it off when completed.”

    Make it fun

    You can stick to the same routine every day if it’s easier, but try to keep it interesting.

    Ray suggested: “Load your favourite song finding a buzz word in the lyrics.

    Who is the most motivated, passionate person you know or admire, whose dedication inspires you?

    What is it that empowers them to be so dedicated? What helps them push through when they’re tired? What’s the “why” behind their efforts?

    Chances are your answer isn’t “to lose weight to fit into a new outfit for vacation,” or to “get a raise.” Motivation based on awards, punishments, or achieving a desired outcome—called extrinsic motivation—can be great in the short term, but it doesn’t usually last. When the season changes and the special event is over, or the reward is in hand, the motivation to sustain the behavior drops. That’s why it’s often hard to stay motivated to lose weight after you meet these types of goals.

    More likely, what motivates the person you thought of is “they love what they do,” “they want to make a difference in the world,” “they’re inspired by their faith,” or “it’s just who they are.” These are examples of intrinsic motivation, when you’re motivated from within to behave driven by what you enjoy, how you define yourself, or what connects to your values. Unfortunately, many goals, including weight loss, require doing tasks you’re not intrinsically motivated to do. Using the following strategies can help you increase your long-term motivation to accomplish your goals.

    Build on your self-identity

    How to stay motivated to lose weightDo you know someone who—no matter the situation, how much sleep they get, or how bad the weather is—will not miss their 5-mile morning run … and also has a “Eat, Sleep, Run, Repeat” T-shirt. Or do you know someone who loves yoga or CrossFit who also describes themselves on social media as a “yogi” and/or posts their WOD (workout of the day) results? One reason that can explain these T-shirts or social media posts relates to increasing motivation. Self-identifying with a particular behavior is an incredibly powerful motivator. The behavior just becomes “what you do.” The decision to either go for a run or watch TV is already made…because “I’m a runner!”

    If you don’t already self-identify with a healthy behavior to reach your goals, you can try to develop one. For example, if you want to start drinking water instead of soda, start saying to yourself when tempted with soda, “I’m a water drinker,” or “I don’t drink soda.” It might seem odd at first, but the more you say it and do the desired behavior to back it up, the more likely this will become a rule that’s part of how you see yourself.

    Connect to your values

    If making “water drinker” a part of your identity feels off to you, try another strategy: Connect the behavior to a core value you already have. For example, if you value “being a great parent and role model to my kids,” you can leverage that value by reflecting on how living a healthy lifestyle helps you to live out that value, such as “having more energy helps me be more present,” or “living longer will let me be there for my kids longer.” When you’re challenged to choose water over soda, you can now reflect on how important being a good parent is to you for the push you need.

    To help identify your core values, read HPRC’s Azimuth check: Are you living your values?

    Learn your signature strengths

    Signature strengths are character traits that make you feel energized, motivated, and true to yourself. You feel at your best when you are using your signature strengths. Finding ways to use your signature strengths to act in the ways needed to accomplish your goal will increase your motivation and performance, and help you to enjoy those behaviors. For example, if one of your signature strengths is curiosity, you could change your morning run to explore different areas. If you’re creative and playful, you could come up with different games to play during your run; it could be as simple as how many pigeons you can spot during each run.

    By finding a way to use your signature strengths, you’re helping to make the desired behavior part of what you do, rather than going against your nature. A simple shift can be a major improvement to your motivation. Try HPRC’s Use signature strengths to be your best self worksheet to discover your signature strengths and how to use them to accomplish your goals.

    Moving forward

    Once you’ve reviewed the 3 strategies, choose at least one to try to increase your motivation. Try it for a couple weeks and if it doesn’t work, try another. Discovering how to motivate yourself is often a trial and error journey. As you learn what really motivates you, you can apply it to many aspects of your life.

    Published on: December 9, 2019

    How to stay motivated to lose weight

    We’ve all been there. You skip a workout, then two, then three. Suddenly that momentum you had going with your fitness routine is nowhere in sight.

    Many people think that the physical act of working out is the most difficult part of maintaining a fitness routine. However, I find that most people I work with struggle with the mental motivation. Staying motivated after a few days off is tough; it messes with the flow of your workout schedule and can make it hard to get back into it.

    As a weight-loss coach for almost 15 years, I’ve come up with some strategies that I use with my clients to help them get back on the horse if they’ve fallen off.

    So how can you make sure missing a workout one day doesn’t turn into an entire week? Here are five tips to keep in mind.

    1. Figure out the reason why you missed the workout

    Did you miss it because something truly came up, or did you find an excuse to skip your workout because you weren’t looking forward to it? Maybe you missed it because you didn’t have enough time or because inclement weather didn’t allow for your walk or bike ride. Answering this question truthfully will allow you to understand the changes you need to make to ensure your workout happens. If you weren’t looking forward to your workout, it may be time to change it up and find a form of exercise you can get excited about. If a factor like time constraints or weather prevented your workout, it’s time to explore some other options that you can have on the back burner when plan A doesn’t work out. Create a list of plan B workouts that are shorter in length and can be done anywhere. This will leave you with no excuses as to why you can’t get a workout in!

    2. Ask yourself: Am I doing a workout I really enjoy?

    One major factor of remaining motivated to continue an activity is enjoyment. According to research, those who perform exercise because they enjoy it or want to expand their skills are more likely to work out than those who perform exercise to reach body-related goals. This doesn’t mean that you shouldn’t have body-related goals, but it does mean that enjoying your workouts is key to maintaining motivation. If you find a type of movement that you really enjoy, exercise won’t feel like a chore and it will be easier to pick right back up where you left off if you have to miss a day.

    3. Set smaller goals

    You may be struggling with motivation because you’re not reaching your goals quickly enough. This happens to all of us, and it’s normal. When you work hard and fail to see results, it’s frustrating. Instead of one long-term goal, I recommend setting smaller milestones for yourself that will keep you motivated on your journey. Instead of a lofty weight-loss goal, like losing 30 pounds. Set incremental goals, like losing 1-2 pounds a week. This will give you something to celebrate each week and every time you hit the small milestone it will motivate you to stick with it. And don’t forget that there are many signs beyond the scale that your fitness routine is working. Keep an eye out for these signs that you’re making progress.

    4. Just walk

    If you’re struggling to find the motivation to get a workout in after a few days off, aiming for a 40-minute HIIT class may not be the best plan of attack. Instead, choose an easy, accessible form of exercise that doesn’t take as much mental strength to convince yourself to do. It’s about just getting your body moving again. My suggestion? Lace up your sneakers and start walking. Tell yourself you will start with a five-minute walk around the block. Chances are, that five minutes will turn into 10, and then 20. With a solid walk under your belt today, tackling a HIIT or strength-training routine tomorrow will feel less daunting.

    5. Take a rest day.

    It may seem odd to recommend taking another day off after missing a workout. But sometimes missing a workout happens for a reason: being overworked. If you’re not really into your workout or you’re feeling tired or sore, this may be your body telling you to schedule in a rest day every once in a while. Take the time to reevaluate your schedule and really listen to your body. Consider scheduling in some active recovery days in between more strenuous workouts where you do yoga, stretching or take a walk. After this break, you will feel rejuvenated and ready to tackle your workouts again.

    Stephanie Mansour is a contributing health and fitness writer for TODAY. She is a certified personal trainer, yoga and Pilates instructor and weight-loss coach for women. She hosts “Step It Up with Steph” on PBS. Join her complimentary health and weight-loss challenge and follow her for daily inspiration on Instagram and in her new app.

    How to hire a sex crime attorney

    How to hire a sex crime attorney

    If you have been accused of any kind of sex crime, you need to hire an attorney immediately. The possible impact on your life of a conviction for a sexual offense will be long and damaging.

    Not just any lawyer ill do. You need a sex crime attorney with a proven track record of helping people in situations like yours. This area of criminal defense has many landmines, so you need an experienced practitioner in your corner.

    Here are seven reasons why you need an attorney with experience in sex crimes if you face this kind of criminal charge.

    1. Statutory Crimes

    Definitions of sex crimes often hinge on the concept of consent: if both parties consent to sexual activity, there is no rape. Thus cases often focus on whether the person claiming rape consented or not.

    However, statutory rape is defined by statute. This means the circumstances of the situation and whether both parties consented, are irrelevant. There is no need to establish consent, or use of force or violence.

    Each state defines statutory rape differently. However, in all states, statutory rape is defined by when one person is legally below the age of consent; in the state of Texas, this is anyone younger than age 17.

    A skilled sex crime attorney will know that there are certain exceptions to this rule. If you are accused of illegal sex with a minor, you may be eligible for the “Romeo and Juliet” exception if you yourself are less than three years older than the minor in question.

    2. Reputational Damage

    You need a lawyer with experience with sex crime defense if you are charged with sexual assault, rape, indecent activity, or other sex-related claims. A good lawyer will help you to negotiate with the prosecutor and possibly reduce or throw out the charges.

    An experienced sex crime attorney knows the damage that can be done to a client who is accused of rape or similar crime. Even someone who is found not guilty may face an irreparable black mark on their reputation that can take years to remove, if ever.

    You need to be able to discuss with your lawyer the legal ramifications of your case, and also how to possibly contain and manage the public relations fall out that may occur in the wake of these allegations.

    3. Incendiary Trial

    Because of the nature of sex crimes, their trials seem to get a lot of community and media attention. There is often sordid news coverage of salacious details.

    Anyone who participates in a trial about sex crimes can expect to be asked many uncomfortable questions. You may be asked in detail about the event in question. You may also have to answer questions about your past sexual history and other very personal topics.

    When you are represented by an attorney, they will prepare you for any testimony you may need to give in either a deposition or in court. They will let you know what to expect, and how to answer these questions. They may give tips on staying calm on the stand.

    They will also let you know how to conduct yourself during the trial, before the judge and your accuser. They will represent your interests and speak up on your behalf when statements are made or accusations leveled that are out of bounds.

    Court is not an arena where you want to be on your own. You need a skilled advocate in your corner.

    3. Strict Penalties

    You face serious consequences if you are convicted of a sex crime. In Texas, sexual assault is a second-degree felony and is punishable by a prison sentence between ten and twenty years. Aggravated assault carries a prison term of between five and 99 years. This stricter charge can be used against people charged with sex crimes against children.

    You also face stiff penalties for sex crimes other than rape. These might include indecent exposure, invasive recording, electronic transmission of sexually explicit material, and voyeurism. Convictions for these crimes may result in prison sentences, fines, or both, depending on the circumstances and your criminal history.

    Your lawyer will know how to mitigate these punishments. Your past may play an important role. If you made one youthful mistake, your lawyer may be able to negotiate a reduced sentence.

    4. Sex Crime Registry

    One of the most burdensome punishments imposed on those convicted of sex crimes is the sex crime registry. Some sex crime punishments in Texas call for lifelong registration.

    Chapter 62 of the Texas Code of Criminal Procedure requires sex offenders to register with their local law enforcement. Your name, address, photo, and the nature of your crime become public record. Failure to comply can result in revoked probation, and arrest.

    Some crimes require registration for less than a lifetime; however, it can still be as long as ten years. This time period begins after you serve any prison sentence.

    Being on the sex offender registry will affect your ability to get a job, buy or rent a home, and have access to your children.

    You need a good lawyer to help you negotiate with prosecutors to avoid the possibly life-long consequences of getting placed on this list.

    5. Possible Civil Liability

    If you are accused of a sex crime, you will not only face criminal charges. You may also face a civil suit from the person who accused you.

    A civil suit can be bolstered by a criminal conviction, but it is not necessary. That means, even if you are found not guilty in criminal court, your accuser may still come after you for financial compensation.

    Talk to your lawyer about how you might be able to insulate yourself from this kind of suit. Many accusers will come after their alleged attackers seeking high amounts of damages for emotional distress.

    6. Academic and Professional Impact

    If you are enrolled in higher education, you may face expulsion or suspension if you are even accused of a sex crime.

    If you are looking for a job or seeking to pass a professional exam, a sex crime conviction on your record may prevent you from ever achieving your professional goals.

    Your lawyer can advise on how to minimize the impact of sex crime accusations and convictions so your entire future is not ruined.

    7. Getting Charges Reduced or Dropped

    A skilled sex crime attorney can negotiate with the court and the DA’s office to drop or reduce charges. She may even be able to negotiate a charge that removes the potential of the sex crimes registry, which would make a big difference in how you get through this crisis.

    You need a lawyer to poke holes in the testimony of your accuser, challenge the facts presented by the state, and present mitigating circumstances that may help you.

    You Need a Sex Crime Attorney If You’re Accused of a Sexual Offense

    An experienced sex crime attorney can make all the difference in the rest of your life if you have been accused of this kind of offense. The stakes are too high to do anything other than retain the best lawyer you can find.

    For more information on sex crimes defense, contact us.

    • Call Now
    • Practice Areas +
      • Defense Attorney Services
      • Animal Cruelty
      • Criminal Law
      • Domestic Violence
      • Drug Crimes
      • DUI / DWI
      • Occupational Drivers
      • Probation Parole
    • Sex Crimes Law +
      • Sexual Assault
      • Child Molestation Attorney Services
      • Sex Offender
      • Statutory Rape
    • Bail Bonds
    • Blog
    • About
    • Resources
      • County Courts
      • Online Payment
      • FAQs
    • Awards
    • Reviews
    • Contact

    Call for a free consultation

    • Call Now
    • Practice Areas +
      • Defense Attorney Services
      • Animal Cruelty
      • Criminal Law
      • Domestic Violence
      • Drug Crimes
      • DUI / DWI
      • Occupational Drivers
      • Probation Parole
    • Sex Crimes Law +
      • Sexual Assault
      • Child Molestation Attorney Services
      • Sex Offender
      • Statutory Rape
    • Bail Bonds
    • Blog
    • About
    • Resources
      • County Courts
      • Online Payment
      • FAQs
    • Awards
    • Reviews
    • Contact

    Knowing When It’s Time To Hire a Sexual Assault Lawyer in Plano

    These days, people turn to lawyers to help them with a variety of different legal issues, and sometimes you might need a sexual assault lawyer in Plano. No matter what your reason is for needing an attorney, finding the right one can be quite difficult. The following article has some great advice that will help you find a lawyer who has you in their best interest.

    If you already have a great lawyer, ask them for advice. They can either tell you that they can take on your case, or point you in the direction of a lawyer who will help you out. When you already have a lawyer you trust, there is no reason to search out advice elsewhere.

    How to hire a sex crime attorney

    Use your professional network to find a reliable business lawyer. Companies who provide lawyers with services will probably be able to provide you with several good lawyer choices. For example, if you’re dealing with small business law, you should speak with a banker, an estate broker, an accountant, and the like. They can tell you from experience who is good.

    Do your research prior to hiring any lawyer. You may get the itch to get it over with and just choose someone from the Yellow Pages. Don’t do it! You won’t be happy with the outcome. Instead, research lawyers who could perform best for you. Track down some referrals (they may be online) and get an idea about his or her personality and track record. It’ll make your situation much better.

    Tips For Hiring Best Sex Offense Lawyers in Plano

    If you have been charged with a sex crime, are in an accident or think you need legal help, you need to hire a lawyer . The amount of time that you wait to make this decision can be a critical factor. You want to have someone on your side that knows the law. The last thing you want is a long and life-changing jail sentence that could have been avoided.

    Know any fees and costs before signing anything. Remember, it’s your job to ask questions in regard to the costs. Ask every question you can think of, and look through every document you are given. Your lawyer is not responsible for you being quick on the draw when it comes to signing official paperwork.

    If you need a lawyer, you need to make sure you find one that is in the proper jurisdiction. Most of the time you will be able to find a lawyer that is licensed to practice in the state you live in. Make sure they are qualified to practice law within your state.

    Make sure you’re comfortable with the lawyer. Lawyers not only need a comprehensive knowledge of the law. They also need to be personable. If your lawyer doesn’t do that, you need a new one. Prepare yourself for a meeting with a lawyer. They often charge people hourly and can be expensive. You’ll be charged for time on the phone, when they look for paperwork, etc. When you’re prepared, you will take up less of their time, and thus pay less in legal fees.

    Call Kent Starr For Quality Legal Defense

    Everyone wants to find the best legal representation for the best price. However, remember that many times you get what you pay for and you surely want the best outcome of your case. Do some research about the reputation of several different lawyers as well as asking acquaintances for personal recommendations.

    You are paying your lawyer, so do not feel like you are stuck with them. If you do not feel as if they are doing a good job, giving you good advice or you just do not like them, don’t hesitate to fire them. There are plenty of other lawyers that will work out better for you.

    How to hire a sex crime attorney

    People use a lawyer for many different reasons. No two cases are the same, and it’s incredibly vital to locate an attorney that can meet your needs. When you find the right one, he or she can make your life a whole lot easier. Make sure you implement the tips and tricks mentioned in the article above when you are conducting a search for an attorney. It is one decision you need to make right.

    If you or a loved one are in legal trouble and face criminal charges, you probably have a lot running through your head. One of the most pressing concerns is likely when to hire a criminal defense attorney, or further, whether you should hire one at all.

    There is plenty of evidence that suggests that the best route is to hire a criminal defense attorney as soon as possible. Having a defense attorney early on in the process can help better secure your freedom and save you a lot of time and money in the long run. In addition, depending on the nature of your case, you’ll need someone to assist you in reaching the most favorable resolution and protecting your constitutional rights along the way. With that in mind, we cannot express the importance of hiring a criminal defender enough.

    Whether you receive charges or accusations of a crime in Colorado, having the experience of someone like Denver criminal defense attorney Jeff Weeden can be crucial to the success of your case. To address your specific legal situation and how he may be able to help you, call WeedenLaw at 720-307-4330 right away.

    What Does a Criminal Defense Attorney Do?

    Criminal defense lawyers (both private and court-appointed) have a lot on their plate with every case they take on. Some of their duties include research, analyzing the evidence against their clients, and attempting to reach deals with the prosecutors. Bail may decrease significantly and charges and sentences may lighten as a result of these agreements. The negotiation (and success) of these kinds of deals has risen in prominence lately as a result of things like political and public pressure, overcrowded jails, and congested court calendars.

    Other duties of a criminal defense lawyer include questioning witnesses, analyzing the prosecutor’s case, reviewing police procedures, gathering evidence, and assisting in the formulation of pleas. Of course, if for some reason a plea deal cannot be reached, the defendant will receive an attorney’s representation at trial. If this is the case, your attorney can help you prepare for what to say to a judge at sentencing.

    Criminal defense attorneys also assist the defendant in dealing with the frustrations and concerns that come with a criminal case court proceeding. With this, they can offer more personalized services by providing a realistic assessment of the probable results and potential sentences.

    How Much is a Criminal Defense Lawyer?

    “How much will this cost?” is likely one of the first things you’ll ask when considering hiring a defense lawyer. How much criminal defense lawyers charge for their services depends on a number of things. Variables include the case’s complexity, the attorney’s expertise, and the region in which the case plays out.

    It also depends on how your attorney handles their billing process. Some attorneys may choose the route of hourly billing, wherein the cost depends on every hour your lawyer spends working on your case. Other attorneys may choose to charge by the case, meaning there is a fixed fee depending on the type of offense in question.

    Whether they bill by the hour or by the case, many defense attorneys require defendants to pay a retainer fee before they begin working for them. In this case, the lawyer should provide the client with periodical statements detailing how much time they have spent on the case, what work has been done, and how much of the retainer has been utilized up to a certain point. If a defendant’s account balance approaches zero, the lawyer will likely seek additional payment.

    Criminal Defense Attorney Fees

    You’ve probably heard the expression “you get what you pay for.” This is true for many things, especially lawyers. When compared to a state-appointed counsel, an experienced attorney like Jeff Weeden may be more expensive, but it pays off in the end. When you’re facing a criminal charge in Colorado, you could be in for a lot of trouble. It might take months of hard labor to achieve the greatest possible outcome for your case, and that will cost you money. However, we know how important your freedom is to you, and that is exactly what your criminal defense attorney is working so hard to get.

    Why Do I Need a Criminal Defense Lawyer ?

    Defending yourself against criminal charges or accusations, whether or not you are at fault, is a difficult and emotionally draining process. You’ll need someone with enough experience to guide you through the complexities and nuances of the American criminal justice system every step of the way. That’s why having a criminal defender on your side offers a sense of comfort and security that only comes with knowing someone is fighting hard for you.

    A criminal defense lawyer is also in the greatest position to negotiate any additional rights you may have, which may end up improving your potential outcome. In a criminal case, having an aggressive and experienced lawyer negotiate and barter for your rights can make all the difference.

    What’s more, a criminal defense lawyer can act as a go-between for you and the plaintiff. These lawyers have the necessary skills to approach the other side and speak reasonably on your behalf. In the best-case scenario, the opposing party agrees to withdraw the accusations and negotiate a mutually beneficial agreement outside of the court system.

    When to Hire a Lawyer for Criminal Defense

    While having an attorney there from the very moment you’re thrown in the back of a patrol car would be ideal, it’s simply not possible. Instead, you should contact a defense counsel as quickly as you are able to, which is often after you’ve been released from police custody.

    One of the most significant advantages of getting legal counsel early on is that a skilled defense attorney may be able to have your criminal charges list dropped long before you receive official charges. Additionally, the longer you wait to hire representation, the more time the other side has to prepare their case against you. If you are facing serious criminal charges, hiring a defense lawyer ASAP should be your top priority.

    Criminal Lawyers Near Me

    When it comes to when to hire a criminal defense attorney, there’s no such thing as too soon. The sooner you can enlist their help, the greater your chances of avoiding an uneven legal fight that may inevitably land you in jail.

    Each crime has its own set of circumstances that characterize it. As such, finding a good criminal lawyer who is willing to fight for you is what will essentially determine the outcome of your case. When you hire Jeff Weeden, you’ll get a legal professional who has experience in both Colorado state and federal courtrooms. He can take on a variety of criminal cases, from petty offenses to homicide cases. The bottom line is this: with more time to work on your case, Jeff Weeden will be better equipped to put together the greatest possible defense for you. So, don’t put it off any longer. Fill out our simple online contact form or call 720-307-4330 to schedule a free consultation with an experienced Colorado criminal defense attorney today.

    How to hire a sex crime attorney

    A sex crime attorney can be crucial in your defense. The charges against you can be serious, but you have rights as well. An experienced sex crime attorney will know how to present evidence to give a jury a reasonable doubt, which prevents them from convicting you. The defense lawyer will also use DNA evidence to help prove the accused’s innocence. Using evidence of character can also be an effective tactic, as it can convince the jury to reduce the severity of the charges.

    If you’re being accused of a sex crime, it’s important to hire an experienced legal professional to defend you.

    These crimes carry a significant social stigma and carry much more severe penalties. Additionally, an allegation of such an offense can damage your reputation, so you’ll need to hire a criminal defense attorney to protect your honor. Fortunately, there are several good options for you. Below is a list of some benefits of hiring a sex crime attorney:

    First, it’s important to hire a sex crime attorney who understands the nature of sex crimes. Sexual assault is a particularly serious crime. It can involve child pornography or cybercrimes. It may even involve prostitution. Finally, a sex crime attorney will know how to defend your honor. Moreover, he can help you get your restitution from the prosecutors. A sex crime attorney has the experience necessary to defend you in court.

    Having a sex crime attorney on your side is essential.

    While you may be feeling anxious and frightened, the police are not on your side. Their job is to identify the perpetrators and incriminate them. Whatever you say can be used against you in court. You must contact a qualified sex crimes attorney who can represent your rights. And, if you’re accused of a sex crime, the only way to protect your rights is to work with an attorney who specializes in such cases.

    A sex crime attorney understands the unique nature of the charges against you. These charges are considered heinous and carry a huge stigma. An alleged sex crime lawyer will work hard to find any flaws in the prosecution’s evidence and make sure the charges are dropped in court. In addition to defending your rights, a sex crime attorney will also be your advocate in court.

    A sex crime attorney will also be able to assist you with the process of obtaining a sex offender registry.

    This database contains information about a person’s identity, age, distinguishing characteristics, and sex crime. If a person is on this registry, they will face difficulties finding a job or a place to live. In such cases, a sex crime attorney is essential to protect your rights.

    During a sex crime trial, a sex crime attorney will work to get the charges dropped. This is an important step in defending your rights as a sex offender. Not only does a sex crime lawyer fight for a client’s rights, but he or she will also help protect the victim’s honor. If the victim is innocent, the sex offender should be released and the victim should be free.

    If the accused person is a victim of a sex crime, hiring a criminal defense attorney is essential.

    While sex crimes against children are highly condemned, false accusations can have a devastating effect on the accused’s life. The prosecutors are also a part of the scheme, which is why a sex crime attorney is critical to a victim’s case. If the victim is a child, hiring a sex crime attorney is even more crucial.

    The most important aspect of a sex crime attorney is his or her knowledge of the law. They will not let the charges against them affect their reputation. In addition to this, sex crimes are also incredibly serious. It is not enough to be accused of a sex crime and be left free. A sex crime attorney will help you fight the case and defend your honor. If the allegations against you are true, your sex crime defense lawyer will make the charges against you much more favorable.

    The charges against a sex crime can have devastating consequences for the victim. A sex crime attorney in Seattle will understand the sensitivity of this situation and will fight aggressively to protect his client’s rights. A sex crime lawyer in Seattle will fight to defend his or her client’s innocence until it is proven that the charges are true. The case will not only affect the person’s reputation, but it will also affect his or her reputation and character.

    The short answer is – immediately. When it comes to sex crimes in Michigan, you should never take a “wait and see” approach. Sex crimes are taken very seriously in Michigan and carry with them severe penalties including long periods of incarceration.

    Plus, sex crimes investigations are often extensive and could take weeks or months before any official charges are authorized. Authorized means an official charge against you, which usually begins when the investigating officer submitting their findings or report to the county prosecutor to review and approve, or authorize. If the prosecutor approves, the officer will then appear in court before a Judge or Magistrate and “swears to” a warrant for your arrest. Once the Judge or Magistrate sign it, there will now be a Felony Arrest Warrant for you.

    If you have done something that might make you susceptible to a Criminal Sexual Conduct (CSC) charge, or other sex crime or assault, if you are suspicious that someone may be making a complaint against you, and certainly if you have been contacted by police or law enforcement, you must consult and retain an experienced assault and sex crime attorney immediately.

    The ‘wait and see’ approach puts you and your attorney at a disadvantage. Essentially, the marathon has begun and law enforcement is potentially miles ahead while we are still at the starting line. The time prior to any official charge can be extremely beneficial to you, your attorney, and the overall outcome of the case.

    How Can an Experienced Sex Crimes Attorney Help?

    An experienced and qualified assault and sex crimes attorney can begin protecting your rights immediately after they are involved. An experienced sex crimes lawyer can also educate you on the process, begin collecting evidence, investigate the case, interview potential witnesses, and communicate with the investigators and law enforcement, and even the prosecuting attorney. They can also coordinate your appearance on the arrest warrant and avoid the embarrassment and fear of being arrested unexpectedly at home or at work.

    In many cases that we have handled, communication with investigating officer will at minimum allow us to stay informed as to status of the case or investigation. Whether the Report has been submitted to the prosecuting attorney requesting criminal charges, whether there are still outstanding search warrants, and whether a warrant is going to be sworn to and when. This allows us, and you, to stay informed and prepared.

    What Should I Do if I’m Contacted by the Police Before I’ve Retained a Lawyer?

    If you are contacted by police or law enforcement, it is always in your best interest to remain silent and refrain from any communications until you have an attorney. It is nearly always true that the police want to talk to you because they have insufficient evidence to charge you. They don’t bring you in for questioning to help you, or to give you a break. They come to talk to you or bring you in for questioning so that they can make out a case that will put you behind bars. Innocent until proven guilty does not apply during an investigation.

    For these reasons, speaking with a Detective or agreeing to an interview without an attorney is a mistake we, unfortunately, observe time and time again. You have an absolute right to remain silent, and you should always exercise this Fifth Amendment right. It is imperative to remain silent because anything you say will become part of the prosecutor’s case and will be used against you. Additionally, if statements are made to the police during questioning that is later deemed to have been false or misleading it will likely lead to more time behind bars. This is because such statements will be counted against you in calculating your sentencing guidelines. This means more potential jail or prison exposure, or even a separate criminal charge.

    What if the Police Don’t Read Me My Rights?

    When people think about their rights, they are usually thinking about what lawyers call “Miranda Rights.” The Miranda Rights arose out of a United States Supreme Court case called Miranda v. Arizona. This case was decided all the way back in 1966, and since this time its application and impact have been significantly lessened. Like the warrant requirement for searches and seizures, there are many exceptions to the rule. For example, Miranda may not apply to your initial interaction with the police because it is considered voluntary, part of a preliminary investigation, or non-custodial. For Miranda to apply, you must be in custody. This means you are not free to leave. Being in custody does not necessarily mean under arrest. Also, the information used by the police must have been adduced (be the result of) questioning by the police. If you simply volunteer information during interrogation, it can be used against you even if you are under arrest and being questioned.

    If you are facing possible prosecution for a sex crime in Michigan, you should not go through it alone. Hire an experienced sex crimes attorney to protect your rights, and to preserve your life. You have the right to remain silent, and you have the right to an attorney. If you have suspicions of a complaint against you or have been contacted by law enforcement, contact the Barone Defense Firm. Our Team is here for you.

    Arrested for a Sex Crime in Denver, Colorado?

    How to hire a sex crime attorney

    At Gerash Steiner Blanton, P.C., our Denver sex crimes lawyers know firsthand how hostile prosecutors, judges and juries can be when dealing with sex crime charges. Sex crimes have a stigma attached to them, and certain sex crime convictions come with a lifetime of embarrassing and intrusive reporting. If you or someone you care about is facing a sex charge, you should hire an experienced defense lawyer immediately.

    If you have been charged with any crime involving sexual impropriety in Colorado, you need an experienced defense team on your side. Contact our Denver sex crimes defense attorney to discuss your case.

    Denver Sex Crimes Defense Lawyer

    Attorney Daniel Gerash is a qualified defense lawyer capable of handling a variety of charges involving alleged sex crimes. With a proven record of trial success in medical malpractice, drug defense, and DUI cases, as well as an unwavering devotion to clients, Attorney Gerash and our criminal defense team proudly represent clients facing all types of sex crime charges.

    We have successfully handled cases involving:

    • Molestation
    • Sexual assault
    • Indecent exposure
    • Prostitution
    • Lewd conduct
    • Rape
    • All other forms of sexual abuse and sexual misconduct
    • Internet sex crimes, such as the possession or creation of child pornography.

    Why You Need to Choose Gerash Steiner Blanton, P.C. Today

    Even the rumor of a sex charge can result in employment termination or strained personal relationships. If you are facing investigation for a sex crime, it cannot be overstated how important it is that you hire an attorney. Without one, you likely face the maximum penalties associated with the offense.

    Some of the punishments associated with a sex crime conviction include:

    • Prison: Colorado has seriously harsh sentencing requirements for crimes involving sexual offenses. Recently, a man was sentenced to a minimum of 10 years in prison for consensual sex with a minor. The law is written in such a way that the convict must serve his entire minimum sentence and may be kept in prison longer if he is not found to be rehabilitated.
    • Sex Offender Registry: You must register with the Colorado Bureau of Investigation as a sex offender. Your name, address and photograph will appear on a website that the public can view without restriction. You may be eligible for removal from this list at a future time, usually at five-, 10- or 15-year intervals.

    Regardless of what specific charges you may be facing, all Colorado sex offenses are extremely serious and carry extreme penalties. Courts have been prone to hand out indeterminate life sentences leading to harsh decades in prison with almost no chance for parole. It is vital that you consult a knowledgeable attorney. At Gerash Steiner Blanton, P.C., we can help you protect your rights and stay out of prison.

    I would like to express my never-ending gratitude to Dan’s dedication to fighting for my freedom. I know that despite his professionalism that he couldn’t help but take my case personally because they all fervently believed in my innocence. This was not an easy case to defend, and Dan went above and beyond the call of duty to do the right thing. You saved my life!

    Call Our Denver Sex Crimes Lawyers for a Free Consultation

    Criminal sex offenses are prosecuted to the fullest extent of the law. Do not leave your legal defense to just anyone. Remember, just because you have been arrested does not mean that you will automatically be convicted of a crime. Your future could be dependent on your immediate choices after an arrest. Act decisively and call upon our legal team to protect your rights.

    Contact our criminal defense firm to discuss your case in a free consultation.

    Sex Crimes Defense from a Sex Crime Attorney in Harrisburg, PA.

    You need an Experienced and Aggressive Criminal Defense Attorney that has defended clients charged with a sex crime or sex crimes.

    As a Sex Crimes Defense Lawyer, I know that sex crimes are taken seriously by prosecutors, and have some of the toughest penalties. If you or a love one has been charged with a sex crime such as rape, sexual assault, statutory sexual assault or involuntary deviate sexual intercourse, you need to act quickly and retain an experienced attorney who is and aggressively defends people accused of a crime.

    How to hire a sex crime attorney

    You don’t have time to wait. Your life just changed in ways you can’t imagine. Call our office right now. We’ll talk with you for free during our initial consultation. No matter what direction you decide to take, you need to know the facts about how the legal system, employers and your future will be impacted by this sex crimes charge.

    Call right now at 717-737-3300

    At our firm, we provide trusted legal advice, and stand ready to assist you by offering a free case evaluation. Don’t wait… contact the The LawOffice of Roy Galloway, LLC now.

    In Pennsylvania, sex crimes not only carry tough prison sentences with the harshest sentence being life imprisonment, but individuals who are convicted of sex crimes are subject to embarrassment and stigma because their names become part of a sex offender registry that is online and available for the public to view.

    The sex offender registry is an online database that maintains personal information about offenders like their names, age, a color photograph of the offender, address, and the type of crime committed by the offender.

    How to hire a sex crime attorney

    In addition, Pennsylvania law requires sex offenders to notify the state police of any change of address, and the failure to report a change of address is a felony offense, which is punishable by up to 7 years in prison.

    If you are charged with a sex crime, you need to hire a zealous advocate who will fight to protect your rights. The Law Office of Roy Galloway, LLC can help you.

    Hire the Law Office of Roy Galloway, LLC to represent you

    At the Law Offices of Roy Galloway, LLC, we are committed to providing first class service to our clients, and focused on obtaining the best possible outcome for every client. With so much at stake, you cannot trust your future to anyone. Contact our firm now to speak with an experienced and aggressive Sex Crime Attorney in Harrisburg and to schedule a free no-obligation consultation.

    “Thanks for your compassion and professionalism. If not for your skilled advocacy, I may have been punished for a crime I did not commit.”

    When You Should Hire a Dayton Sex Crime Defense Attorney

    How to hire a sex crime attorney

    Getting arrested for a sex crime can be devastating, as sex crimes are punished severely in Ohio.

    With Megan’s Law, the Adam Walsh Act, and Ohio Senate Bill 10 being passed, anyone convicted of a sex crime is required to register as a sex offender, sometimes for the rest of their life.

    This is in addition to prison and fines. You need exceptional defenders in your corner.

    Why choose our sex crime lawyers?

    • Perfect 10.0 Superb Avvo Ratings
    • Former judge and former prosecutors fighting for you
    • Awards including Super Lawyers® and National Trial Lawyers: Top 100

    When it comes to a charge of sexual crimes, our Dayton criminal defense attorneys realize that people get jailed based on misinformation, misunderstood situations, and spiteful accusations.

    Our experienced sex crime lawyers in Dayton are ready to help you immediately deal with allegations of any sex crime. Contact Gounaris Abboud, LPA to discover how we can protect your reputation, freedom, and future.

    Trial-Tested Sex Crime Defense in Ohio

    Sex crimes can range from misdemeanor charges of sexual imposition or importuning to felony rape, sexual battery, or child pornography charges.

    Whatever sex crime you have been accused of, you can rely on a sex crimes defense lawyer at our firm to fully review the details of your case as quickly as possible.

    Then we can construct a defense strategy to get your charges reduced or even dropped.

    With decades of shared experience, we at Gounaris Abboud, LPA are confident that our resources can maximize your chances of achieving the most favorable result possible. Seek award-winning help from a sex crime attorney in Dayton today.

    Call 937-222-1515 or fill out a free case evaluation form today to see how we can help!

    Please select a city to find local Ohio Sex Crime lawyers.

    Sex Crime Lawyers in Common Ohio Cities

    • Akron
    • Ashland
    • Ashtabula
    • Barberton
    • Bowling Green
    • Broadview Heights
    • Brook Park
    • Canton
    • Chillicothe
    • Cincinnati
    • Cleveland
    • Columbus
    • Cuyahoga Falls
    • Dayton
    • Delaware
    • Dublin
    • Elyria
    • Euclid
    • Fairfield
    • Findlay
    • Grove City
    • Hamilton
    • Hilliard
    • Hudson
    • Lakewood
    • Lancaster
    • Lebanon
    • Lima
    • Lorain
    • Loveland
    • Mansfield
    • Marietta
    • Marion
    • Mason
    • Massillon
    • Medina
    • Mentor
    • Miamisburg
    • Middletown
    • Newark
    • Niles
    • North Olmsted
    • Oregon
    • Painesville
    • Portsmouth
    • Ravenna
    • Reynoldsburg
    • Sandusky
    • Springfield
    • Steubenville
    • Sylvania
    • Toledo
    • Troy
    • Warren
    • West Chester
    • Westerville
    • Wooster
    • Youngstown
    • Zanesville
    • All Ohio Cities »

    Common Ohio Counties

    • Butler County, OH
    • Clark County, OH
    • Clermont County, OH
    • Cuyahoga County, OH
    • Delaware County, OH
    • Fairfield County, OH
    • Franklin County, OH
    • Greene County, OH
    • Hamilton County, OH
    • Lake County, OH
    • Licking County, OH
    • Lorain County, OH
    • Lucas County, OH
    • Mahoning County, OH
    • Medina County, OH
    • Montgomery County, OH
    • Portage County, OH
    • Richland County, OH
    • Stark County, OH
    • Summit County, OH
    • Trumbull County, OH
    • Warren County, OH
    • Wayne County, OH
    • Wood County, OH
    • All Ohio Counties »

    Common Ohio Metros

    • Akron Metro, OH
    • Cincinnati Metro, OH
    • Cleveland-Lorain-Elyria Metro, OH
    • Columbus Metro, OH
    • Dayton-Springfield Metro, OH
    • Toledo Metro, OH
    • All Ohio Metros »

    Charged with a Sex Crime?

    You’ve come to the right place. If you’re facing sex crime charges or other charges that would force you to register as a sex offender and have questions about the sex offender registry — you should speak with a sex crimes lawyer today.

    A charged sexual offender faces unique problems, and a qualified sex crimes lawyer can help.

    Use FindLaw to hire a local sex crimes attorney to help you defend yourself.

    Need an attorney in Ohio?

    FindLaw’s Lawyer Directory is the largest online directory of attorneys. Browse more than one million listings, covering everything from personal injury to DUI to estate planning.

    Detailed law firm profiles have information like the firm’s area of law, office location, office hours, and payment options. Attorney profiles include the biography, education and training, and client recommendations of an attorney to help you decide who to hire.

    Use the contact form on the profiles to connect with an Ohio attorney for legal advice.

    How do I choose a lawyer?

    Consider the following:

    Comfort Level – Are you comfortable telling the lawyer personal information? Does the lawyer seem interested in solving your problem?
    Credentials – How long has the lawyer been in practice? Has the lawyer worked on other cases similar to yours?
    Cost – How are the lawyer’s fees structured – hourly or flat fee? Can the lawyer estimate the cost of your case?
    City – Is the lawyer’s office conveniently located?

    Please select a city to find local Kentucky Sex Crime lawyers.

    Sex Crime Lawyers in Common Kentucky Cities

    • Ashland
    • Bardstown
    • Berea
    • Bowling Green
    • Campbellsville
    • Corbin
    • Covington
    • Danville
    • Elizabethtown
    • Erlanger
    • Florence
    • Fort Thomas
    • Frankfort
    • Ft Mitchell
    • Georgetown
    • Glasgow
    • Hazard
    • Henderson
    • Hopkinsville
    • Lawrenceburg
    • Lexington
    • London
    • Louisville
    • Madisonville
    • Manchester
    • Mayfield
    • Morehead
    • Mount Sterling
    • Murray
    • Newport
    • Nicholasville
    • Owensboro
    • Paducah
    • Pikeville
    • Radcliff
    • Richmond
    • Shelbyville
    • Shepherdsville
    • Somerset
    • Winchester
    • All Kentucky Cities »

    Common Kentucky Counties

    • Boone County, KY
    • Boyd County, KY
    • Bullitt County, KY
    • Campbell County, KY
    • Christian County, KY
    • Daviess County, KY
    • Fayette County, KY
    • Franklin County, KY
    • Hardin County, KY
    • Henderson County, KY
    • Hopkins County, KY
    • Jefferson County, KY
    • Jessamine County, KY
    • Kenton County, KY
    • Laurel County, KY
    • Madison County, KY
    • McCracken County, KY
    • Nelson County, KY
    • Oldham County, KY
    • Pike County, KY
    • Pulaski County, KY
    • Scott County, KY
    • Shelby County, KY
    • Warren County, KY
    • All Kentucky Counties »

    Common Kentucky Metros

    • Lexington Metro, KY
    • Louisville Metro, KY
    • Owensboro Metro, KY
    • All Kentucky Metros »

    Charged with a Sex Crime?

    You’ve come to the right place. If you’re facing sex crime charges or other charges that would force you to register as a sex offender and have questions about the sex offender registry — you should speak with a sex crimes lawyer today.

    A charged sexual offender faces unique problems, and a qualified sex crimes lawyer can help.

    Use FindLaw to hire a local sex crimes attorney to help you defend yourself.

    Need an attorney in Kentucky?

    FindLaw’s Lawyer Directory is the largest online directory of attorneys. Browse more than one million listings, covering everything from divorce to personal injury to dealing with debt.

    Detailed law firm profiles have information like the firm’s area of law, office location, office hours, and payment options. Attorney profiles include the biography, education and training, and client recommendations of an attorney to help you decide who to hire.

    Use the contact form on the profiles to connect with a Kentucky attorney for legal advice.

    How do I choose a lawyer?

    Consider the following:

    Comfort Level – Are you comfortable telling the lawyer personal information? Does the lawyer seem interested in solving your problem?
    Credentials – How long has the lawyer been in practice? Has the lawyer worked on other cases similar to yours?
    Cost – How are the lawyer’s fees structured – hourly or flat fee? Can the lawyer estimate the cost of your case?
    City – Is the lawyer’s office conveniently located?

    If you’re facing sex crime charges in Michigan, you need an experienced federal defense attorney battling on your behalf. You could potentially be facing life-altering consequences, such as jail time and registration as a sex offender, that may negatively impact your future and make it difficult to move on with life long after a conviction. It’s crucial to contact a federal sex crimes lawyer at the beginning stages of your case to ensure you have a strong defense strategy. The team at Grabel & Associates has over 15 years of experience fighting for the wrongfully accused and is ready to put their knowledge to work for you. Contact us today for top-tier defense in your federal sex crime case. The sooner you reach out to our team, the better your chances are of receiving a beneficial outcome.

    Defending Against Federal Sex Crime Charges in Michigan

    Being accused of a sex crime is serious and requires action on your part if you want to prevent charges from leading to conviction. Having a federal defense attorney on your side may mean the difference between clearing your name and being registered as a sex offender. If you want to be successful in your criminal case, you need a lawyer with ample experience who is dedicated to your cause. The team at Grabel & Associates has worked with individuals accused of rape or attempted rape, sexual abuse, prostitution, child pornography, public or private indecency, statutory rape, solicitation of a minor, unlawful penetration, and other sex offense violations, and understand what it takes to beat criminal charges. If you or someone you love has been accused of a sex crime, call our team toll-free for a free initial case consultation. We are available to you 24 hours a day, 7 days a week to help you beat sex crime charges.

    How to Avoid Penalties for Sex Crimes in Federal Cases

    Depending on the details of the offense, individuals accused of a sex crime may be charged on a state or federal level. Federal sex offenses are more serious, and often have a minimum sentence that includes years in prison, probation or parole, and mandatory sex offender registration. When a person is registered as a sex offender, their name, address, headshot, and a detailed description of the offense is posted for the public to see. This information will be available for years to come, and may make it difficult for you to find housing, secure employment, or could limit the places you can go. If you’re convicted of a federal sex crime, you may also be sent to a Federal Medical Center and enrolled in the residential Sex Offender Treatment Program or Sex Offender Management Program. This treatment is often mandatory and inmates are required to submit to the intensive treatment programs. If you want to avoid these life-altering penalties, reach out to Grabel & Associates today. We are willing to start fighting for you at any stage of your case and will devote the necessary time and energy to ensure your defense strategy is effective.

    Our Representation of Federal Sex Crimes in Michigan

    The team at Grabel & Associates values your future and is committed to doing everything in their power to ensure you have the best shot at justice. The outcome of your case will dramatically impact your life, so it’s important to do everything you can to set yourself up for success. Our attorneys will review every detail of your unique case and conduct their own investigation to ensure your defense is effective. If you’re under investigation for a sex crime or suspect that you are under investigation, call us now. It’s never too early to start developing a winning defense strategy. Reach out to one of Michigan’s leading defense firms today.

    Contact Us for 24/7 Criminal Defense in Federal Criminal Cases

    Facing criminal charges can be traumatic. The process is overwhelming and oftentimes confusing, making it difficult to navigate it on your own. We understand the stress you’re under and will do everything in our power to alleviate it. If you want one of Michigan’s top defense attorneys fighting for you, call us now or contact us online. We can be reached anytime, day or night, to start working for you. Dial 1-800-342-7896 toll free to get connected with a skilled case analyst who will provide you with a free initial case consultation and get you on track to receiving a favorable outcome in your case.

    Sex crimes are extremely serious. They can result in significant terms of incarceration as well as a requirement to register as a sex offender. These crimes are treated this way because most are violent in nature and many often have minors as victims.

    With these things in mind, the benefit of having an attorney is immeasurable. A Richmond sex crimes attorney can review your case carefully and advise you of the law you are accused of violating, prepare a vigorous defense on your behalf, and also negotiate with prosecutors in an attempt to resolve your matter with the best possible result. To learn more about what a Richmond criminal lawyer can do for you call today.

    Importance of Hiring of A Richmond Sex Crimes Attorney

    How to hire a sex crime attorneyHiring a Richmond sex crimes attorney is important because an attorney can disseminate the evidence and investigate the facts of the case and witnesses.

    An experienced attorney will speak with the Commonwealth attorney, investigators, witnesses, and anyone else who has information regarding the case. Additionally, a sex crimes lawyer in Richmond can review the evidence at hand that the state is planning on using against you at trial. With these types of cases this can include everything from witness statements to forensic and DNA evidence.

    If you are currently facing a sex crime charge in Virginia and would like to consult with an experienced sex crimes lawyer, please contact us today to conduct your free initial consultation.

    Sex Crimes in Virginia

    In Virginia, a sex crime is considered to have been committed when a person performs a sexual act with someone who has not given or cannot give their consent. An example of someone who cannot give consent would be a person who lacks the mental capacity to do so (due to disability, injury, or intoxication, for example) or a child under the age of 16 years old.

    While most people correctly associate a sex crime with some type of physical contact, Virginia also considers certain acts that lack physical touching to fall under the sex crime category.

    Sex crimes charged in Virginia include:

    • Rape
    • Statutory Rape
    • Date Rape
    • Sexual Battery
    • Child Pornography
    • Forcible sodomy
    • Object sexual penetration
    • Carnal knowledge of a child between 13 and 15 years of age

    Although accompanying penalties and other details pertaining to these charges are discussed below, you’ll want to speak with a Richmond sex crimes lawyer to get a full understanding of your legal options.

    Sexting

    Sexting can also be a crime in a number of ways. The Virginia law against possession and distribution of child pornography includes the creating, sending and possessing and/or resending of sexually explicit images of juveniles and people under the age of 18 via text message. Whether it’s an adult sending the message or a minor sending a message with the picture in it, the law does not make a distinction between adults and juveniles who make, send or receive such messages or receive such images.

    Penalties for Richmond Sex Crimes

    The penalties on a sex crime conviction can vary widely. They can vary from a simple class 1 misdemeanor, which carries up to a 12 months in jail and a $2500 fine, up to felony convictions and ranging from a class 5 felony conviction, which can come up to five years in jail and convictions that can result in life in prison.

    In addition to that, a sex crime conviction comes with the requirement to register as a sex offender.

    Because the severity of the penalties depends upon the details of your case, it is important to have an experienced Richmond sex crimes lawyer to help navigate the case’s intricacies in order to put you in the best possible situation.

    What Must Be Proven in a Sex Crimes Case?

    The facts needed in Virginia to prove that a sex crime occurred depend on the specific type of sex crime you may be facing.

    For sex crimes like rape, forcible sodomy, or object sexual penetration, Virginia Code sections 18.2-61, 18.2-67.1, and 18.2-67.2 differ in the specific physical act that must be proven for each crime, but the secondary requirements are the same in that the act must have been against the victim’s will by way of force or intimidation, or with a person who does not have the capability to consent to the act.

    In contrast, a crime of carnal knowledge requires a detailed look at the crime itself. For example, Sections 18.2-64.1 and 18.2-64.2 state that carnal knowledge includes sexual acts, involving intercourse or oral sex, with a minor between the ages of 13 and 15 years of age. However, the severities of the crime depend on both the age of the accused and the age of the victim.

    For specifics on your case and what punishments you may be facing contact a Richmond sex crimes lawyers as soon as possible.

    Contacting a Richmond Sex Crimes Lawyer

    If you have been charged with a sex crime in Virginia, you need a Richmond sex crimes attorney to review to your case that understands how to challenge the Prosecution’s case, the State’s evidence, challenge witnesses against you, and know exactly what the state will attempt to prove. In addition to that, when preparing a defense, your sex crimes attorney in Richmond should examine the evidence the state has collected and determine the best course of action, whether that be to fight the case and/or attempt to negotiate. Call today to learn more.

    Building a Strong Defense in State and Federal Sex Crime Cases

    In terms of sex cases once we move beyond the misdemeanor offense of prostitution, most sex cases are cases that people – even other lawyers often shy away from. When we are talking about criminal sexual assault, aggravated sexual abuse or child pornography due to the nature of these allegations it is not uncommon for detectives, prosecutors and witnesses to unfairly judge a suspect before he or she is proven guilty in a court of law. Sex cases are cases in which it is often easier to condemn the suspect than to question the accuser in the reliability of his or her story. When it comes to sex crimes at the Law Offices of Robert Kerr we vigorously defend the accused, and we treat our clients like human beings that well deserve the presumption of innocence. The scariest thing about a sex case is that many cases without any physical evidence hinge solely on the word of the accuser. The consequences after conviction are among the harshest penalties available under the law. Whether it’s a “he said she said” case or a case involving DNA, social media or computer forensics we strongly believe in fighting these allegations head on. Consecutive prison sentences and lifetime registration as a sex offender are penalties that deserve your best defense. If you or your loved one is facing a criminal indictment or a DCFS investigation – please contact our offices immediately for help.

    Sex crime allegations not only expose the defendant to what could be a long prison sentence, but also sex offender registration obligations and a long-term stigma that can hurt you and your family for years to come. At the Law Office of Robert Kerr, LLC, in Chicago, we know how serious sex crime charges can be, and we subject each allegation to careful scrutiny. Our experience with the defense of cases ranging from child molestation to sexual assault can make a significant difference to the outcome of your case.

    If you are being investigated for a sex crime, or if you have already been arrested for one, it is important to talk with an experienced Chicago sex crime defense lawyer as soon as possible. Before your arrest, you are able to assert your right to an attorney, limit your exposure to certain criminal charges, or even prevent charges from being brought against you. Following your arrest, we can try to discuss your case with the prosecutor with the aim of persuading him or her to drop the charge or reduce it to a lesser one. In this manner, we have obtained dismissals and reduced charges for clients charged with serious sex crimes.

    We can help you understand:

    Who to hire to represent you if you are charged or accused of a sex crime?

    When you need to hire a sex crime defense lawyer?

    How much do sex crime defense lawyers cost?

    How to choose a sex crime defense attorney?

    What sex crimes are felonies?

    Why you may need to hire a sex crime defense attorney?

    Why it is important to hire a sex crime lawyer if you have been charged or accused?

    Call NOW for a Free Consultation

    Our criminal defense attorneys defend clients accused of all types of sex crimes. Some cases can be highly complex and involve challenges to DNA and other forensic evidence. Others can hinge on the testimony of biased witnesses, unreliable victim statements or unqualified investigators. Whatever the particular circumstances of the case, we will work to build the strongest defense possible — one designed to protect your rights and freedom.

    The Law Office of Robert Kerr defends clients accused of sex crimes in both the state and federal courts throughout northern Illinois, especially Cook County and Greater Chicago’s collar counties. We advise people about the best ways to resolve such charges as:

    • Criminal sexual assault
    • Statutory rape and other sex crimes involving minors
    • Aggravated criminal sexual abuse
    • Predatory criminal sexual assault
    • Solicitation of a minor for sex over the Internet
    • State or federal child pornography charges
    • Prostitution and solicitation
    • Indicated findings of abuse in Illinois Department of Children and Family Services (DCFS) investigations and appeals

    AVOIDING A SEX CRIME CONVICTION

    We can help you with:

    • What You Need To Know
    • What To Do If You Are Accused
    • What To Do If You Are Under Investigation
    • What To Do If You Are Arrested
    • Sex Crime Defenses
    • Understanding the Consequences of a Sex Crime Conviction

    For a free consultation with a knowledgeable Chicago sex crimes defense lawyer who focuses more on winning cases than negotiating guilty please, contact the Law Office of Robert Kerr, LLC in Chicago or the suburbs.

    Sex crimes generate an emotional response from the community, law enforcement officials and the families involved. Sex crime charges can therefore lead to a lifetime of serious consequences, including a record, prison time and inclusion on the sex offender registry. Even when you are certain of your innocence, you need an experienced Orlando sex crime lawyer who can keep the focus on the facts and on the protection of your rights.

    At Moses & Rooth Attorneys at Law , our skilled Orlando sex crimes defense attorneys believe that every defendant is entitled to a strong legal defense. We understand the enormous stigma that surrounds any type of sexual offense. Our legal team knows how important it is for defendants to fight back on illegitimate charges.

    If you or a loved one is facing a sex crimes charge in Orange County, FL, it is crucial that you seek immediate professional legal help. The consequences for a conviction can be severe. For a fully private criminal defense consultation, please do not hesitate to contact our Orlando office today.

    Sex Crimes Defense in Orange County, FL

    At the Orlando, Florida, law firm of Moses and Rooth Attorneys at Law, attorneys Andrew Moses and Jay R. Rooth are both former prosecutors with extensive legal experience on both sides of sex criminal law. We know the criminal justice system well and use that knowledge to protect the rights of our clients charged with:

    We also know that even an innocent remark can be turned against you following sex crime charges. Our advice to all our clients is to 1) remain silent until you have spoken with an attorney, and 2) contact an attorney at Moses and Rooth Attorneys at Law immediately. Why?

    Even a dismissal of charges may not fully erase the humiliation and consequences of a sex crime accusation. From the moment you retain our services, we will protect your rights and use our 30+ years of combined legal experience to seek your best possible outcome. Protect your rights by contacting a criminal defense attorney today.

    Sex Crimes Charges: Frequently Asked Questions (FAQs)

    When Should I Hire a Florida Sex Crimes Defense Lawyer?

    With sex crimes charges, there is no time to wait to take action. You should hire an Orlando sex crimes defense lawyer if you have already been arrested or if you believe that you are being investigated for a crime. The best thing that you can do to protect your rights, your reputation, and your freedom is to hire a criminal defense lawyer as soon as possible.

    Should I Cooperate With a Police investigation?

    As we have stated previously, it is not in your best interest to give a statement to law enforcement officers. Even if you know you are innocent, you could still say something that could be misinterpreted and used against you. Though it is entirely understandable that you may want to assist police with their investigation, you need to look out for yourself. You should not answer any questions until you have an experienced Orlando sex crimes defense lawyer by your side.

    What are the Penalties for Sex Crimes in Florida?

    The penalties for a sex offense will depend on the specific charges in question. In all cases, sex-related offenses must be taken seriously. You could face very serious consequences. With the most serious sex-based offenses, a conviction could result in a lengthy prison sentence. You should always be represented by an Orlando criminal defense lawyer who can assess the specific charges against you and build the most sensible defense strategy.

    Will I Be Required to Register as a Sex Offender?

    In Florida, a person who has been convicted of a sex crime may be classified as either a sex offender or sexual predator. Florida has a long list of sexual offenses for which a conviction or a guilty plea will require registration on the sexual offender list. This is an important factor that must be considered. To find out how more about sexual offender registration and how it applies to your specific case, please contact our legal team.

    Contact Our Orlando Sex Crimes Defense Lawyers Today

    At Moses & Rooth Attorneys at Law , our Florida criminal defense attorneys have the skills and experience required to defend sex crimes charges. Every defendant deserves their day in court. If you were arrested for a sex offen se, please do not hesitate to call us today at (407) 377-0150 for a confidential consultation. With an office in Orlando, we represent clients throughout Central Florida, including in Orange County, Lake County, Seminole County, and Osceola County.

    Sex crimes are serious offenses that come with life-changing consequences. A Tampa sex crime attorney understand the pain and stress that can come with being accused of a sex crime. We work tirelessly to ensure that our clients get the strongest legal defense.

    Sexual Abuse Charges

    Sexual abuse is a general term that refers to a wide range of unsolicited and unwanted sexual conduct. Although the penalties vary, a conviction can come with substantial monetary fines and significant time behind bars.

    • Lewd and lascivious conduct is defined as situations in which a person touches another person who is under the age of 16 in a way that is vulgar or sexually related. It also applies to situations in which a person tries to get another person under the age of 16 to engage in a sex-related act.
    • Sexual battery is the legal term for rape in Florida and among the most serious sex offenses on the books, carrying strict penalties that vary based on the circumstances.
    • Statutory rape, also called unlawful sex with a minor, is different than sexual battery. Statutory rape happens when a person who is at least 24 years old has sexual contact with a person 17 years old or younger. Statutory rape is a crime, even if the contact is consensual. A person convicted of the rape of a child under the age of 12, for example, is looking at a potential life sentence.
    • Sexual assault charges include various aggressive sexual contact and other behavior that falls short of rape. Unwanted touching, fondling, groping and kissing are all common sexual assault charges.
    • Internet solicitation is a common computer sex crime that involves luring or encouraging a person under the age of 18 to perform a sexual act, engage in certain behavior or share explicit images. A crime occurs when the enticement happens, even if the minor does not agree and the parties never meet in person.
    • Traveling to meet a minor for the purpose of engaging in sexual activity is a crime in Florida. Local law enforcement officers often set up sting operations, posing as underage victims online, which can raise questions about entrapment – a possible sex crimes defense.
    • Prostitution – or the solicitation of prostitution – is the trading of sex for money or something else of value. Although it is a relatively common crime, it carries serious penalties. That is particularly true in cases where the prostitute is a minor or is a victim of sex trafficking.

    Working with a Florida Sex Crimes Defense Firm

    The sex crime attorneys at Whittel & Melton represent clients in Tampa and throughout Florida who have been charged with a wide variety of offenses, from lewd and lascivious conduct to sexual assault and rape. We understand how cops and courts handle these cases and we work aggressively to fight criminal charges head-on.

    Consent – that the alleged victim willingly participated in the sexual contact – is a full defense in most rape cases. Consent defenses often come with a number of complex factual and legal questions.

    • An alleged victim’s failure to fight back or resist a person charged with rape is not, at least alone, enough to prove that the victim consented to the sexual activity.
    • A person who is mentally incapacitated – as a result of intoxication, for example – is considered unable to consent.
    • The same goes for those who are “physically helpless,” that is unable to communicate non-consent or to physically resist.

    Our attorneys combine decades of legal experience to build the strongest possible defense for the people we represent, starting sometimes before charges are even filed. We fight aggressively to get charges dropped or reduced ahead of the trial while standing ready to defend clients in court when needed.

    Tampa Sex Crime Attorney Answers FAQs

    If you’ve been arrested for a sex crime or are the potential suspect of a criminal investigation, it can be challenging to know what to expect. Learn more about the process from our experienced legal team, which includes a Board Certified Criminal Trial Law Specialist.

    What do I Tell my Family Members?

    As difficult as it can be, avoid telling your side of the story to friends or family. The prosecution can subpoena anyone you discuss your case with and use your own words against you.

    Saying the wrong thing to the wrong person can have disastrous consequences. When facing serious criminal charges, it can be impossible to know whom to trust. The prosecution can subpoena anyone you discuss your case with and use your own words against you.

    What are my Rights After Being Suspected of a Sex Crime?

    You are innocent until proven guilty. Remember you are a suspect, you are not required to assist in the investigation. Without a warrant, you have the right to refuse requests from law enforcement.

    • You can refuse to answer questions.
    • You can deny access to your home, computer, or other property.

    Am I Going to Go to Jail?

    It depends. Florida sex crime convictions carry some of the harshest minimum penalties in the country. Most are felony convictions and punishable by at least a year. Even a misdemeanor sex crime conviction can carry up to a year of jail time.

    A Tampa sex crime attorney may have the option of helping you avoid jail time by reducing your charges through a plea bargain.

    What is my First Step?

    Take your accusations seriously. Even if you are innocent, false accusations can result in an arrest and even a trial. Resist the urge to “tell your side of the story” and contact a Tampa sex crime attorney ASAP. Hiring an attorney is not an admission of guilt. Even if you are innocent, you need to prepare a defense strategy.

    Is Working with Your Sex Crime Lawyers Confidential?

    Communication between you and your lawyer about your current case is confidential. A defense attorney’s job is to ensure the best possible outcome, whether you are innocent or guilty. Your lawyer will tell you what information they need to build your defense. With a few, very obscure exceptions, the communication between you and your lawyer is confidential.

    Speak with a Tampa Sex Crime Attorney Today

    If you or a loved one has been charged with or is suspected of a sex crime in Florida, you are well-advised to seek the assistance of an experienced Tampa sex crime attorney. Our firm offices throughout the state, including in Miami, Tampa, Orlando, Jacksonville, Ocala, Gainesville, West Palm Beach, Boca Raton and Ft Lauderdale. Contact us online or call 866-608-5529 for a free and confidential evaluation.

    Being accused of a sexual crime in New York is a very serious matter and can negatively affect the rest of your life. Any conviction for a sex crime in New York can mean that you or a loved one may have to pay thousands of dollars in fines, suffer harsh prison sentences, and be required to register as a sex offender under SORA.

    Unfortunately, many innocent people are accused of sex crimes in New York every day, and others face inflated charges. If you or someone you know has been charged with a sex crime in New York, contact an experienced sex crimes lawyer today.

    Sexual Assault Crimes

    Any sex crime in New York is something a person should take very seriously. Any accusation of a sexual crime has the potential to impact a persons’ career, housing, finances, and can even result in lengthy prison sentences. New York Penal Code § 130.05(1) lays the foundation for any sex crime charge and provides:

    Whether or not specifically stated, it is an element of every offense defined in this article that the sexual act was committed without consent of the accuser.

    An experienced New York sex crimes lawyer can help defend against any of the following commonly charged sex crimes:

    • Aggravated sexual abuse
    • Child Pornography
    • Forcible Touching
    • Indecent exposure
    • Internet sex crimes
    • Sexual abuse
    • Solicitation
    • Prostitution
    • Rape charges
    • Sexual harassment
    • Sexual misconduct
    • Sexual offender registration
    • Sexual contact with a minor

    Sexual crimes are very complicated cases, and anytime a person is accused of committing a sexual crime they should contact an experienced New York sex crimes lawyer immediately.

    A New York sex crimes lawyer will be able to explain the charges, stop aggressive police and prosecutorial interrogations, and help raise a defense to a criminal sex crimes charge.

    Penalties for Sex Crimes in New York

    While the consequences for a sex crime of any degree can be very serious, it is important for a person to understand the different degrees of sexual offenses in New York.

    The penalties a court can impose on a person who has been convicted of a sex crime can vary depending on the nature of the charged offenses, the age of the accuser, and whether or not a person has been convicted of a sexual crime in the past.

    New York Penal law distinguishes between sexual crimes and categorizes them class A or class B misdemeanors, or Class A through Class E felonies. Each of these categories carries a maximum prison sentence as follows:

    • Class A felony convictions can be punished by a maximum term of imprisonment for life
    • Class B felony convictions can be punished by a maximum term of imprisonment of up to 25 years
    • Class C felony convictions can be punished by a maximum term of imprisonment of up to 15 years
    • Class D felony convictions can be punished by a maximum term of imprisonment of up to seven years
    • Class E felony convictions can be punished by a maximum term of imprisonment of up to four years
    • Class A misdemeanor convictions can be punished by a maximum term of imprisonment of up to one year in jail
    • Class B misdemeanor convictions can be punished by a maximum term not to exceed three months

    A person who is convicted of a sex crime can be fined anywhere from $500 up to $30,000.

    However, one of the longest lasting penalties a person can face if they are convicted of a sexual crime in New York is being mandated to register as a sex offender under the New York Sex Offender Registration Act, which is generally a lifetime requirement.

    Contact a Lawyer

    Being accused of or charged with a sex crime in New York can be devastating to your future, and New York prosecutors are notorious for aggressively pursuing the maximum sentences for a crime.

    However, fortunately, an experienced New York sex crimes lawyer can help defend your rights in court and may be able to have your charges lowered, dismissed, or prove to a jury you are not guilty of a sexual crime.

    If you or someone you know has been accused of committing a sex crime it is crucial to contact an experienced New York sex crimes lawyer as soon as possible.

    Sex crime charges are some of the most serious charges that a person can face. Sex crime convictions carry significant penalties, including lengthy periods of incarceration and hefty fines. A felony conviction for a Minnesota sex crime generally carries a 12-year prison sentence in addition to significant fines. A first-degree felony sex crime conviction in Minnesota could result in 30 years in jail and $40,000 in fines.

    Moreover, a sex crime conviction can impact a person’s life for many years to come, impacting a person’s ability to obtain housing and get a job, among other things. Charges of a Minnesota sex crime alone can cause major damage to a person’s reputation and impact their ability to get and hold a job.

    For these reasons, it is essential to hire an experienced Minnesota sex crime attorney to protect your rights and defend you against the criminal charges. Minneapolis sex crime attorney Max A. Keller has been handling criminal cases involving various Minnesota sex crime charges since 1997. His vast experience and considerable legal knowledge regarding Minnesota sex crimes have resulted in acquittals, dismissal of charges, and reduced sentences for many individuals throughout Minnesota.

    Aggressive Minnesota Sex Crime Defense Lawyers

    Oftentimes, defendants are falsely accused of sex crimes. At Keller Law Offices, we are dedicated to defending you against your Minnesota sex crime charges. We will aggressively attack the prosecution’s case and fight to prove your innocence. Depending on the circumstances of your case, we will call into doubt the alleged lack of consent, witness credibility, and lack of physical evidence. As a former prosecutor with significant trial experience, Minnesota sex crime defense attorney Max A. Keller is not afraid to try a case in order to defend his clients’ charges.

    Representing Clients Facing All Types of Minnesota Sex Crimes

    At Keller Law Offices, our criminal defense attorneys have defended clients facing a wide variety of Minnesota sex crime charges, including:

    • Sexual Assault
    • Internet Sex Crimes
    • Rape Charges
    • Child Molestation
    • Child Pornography
    • Solicitation of Prostitution
    • Sex Crime Information
    • Sex Offender Registry / Megan’s Law

    Speaking with a criminal defense attorney early in the process can be the difference between being charged with a crime that carries the requirement of sex offender registration, and being charged with a less serious crime not requiring registration. If you’re being investigated for a sex crime, contact a criminal defense attorney today.

    If you’ve already been charged with a sex crime, you aren’t out of options. Not by a long-shot. A criminal defense attorney with experience defending sex crimes can help you raise many valid defenses. Evidence used in sex crimes can be complicated. For example, possible evidentiary issues may relate to the DNA, including the type of testing used and the reliability of that particular method of testing, evidence that the person making the allegations may have presented himself or herself as being of a legal and consenting age, evidence from social networking sites or previous criminal records that may demonstrate the person making the allegations has not been truthful with the police, and any alibi defenses that may demonstrate the charged individual could not have committed the crime.

    Sex Offender Registration

    Certain sex crimes require you to register as a sex offender even if you are convicted, or plead guilty to, a lesser offense, even one as minimal as disorderly conduct. In essence, it doesn’t matter to the court and the Bureau of Criminal Apprehension (BCA) that you didn’t plead guilty to a sex crime requiring sex offender registration – if you were merely charged with a sex crime requiring predatory registration, you will still have to register as a sex offender if you are convicted or plead guilty to a lesser offense.

    Take Action Now – Contact Max A. Keller, Attorney at Law

    If you are facing a Minnesota sex crime charge, it is important to get an experienced criminal defense attorney. Contact Keller Law Offices at (952) 913-1421 today to schedule a free consultation with a skilled Minneapolis sex crime defense lawyer. He will put his years of experience and his exceptional knowledge to work to defend you and protect your rights.

    How to hire a sex crime attorney

    How to hire a sex crime attorney

    How to hire a sex crime attorney

    How to hire a sex crime attorney

    How to hire a sex crime attorney

    Information on Being Charged With a Sex Crime in PA

    If you were charged with a sex crime in Pennsylvania, you already know that it is an embarrassing affair and that your reputation as well as your rights and freedom are all at stake.

    What you may not know is that there are extremely severe punishments if you are convicted in Pennsylvania and that many people, including the police, the prosecutors, and the District Attorney are going to try their best to make sure you are convicted. Most sex crimes are considered felonies.

    People convicted of certain sex crimes are required to register as sex offenders on a national registry which can have debilitating effects on your future: your reputation, your family’s reputation and dignity are all at stake.

    In addition, being registered as a criminal sex offender places serious limitations on where you are allowed to live and other basic rights. Failing to register as a sex offender, can mean being sent to prison.

    An arrest is not a conviction.

    At Ketchel Law, we understand that people are innocent until proven guilty and we will treat you as such.

    Our Pittsburgh Sex Crime Lawyers will closely listen to your case to understand the circumstances involved and examine every detail that can be used to prove your innocence, suppress the evidence, or lessen your sentencing.

    There are many defenses to a sex crime, and we will explore all of our options to build the strongest defense possible for your case.

    Attorney Ketchel offers experience and takes an aggressive approach to defending your rights, your freedom, your reputation and your family’s reputation. If a not-guilty verdict is impossible, we will fight aggressively to keep your name off of Megan’s List and your reputation and freedom preserved.

    We offer free consultations and will help you understand the charges brought against you and how to best defend your rights. Call us today.

    Sex Crimes and Penalties in Pennsylvania

    Being charged with a sex crime does not necessarily mean you will be convicted.

    Hiring an experienced and aggressive sex crimes attorney who will carefully investigate your case and pick apart every piece of evidence is going to make the difference in winning or losing your rights and freedom.

    Below are some of the types of sex crime cases Ketchel Law defends:

    • Indecent Assault
    • Sexting
    • Sexual Assault
    • Failure to Register as a Sex Offender
    • Rape
    • Sexual Assault
    • Involuntary Deviate Sexual Intercourse
    • Indecent Exposure
    • Lewd Conduct and Open Lewdness
    • Prostitution and Solicitation of a Prostitute
    • Statutory Sexual Assault (Sex with a Minor)
    • Online Solicitation of a Minor
    • Child Pornography
    • Child Sex Abuse Charges

    If you have been charged with a sex crime call Pittsburgh Criminal Attorney Justin J. Ketchel for a free consultation. It is our goal to have your case dismissed and if that is not possible, we will fight aggressively to keep your name off of the national registry of sex offenders.

    Information on Megan’s Law/Adam Walsh Act

    People convicted of certain sex crimes are required to register on the Pennsylvania State Police Megan’s Law Website. This website can be viewed by anyone with an internet connection and will contain your full name.

    FREE LEGAL CONSULTATION

    We offer free legal consultations to anyone charged with a crime. Call us today to find out how we can help defend your rights.

    Learn more about Ketchel Law and Sex Crime Laws in Pennsylvania:

    • Pittsburgh Criminal Lawyers
    • Consequences of a Sex Crime in Pennsylvania
    • Defenses to Sex Crimes in Pennsylvania
    • Indecent Assault
    • Sexting
    • Open Lewdness Charges
    • Sexual Assault Charges
    • Statutory Sexual Assault Charges
    • Rape Charges
    • Involuntary Deviant Sexual Intercourse Charges
    • Online Solicitation of a Minor Charges
    • Child Pornography Charges
    • National Sex Offender Registry Laws
    • Failure to Register as a Sex Offender

    Learn more about Ketchel Law:

    • Criminal Attorneys Pittsburgh
    • Federal Sex Crime Attorneys
    • Attorney Justin J. Ketchel
    • Our Client Testimonials
    • View Our Case History / Results

    Practice Areas

    • Criminal Law
    • DUI Offenses
    • Drug Crimes
    • Federal Crimes
    • Violent Crimes
    • Sex Crimes
    • Read PA Legal News >>

    Site Map

    • Home
    • Attorneys
    • Practice Areas
    • DUI
    • Drug Crimes
    • Case Results
    • Client Reviews
    • Contact
    • PA Legal News

    Our Team

    • Justin J. Ketchel
    • Thomas M. McKinley
    • Michael E. Waltman

    Contact Us

    Ketchel Law
    429 4th Avenue, Suite 1600
    Pittsburgh, PA 15219

    At AZ Defenders, we know how stressful it is to be accused of a sex crime. A sex crime conviction in Arizona can have severe ramifications and life-changing consequences. If you or a loved one has been accused of a sex crime, contact a qualified Mesa sex crimes attorney at our law firm right away. We can defend your rights and fight hard for justice on your behalf. Call (480) 456-6400 today for a free and confidential consultation.

    How to hire a sex crime attorney

    Why Do You Require a Sex Crime Defense Lawyer?

    • We are aggressive and reputable criminal defense attorneys.
    • We personalize defense strategies for each case and client.
    • We are highly experienced negotiators and litigators in Arizona.
    • We will work closely with you throughout your criminal case.
    • We are recognized as one of the most effective criminal defense law firms in Arizona.

    Are There Different Kinds of Sex Crimes?

    At AZ Defenders, we have the Mesa criminal defense lawyers and resources to accept all different types of sex crime cases. We understand Arizona’s related statutes and how to create a strong defense on behalf of a client according to the specific charges against him or her.

    Crimes Against Children; Molestation: ARS 13-1410 and Pornography: ARS 13-3553

    Arizona Revised Statute (ARS) 13-1410 defines child molestation as a crime against a child who is 14 years old or younger, such as intentionally engaging in sexual contact or forcing the child to engage in sexual contact. Arizona’s child pornography law (ARS 13-3553) defines this crime as knowingly photographing, filming or depicting a minor engaged in sexual conduct or distributing this type of material.

    Indecent Exposure: ARS 13-1402 and Public Sexual Indecency: ARS 13-1403

    Indecent exposure refers to exposing one’s genitals, anus or a female’s breast (except while breastfeeding) in a public place. Public sexual indecency can describe any sexual act, including sexual intercourse or sexual contact, committed recklessly while someone who would be alarmed or offended is present.

    Sexual Abuse: ARS 13-1404

    The definition of sexual abuse in Arizona is knowingly or intentionally committing a sexual act or behavior against someone without that person’s consent.

    Sexual Assault: ARS 13-1406 and Violent Sexual Assault: ARS 13-1423

    Sexual assault is the crime of engaging someone in a sexual act – primarily rape – without that person’s consent. Violent sexual assault is this crime with an aggravating factor, such as the use of a deadly weapon.

    Sexual Misconduct: ARS 13-1418

    Sexual misconduct describes sexual relations between two people who have a protected relationship, such as a therapist and his or her patient.

    Prostitution and Solicitation for Prostitution: ARS 13-3211

    Prostitution is the crime of agreeing to engage or engaging in sexual activity for a fee or another type of payment. Solicitation for prostitution is the crime of paying someone or offering to give someone something of value for sexual engagement.

    Statutory Rape: ARS 13-1405

    Even if someone consents to sexual intercourse, it could constitute the crime of statutory rape if one of the parties is under the age of 18.

    What Are Common Penalties for Sex Crimes?

    Arizona punishes sex crimes harshly, making the need to hire a skilled Mesa sex crimes attorney all the more important. If the criminal courts convict you of a sex crime, you could face expensive fines, jail or prison time, probation, community service, and other penalties. The exact sentence will depend on the nature of the alleged crime and its severity. If the victim suffered a serious bodily injury or you are convicted of an aggravated crime, for example, you will face more serious consequences.

    How an Attorney Works to Build a Successful Defense

    The strength of your defense is what will determine your future as the defendant of a sex crimes case. Your Mesa sex crimes attorney should personalize your legal defense based on the specific facts of your case, such as whether or not you have a criminal history. Examples of possible defenses include consent, wrong defendant, mistaken identity, alibi, police misconduct, mistake of age, involuntary intoxication and lack of evidence. Discuss your unique defense with our attorneys today.

    Consult With a Skilled Mesa Sex Crimes Lawyer Today

    The Mesa and Phoenix sex crimes attorneys at AZ Defenders have years of experience representing defendants in these types of cases. We understand the importance of obtaining positive results for clients facing severe consequences. Contact us today to request a confidential case evaluation near you. Call our law firm at (480) 456-6400 24/7.

    Attorney Jason Neff has the experience to defend
    you in your time of need.

    Contact Us Today For Help!

    AN AGGRESSIVE SEX CRIME DEFENSE LAWYER PROVIDING THE
    STRONGEST DEFENSE POSSIBLE.

    Federal & State Sex Crime Attorney

    No other crime in our society comes with the same negative stigma and social scorn as sexual crimes. Simple allegations of sexual impropriety can have disastrous and long-lasting negative consequences. Sexual offenses and allegations of sexual misconduct are among the most serious crimes that criminal defense lawyers handle. Many times federal law encompasses many sex-related crimes and allegations, including many laws designed to protect children. If the allegations result in a conviction, a defendant may be placed on a sexual offender registry.

    It is important to act quickly to obtain the legal counsel of an experienced sex crime defense lawyer as soon as possible. The selection of the right attorney may be the most important decision you make as you move forward with your defense.

    We can help you with ANY federal or state sex crimes or offense:

    • Aggravated criminal sexual abuse
    • Criminal sexual assault
    • Predatory criminal sexual assault
    • Prostitution and solicitation
    • Sexual Abuse
    • Solicitation of a minor for sex over the Internet
    • State or federal child pornography charges
    • Statutory rape and other sex crimes involving minors

    We can help you understand:

    • How much do sex crime defense lawyers cost?
    • How to choose a sex crime defense attorney?
    • What sex crimes are felonies?
    • When you need to hire a sex crime defense lawyer?
    • Who to hire to represent you if you are charged or accused of a sex crime?
    • Why it is important to hire a sex crime lawyer if you have been charged or accused?
    • Why you may need to hire a sex crime defense attorney?

    AVOIDING A SEX CRIME CONVICTION

    We can help you with:

    • Sex Crime Defenses
    • Understanding the Consequences of a Sex Crime Conviction
    • What To Do If You Are Accused
    • What To Do If You Are Arrested
    • What To Do If You Are Under Investigation
    • What You Need To Know

    Some Common Sex Crime Definitions

    Age of consent – The age at which criminal statutes acknowledge that an individual is capable of consenting to sexual acts, which varies by state.

    Aggravated – Any circumstances during the commission of a crime that increase its seriousness or the injury.

    Child pornography –Any visual depiction, including any photograph, film, video, picture, or computer or computer-generated image or picture, whether made or produced by electronic, mechanical, or other means, of sexually explicit conduct.

    Coercion – The use of force or threats of serious harm, including the use of physical restraint(s), against any person, intended to cause a person to do something against their will.

    Forcible Sex Offenses – The act of forcible sexual intercourse with any person with some forcible compulsion to submit despite earnest resistance.

    Mistake of Fact – An error, incorrect decision or assumption, or a misunderstanding caused by the ignorance or facts or circumstances. As it relates to statutory rape and several other federal sex crimes, it does not matter if the perpetrator did not know that the victim was below the age of consent.

    Molestation – The crime of sexual acts with children up to the age of 18, including touching of private parts, exposure of genitalia, taking of pornographic pictures, rape, inducement of sexual acts with the molester or with other children.

    Non-forcible Sex Offenses – Sexual acts with individuals who are not capable of giving consent to sexual acts. Determining factors to determine an individual’s incapability may vary from state to state, but federal laws generally include those who, at the time of the crime, were underage victims, those who were physically helpless, and those who are permanently mentally disabled or were temporarily mentally incompetent. Consent is not considered to be a valid defense to the crime.

    Rape – Sexual intercourse without consent and accomplished through force, threat of violence or intimidation.

    Rape Shield Laws – Laws enacted to protect victims from the emotional trauma of being questioned about their sexual history on the witness stand.

    Sexting – The act of sending sexually explicit materials through mobile phones. In the U.S., a teenager texting sexually explicit photographs of him/herself, or of their friends or partners, can be charged with distribution of child pornography and those who receive the images can been charged with possession of child pornography.

    Sex Offender Registration and Notification Act (SORNA) – The Sex Offender Registration and Notification Act, which is Title I of the Adam Walsh Child Protection and Safety Act of 2006 (Public Law 109-248). SORNA provides a comprehensive set of minimum standards for sex offender registration and notification in the United States.Statutory Rape – sexual relations with anyone who has not reached the legal age of consent.

    Do You Need An Experienced Sex Crime Defense Lawyer?

    Contact Attorney Jason C. Neff for help!

    The criminal defense attorneys in the Law Firm of Sean F. Leslie have represented numerous clients in dealing with molestation and sex crime cases. Accused child molesters and sex crimes charges have an extremely negative long term stigma associated with them! Immediate legal representation is necessary. Likewise, if you hire an inexperienced attorney and end up incarcerated your safety will be in danger!! You must hire an experienced criminal attorney when you are the target of a child molestation or sex crime investigation. Let me and criminal defense attorneys in my firm protect you from false accusations of child molest and sex crimes.

    I have successfully handled many of these highly inflammatory cases! I have prevented the filing of rape charges for at least two clients by representing their interests in pre-filing interviews with law enforcement.

    If you plead guilty, then the court will impose lengthy prison or jail custody sentences! The court or parole will also impose harsh and expensive terms & conditions of probation/parole that will most likely include GPS monitoring, sexual deviant programs, counseling and registration as a sex offender for life. (See Penal code section 290 et seq.) Your name and place of residence may be placed on the internet as a sex offender. Simply, sex crime convictions carry long lasting devastating affects upon the person.

    You must fight all these type of allegations and charges. Please do not attempt to handle child molest or sex crime investigations by yourself or you will end up behind bars for a substantial period of time.

    A thorough investigation and examination of the facts by an experienced criminal attorney are essential. False accusations must be flushed out and aggressively defended. Also, a psychological exam may be appropriate to show that you are not a sexual predator and don’t prey upon children. DNA and or other scientific evidence issues may be present as well as forced confessions and admissions. Remember, law enforcement does not care what you want if you are the subject of child abuse or sex crime accusation.

    Allegations can range from neglect, abusive discipline, sexual touching or battery, prostitution, rape, pimping, indecent exposure, possessing child pornography and or trafficking in child pornography. Once these charges are made, expect CPS to do an investigation and perhaps remove your child and any other children from your home for their protection.

    Avoid the stigma and hire my law firm for representation and protection of your rights.

    Call My Law Firm to Speak with a Criminal Lawyer Not a Paralegal or Case Manager

    Again, please feel free to contact my firm and talk with an experienced criminal defense attorney with any child molest or sex crime questions that you may have. I take personal responsibility in my firm’s “commitment to excellence” in obtaining a favorable result on your molest or sex crime case whether it’s in San Diego, Carlsbad, Vista or elsewhere . I look forward to hearing from and meeting you soon.

    Once again, thank you for consulting with a criminal lawyer in my law firm for your legal representation.

    If you have been accused of sexual misconduct or are already facing charges for an Ohio sex offense, do not waste any more time. Call an experienced and proven sex crime lawyer from Luftman, Heck & Associates immediately. Criminal proceedings for sex crimes are often nuanced and emotionally charged. Dealing with these allegations and mounting a strong defense is psychologically taxing, which is why you need an aggressive criminal defense attorney to do the heavy lifting for you.

    Scroll for more information

    “I trusted your judgment and am glad I did. I am very happy with your services and the way my case was concluded. Thank you.”

    Luftman, Heck & Associates client

    To learn more about how one of our sex crime attorneys can help you, call us at (614) 500-3836 to schedule an initial consultation.

    Ohio Sex Crimes

    Some of the most common sex offenses brought in Ohio include:

    • Rape §2907.02 – It is illegal for you to engage in sexual conduct with another person through force or the threat of force. It is also illegal to engage in sexual conduct with another when you have substantially impaired the victim’s judgement or control through drugs or alcohol by force, threats or deception; the victim is younger than 13 years; or the victim’s ability to resist or consent is impaired due to a physical or mental condition. Rape is a first-degree felony, the punishment for which varies depending on the circumstances. If you have been accused of rape, contact a sex crime attorney immediately.
    • Sexual Battery §2907.03 – It is unlawful for you to engage in sexual conduct with another person through coercion that would prevent resistance by an average person; when you know the victim is substantially impaired; when you know the other person is unaware of what is going on; or you are in a position of authority over the victim. Sexual battery is a third-degree felony, unless the victim is a minor, and then it is a second-degree felony.
    • Gross Sexual Imposition §2907.05 – Ohio law prohibits you from having sexual contact with other people through force or the threat of force; by intentionally substantially impairing the victim’s resistance, judgement, or control through drugs or alcohol; when you know the victim’s judgement or control is substantially impaired due to drugs or an intoxicant administered because of medical care; when the victim is younger than 13; or when the victim is unable to resist or consent due to a mental or physical condition. Gross sexual imposition is a fourth- or third-degree felony. While a sexual battery, sexual imposition, or gross sexual imposition charge is less serious than rape, you will need a sex crime lawyer to aggressively defend you.
    • Online Solicitation of a Minor (Importuning) §2907.07 – it is unlawful for you to solicit a minor younger than 13 years old to engage in sexual activity, whether or not you know the minor’s real age. It is illegal for you, when you are over 18 years old, to solicit a person who is younger than 16 years, and more than four years younger than you, to engage in sexual activity, whether or not you know the other person’s exact age. It is also illegal to conduct these solicitations through the use of any telecommunications device, such as a phone or computer. Online solicitation of minors is a felony, the exactly level of which depends on the circumstances. If you have been charged with any online sex offense, contact a sex crime lawyer to discuss your options and the potential consequences of a conviction.
    • Voyeurism §2907.08 – It is illegal to trespass, invade another person’s privacy, spy, or eavesdrop for the purpose of sexual arousal or self-gratification; film, photograph, or otherwise record another person who is nude for sexual arousal or self-gratification; or film, photograph, or otherwise record a person under their clothing to view their undergarments. Depending on the situation, voyeurism may be a third-, second-, or first-degree misdemeanor. However, if the victim is a minor, it may be a fifth-degree felony.
    • Public Indecency §2907.09 – Ohio law prohibits you from recklessly and publically exposing your private parts, engaging in sexual conduct or masturbation, or engaging in conduct that would appear to an ordinary person as sexual. It is also illegal to knowingly expose your private parts for the purpose of arousal, gratification, or to lure minors, to engage in masturbation or sexual conduct, or to engage in conduct that appears to be sexual in public. In most situations, public indecency is charged as a fourth-degree misdemeanor. However, if you have a previous conviction or minors were involved, it will be a higher misdemeanor charge. When facing a misdemeanor sex offense in Ohio, your best course of action is to hire a sex crime attorney to defend you and prevent harsh repercussions.
    • Solicitation §2907.24 – You are prohibited from soliciting another person to engage in sexual activity for hire. The charge you face for soliciting prostitution depends on the circumstances. It is at least a third-degree misdemeanor. If the individual solicited is a minor has a developmental disability, then it is a felony.
    • Prostitution §2907.25 – It is illegal to engage in sexual activity for hire. You will be charged with a third-degree misdemeanor for prostitution. If you are accused of engaging in prostitution in any way, particularly if you are HIV positive, call a sex crime lawyer from Luftman, Heck & Associates immediately.

    Ohio Sexting Laws

    A minor who is caught creating, possessing, or sending videos or pictures that involve one or more minors who are nude or engaging in sexual activity may be guilty of a child pornography crime. Ohio’s child pornography law, §2907.321 (pandering obscenity involving a minor), states you are prohibited from creating, reproducing, or publishing any obscene materials that has one or more minors portrayed as participants or observers. You cannot promote, sell, deliver, disseminate, or display obscene materials that include minors. You also cannot buy, obtain, possess, or control any child pornography. This is a felony conviction that can require sex offender registration.

    It does not matter if the minor who made the photo or video, possessed it, or sent it is the one depicted. It does not matter if the photo was created, received, or sent with consent. It also does not matter if the creator and recipient were both minors. Unfortunately, this means consensual sexual activity between teenagers can lead to felony child pornography charges.

    If you or your adolescent are facing serious child pornography charges because of sexting, call our sex crime attorneys right away. Teenagers who are exploring their sexuality will make mistakes. You or your child do not deserve a felony conviction and sex offender registration for a nude photo.

    If you have been charged with a crime, contact us TODAY for a FREE consultation.

    Call or Text us 24/7 at

    Or fill out our online form to start your case today.

    Grand Rapids Sex Crimes Lawyer

    AGGRESSIVE DEFENSE FOR SEXUAL MISCONDUCT IN WESTERN MICHIGAN

    Have you been arrested or are you under investigation for a crime of a sexual nature? Criminal sexual conduct is taken extremely seriously in the state of Michigan, especially by judges. Regardless of the type of charges you are facing, you cannot afford to wait to hire a skilled Grand Rapids sex crime lawyer.

    At Blanchard Law, we have the knowledge to investigate your case and fight aggressively on your behalf. With decades of combined experience, our trial lawyers and legal team are prepared to present your story to a jury of your peers.

    There is nothing more terrifying that a false accusation of sexual assault or child molestation. Unfortunately, all too often, innocent people find themselves in exactly that position. The sex crimes attorneys at Blanchard Law are experienced in defending those who have been falsely accused of a sex crime and have had great success in trying these types of cases to juries in Michigan and nationally.

    The sex crimes attorneys at Blanchard Law work hard to investigate their cases so that they can help find an answer to the question of “why would they lie?” that so often comes up in cases where there has been an accusation of a sex crime. Utilizing tools such as private investigators, social media, motion practice, preliminary examinations, and more, Blanchard Law’s sex crimes attorneys will do everything in their power to find answers that they can present to a jury.

    Blanchard Law’s sex crimes attorneys also have a network of expert witnesses that can assist with scientific and psychological issues that so often arise in cases involving accusations of sexual assault or abuse. From DNA experts to psychiatrists, from psychologists to OB-GYN experts, Blanchard Law’s sex crime lawyers know how to identify the important issues for trial and can bring to the table the right expert for your case.

    Contact our firm now at 616-773-2945 to learn how we can help.

    DEDICATED TRIAL ADVOCACY FOR SEX CRIMES

    Being accused of a sex crime can be stressful and downright frightening. Your future, reputation, and freedom are all on the line as you choose an attorney to represent you. With so many firms to choose from, it is important that you consider the skill and experience level of the one you select. Our Grand Rapids criminal defense lawyers have represented thousands of clients for a variety of cases, including sexual offenses.

    The sex crime lawyers at Blanchard Law have extensive experience in defending against false accusations of sex assault and child molestation. In fact, they are often asked to present to other lawyers regarding their expertise in the areas of trial skills, dealing with sympathetic witnesses in criminal sexual conduct cases, and regarding scientific evidence. The lawyers at Blanchard Law are in-demand statewide and nationally as trainers for other lawyers.

    Blanchard Law also ensures that the clients they serve are a top priority. We significantly limit our caseloads so that each case we do take on gets the personal attention that it deserves. We make time not just to do the legal work on the case, but also to get to know the client and their family in the way that the client deserves. We find that we can best defend our clients when we truly get to know and understand their story.

    In order to be successful at trial, you will need a sex crimes attorney who can best help you tell your story to a jury. A jury is going to want to understand the relationships involved in the case and to have an idea or ideas about why a person or a child would lie about something so serious. It is important to find the most effective way of presenting the story to a jury so that you can come away with a not guilty verdict and begin to rebuild your life following an accusation.

    Blanchard Law also ensures success at trial by conducting focus groups prior to trial. The focus groups help us figure out what issues in the case regular people, like our potential jurors, will focus on during a trial. It also helps the lawyers practice various arguments and see which ones work best, before we try them out on a real jury. The focus groups also help our clients to practice their testimony in a courtroom-like setting, so that they feel more comfortable with their actual testimony in a real trial.

    Most of all, you will need a sex crimes attorney who cares about the outcome of your case to be defending you at trial. Blanchard Law looks at your defense as a partnership with you, and takes a team approach to defending your case.

    We are prepared to defend you against a wide range of sex crimes, such as:

    PROTECTING YOU AGAINST THE CONSEQUENCES OF A CONVICTION

    The consequences involved in a sex crime conviction can be devastating, from prison time to a permanent sex offender registry. Blanchard Law understands exactly how serious these penalties are and will work with DNA experts, forensic psychologists, and investigators to give you the best chance of avoiding a conviction.

    We do everything we can to obtain the best possible outcome for our clients. Sometimes, that results in reduced charges. Sometimes, we are able to obtain a dismissal. However, no matter what, if the client has not obtained a result that they are satisfied with, the sex crimes attorneys at Blanchard Law are always prepared to take any case to trial, and will fight as hard as possible to obtain an acquittal for a client.

    Blanchard Law’s sex crimes attorneys have faced many challenges in their cases and are dedicated to finding solutions that will give the best chance of success to their clients. We know that the stress and pressure of criminal sexual conduct charges is great and that this is likely to be one of the most difficult things our clients will ever face. The sex crimes attorneys at Blanchard Law want to make sure that they are there for the clients that they serve.

    While no one can guarantee results in difficult cases like these, experienced sex crimes lawyers like those at Blanchard Law can give their clients the best chance at a life beyond these types of accusations. If you are facing false accusations of sexual assault, sexual abuse, or child molestation, contact Blanchard Law today for a case consultation. We’ll figure out if you are the right fit for our firm, or we’ll try our very best to help give you direction in this difficult time. Contact Blanchard Law today at 616-773-2945.

    Request a case consultation with a Grand Rapids sex crime lawyer today by calling us at 616-773-2945.

    Riverside Sex Crimes Lawyer

    Being convicted of a sex crime could have devastating consequences on you and your family. These offenses carry a negative stigma that can follow you for a lifetime. If you have been charged with a sex crime, you need to hire strong legal counsel from a Riverside, CA sex crimes attorney to defend you. This will keep you from having to face life-changing and serious charges on your own.

    Examples of Sex Crimes

    Sex crimes are a very broad category of the law that encompasses many different offenses, so it is not possible to give a uniform definition. Here are some crimes that fall into this classification:

    • Sexual assault
    • Statutory rape
    • Child sexual abuse
    • Online internet crimes
    • Indecent exposure
    • Possession of child pornography

    This is just a partial list of sex crimes. There are scores of offenses in California that can be charged as sex crimes.

    Beyond the potential jail time, the effects of a sex crime conviction can be devastating. First, most sex crimes will require that the person convicted place their name on a sex offender registry. Not only is this deeply embarrassing, but it could also keep those convicted from finding jobs or a place to live in the future. In addition, a conviction could have a devastating effect on your family and reputation. Finally, a sex crimes conviction may also cost you the right to own a firearm.

    Defenses to Sex Crimes Charges

    One of the keys to defending against sex crimes charges is to hire an aggressive attorney who can get to work early in defending you. We will do our own independent investigation of the charges against you to learn how to defend your case. This could even happen before formal charges are filed. Your lawyer could also engage with the prosecutor to explain your side of the story. If the possible charges are the result of a misunderstanding, this could help clear your name.

    Since sex crimes are often evidence-based, an aggressive legal strategy to keep illegally obtained evidence out of court could weaken the case against you. It could keep prosecutors from charging more serious crimes.

    We do not judge our clients. Instead, we work with them to mount the strongest possible legal defense to the charges that they face. We take the attorney-client relationship seriously and will always stick to defending our clients’ legal rights no matter what the charges are.

    There are numerous defenses that those charged can use against the prosecution. Here are some:

    • A common defense to online sex crimes is entrapment. Sometimes, when law enforcement is active in cyberspace, they take things a step too far in luring someone to commit a crime.
    • Many sex crimes are evidence-based. In some cases, police will illegally seize evidence when they confiscate or search a mobile device or laptop computer.
    • When the defendant is accused of sexual assault, a common defense is that the sexual activity was consensual or never even happened in the first place. Many sex crimes charges are a case of mistaken identity.

    You need an attorney who can get to the bottom of your case after a thorough investigation. Since this can take time, early engagement with a lawyer can make all the difference in your case. Police questioning can be intense, and prosecutors are often under pressure to win convictions in these cases. This is why legal representation is a must.

    In some cases, your attorney may be able to persuade the prosecutor to agree to a deal that allows you to avoid jail and having to register as a sex offender. In other cases, your attorney could convince a jury that law enforcement has not proven the charges beyond a reasonable doubt. At DeLimon Law, we give our clients frank and objective advice designed to help them achieve the best legal outcome.

    Contact a Riverside Sex Crimes Lawyer

    Those who have been charged with sex crimes should not feel as if they have nowhere to turn. In fact, the first place to go for help is to an experienced criminal defense attorney. Call the firm of DeLimon Law at (951) 777-9104 or contact us online. The time to call is the very first instant that you think you may be under investigation for a possible sex crime charge. Having a tough and knowledgeable attorney on your side could impact what evidence law enforcement can seize and even the charged offenses. Call us today for your initial consultation. Getting an early start on your case is vital to mounting your strongest defense.

    How to reset your advertising id on pc or mac

    Posted on April 19th, 2019 by Kirk McElhearn

    How to reset your advertising id on pc or mac

    In this week’s episode of the Intego Mac Podcast, we discussed the “advertising identifier,” a unique identifier assigned to each Mac, iOS device, and Apple TV. The subject came up because the Mozilla foundation is calling on Apple to reset this identifier once a month.

    The advertising identifier on an Apple device does not identify you personally, but it can be used by advertisers to create a profile about you. If it’s never reset, that profile increases in detail, allowing advertisers to target ads to you based on your Internet activity.

    Mozilla’s point is that resetting this identifier prevents advertisers from developing rather detailed profiles on users, and is simple to do. It’s not a hardware identifier (such as the EMEI of your iPhone), but rather a number generated by your operating system.

    However, you can manually reset this advertising identifier, and it’s a good idea to do so regularly. Here’s how.

    iOS devices (iPhone, iPad, iPod touch)

    On an iPhone or iPad, go to Settings > Privacy > Advertising. Tap Reset Advertising Identifier.

    How to reset your advertising id on pc or mac

    On the Mac, go to System Preferences > Security & Privacy > Privacy, then scroll down until you see Advertising. Click that, then click Reset Advertising Identifier.

    How to reset your advertising id on pc or mac

    Apple TV

    On the Apple TV, go to Settings > General > Privacy, and select Reset Advertising Identifier.

    How often should it be reset?

    If you want to prevent advertisers from developing profiles about your activity—which they may later be able to link to other, personal data they have from you—think about doing this regularly. Set a calendar event to do this monthly, or more often if you prefer. It will prevent advertisers from knowing too much about you.

    How can I learn more?

    How to reset your advertising id on pc or macWe discuss Apple’s advertising identifier—and Mozilla’s opinion about it—on this week’s episode of the Intego Mac Podcast, so be sure to subscribe to make sure you don’t miss it. You’ll also want to subscribe to our e-mail newsletter and keep an eye here on The Mac Security Blog for updates.

    You can also follow Intego on your favorite social and media channels: Facebook, Instagram, Twitter, and YouTube (click the ? to get notified about new videos).

    iPhone X image by Rani Ramli.

    Share this:

    • Twitter
    • Facebook

    About Kirk McElhearn

    Popular Stories

    • How to reset your advertising id on pc or mac

    How to reset your advertising id on pc or mac

    How to reset your advertising id on pc or mac

    How to reset your advertising id on pc or mac

    Follow Intego

    How to reset your advertising id on pc or mac

    Recommended

    • Apple
      17 Reasons Why You Should Use an iPod touch in 2022
    • How To
      USB-C and Thunderbolt: Understanding Ports and Cables for Macs and iPads
    • How To
      How to switch search engines in Safari and other browsers on macOS and iOS (and why you should)
    • How To
      How to Uncover and Delete Hidden Files Cluttering Your Mac and Save Space

    Subscribe

    Sign up for a Free Mac Security Newsletter to stay updated.

    How to reset your advertising id on pc or mac

    Your phone holds a trove of data that advertisers use to deliver targeted ads based on your habits. Here’s how to reset the tracking ID and opt-out of ad personalization.

    Advertising is how the tech companies can offer everyone so many cool, fun, and useful apps and services. And your phone contains a trove of information advertisers use to build a custom profile of your daily phone use to deliver targeted ads. While you cannot completely turn off the ad ID, both Android and iOS offer ways to reset it. Here is a look at resetting your advertising identifier and opting out of some personalized ad profile tracking.

    Reset Advertising ID on Android

    The steps for resetting your ad ID and turning off ad personalization are essentially the same for all versions of Android, though things may vary slightly. Head to Settings > Google > Ads > Reset advertising ID and click OK when the confirmation screen appears. It would be best if you also wanted to make sure to opt-out of ads personalization. Or, on other versions of Android, it might say “Opt-out of interest-based ads,” and you may find a toggle switch or checkbox to enable it.

    How to reset your advertising id on pc or mac

    Reset Advertising Identifier on iOS

    You can do the same on your iOS device as well. On your iPhone or iPad, head to Settings > Privacy > Reset Advertising Identifier and then Reset Identifier when the prompt comes up. Just like with Android, here, you should also turn on the option to limit ad tracking.

    How to reset your advertising id on pc or mac

    If you use a smartphone, there isn’t much you can do to prevent ad tracking of some sort. Email companies are scanning your mail to sell ads; cookies keep track of your browsing habits, etc. It was recently reported that some apps send a plethora of data to companies without your consent via the Facebook API. Not being tracked on your phone is like playing whack-a-mole and the game never ends.

    But there are measures you can take to help limit tracking, such as properly stopping Google from tracking your location, using alternate DNS like Cloudflare’s 1.1.1.1 service while on Wi-Fi, deleting your voice searches from digital assistants, and resetting your ad tracking identifier as explained above. And for more, make sure to check out our archive of privacy tech tips.

    Chris Hoffman is Editor-in-Chief of How-To Geek. He’s written about technology for over a decade and was a PCWorld columnist for two years. Chris has written for The New York Times and Reader’s Digest, been interviewed as a technology expert on TV stations like Miami’s NBC 6, and had his work covered by news outlets like the BBC. Since 2011, Chris has written over 2,000 articles that have been read nearly one billion times—and that’s just here at How-To Geek. Read more.

    How to reset your advertising id on pc or mac

    Modern mobile operating systems — Apple’s iOS, Google’s Android, and Microsoft’s Windows 10 — all provide a unique advertising identifier to apps you use. Apps use this identifier to track your interests and provide personalized ads.

    If you’d rather not see personalized ads in apps, all operating systems provide a way to disable — or just reset — your identifier. You’ll still see ads, they just won’t be personalized. These settings are just for apps, not websites in your browser.

    What This Does (and What This Doesn’t Do)

    This doesn’t disable in-app ads, or reduce the number of ads you’ll see. Instead, it disables access to a tracking feature that normally allows ad networks to track your usage across apps. This is used to build up a personalized ad profile about you and serve targeted ads.

    With this feature disabled, you won’t see ads specifically targeted to you based on other apps you were using. For example, if you’re shopping for a product in App A, you won’t see ads for that type of product in App B. You will see ads for that type of product in App A, however — this just prevents cross-app ad-tracking.

    iPhone & iPad

    Apple introduced this option in iOS 6. Previously, ads relied on a unique device identifier to track your device — always. Now, they rely on an ad-tracking identifier you can disable or reset. This affects the in-app ads provided by Apple’s iAd network.

    To change this setting, open the Settings app, select the Privacy category, and tap the Advertising option at the bottom of the screen. Activate the “Limit Ad Tracking” option to disable interest-based ads or tap “Reset Advertising Identifier” if you’d like to continue seeing interest-based ads in the future but wipe your existing profile.

    You can also disable location-based ads, if you like. Open the Settings screen, select the Privacy category, and tap Location Services. Tap the “System Services” option at the bottom of the list and disable “Location-based iAds.”

    How to reset your advertising id on pc or mac

    Android

    There’s a setting that does the same thing on Android phones and tablets, too. It works similarly to the feature on iOS. Rather than using a unique, unchangeable identifier to identify your device, it uses an “anonymous” ID that can be reset or disabled.

    This option is found in the Google Settings app Google quietly added to devices via Google Play Services back in 2013, so you should have it on your device.

    Open your app drawer and launch the Google Setting app. Tap “Ads” under Services and enable the “Opt out of interest-based ads” option. You can also reset your advertising ID from here by tapping “Reset advertising ID”.

    How to reset your advertising id on pc or mac

    Windows 10

    Windows 10 has a similar setting for its apps and their ads. You’ll find this particular setting in the Settings app. Open the Start menu, click Settings, and select the Privacy category. At the top of the General pane, you’ll see a “Let apps use my advertising ID for experiences across apps (turning this off will reset your ID)” option. Disable this setting to disable those personalized ads. To reset your ID, just disable the setting and reenable it.

    This setting only affects those new “universal apps” you get from the Windows Store. It won’t affect any traditional Windows desktop apps that use advertising — Microsoft’s own Skype desktop program, for example. This setting should be in the same place on Windows 10 phones.

    How to reset your advertising id on pc or mac

    The Web

    There’s no similar setting for traditional Windows desktop programs, Mac software, or Linux applications. Instead, you’ll generally get those interest-based ads from within your web browser.

    Advertising networks track you in a variety of ways, including by asking your web browser to store cookies and tying your activity to an account you stay logged in with on different services.

    A variety of websites and ad networks do provide some control over whether you see those interest-based ads on the web. For example, Google offers pages where you can control interest-based ads when signed into Google, and when not signed into Google. There are other opt-out tools, like the Digital Advertising Alliance Consumer Choice page and the Ad Choices page for European users. Other ad networks and services may have their own options for controlling this.

    This is a scattershot approach necessitated because the “Do Not Track” option integrated into modern browsers is largely ignored. You could also just clear your cookies every time you close your web browser. You’d have to log into websites you use over and over, but no data would be built up over time — unless it’s account-based data and you always log back into the same websites.

    Of course, whether personalized, interest-based ads are actually a problem is a matter of some disagreement. This does ensure you’ll see ads that are targeted to you, at least theoretically — you won’t see ads for diapers if you’re not a parent, for example. In practice, some people do find them “creepy” — whether you want to see them is up to you.

    Joe Fedewa is a Staff Writer at How-To Geek. He has been covering consumer technology for over a decade and previously worked as a News Editor at XDA Developers. Joe loves all things technology and is also an avid DIYer at heart. He has written thousands of articles, hundreds of tutorials, and dozens of reviews. Read more.

    How to reset your advertising id on pc or mac

    Advertising IDs are used by companies to send you targeted ads based on your activity. Each iPhone has its own unique advertising ID—at least, they used to. Can you still reset the ID on your iPhone or iPad?

    The idea behind an advertising ID is similar to the one behind browser cookies. Companies use things like your location, shopping habits, and app usage to show you ads that you’re more likely to interact with. If you care about privacy, it’s something to think about.

    There’s good news for iPhone users, though. Starting in iOS 14, apps are forced to ask before they can track your activity. You no longer have to worry about “resetting” your advertising ID. In fact, you can even stop all apps from requesting to track you.

    What you can still do is turn off personalized ads. This will limit the number of targeted ads that you see, but not the number of total ads.

    First, open the “Settings” app from your iPhone or iPad home screen.

    How to reset your advertising id on pc or mac

    Select “Privacy” from the Settings.

    How to reset your advertising id on pc or mac

    Tap “Apple Advertising” at the bottom.

    How to reset your advertising id on pc or mac

    Simply toggle off the switch for “Personalized Ads.”

    How to reset your advertising id on pc or mac

    That’s all there is to it! Apple has done a lot to limit how apps can track you, which makes things like advertising IDs less scary on iPhones.

    Apple offers a way for advertisers to uniquely identify you in order to track your activity across applications and websites you consume on your mobile device. In this guide you’ll learn how to hinder tracking on your MacOS device either by periodically resetting your Ad ID or by opting out completely.

    The Advertising ID is a unique identifier offered by the MacOS Operating System that advertisers might use to uniquely identify you. It facilitates the creation of a profile by advertisers or data brokers that can later be used for advertisement targeting or other purposes.

    Opt out of targeted advertising

    We have written before about the risks that targeted advertisements pose with regards to your digital privacy. To opt out of targeted ads on macOS, open the System Preferences app, go to the Security & Privacy page, and then click on the Privacy tab (Fig. 1).

    How to reset your advertising id on pc or mac

    To change the settings you need to click the lock icon in the lower left corner of the window, input your password, and then click Unlock (Fig. 2).

    How to reset your advertising id on pc or mac

    On the left menu, scroll down and click on Apple Advertising (Fig. 3). To opt out of targeted ads, disable Personalised Ads

    How to reset your advertising id on pc or mac

    Disable location data collection

    On the privacy menu (Fig. 1), select Analytics, and then disable Share Mac Analytics (Fig. 4) to prevent diagnostic messages which are shared with Apple from leaking your location data.

    How to reset your advertising id on pc or mac

    Next, select Location Services, find the System Services item, and click on Details. . Disable Location-Based Sugestions, Significant Locations, Location-Based Apple Ads, and Wi-Fi Networking (Fig. 5).

    How to reset your advertising id on pc or mac

    Found a mistake? An outdated screenshot? Think this could be improved? Check out our Github repository and contribute to help keep these guides up-to-date and useful!

    More steps to take

    How to reset your advertising id on pc or mac

    Cómo desactivar los anuncios personalizados en macOS

    Apple ofrece la posibilidad de que los anunciantes te identifiquen de forma precisa para poder rastrear tu actividad en las aplicaciones y sitios web que consumes en tu dispositivo móvil. En esta guía aprenderás a dificultar el seguimiento en tu dispositivo MacOS, ya sea restableciendo periódicamente tu Ad ID o desactivándolo completamente.

    How to reset your advertising id on pc or mac

    Cómo configurar el bloqueo de anuncios a nivel del DNS en macOS

    Con esta guía aprenderás a insertar manualmente registros DNS para ciertos tipos de hosts conocidos (por ejemplo, servidores de anuncios, rastreadores, sitios web de malware) y dirigirlos a una dirección vacía, de modo que esas solicitudes queden bloqueadas en tu dispositivo. A diferencia de las extensiones del navegador, el bloqueo de anuncios a nivel del DNS funciona en *cualquier* aplicación o servicio que se ejecute en tu dispositivo, no solamente en tu navegador.

    How to reset your advertising id on pc or mac

    Cómo aislar tu actividad en línea – Firefox Multi-Account Containers

    Una manera de minimizar el rastreo y mejorar tu privacidad en línea es almacenar la menor cantidad posible de cookies de navegación en tu dispositivo. Sin embargo, algunas es práctico tener cookies almacenadas en sitios web como tu cliente de correo electrónico o tu aplicación web para tomar notas, para que no tengas que iniciar una sesión cada vez que visites el sitio. Esta guía explicará cómo instalar y configurar los contenedores de Firefox Multi-Account Containers para mantener diferentes partes de tu actividad en línea aisladas entre sí, reduciendo así tu huella digital.

    Windows provides the following privacy settings to give you control over your privacy.

    Advertising ID

    Windows generates a unique advertising ID for each user on a device, which app developers and advertising networks can then use for their own purposes, including providing more relevant advertising in apps. When the advertising ID is enabled, apps can access and use it in much the same way that websites can access and use a unique identifier stored in a cookie. Thus, app developers (and the advertising networks they work with) can associate personal data they collect about you with your advertising ID and use that personal data to provide more relevant advertising and other personalized experiences across their apps.

    The advertising ID setting applies to Windows apps using the Windows advertising identifier. The advertising ID setting does not apply to other methods of interest-based advertising delivered by Microsoft or third parties, such as cookies used to provide interest-based display ads on websites. Third-party products accessed through or installed on Windows may also deliver other forms of interest-based advertising subject to their own privacy policies. Microsoft delivers other forms of interest-based ads in certain Microsoft products, both directly and by partnering with third-party ad providers. Learn more about other interest-based advertising from Microsoft

    To turn off your advertising ID in Windows 10

    Go to Start > Settings > Privacy > General.

    Choose your preferred setting for Let apps use advertising ID to make ads more interesting to you based on your app activity.

    To turn off your advertising ID in Windows 11

    Go to Start > Settings > Privacy & security > General.

    Choose your preferred setting for Let apps show me personalized ads by using my advertising ID.

    Turning the advertising ID off will not reduce the number of ads you see, but it may mean that ads are less interesting and relevant to you. Turning it back on will reset the advertising ID.

    In previous versions of Windows 10, advertising ID was referred to as relevant ads.

    Windows Defender SmartScreen

    Windows Defender SmartScreen sends data to Microsoft about the websites you visit and files you download to warn you and help protect you and your device from unsafe web content or malicious software.

    To turn off Windows Defender SmartScreen

    Do one of the following:

    In Windows 10, go to Start > Settings > Update & Security > Windows Security > App & browser control.

    In Windows 11, go to Start > Settings > Privacy & security > Windows Security > App & browser control.

    Choose your preferred settings for Windows Defender SmartScreen.

    Website access of the language list

    Some websites may have their content available in different languages. Windows can share information about your preferred language list with websites so that they can have the opportunity to respect your language preferences without you having to independently set them for each site.

    To turn off website access to the language list in Windows 10

    Go to Start > Settings > Privacy > General.

    Choose your preferred setting for Let websites provide locally relevant content by accessing my language list.

    To turn off website access to the language list in Windows 11

    Go to Start > Settings > Privacy & security > General.

    Choose your preferred setting for Let websites show me locally relevant content by accessing my language list.

    App launch tracking

    Windows can personalize your Start menu based on the apps that you launch. This allows you to quickly have access to your list of most-used apps both in the Start menu and when you search your device.

    To control app launch tracking in Windows 10

    Go to Start > Settings > Privacy > General.

    Choose your preferred setting for Let Windows track app launches to improve Start and search results.

    To control app launch tracking in Windows 11

    Go to Start > Settings > Privacy & security > General.

    Choose your preferred setting for Let Windows improve Start and search results by tracking app launches.

    Suggested content

    Microsoft can offer you suggestions throughout Settings. This content comes in a variety of forms, and can help you discover new features within Settings, or suggest new content and apps you might find interesting.

    To turn off suggested content in Settings

    Do one of the following:

    In Windows 10, go to Start > Settings > Privacy > General.

    In Windows 11, go to Start > Settings > Privacy & security > General.

    Turn off Show me suggested content in the Settings app.

    How to reset your advertising id on pc or mac

    This tutorial is about How to Reset Advertising ID on iPhone. Recently I updated this tutorial and will try my best so that you understand this guide. I hope you guys like this blog, How to Reset Advertising ID on iPhone. If your answer is yes after reading the article, please share this article with your friends and family to support us.

    • Check How to Reset Advertising ID on iPhone
    • How to reset the advertising ID on your iPhone
    • Final remarks: How to Reset Advertising ID on iPhone

    Check How to Reset Advertising ID on iPhone

    An Advertising ID is a user-resettable identifier assigned to you by your mobile device or operating system. Android users get a Google Play ID, while iPhone owners get their iOS ID. These IDs are similar to cookies and are used for advertising purposes. They can help developers track your movements and mobile app usage. This information can then be shared with (or sold to) advertisers and third parties who flood you with targeted ads. Advertising IDs may not sound malicious.

    They are simply used to serve personalized ads. What’s wrong with that? However, there are a few reasons why you should opt out of ad ID personalization. However, you can disable or reset your ID with a few clicks and go back to being (almost) anonymous. Note: Limiting ad tracking settings only works for apps, not websites you visit through your browser. And resetting your ID will not remove ads; they just won’t be personalized because they don’t have your data. When you come across an ad on social media or another website, you will get the same or similar ads everywhere, including in apps.

    This is because your ad ID is exposed and the advertiser’s algorithm is now targeting you. While it’s true that you can’t completely escape ad targeting, you can greatly minimize it by simply resetting your ad ID. In this article, we will show you how to reset the Ad ID on your phone. No matter you use Android or iPhone, you can reset ad id without third party app.

    How to reset the advertising ID on your iPhone

    • Open the “Settings” app from the home screen of your Apple iPhone.
    • In the Settings menu, select the “Privacy” option.
    • Now, tap on “Apple Advertising” at the bottom of the page.
    • Just turn off the “Personalized Ads” switch.

    Final remarks: How to Reset Advertising ID on iPhone

    I hope you understand this article, How to Reset Advertising ID on iPhone. If your answer is no, you can ask anything via the contact forum section related to this article. And if your answer is yes, please share this article with your friends and family to give us your support.

    How to reset your advertising id on pc or mac

    On Windows 10, every user account gets a unique identifier, known as the “advertising ID,” that tracks and collects their activities, which then advertisers and developers can use to show targeted ads in apps.

    If this sounds familiar, it’s because the advertising ID works like cookies on the internet to “personalize” your experience and show you tailored ads, but the token generated for Windows 10 users only applies for apps they obtain from the Microsoft Store.

    If you don’t want to get ads on apps based on your activities, Windows 10 offers an option to disable this behavior. It won’t block ads in apps, but future advertisements you see won’t be personalized.

    In this Windows 10 guide, we’ll walk you through the steps to disable the advertising ID on your device to stop getting targeted ads on apps from the Microsoft Store.

    • How to disable advertising ID using Settings
    • How to disable advertising ID using Group Policy
    • How to disable advertising ID using Windows 10 setup

    How to disable advertising ID using Settings

    To delete your advertising identifier on Windows 10, use the following steps:

    1. Open Start.
    2. Click on Privacy.
    3. Click on General.

    Under the “Change privacy options” section, turn off the Let app use Advertising ID to make ads more interesting to based on your app activity toggle switch.

    Once you’ve completed the steps, you’ll continue to see ads through the experience, but they won’t be based on your activities.

    If you change your mind, you can use the same instructions to revert the changes, but on step No. 4, make sure to turn on the toggle switch. (Re-enabling the feature will reset the unique advertising identifier.)

    How to disable advertising ID using Group Policy

    If you’re running Windows 10 Pro, you can also prevent tailored advertising using the Local Group Policy Editor.

    1. Use the Windows key + R keyboard shortcut to open the Run command.
    2. Type gpedit.msc and click OK to open the Local Group Policy Editor.

    Browse the following path:

    Computer Configuration\Administrative Templates\System\User Profile

    On the right side, double-click the Turn off the advertising ID policy.

    Select the Disable option.

  • Click Apply.
  • Click OK.
  • After completing the steps, Microsoft Store apps will no longer show relevant ads.

    In the case you change your mind, you can roll back the previous settings using the same instructions, but on step No. 5, select the Not Configured option.

    How to disable advertising ID during Windows 10 setup

    Alternatively, you can also prevent apps from showing relevant ads by turning off the Advertising ID in the “Choose privacy settings for your device” page during the last step setting up Windows 10.

    More Windows 10 resources

    For more helpful articles, coverage, and answers to common questions about Windows 10, visit the following resources:

    These are the best 27-inch monitors money can buy

    A 27-inch monitor is just about the perfect size without having to sit too far away or whip your head back and forth to follow things across the screen. If you’re in the market for a new monitor, check out our top picks.

    Review: Lenovo’s Yoga 9i Gen 7 with OLED and speaker bar is simply superb

    The Lenovo Yoga 9i 14 Gen7 for 2022 brings an all-new smoother, more modern design while amping up the display and audio to new highs. But while the Intel 12th Gen P-series processor blows away even Apple’s M1 for performance, battery life is this laptop’s one weak spot. Here’s our full review.

    Microsoft partners with Apple and Google to get rid of passwords

    Microsoft has tried to convince people to move away from passwords for half a decade. This week, the company announced support for a FIDO standard to help make people shift away from passwords.

    Check out these must-have Windows apps for Super Bowl LVI

    Super Bowl LVI is finally here. To make sure you get the best experience for the big game, make sure to grab these apps for Windows 11 and Windows 10.

    How to reset your advertising id on pc or mac

    What is the advertising ID?

    The advertising ID is an identifier on your mobile device that is created to identify you for advertising purposes. It is present on both Android and iOS devices.

    Apps on your mobile devices can send your behavior along with the advertising ID to one or more advertising networks. By linking data from different apps with the same advertising ID, the advertising networks can build a profile for all of the apps you are using, and how you are using them. Then they can analyze the data to deliver more targeted ads to you.

    How the advertising ID might help to protect your privacy

    Before there was ad ID, the advertising industry used device identifiers (such as IMEI, WiFi MAC address etc.) to track you. Device identifiers are permanently associated with your device.

    The advertising ID, on the other hand, can be reset. Just like clearing cookies in the web browser, you get a fresh start each time you reset the advertising ID. Once you reset the ad ID, previous profiles built around your old ad ID can not be associated with your future activities.

    As such, resetting the advertising ID is often offered as a technique to fend off the omnipresent and persistent tracking (e.g., to sidestep stalker ads).

    How to reset your advertising id on pc or mac

    Why it actually doesn’t help

    If your IMEI (or any hardware ID) is sent along the ad ID to an advertising network, the purpose of the ad ID is defeated. The advertising network can simply discard the ad ID and continue to track you with your IMEI. That is why both Apple and Google prohibit app developers from transmitting device identifiers alongside the advertising ID.

    Unfortunately, not all apps follow the rules. A recent AppCensus blog reported that about 70% of the 24k apps in their database transmitted some persistent identifier along with the ad ID. As long as apps continue to violate Apple and Google’s policies, resetting the ad ID is practically a waste of time.

    What you can do

    Well, you can’t control what your apps send out. But you can block access to the advertising networks from your devices. Here’s a recipe that will help to reduce your chances of being tracked:

    1. Install an ad blocker on your home network.
    2. Install a VPN server on your home network.
    3. On your mobile devices, establish a VPN connection home to take advantage of the ad blocker at home.

    For DYI enthusiasts, this can be accomplished by adding a Raspberry Pi to your network and install Pi-hole ® & PiVPN.

    If you own a pcWRT router, everything is built-in. Just turn on ad-blocking and configure an OpenVPN, IPsec, or WireGuard ® VPN server on the router.

    How to reset your advertising id on pc or mac

    Have you ever given a thought to those ads that match your interest and pop up when you browse on any page? How these ads are matched up with your interest? Do you know your every activity on the browser can be tracked by web developers or tech giants? Wondering about your privacy cookies and don’t know how to protect your personal information from being marketed by these developers? Your android phone facilitates you with an advertising ID so that you can control your browsing information and make most of your browsing activity private.

    If you are tussling with the privacy of your Android phone and want to protect your secret identifier i.e. Advertising ID, you have landed at the right place. You are just a troll away from maintaining your mobile app activity back and protect them from the tech giants and advertisers. These advertising IDs on Android can be reset easily and by following few steps you can hide the browsing information of your mobile phone and make it private. Then, there is no hassling of annoying advertising ads on your android mobile phone.

    The term advertising ID itself identifies that it is a reset table ID given to android users by Google Play and is similar to cookies and used for advertising purposes. This advertising ID helps track your mobile movement and mobile app usage by developers and advertising companies. Henceforth, web developers target the advertising ID and sell it or share it with the advertising company or third parties. This will help the third party to learn about your interest, and finally, they flood your mobile with the targeted ads.

    Your advertising ID knows all the finest information about your shopping habits like how many bucks you spend on the restaurant? What you bought last night and lots more? Further by tracking your ID information they can serve you some political ads and can cheat you with making payments and all.

    However, in this case, you can simply disable or rest your advertising ID with the help of few clicks and protect yourself from being tracked and malware advertising ads. Additionally, you can protect yourself from getting targeted with advertising ads. And here is the step-by-step process to reset Your Advertising ID on Android.

    Steps to Reset Your Advertising ID on Android:

    Firstly go to Settings of your mobile and scroll down to see Google Services and preferences

    By tapping on Google services and preferences it will command you to your Google account

    There, click on Ads

    Now, click on Reset advertising ID

    When you finally tap reset, a new Advertiser ID is displayed immediately on the same page

    After getting a new advertising ID the tech giants can no more connect with you and annoy you with advertising ads.

    Important Note:

    On the same page, you can opt out of interest-based ads. The developers then no more can use the advertising ID for showing you ads.

    Google dealt with the apps that before showing ads, the apps must check and respect the Android device’s settings. If interest-based advertisements are turned off on an Android device, apps must honor it and if fails to do so it means policy violation.

    Google wants that no information about their users goes public, so Goggle offered the companies a policy page that how the advertising ID may be used by tech giants or developers without violating their privacy.

    But, is resetting the advertising ID enough to protect yourself from tech giants and keep your browsing habits away from them? The tech giants can use privacy-oriented browsers and with the help of filter bubble, they will show you annoying ads. So, always flush out your cookies regularly because most of the trackers use mobile cookies to understand your browsing behavior and show you the targeted ads.

    By adding these simple steps to your mobile use routine you can step out from the stealing of your personal browsing information!

    Experiencing difficulties with your Device, check out our “How To” page on how to resolve some of these issues.

    Learn how to limit the personalization of ads delivered by Apple on your iPhone, iPad, iPod touch, and Mac, and how to turn off location-based ads delivered by Apple on your iPhone, iPad, iPod touch, and Mac.

    Apple-delivered advertising helps people discover apps, products, and services while respecting user privacy. To deliver personalized ads, Apple uses information about you to serve ads that are more relevant to you. You can learn more about the information Apple uses to serve advertisements to you while protecting your privacy.

    If you don’t want to receive personalized ads, you can choose to turn off the Personalized Ads setting on your iPhone, iPad and iPod touch, and Mac. This may not decrease the number of ads you receive, but the ads may be less relevant to you. You can also turn off location-based ads on your iPhone, iPad and iPod touch, and Mac.

    Personalized ads

    Turn off personalized ads on your device to limit Apple from using information to serve ads that may be more relevant to you.

    Turn off personalized ads on your iPhone, iPad, or iPod touch

    1. Go to Settings > Privacy > Apple Advertising.
      How to reset your advertising id on pc or mac
    2. Turn off Personalized Ads.

    Turn off personalized ads on your Mac

    1. Go to System Preferences and click Security & Privacy.
    2. Select the Privacy tab.
    3. Select Apple Advertising in the side bar.
      How to reset your advertising id on pc or mac
    4. Deselect Personalized Ads.

    Location-based ads

    If you grant the App Store or Apple News access to your device location, Apple’s advertising platform may use the current location of your device to provide you with geographically-targeted ads on the App Store and on Apple News.

    You can turn off geographically targeted ads.

    This tutorial explains how to reset advertising ID in Android, iOS to avoid targeted ads. If you think you are getting targeting ads on your mobile then to get rid of them, you can just reset your Ad ID. And I will show how to do that on Android and iPhone.

    Many people don’t know that this is a built-in feature and is very easy to find in the settings. previously it used to come as a part of Google Settings but in Android 10+ it can now be found in the system settings.

    When you make impression on some ad on social media or on any other website then you start getting the same or similar ads everywhere, even in-app ads. This is because your Ad ID is being exposed and now the advertiser’s algorithm is targeting you. Well it is true, you can cannot completely escape the ad targeting but you can minimize it to a very much extents by simply resetting your ad ID.

    And in this post, I will show you how you can reset advertisement ID on your phone. It doesn’t matter if you are using Android or iPhone, you will be able to reset the ad id without any third party app.

    How to Reset Advertising ID on Android to Avoid Targeted Ads?

    Follow these steps to reset ad ID on Android phone. For this, I am doing it on my Samsung Galaxy phone but steps should be same for other Android phones as well.

    1. Open Settings app.
      How to reset your advertising id on pc or mac
    2. Find Google option. Tap on it to enter the Google Settings.
      How to reset your advertising id on pc or mac
    3. Tap on Ads and then tap on Reset advertising ID option.
      How to reset your advertising id on pc or mac

    Now, for extra step, you can restart your phone but that is not required. From now on, you will start seeing less targeted ads on your Android phone.

    How to Reset Advertising ID on iPhone to Avoid Targeted Ads?

    The process of resetting ad ID on iOS devices such as iPhone, iPAD is very different than Android. Actually Apple has limited how iOS apps can track users, which makes advertising IDs less scary on iPhone devices. Also, there isn’t really an option to reset the ad ID but you simply turn off targeted ads in a few taps. And it works in the same was as resetting ad ID does.

    Follow these steps to turn off targeted ads on iPhone.

    1. Open Settings app.
      How to reset your advertising id on pc or mac
    2. Select “Privacy” and scroll down to the “Apple Advertising” option.
      How to reset your advertising id on pc or mac
    3. Now, simply slide the switch next to “Personalised Ads” to prevent targeted ads.
      How to reset your advertising id on pc or mac
    4. You can enable the ad ID in the same way if you think targeted ads are not much of a concern for you.

    In this way, you can do equivalent of resetting advertising ID on iPhone. You can follow the same process on iPAD devices to get rid of targeted ads.

    Final thoughts:

    If you were unaware of the method to resetting advertising Ad ID on your mobile then this tutorial will come in handy. And personally, I will suggest you to keep resetting your ad ID time to time if don’t want brands to learn about you or track you.

    Andrew is the News Editor for Review Geek, where he covers breaking stories and manages the news team. He joined Life Savvy Media as a freelance writer in 2018 and has experience in a number of topics, including mobile hardware, audio, and IoT. Read more.

    @andrew_andrew__
    Jun 4, 2021, 12:58 pm EDT | 1 min read

    Following on the heels of Apple’s new App Tracking Transparency feature, Google will soon let Android users opt out of ad tracking. Doing so prevents apps from seeing a users’ unique advertising ID, thereby limiting businesses’ ability to collect private data and sell targeted ads.

    First reported by Bloomberg, Google quietly announced the change in a Support page for app developers. A notice at the top of the support page states that Google will implement its anti-tracking tools on select devices in late 2021, with expanded support for all Android devices running Google Play in early 2022 (your Android OS version shouldn’t matter).

    Starting in late 2021, when a user opts out of interest-based advertising or ads personalization, the advertising identifier will not be available. You will receive a string of zeros in place of the identifier.

    But unlike Apple’s App Tracking Transparency feature, which lets you control tracking on an app-by-app basis, Google’s anti-tracking tool completely disables tracking for every app on your device. Unfortunately, the feature will be tucked away in the Android Settings, so users must go out of their way to use it.

    It’s surprising to see Google implement an anti-tracking feature, given the company’s reliance on personalized advertising. Several companies have voiced concerns that anti-tracking tools will hurt their advertising business, and Facebook threw a temper tantrum after Apple debuted App Tracking Transparency earlier this year.

    While we wait for Google to roll out its anti-tracking tool, you can turn off Android ad personalization to limit what advertisements you see in some apps. You can also reset your advertising ID to make yourself slightly more anonymous than usual.

    The International Computer Science Institute in Berkeley, California, has discovered that many popular apps can still track your internet activities, even when you try to use an Android privacy control to stop it.

    How to reset your advertising id on pc or mac

    Getting online advertisers to stop tracking you over Android may not be as easy it seems. New research has found that over 18,000 Android apps can create permanent records on their users, even when they try to stop the tracking.

    The apps in question should only be collecting a digital “advertising ID” from your phone as a way to serve up targeted ads. If you’d like to opt out, all you should need to do is go to the phone’s settings and reset the advertising ID.

    However, the International Computer Science Institute in Berkeley, California, has discovered that many popular apps are doing more than just capturing the advertising ID from Android phones. They’re also collecting other identifiers, such as the device’s serial number, the IMEI number, and other hardware or network indicators — none of which you can reset.

    As a result, the apps can still identify your device, even if you decide to reset the advertising ID, said Serge Egelman, a researcher at the institute. “What little users can do is use the privacy controls, but as this research shows, those controls don’t appear to do anything,” he told PCMag.

    The data collection also appears to violate Google’s own developer policies, which forbids apps from collecting the advertising ID with device information. According to Egelman’s findings, which were first reported by CNET, some of the most popular Android apps, with millions of installs, all engage in the practice. Much of the data is also being sent to various ad networks.

    However, Google is pushing back on some of the research. The company told PCMag that collecting both the advertising ID and other device indicators can be done for legitimate purposes, like detecting fraud or account registrations, which is permitted under Google’s policy.

    Nevertheless, the tech giant said it’s taking action against many of the apps identified in Egelman’s research. “We take these issues very seriously. Combining Ad ID with device identifiers for the purpose of ads personalization is strictly forbidden,” the company said in a statement. “We’re constantly reviewing apps —including those listed in the researcher’s report — and will take action when they do not comply with our policies.”

    🔹 For iOS devices:

    1. Open Facebook Settings (using the mobile app or website version).
    2. Make sure you have allowed the use of Facebook to sign in to third-party sites and applications (Settings->Apps and Websites-> tap on the Edit button in the Apps, Websites and Games section-> check if the setting is turned on).
    3. For devices with iOS version below 14.0 reset your advertising identifier (go to device Settings ->Privacy ->Advertising ->Reset Advertising Identifier).
    4. For devices with iOS version 14.0 and above, limit tracking requests (go to device Settings->Privacy->Tracking).
    5. Uninstall the Facebook app from your device.
    6. Open your browser -> open your Facebook account page -> log into your account.
    7. Try to reconnect to Facebook in the game settings.

    🔹 For macOS devices:

    1. Open Facebook Settings.
    2. Make sure you have allowed the use of Facebook to sign in to third-party sites and applications (Setting & Privacy->Settings->Apps and Websites-> tap on the Edit button in the Apps, Websites and Games section-> check if the setting is turned on).
    3. Restart your device, enter the game, and try to reconnect it to Facebook.

    🔹 For Android devices:

    1. Go to device Settings->Accounts.
    2. Tap Facebook ->Remove.
    3. Open Facebook Settings (using the mobile app or website version).
    4. Make sure you have allowed the use of Facebook to sign in to third-party sites and applications (Setting & Privacy->Settings->Apps and Websites-> tap on the Edit button in the Apps, Websites and Games section-> check if the setting is turned on).
    5. Remove the game from the list of applications on Facebook.
    6. Restart your device, enter the game, and try to reconnect it to Facebook.

    🔹 For Windows devices:

    1. Open Facebook Settings.
    2. Make sure you have allowed the use of Facebook to sign in to third-party sites and applications (Setting & Privacy->Settings->Apps and Websites-> tap on the Edit button in the Apps, Websites and Games section-> check if the setting is turned on).
    3. Restart your device, enter the game, and try to reconnect it to Facebook.

    ❗️ Please be aware that access to Facebook programs and services can be restricted in certain countries or regions. In such cases, we comply with local laws and regulations.

    Learn about Android device identifiers and how apps abuse them to make more money on ads.

    How to reset your advertising id on pc or mac

    December 9, 2019